Better To Get Hurt By The Truth Than Comforted With A Lie + The Pfizer Vaccine Only Has 1,291 Side Effects! March 10 2022 | From: TheBFD / GlobalResearch / Various
Inconvenient Truths Hidden by Government Lies.
The penny still has not dropped, yet the forces of the state brutally put down dissent on 2 March 2022.
An interesting thing is happening with the statistics that the regime is putting out as the Omicron outbreak progresses through the population.
Pretty much the same outcomes as we have seen around the world are happening here.
The statistics show, or at least did show, that those becoming infected, and also filling up the hospital are predominantly vaccinated and boosted.
The numbers were growing and showed starkly that the lies that the vaccines prevented you from getting sick, or being hospitalised were becoming more and more apparent.
Worse still for the regime, the rationale behind the mask and vaccine mandates was being shown to be as hollow as a politician’s promise.
A week ago the Ministry of Health changed how the statistics were classified. No longer are unvaccinated shown on their own in the rolling seven-day average:
The updating of the chart was halted but clearly showed that the vaccinated, fully, partially or boosted as a ratio per 100,000 cases were double or more than double the unvaccinated.
The chart was paused like that for a week. All other charts continue to show the breakdowns between fully vaccinated, boosted, partially vaccinated and unvaccinated.
The new chart looks like this:
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Fully vaccinated, Boosted and ineligible are still shown separately, but now the regime has lumped partially vaccinated in with the unvaccinated and called them all “Not Fully Vaccinated”.
The deception is now locked in, but it hasn’t been enough because fully vaccinated are still nearly 2.5 times more likely to catch Covid, than the new munged, and ultimately dishonest statistic.
All other charts remain unchanged, like this one showing hospitalisations based on vaccine status:
As you can see we have negative efficacy for fully vaccinated, where their hospitalisation rate is higher than their vaccination rate, and boosted is fast catching up. A week ago the boosted in hospitals were just 16% and people on Twitter were claiming that this proved boosters worked.
A week later the rate has doubled. In a week’s time watch the boosted rates take over.
Everywhere around the world the more you boost the more cases and hospitalisation you get.
Yet the lying politicians, media and Health officials are still pushing boosters as hard and as fast as they can.
Hospitalisation statistics are still skewed by the start of the vaccination programme, but this week vaccinated overtook unvaccinated in the hospitalisation stakes, and boosted is growing quickly too:
It is now obvious that the vaccine mandates and the mask mandates were all for nothing. The regime instituted divisive mandates and literally enforced them with batons, shields, tear gas, pepper spray, bricks and fire extinguishers.
Isn’t it funny how the vaccine status categories remain the same in most charts, but not in the cases per 100,000 chart?
You can’t blame the unvaccinated for those statistics. They’ve been prevented by the regime’s draconian and divisive exclusionary policies from accessing the society that now has Covid rampant in it.
The vaccine passes, the mandates, the masks have all failed, and yet the stupid people are all still doing the same thing. Sadly, that is a very large chunk of the population.
The penny still has not dropped, yet the forces of the state brutally put down dissent on 2 March 2022.
The regime is now manipulating statistics to hide the truth but the truth just keeps on peeking out.
The most honest and transparent government ever, is actually a bunch of shabby chancers, lying just as hard and just fast as every other government, except this regime has now added Police brutality to their resume of achievements, to go sit alongside Massey’s ‘Cossacks’ of 1913, Robert Muldoon’s dawn raids and the 1981 Springbok Tour excesses in the halls of infamy.
Very soon the regime is going to drop all the mandates as the evidence becomes overwhelming that they were neither successful nor effective, but in fact pointless.
The only people who can hold their heads high after this shameful and despicable era are those who resisted the mandates, and those who stood on Parliament’s hallowed grounds to say “NO!” to the mandates.
All the politicians and parties currently in Parliament deserve nothing. They stood for fascism, they stood for regulation, they stood against freedom, and now they will fall for nothing.
Give nothing to them. Cancel memberships, remove yourself from their mailing lists, unsubscribe with gay abandon.
Unfollow them, or unfriend them on Facebook and Twitter, go one step better and actually block them so you never have to see their bullshit again. Don’t engage with them, or their sycophants, just block and turn your back.
Take away their voice like they took away your freedoms. They deserve nothing. Give nothing to evil. Give nothing to those that would take your freedom.
Embrace freedom, live freely, just say No!, or No More! Don’t talk about it, just do it. Take back your power, own your own life. It’s yours, not theirs.
Remember what they did to us, vote for freedom. Something will arise, mark my words.
The FDA had originally wanted to hide the data for 75 years and release it in 2096 because, of course, the FDA is basically engaged in a criminal conspiracy.
The COVID vaccines should never have been approved.
This was obvious from the very beginning when animal trials were skipped in the Trump Administration’s ill-fated “Operation War Speed.” And now it’s undeniably true. We have the clinical data, and it’s horrific.
Hiding out in one appendix is the clinical data for Pfizer’s vaccine - which lists 1,291 adverse side effects in alphabetical order.
Let’s give you just the bad things that can happen to people who took the Pfizer vaccine - That start with the letter “a” to enjoy:
You get the idea. There are 9 pages of side effects in small print.
You already know that children, especially young boys, can get myocarditis from the vaccines but you should add to that list the serious possibility of them getting: a brain stem embolism, acute kidney injury, cardiac failure, frontal lobe epilepsy, Hashimoto’s encephalopathy, herpes, interstitial lung disease, or Type 1 diabetes mellitus - just to pick a few very serious side effects from a very sobering list.
And don’t tell me that your chances are slim of getting injured.
The U.S. government’s own database, the Vaccine Adverse Events Reporting System (VAERS), has over 1 million reports of “adverse events” to the new vaccines - with 24,000 events listed as “death.”
Pfizer was aware of more than 158,000 “adverse events” when they asked for approval from the FDA. People had serious issues after taking the Pfizer vaccine and Pfizer knew it before it sought approval for its vaccine.
Why would the FDA approve a new vaccine when 15,000 people had serious disorders of the nervous system after taking it?
There’s simply no good reason.
Tell your friends and tell your family: the vaccination of children must stop immediately. The U.S. government has bought 50 million doses of this poison for children under the age of 5 pedning FDa approval and it must never be allowed to use them.
Call your elected representatives, call your senators, call everyone you know to put a stop to this today.
Do not allow anyone to jab a child with this stuff.
The Matrix Program Is Crashing March 9 2022 | From: ZenGardener / Various
It is. It’s outdated programming and the engineers of deceit can’t keep up. The vibrational changes are exceeding their capabilities. You know how your phone or computer’s software goes out of date, and new programs can’t operate? It’s the same thing.
The imitators of creation can’t maintain a current operating system any longer in the face of this Universal shift.
And it’s driving them nuts.
Just look at the desperation we’re witnessing. Crude military and police state maneuvers are only one aspect. The biggest clue is seeing the previously incremental and now hyperbolic use of monstrous lies that are becoming so transparent and unbelievable to just about anyone. Agreed, there are the entranced apathetics who swallow anything, but we’re witnessing a meltdown before our eyes.
If you can’t see it, look again.
You Want Proof?
First of all you’re in the wrong mindset if you’re looking only for data or left brained evidence, although it’s out there for those who can see.
When we come to understand the vibrational workings of our holographic reality everything takes on new dimensions and opens us up to understanding these more esoteric notions.
Those with hearts that can see, feel this. I say hearts because much of what we need to grasp or at least track is intuitive. Taking all of the information and dot connecting and personal spiritual experience together paints very clear pictures, we just need to trust what we’re seeing and learning. When we explore these realities we’re sensing we start to notice how they’re manifesting.
Forbidding free speech, shooting civilians with no cause, obvious mega bullshit in the news, wars with no possible end, deliberate poisoning, starvation and dumbing down of populations? I mean, c’mon.
But it’s kind of a conscious or spiritual symbiosis we’re experiencing. They all work together. But ignoring the spiritual and metaphysical as “evidence” in conjunction with such obvious manifestations is why this world has devolved to its current state.
Previous enlightened civilizations and earth connected tribes took this to heart. Our current imposed paradigm does nothing of the sort.
The Computer Analogy
It’s just like expired or outdated software. Their programs can’t keep up with the changes the cosmos is bringing to our planet and race. That’s exactly it. While they’ve literally gotten away with murder for millennia and are working furiously to enforce their “programs” at so many levels, the time’s up.
Sorry Charlie, but you’ve been superceded, or should I say “super seeded”. The new upgraded paradigm is taking over fellas.
It’s just a matter of time before your whole wicked system crashes.
The shift is moving through their lower level grip and on into massive empowerment and transcension beyond the net they’ve laid for humanity.
It’s got to be frustrating the hell out of these creeps.
Imagine, the very thing you’re trying to encase in every way possible keeps morphing before your eyes. They can throw up matrix program after program but their perceived petri dish subjects just keep finding ways to survive and grow. What irony the Universe has.
Humanity is getting out of hand, in their eyes. All the while we’re being empowered – by our own awakening and resultant commitment to truth, but also by a fundamental vibrational shift we’re undergoing.
No savior, no galactic battlestars. It’s us, and an organic consciousness evolution at the deepest level with a living, expanding and enveloping Universe. Awakening with Creation Itself.
Anyone who’s woken up to almost any degree understands everything is interconnected. Even “modern” physics is arriving at this reality, all while mainstream thinking ignores the profound ramifications.
That we’re all interconnected not just as a race, but with the earth and the cosmos in such a fundamental way is a game changer.
While this has been known for eons, our current control model cannot even begin to acknowledge this fact. To these oligarchs and self-appointed maniacal masterminds, no matter what powers they’re summoning, that truth is something apparently well beyond their debased comprehension.
Sure, they have their satanic rituals and tap into other dimensional entities, but it’s child’s play compared to the True picture of our all Powerful Creative Universe. That they live in rebellion against this Force is a known reality for millennia, and even alluded to by spiritual traditions and native shamanic teachings alike for ages. Bringing this understanding “down to earth” is another story.
This is why the transhumanism agenda is so important to them. This merging of man with machine has been in the works for a long time. Clipping the link with our humanity by short circuiting the human creation is an obvious next step for these would-be controllers.
Agreed, they’ve made it a fad and carefully groomed acceptance of such a trend, but it’s going to fritz and die in the junkyard of temporal existence. It can’t stand, never mind last, in such a creative force field.
Time will bear this out, as has happened to previous off-course civilizations.
Is This For Real?
It’s up to us. We have everything going for us. But our will and actions need to be aligned with this transition. We can ignore it or respond.
The sanctity of our free will cannot be violated. Either we get paddling and ride the wave or it crashes on us and perhaps dissipates on the shores of time for lack of recognition or response.
And the whole cycle may need to be repeated. Not a nice destiny. I don’t know.
I know I’m not coming back. I’m done with this insanity and am doing my damnedest to change things this time around. If we all did it won’t get repeated, but time will tell.
Not many seem to be willing to respond, even though their lives and their children and grandchildren’s lives are at stake. Talk about self imposed defeat and debilitation.
Either way, the matrix will collapse. But the true civilization of love, peace, harmony and abundance awaits manifesting.
Is it time? I think so. It is for me. How about you?
The Anesthetisation Of Humanity March 8 2022 | From: Sott / Various
Humanity's been carefully anesthetized. Things are moving so fast and crazy and in so many weird directions it's tantamount to mass insanity going on. Yet most don't even notice, and that's the weirdest thing of all.
That polarization is what compounds the problem, and that's why the cryptos love to try to continue to confuse and divide us in every way they can.
It's coming down to those who dare wake up to reality vs. those who continue on within the projected mindframe. All have a chance to wake up, but not all will take the challenge and opportunity.
Such is the nature of the Universe apparently. This ongoing contest seems to be the playing field into which we have been planted, and it is each of our choices individually that will make up any sort of outcome.
All will be eventually resolved, but at what cost? Where and in what lies our response-ability?
Medication and Conditioning, Bread and Circus, Omission and Denial
This is where the great schism lies. The awake and aware have snapped out of the control system. Those who haven't are being tooled around like puppets on a million nano strings. When you don't know, you don't know that you don't know...and are very easy to keep being fooled.
When you've woken up, the world is completely reversed from everything you were told and believed before. You now know that you now know! And everything rights itself and all is clear.
It takes some cobweb clearing to get a handle on the real picture but it happens, and in a relative hurry.
Truth not only defends itself, but drives itself.
The Romans came up with the idea that if you keep the people fed, watered and entertained - distracted - the 'elite' can get away with anything, behind the scenes. Today we have professional sports hysteria, mass media movies, mindless reality TV and music filling that role nicely, while subconsciously programming the masses with the themes and thoughtforms the elite decide on to further their agendas
"Bread and circuses" (or bread and games; from Latin: panem et circenses) is metonymic for a superficial means of appeasement. In the case of politics, the phrase is used to describe the generation of public approval, not through exemplary or excellent public service or public policy, but through diversion; distraction; or the mere satisfaction of the immediate, shallow requirements of a populace, as an offered "palliative."
Its originator, Juvenal, used the phrase to decry the selfishness of common people and their neglect of wider concerns. The phrase also implies the erosion or ignorance of civic duty amongst the concerns of the commoner.
Related:The Hypnotic Symbols Of Modern Medicine
How do they maintain this illusion? Mental conditioning is the name of the game for the designers and propagators of the matrix.
Once the pattern is established in its captive subjects, the more you can pour the lies on without them being noticed. Also disguised is the fact that their every intention for humanity is for control and exploitation....at any cost or consequence to these expendable "human resources".
To achieve this conditioning requires quite an effort on their part, because we are ultimately irrepressible and they know that. It's like chemtrails. If they don't keep spraying the required concentration of their toxic soup the effects start to wane, like the fluoride dosing and the rest. To keep the vast majority sleep walking they use all kinds of methods and have to maintain them.
"The more we do to you, the less you seem to believe we are doing it."
- Josef Mengele
It's also inspiring...because no matter what they do to us they can't put us out of commission. Unless they kill us off entirely, but that's just a promotion to the next level.
Tools That Numb
But what specifically do they control us by? They flood our bodies with drugs delivered by any means possible; deprivation of nutrition, sunlight and clean air, water and food; dumbed down education and a fully controlled media with mind numbing false news and so-called entertainment; electromagnetic smog blasting on the human nervous system wavelength; violence and oppressive fear and terror tactics, and on and on.
They do this with impunity. Imagine the world is a massive internment camp where the captors give the illusion the inmates are free by letting them have a few choices within this massive facility, and disguise the barbed wire fence as gorgeous murals, and the control devices as modern marvels for their advancement.
Wars are a perfect example. All supposedly for our defense, safety and security, when it's the exact opposite.
Some fundamental questions that beg answers that are evident before any clear thinking individual:
How can a government usurping monstrosity like the United Snakes Corporation and its affiliate thugs gang rape a planet and make it look benevolent?
How can obviously lying elitist politicians bought off by the highest bidder be taken as serious entities in governing institutions?
How can known secretive government sponsored agencies pull off assassinations and staged bombings and shootings in plain sight?
How can the most murderous, supremacist, fascist, arrogant, racist people on earth be called "the chosen ones" and given title to anything they want including their own sanctioned Zionist territory and ravenous, genocidal agenda and be given complete religious, social and political immunity and massive financial support? All supposedly based on clearly misguided insane religious zeal?
How can sweeping freedom destroying measures be instituted by "executive order" and other means in a representative republic, or any supposedly democratic regime?
How can the food, water and air be deliberately poisoned in public knowledge and in plain sight?
How can the genetic modification of not just plants and animals but human beings be tolerated, no matter the stated justification?
How can technocratic electro-surveillance, artificial intelligence, robotic warfare and social and mental manipulation be known and accepted as legitimate human altering science and in full implementation for mass control?
....and on and on...why wouldn't people in such an abused situation not go virtually berserk in protest, or a least speak out on a massive scale?
The Hypnotic Rhythm of Anesthesia
Every day I'm just amazed that so few seem to notice what's going on. The business as usual behavior and shallow chatter about nothing and the complete dependence on routine behavior for money and phony goals is just mind-boggling.
Clearly, there won't be a world in which to live even those shallow goals if things aren't changed drastically.
The day we hope our children and grandchildren to grow up in is quickly becoming not just night, but a literal nightmare.
The snapshot above is from the movie Time Machine from one of globalist insider H.G. Wells' predictive programming pieces where cultivated humans are routinely harvested in the maws of parasitic beings.
Despite this meme of humanity being fodder for others being shown to mankind for eons via literature or inside messengers, humanity doesn't get it. It's another surreptitious way to hide the Truth; sci-fi or story-fy it. Turn the real direction of the controllers into a fiction, a fantasy, and entertainment.
"A tale told by an idiot full of sound and fury, signifying nothing," as Shakespeare famously said through Macbeth.
Who's Behind This?
I'm convinced there's something very occult and spiritual that is ultimately behind all this, and these described techniques are just to augment the signal from the bowels of the matrix, be they archontic or some other form of inter-dimensional influence perpetrated by willing psychopaths amongst us. Just as how chemtrails are used by the EMFs to manipulate weather patterns while serving other purposes, they provide an enhanced medium for these spiritual influences to take effect.
Comment: There has been an enormous effort to promulgate disinformation regarding chemtrails which includes inducing the belief, against the evidence, that the government is "in control of the weather."
Certainly, there is some kind of atmospheric spraying going on in many places, but this activity is mainly aimed at:
1) providing a bounce screen for HAARP mind control waves;
2) providing fuel for the rumors that the government is in control by dribbling a few toxic substances onto the masses which
3) can make people sick and thus more susceptible to the mind control waves.
The question arises, is something else being perpetrated on a massive scale? Are we subjects of another realm?
I don't know. But does it matter where this oppression originates? I'm sure aware of the possibility and inclined to think so, but that doesn't excuse or distance me from the very real struggle we find ourselves in.
Fundamentally my awareness of these possibilities profoundly indicates to me that I am truly free.
Extremely free. And that has power. Wonderful, conscious, awakening power. And it's for all of us.
Don't begin to believe this massive lie, as real as it is being temporarily manifested due to the accepting ignorance of the majority of humanity.
From the religious or financial paradigms to the scarcity and fear of death memes, when you realize what effort they have to make to keep the illusion in place you also realize the extent of your innate power and what they innately fear, a complete reversal of their paradigm.
Grow in the peace of understanding and the courage of conviction, no matter how alone you may feel.
Why Do We Allow Private Banks & Families To Control The World’s Money? +The Truth Is Out: "Money" Is Just An IOU, And The Banks Are Rolling In It March 7 2022 | From: TheWakingTimes / TheGuardian
The masses can no longer escape the knowledge that they’re being taken for a walk down a dark alley. The way money is created in our global society benefits the so-called elite at the expense of the 99.9%. It doesn’t have to be this way though, all we have to do is stand up and demand that it change.
Jacob Rothschild with David Rockefeller
Related: The Rothschild’s Global Crime Syndicate And How It Works Money is no longer backed by anything concrete. It used to be, when it was attached to the gold standard, but for the last several decades if you and I were to get a loan from a bank we’re not actually being loaned anything that they physically have. Instead, they punch numbers into a computer, which creates new money that is placed directly into our bank accounts.
That’s right – they create new cash out of nothing. They don’t get it from their vault, or borrow it from another source, they just create it on their computer.
Can’t we just generate new funds for the benefit of the people and direct the profits back into the community?
Apparently NO! Under their psychopathic regime! - lest they lose control -
Of course we can. If so, we could genuinely attempt to finally overcome poverty, homelessness and other socioeconomic disadvantage. In fact, there are some places on earth that have already taken the lead in transforming the way money is created and distributed in their society.
First of course is Iceland, who not only jailed 26 bankers for their fraudulent behavior that contributed to their economic meltdown during the GFC, but they are also initiating massive reforms to their banking sector. Additionally, they are going to give every citizen a share of the profit from the sale of one of their biggest banks.
It’s only the beginning, but well done Iceland, you’re killing it (the monetary-madness, that is).
Another example is North Dakota, who operates under a public-banking model. They have designed their state-owned bank in a way that was essentially immune to the 2008 GFC. It has also outperformed the private banking industry in terms of profitability.
Many matrix-media explanations focus on excess deposits or the oil boom for its success, however that is simply not true. As explained in a Global Research article:
"To what, then, are the remarkable achievements of this lone public bank attributable? The answer is something the privately-owned major media have tried to sweep under the rug: the public banking model is simply more profitable and efficient than the private model.
Profits, rather than being siphoned into offshore tax havens, are recycled back into the bank, the state and the community”.
When some people hear that a system like banking can be re-designed to actually benefit society, they automatically hear ‘socialism,’ and it offends them. The reality is, the celebration of the capitalist structure and the contempt towards socialism and communism achieves nothing. Just have a look at where capitalism has gotten us, regardless if it was taken over by crony capitalism and socialism for the rich.
The simple fact remains that going backwards is not an option, and right now humanity is being controlled by a monetary system that is, to put it bluntly, a joke.
We need new approaches and innovative designs to move forward to build real peace and prosperity on planet earth, so as a collective we should make it a fundamental priority to seriously look at the available short and long term solutions that we could potentially implement, to once and for all put an end to being ruled by the banking oligarchy.
For examples of how to truly move forward read, This is How to Create True Freedom for Humanity.
If you want to contribute to the cause, sign and share the petition, here. And finally, watch this five minute video:
The Truth Is Out: Money Is Just An IOU, And The Banks Are Rolling In It
The Bank of England's dose of honesty throws the theoretical basis for austerity out the window
'The central bank can print as much money as it wishes.' Photograph: Alamy 1930s, Henry Ford is supposed to have remarked that it was a good thing that most Americans didn't know how banking really works, because if they did, "there'd be a revolution before tomorrow morning".
The Bank of England let the cat out of the bag. In a paper called "Money Creation in the Modern Economy", co-authored by three economists from the Bank's Monetary Analysis Directorate, they stated outright that most common assumptions of how banking works are simply wrong, and that the kind of populist, heterodox positions more ordinarily associated with groups such as Occupy Wall Street are correct. In doing so, they have effectively thrown the entire theoretical basis for austerity out of the window.
To get a sense of how radical the Bank's new position is, consider the conventional view, which continues to be the basis of all respectable debate on public policy. People put their money in banks. Banks then lend that money out at interest - either to consumers, or to entrepreneurs willing to invest it in some profitable enterprise.
True, the fractional reserve system does allow banks to lend out considerably more than they hold in reserve, and true, if savings don't suffice, private banks can seek to borrow more from the central bank.
The central bank can print as much money as it wishes. But it is also careful not to print too much. In fact, we are often told this is why independent central banks exist in the first place. If governments could print money themselves, they would surely put out too much of it, and the resulting inflation would throw the economy into chaos.
Institutions such as the Bank of England or US Federal Reserve were created to carefully regulate the money supply to prevent inflation. This is why they are forbidden to directly fund the government, say, by buying treasury bonds, but instead fund private economic activity that the government merely taxes.
It's this understanding that allows us to continue to talk about money as if it were a limited resource like bauxite or petroleum, to say "there's just not enough money" to fund social programmes, to speak of the immorality of government debt or of public spending "crowding out" the private sector.
What the Bank of England admitted this week is that none of this is really true. To quote from its own initial summary:
"Rather than banks receiving deposits when households save and then lending them out, bank lending creates deposits" …
"In normal times, the central bank does not fix the amount of money in circulation, nor is central bank money 'multiplied up' into more loans and deposits."
In other words, everything we know is not just wrong – it's backwards.
When banks make loans, they create money. This is because money is really just an IOU.
The role of the central bank is to preside over a legal order that effectively grants banks the exclusive right to create IOUs of a certain kind, ones that the government will recognise as legal tender by its willingness to accept them in payment of taxes.
There's really no limit on how much banks could create, provided they can find someone willing to borrow it.
They will never get caught short, for the simple reason that borrowers do not, generally speaking, take the cash and put it under their mattresses; ultimately, any money a bank loans out will just end up back in some bank again.
So for the banking system as a whole, every loan just becomes another deposit. What's more, insofar as banks do need to acquire funds from the central bank, they can borrow as much as they like; all the latter really does is set the rate of interest, the cost of money, not its quantity.
Since the beginning of the recession, the US and British central banks have reduced that cost to almost nothing.
In fact, with "quantitative easing" they've been effectively pumping as much money as they can into the banks, without producing any inflationary effects.
Money created out of thin air - the debts you owe - your mortgage - DO NOT EXIST - and the elite 'banksters' are FUCKING YOU
What this means is that the real limit on the amount of money in circulation is not how much the central bank is willing to lend, but how much government, firms, and ordinary citizens, are willing to borrow.
Government spending is the main driver in all this (and the paper does admit, if you read it carefully, that the central bank does fund the government after all). So there's no question of public spending "crowding out" private investment. It's exactly the opposite.
Why did the Bank of England suddenly admit all this? Well, one reason is because it's obviously true.
The Bank's job is to actually run the system, and of late, the system has not been running especially well. It's possible that it decided that maintaining the fantasy-land version of economics that has proved so convenient to the rich is simply a luxury it can no longer afford.
MORTGAGE = DEATH PLEDGE: Latin words Mort-Gage Literally Translated Mort Means (Death) Gage Means (Pledge) “Debt Slavery=Human Mortgages=Debt Till Death.
The word “mortgage” comes from the French “mort-gage”, literally death-pledge. The French peasants were working until they died for the privilege of owning a house. Same Game! Same People! Different Time!
But politically, this is taking an enormous risk. Just consider what might happen if mortgage holders realised the money the bank lent them is not, really, the life savings of some thrifty pensioner, but something the bank just whisked into existence through its possession of a magic wand which we, the public, handed over to it.
Historically, the Bank of England has tended to be a bellwether, staking out seeming radical positions that ultimately become new orthodoxies. If that's what's happening here, we might soon be in a position to learn if Henry Ford was right.
In Defense Of Homeopathy March 6 2022 | From: GreenMedInfo / Various
Homeopathy is here to stay. Despite relentless criticism from skeptics and fundamentalists, homeopathy has withstood the test of time.
Since its inception over 200 years ago, homeopathy has been the target of almost constant antipathy from the prevailing school of orthodox medicine. Given so much organized resistance from the mainstream, one would think that if homeopathy were much ado about nothing it would not have endured.
It would have withered on the vine a long time ago. And yet it has persisted. No, it thrives - all across the globe - for a number of very good reasons.
When a German physician named Samuel Hahnemann discovered that a miniscule dose of a medicinal substance designed to mimic the symptom pattern of a sick person could paradoxically provoke a healing response in that same person, a medical revolution was set in motion.
Dr. Hahnemann referred to this surprising phenomenon as the law of similars. As opposed to the conventional medical approach, which uses opposites to combat symptoms (antidepressants, anti-inflammatories, antihistamines, anticonvulsants, etc.), homeopathy represents a different approach to healing, one that uses "likes to cure likes."
The standard treatment for a bee sting or a case of poison ivy might involve the use of an antihistamine to suppress the inflammatory swelling, redness, and itching.
A homeopathic practitioner, on the other hand, might recommend a highly diluted dose of a medicine made from the honeybee in the former case, and a similar dose of a medicine made from the poison ivy plant in the latter. It's a little bit like the use of anti-venoms to treat snakebites, only the doses used in homeopathy are much smaller.
The homeopathic principle of similars can be used to treat not just physical illness, but also mental and emotional issues. For example, in my own practice I have used homeopathic doses of a plant called Stramonium to successfully help hundreds of children who had suffered from nightmares, were afraid of the dark, and were unwilling to be alone at night.
Ingesting Stramonium in its crude form can induce a type of delirium characterized by severe agitation and a tremendous state of fear. In its homeopathically diluted form, it is the antidote to similar states of fear and agitation. It can be a lifesaver for these kids and their families.
In its heyday in the latter half of the nineteenth century, there were more than 100 homeopathic hospitals in the United States, 22 homeopathic medical schools, 700 homeopathic physicians in New York State, and thousands more across the country.
Homeopathy in the U.S. experienced a decline in the early 1900s, largely due to increased regulatory pressure from orthodox medicine.
The same lack of vision regarding the future of health care is not necessarily true of other countries. Today, there are well over 200,000 homeopathic practitioners in India alone.
Is it possible that so many doctors and patients could be wrong about a medical therapy that they rely upon for their own personal health and well-being? I think not.
Criticism of Homeopathy
In spite of the remarkable growth of homeopathy and the testimony of millions of satisfied patients who swear by its effectiveness, critics insist upon spreading a number of unsubstantiated falsehoods regarding this unique healing modality.
The worst offenders are the ones who call themselves scientific "skeptics." Although they claim to speak for science, their willful refusal to consider the facts exposes them as anti-scientific defenders of scientistic dogma. Their pathological disbelief in all things holistic and unconventional is a violation of the open-minded spirit of genuine scientific inquiry.
Let me be clear; for those who seek to discredit homeopathy purely out of bias there should be no obligation on the part of homeopathy to defend itself. It is a waste of energy to quarrel with a relatively small band of medical fundamentalists who wish to argue their case using disingenuous tactics. The truth of homeopathy stands on its own merit for any open-minded individual to examine for him or herself.
Nevertheless, I will venture to answer skeptic's criticisms for the benefit of innocent bystanders, many of whom are puzzled by the Salem Witch Trial-like atmosphere that surrounds homeopathy. Let's examine these objections to homeopathy one by one and see how they stand up to scrutiny.
Objection 1: The Principle of Similars is Not Logical. It Does Not Make Scientific Sense
Some object to homeopathy on the grounds that treating an illness with a substance that can cause symptoms similar to that illness just doesn't make sense.
They fail to grasp that this is essentially the same idea behind many allopathic therapies including allergy shots andvaccines.
The same principle applies to stimulant drugs used to treat hyperactive children. Amphetamine analogs like Ritalin and Adderall are known to have a paradoxical calming effect on the nervous systems of children with ADHD.
The difference is that while these conventional treatments involve crude and potentially toxic doses that are administered uniformly to all individuals, homeopathy tailors its treatment to each individual with doses that are far smaller and, therefore, far safer.
Skeptics tend to dismiss homeopathy due to its so-called "implausibility." This is a fancy way of saying that, given our current understanding of biology, it is not plausible to assign a cause-and-effect relationship between homeopathic doses and their observed effects.
This is really just a tautological argument - a bogus use of logic - employed by skeptics to deny the validity of a phenomenon that medical science cannot explain in conventional medical terms. In essence, the claim is that, since homeopathy cannot be explained, it therefore cannot be possible.
If we were to adopt this attitude toward all new unexplained medical phenomena, then medicine would remain forever static and impervious to change. The implausibility argument amounts to nothing more than a ridiculous self-fulfilling defense of conventional medical dogma.
Objection 2: Homeopathic Doses Are Too Small to Have Any Effect. They Are Nothing More Than Placebos
Homeopathy-hating skeptics love to mockingly claim that homeopathic medicines are nothing but water. After all, they surmise, if these medicines are diluted to the extent that homeopaths claim, then they must be devoid of all medicinal properties. Any observed effects are assumed, therefore, to be placebo effects.
Now, this might be true if homeopathic medicines were just another class of conventional drugs. Drugs are pharmaceutical grade chemicals that act on a biochemical level to alter or arrest physiologic processes. Although homeopathic remedies are regulated by the FDA as if they are drugs, no homeopath believes that they act in the same manner as conventional drugs.
Unlike drugs, which must often be taken on a regular basis to maintain their suppressive effects, homeopathic remedies act as bioenergetic catalysts designed to provoke a healing response from the life force. Dr. Hahnemann, himself, attributed all genuine healing to the innate wisdom of the "vital force."
Homeopathy is based upon a stimulus-response model of treatment. An effective prescription acts as a stimulus that initiates a self-healing reaction from the bioenergetic field of the human organism. Once a healing response has begun, there is no need to repeat the stimulus unless its effect begins to wear off.
Although analysis reveals the presence of material nanoparticles in homeopathic medicines, their impact on the life force is a bioenergetic one, not a material one. The bioenergetic strength of a remedy is not something that can be measured in quantitative terms.
It is an energetic property that is gauged by the intensity, depth, and duration of effect that it has upon the living organism. As an energetic phenomenon, the mechanism of action of homeopathy is best studied by medical professionals with backgrounds in physics.
Chemical drugs have a reputation for the side effects that they can produce. As chemicals, their sphere of action and the extent to which they can influence biological systems is limited. Homeopathic remedies, on the other hand, can have a powerful and far-reaching energetic effect on the entire system.
Those who insist that homeopathic medicines are placebos because there is "nothing there" make the mistake of applying a biochemical model to a bioenergetic therapy. They simply do not know what they are taking about.
Objection 3. Homeopathy is Not Scientific.
It's not hard to see how someone who thinks that all medicinal agents must act on a biochemical basis, according to the tenets of mechanistic medicine, would automatically assume that homeopathy is unscientific.
But this would be a naïve conclusion based on lack of information. When critics who have already made up their minds hear that homeopathy is really a form of energy medicine, their eyes start to glaze over and they begin to chant that familiar mantra, "woo woo, woo woo."
The great irony is that most diagnostic imaging is energy-based. MRIs, CT scans, ultrasound testing, and thermography all involve energetics. They are made possible thanks to physics. I don't hear critics crying, woo woo, over MRIs and CT scans. Even a treatment like radioactive iodine therapy, used to destroy the thyroid gland in cases of hyperthyroidism, is an energetic intervention.
While radioactive iodine is an example of the destructive use of energy, homeopathy represents the cutting edge of the constructive use of bioenergetics designed to improve health and promote healing. Those who claim that homeopathy is unscientific because it is based upon bioenergetic principles demonstrate their lack of scientific understanding.
Homeopathic methodology itself is the very definition of scientific method. Medicinal substances are gathered and their capacity to cause symptoms in the human organism is studied. These substances are administered in diluted form to volunteers who are not told what they are receiving.
The symptoms reported by these study subjects are then recorded in great detail. The symptomatic profile of each medicine is developed and documented in reference texts called materia medicas.
Highly diluted doses of these medicines are then given to sick persons who exhibit similar symptom profiles. The responses are noted and used to confirm the symptom profiles of these substances and to expand the database of information regarding their uses.
In this sense, homeopathy is the most empirically reliable medical methodology ever devised. It is based upon direct experience and real time, real life clinical outcomes and patient feedback. Just because the mechanism of action of homeopathy is as of yet undetermined does not mean that it does not qualify as a science.
No scientist in his or her right mind dismisses an unusual phenomenon simply because it cannot be explained. Homeopathy utilizes a sound scientific methodology that can yield remarkable results.
Objection 4. There is No Scientific Evidence to Support Homeopathy
This particular objection to homeopathy is perhaps the most egregious of all. It is simply untrue. By any objective standard, it is a flat out falsehood. There is a growing mountain of research that demonstrates the positive benefits of homeopathy.
Nevertheless, diehard skeptics who show no interest in factual evidence continue to spread lies to the contrary. When you hear the statement that there is no scientific evidence in support of homeopathy, you know you are dealing with someone who is either uninformed, willfully ignorant, a scientific zealot, or a mercenary for PhRMA.
Many who insist that there is no evidence are usually just parroting propaganda that they've heard elsewhere. At best, a skeptic will acknowledge the existence of a particular homeopathic study, only to then nitpick over the supposed flaws in that study.
This is a common tactic employed by fundamentalist devotees of scientism. In any event, the studies are there to examine for all who are genuinely interested. A small sampling of homeopathic research references is provided at the end of this article.
When it comes to medical research, there are some real issues worth discussing. One such issue is the increasing unreliability of scientific studies, which are often funded and conducted by vested interests. When drugs approved by the FDA are taken off the market with such regularity, then the research that justified their approval in the first place must be called into question.
Another problem is the way in which we define scientific evidence itself. Modern scientists have convinced themselves that experiential evidence is not real evidence. Patient's reports of their own experiences and physician's firsthand observations of the patients that they treat have somehow become second-class forms of evidence.
Skeptics tell us that this type of evidence is merely "anecdotal." We are supposed to believe that direct firsthand experience is inferior to the abstract statistical data produced by modern research trials. A belief like this can only come from armchair quarterbacks who are out of touch with patient reality.
As far as I am concerned, I glean far more practical information from individual patient case studies than from artificially homogenized trials involving large groups of patients.
It appears that the Emperor of Research is wearing no clothes. Society as a whole is dazzled by quantitative data - and seems to have lost its capacity for common sense and sound judgment.We have been bamboozled into believing that our own experiences cannot be trusted.
This, to me, is the true crisis engendered by modern medicine. Its misguided beliefs regarding experiential evidence have had a dehumanizing and disempowering effect on doctors and patients alike.
This issue is particularly important to homeopathy because it is an empirical science. In other words, it places a great deal of emphasis on patient experience. Homeopathic evaluations are heavily influenced by the subjective information provided by patients regarding their own perceptions of their illnesses.
The standards of evidence used by homeopathy are much broader than those of conventional medicine. Homeopathy is more inclusive because, in addition to research findings and objective diagnostic information, it respects the value of subjective patient input.
Conventional medicine places much higher value on objective factors like lab results and imaging tests. It shows little interest in the subjective evidence that is so important to homeopathy. However, none of this mitigates the fact that there are numerous conventionally designed clinical trials that point to the benefits of homeopathy.
Objection 5. Homeopathic Treatment is Dangerous Because it Prevents Patients From Obtaining the "Real" Medical Care That They Need.
This objection is just another red herring. Homeopathic treatment is known for its lack of side effects and unparalleled safety record.
When compared side-by-side, allopathic medicine is far more prone to iatrogenic dangers including allergic reactions, side effects, adverse events, and complications.
Furthermore, the course of illness is not always predictable. Even a well-chosen antibiotic, for example, may not work, during which time the patient's condition can worsen. A doctor may diagnose indigestion in a patient who later turns out to have appendicitis.
These types of events occur all the time. And they can happen to practitioners of all stripes; allopathic, homeopathic, and otherwise. All practitioners have patients who take turns for the worse, and who get sick in spite of their best efforts. To argue that this is unique to homeopaths is ludicrous.
The reverse is also true. I have seen my share of patients who, in my medical opinion, could have avoided the side effects and complications from various drugs or surgical interventions had they chosen to consult me for homeopathic care in the first place.
In fact, homeopathic physicians have an advantage in the sense that they have training in both conventional and homeopathic approaches. As it turns out, "real" medical care is not the exclusive province of orthodox medicine.
Homeopathy is Here to Stay
In spite of relentless opposition, homeopathy has withstood the test of time. It continues to endure deliberate misinformation campaigns designed to undermine its good reputation. Hard core skeptical ideologues hurl epithets like "junk science" and "pseudoscience."
Much of the rhetoric coming from these anti-homeopathy mercenaries amounts to defamation of character. They need to be identified for who they are and held accountable for their libel and slander. These self-proclaimed defenders of science are the most unscientific hucksters of all.
Homeopathic remedies are manufactured by legitimate pharmacies, regulated by the FDA, and in popular demand among consumers. But few U.S. physicians show any interest in learning about how homeopathy can help their patients.
Furthermore, the corporate medical establishment views homeopathy as competition. PhRMA can't own homeopathic medicines exclusively because they cannot be patented.
You can draw your own conclusions about the motivating reasons behind FDA and FTC's recent scrutiny of the marketing of homeopathic products.
Homeopathic medicines are exceptionally safe precisely because the material quantities involved are so minute. As such, the likelihood of an allergic reaction or adverse event is virtually nil. One can quibble over whether homeopathic medicines act as bioenergetic catalysts or whether the life force is a real thing or not.
It doesn't really matter, because the final results are what count. Millions of doctors and patients around the globe can attest to the positive benefits of homeopathic treatment.
As bioenergetic catalysts, homeopathic remedies have broad and all-encompassing effects on human health. Homeopathy is truly holistic because it acts on the whole person. Because homeopathic remedies have such deep effects, they are capable of getting to the root of chronic health problems.
When a homeopathic remedy gets to the root of a problem, the life force ceases to generate symptoms because there is no further need to call attention to the problem.
Homeopathy is safe, inexpensive, and effective. It represents the cutting-edge of Space Age futuristic medicine precisely because it transcends the pitfalls of material medicine. In the immortal words of Bones McCoy, "I'm a doctor, Jim, not a car mechanic!"
3. Database. Initiative to Promote Research in Homeopathy.
Five Valid Reasons To Stop Using Aluminium - Aluminium Is Toxic To All Life Forms March 5 2022 | From: NaturalNews / GreenMedInfo
Most people probably think they don’t use aluminum all that often. A little bit of aluminum foil here and there to cover a dish and that’s about it, right? Unfortunately, no.
Our bodies have a hard time knowing what to do with this aluminum and it usually ends up accumulating over time in the kidney, lungs, liver, brain, and thyroid.
Five Reasons to Stop Using Aluminum Now
1. Damage to your Central Nervous System: This consists of the brain and spinal cord. Studies suggest that aluminum exposure may be linked to autism, brain disease, and bone disease in children. In adults, aluminum exposure has been linked to neurological defects similar to Alzheimer’s.
2. Brain Damage:Studies have shown that aluminum has the ability to create toxic, oxidative stress in the brain. Unfortunately, your brain can accumulate a lot of aluminum and not be able to rid itself of it. This aluminum store can result in MS, Attention Deficit Disorder, epilepsy, chronic fatigue syndromes, and Alzheimer’s, as previously mentioned.
3. Robs the Body of Vitamins: Among the vitamins that aluminum steals from the body are magnesium, calcium, and iron. Reduced calcium absorption can result in brittle bones and is especially dangerous for elderly people. Iron deficiency can lead to constant tiredness, weakness, paleness, and lightheadedness. Magnesium is a vitamin that many adults already do not get enough of, and the amount of aluminum found in so many products only exacerbates this issue. Magnesium is needed by every organ in your body to work properly. Side effects of low magnesium include constant tiredness, heart problems, and muscle spasms.
4. It Accumulates: As already mentioned, aluminum accumulates in the body because our system don’t know how to get rid of it. Perhaps even worse, aluminum accumulates in large amounts in the bones. In combination with robbing the body of calcium, this effect drastically puts you at risk for bone breaks and fractures. It can also lead to osteoporosis.
5. Stresses the Body: Because the body is not meant to consume aluminum and it does not know how to process it, the consumption of aluminum severely stresses the body out. Aluminum in the system results in oxidative stress on the cells, which can damage the DNA in those cells and even speeding up the body’s natural aging process.
Needless to say, aluminum is not something that your body likes and it should be avoided as much as possible. Use a cautious eye when shopping for your deodorant and other beauty products, and even your groceries. Almost any food additive with the letter “E” followed by a series of numbers contain aluminum, so stay away!
Juice fasts (full of veggies) may help our bodies get rid of some of the aluminum that has been stored, but it is not a guarantee. It must be emphasized that our bodies simply are not made to process aluminum, and therefore it should be avoided as much as possible.
Many of today’s pro-vaccine elite insist that aluminum in infant and child vaccines is totally harmless. Find out the real truth, with scientific back up. Dr Suzanne Humphries, Internist and Nephrologist, has studied out the issue and shows that Paul Offit’s absurd claim that aluminum ‘plays an important role in the development of a healthy fetus’ is completely made up. Such statements from a leading vaccine educator are flat out dangerous.
The featured video is from a 5 hour seminar on Infant Immunity from last year. The focus in this clip is aluminum. In New Zealand and Europe, aluminum is spelled and pronounced aluminium.
Ten Government Rulers Who Have Told Us A “Secret Government” Rules The Earth March 4 2022 | From: NewsPunch / Various
Many people believe that a secret government actually controls the Earth. But, did you know that its not just “conspiracy nuts” who believe this? Contrarily, countless presidents, politicians, and government leaders have also affirmed the statement that a secret government truly rules planet Earth.
Click on the image above to see more detail in a new window
If you told somebody 10 years ago that there existed some sort of secret group or “secret government” pulling the strings behind the scenes of government policy, international law, various global rules/regulations, and more, they would have called you a “conspiracy theorist.”
Today things have changed, largely as a result of information leaked by Edward Snowden, Julian Assange, and various other whistleblowers and activists in recent years. Their bravery has shed light on the world of secrecy that’s been blinding the masses since its inception.
“The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society. Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country.
We are governed, our minds are molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of.”
- Edward Bernays (“the father of public relations”), Propaganda, 1928 (note that Bernays’ book, Propaganda, begins with the above quote).
I’ve mentioned this before, and I’ll mention it again, did you know that the U.S. Government classifies more than 500 million pages of documents each year? Did you know that the United States has a history of government agencies existing in secret?
For example, the National Security Agency (NSA) was founded in 1952, but its existence was hidden until the mid 1960’s.
Even more secretive is the National Reconnaissance Office, it was founded in 1960 but remained completely secret for 30 years. Then we have the entire black budget world, a world dominated by secrecy that was officially revealed by Edward Snowden a couple of years ago. This deals with what are known as “Special Access Programs.”
It’s not just statements that these “high-level” people are making. It’s all of the proof and evidence that goes along with it.
Canadian Defence Minister Paul Hellyer
Former Minister of National Defence, Paul Hellyer, is one of Canada’s best known and most controversial politicians. He was first elected in 1949, and was the youngest cabinet minister appointed to Louis S. St. Laurent’s government eight years later. He held senior posts in the governments of Lester B. Pearson and Pierre E. Trudeau.
He achieved the rank of senior master (Deputy Prime Minister), and went on to become the Canadian Defence Minister. He is best known for the unification of the Canadian Armed Forces, and in September 2005 he became the first person of cabinet rank in the G8 group of countries to state unequivocally that “UFOs are as real as the airplanes flying overhead.”
Here’s what he had to say about the world of secrecy:
“It is ironic that the U.S. would begin a devastating war, allegedly in search of weapons of mass destruction, when the most worrisome developments in this field are occurring in your own backyard.
It is ironic that the U.S. should be fighting monstrously expensive wars in Iraq and Afghanistan, allegedly to bring democracy to those countries, when it itself can no longer claim to be called a democracy, when trillions, and I mean thousands of billions of dollars have been spent on projects about which both the Congress and the Commander in Chief have been kept deliberately in the dark."
Woodrow Wilson, an American academic, politician, and the 28th president of the United States, had this to say (among other things) in his book The New Freedom. The book also contains several other, similarly eye-opening statements:
“Since I entered politics, I have chiefly had men’s views confided to me privately. Some of the biggest men in the United States, in the field of commerce and manufacture, are afraid of somebody, are afraid of something.
They know that there is a power somewhere so organized, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocked, so complete, so pervasive, that they had better not speak above their breath when they speak in condemnation of it.
Here’s what JFK had to say in one of his most famous speeches:
“The very word “secrecy” is repugnant in a free and open society; and we are as a people inherently and historically opposed to secret societies, to secret oaths and to secret proceedings. We decided long ago that the dangers of excessive and unwarranted concealment of pertinent facts far outweighed the dangers which are cited to justify it.
Even today, there is little value in opposing the threat of a closed society by imitating its arbitrary restrictions. Even today, there is little value in insuring the survival of our nation if our traditions do not survive with it.
And there is very grave danger that an announced need for increased security will be seized upon by those anxious to expand its meaning to the very limits of official censorship and concealment. That I do not intend to permit to the extent that it is in my control. …
For we are opposed around the world by a monolithic and ruthless conspiracy that relies primarily on covert means for expanding its sphere of influence–on infiltration instead of invasion, on subversion instead of elections, on intimidation instead of free choice, on guerrillas by night instead of armies by day.
It is a system which has conscripted vast human and material resources into the building of a tightly knit, highly efficient machine that combines military, diplomatic, intelligence, economic, scientific and political operations.
Its preparations are concealed, not published. Its mistakes are buried, not headlined. Its dissenters are silenced, not praised. No expenditure is questioned, no rumor is printed, no secret is revealed."
John C. Calhoun, 7th Vice President of The United States
John C. Calhoun was the 7th Vice President of the United States, from 1825-1832. He was also a political theorist during the first half of the 19th century.
Here’s what he had to say:
“A power has risen up in the government greater than the people themselves, consisting of many, and various, and powerful interests, combined into one mass, and held together by the cohesive power of the vast surplus in the banks."
This quote reminds me of a great clip from the Thrive documentary by Foster Gamble, heir to the Proctor Gamble corporation. He was groomed for the establishment, but chose a different path.
New York City Mayor John F. Hylan
John F. Hylan was Mayor of New York City from 1918-1925. He has been famously quoted as saying:
“The real menace of our Republic is the invisible government, which like a giant octopus sprawls its slimy legs over our cities, states and nation…
The little coterie of powerful international bankers virtually run the United States government for their own selfish purposes. They practically control both parties…
[and] control the majority of the newspapers and magazines in this country. They use the columns of these papers to club into submission or drive out of office public officials who refuse to do the bidding of the powerful corrupt cliques which compose the invisible government.
It operates under cover of a self-created screen [and] seizes our executive officers, legislative bodies, schools, courts, newspapers and every agency created for the public protection."
Senator William Jenner
A United States senator who said this to Congress in 1954:
“Today the path to total dictatorship in the U.S. can be laid by strictly legal means … We have a well-organized political-action group in this country, determined to destroy our Constitution and establish a one-party state …
It operates secretly, silently, continuously to transform our Government … This ruthless power-seeking elite is a disease of our century… This group … is answerable neither to the President, the Congress, nor the courts. It is practically irremovable."
34th U.S. President And 5 Star General, Dwight Eisenhower
In his farewell address to the nation, president Eisenhower offered these words of caution:
“In the councils of government, we must guard against the acquisition of unwarranted influence, whether sought or unsought, by the military industrial complex. The potential for the disastrous rise of misplaced power exists, and will persist. …
Only an alert and knowledgeable citizenry can compel the proper meshing of the huge industrial and military machinery of defence with our peaceful message and goals."
Babylonian Money Magic & How Modern "Commercial Law" Is Based On Ancient Babylonian Codes March 3 2022 | From: WayOfMessiah / BibleBelievers
The modern “magic” of creating money out of thin air had its roots in the ancient city of Babylon, some 600 years before the birth of Messiah. Practitioners of the craft were known historically as “money changers”, as in “change your money from your hand to mine.”
Today, adepts in the monetary black arts go by the sanitized term banker, practicing the same evils as their forebears with increasingly more sophisticated methods of robbing from the poor to give to the rich, a modern day sick and twisted Robbing Hood.
The Magic of Money
Money is “created” in a debt-based monetary system. Money only comes into being when credit is established.
You walk into a bank, borrow $250,000 for a new Ferrari, a mark is made on the bank’s ledger, and VOILA! $250,000 exist where it didn’t exist before, simply by virtue of the fact you signed your name on a piece of paper promising to pay back that sum of money.
And now, by the magic of “fractional reserve banking”, the fraudsters can now loan out 10 times that amount to other unsuspecting victims. A thing of real beauty, isn’t it?
Here’s how it all started.
From Goldsmith to Money Maker
Back in the day, goldsmiths were an honest bunch, plying their trade like any other hardworking citizen of the realm. Having the ability to safely store valuables, the goldsmith’s vault was an obvious choice that people naturally gravitated to for storage of their own gold and silver.
It was much easier to hold a receipt than to carry around a ton of weight in gold and silver coin. Made your pants sag. Painted a big target on your forehead for muggers and thieves, too.
Soon, the goldsmith / banker got the bright idea to suggest to the people they could just trade the paper for their everyday purchases rather than make regular trips to the vault. Much more convenient, eh? And there’s still that ever-present highway robbery to think about. (“Muahaha” he chuckles in private, wringing his hands and licking his lips in gleeful anticipation).
For you see, the goldsmith turned banker had realized that by making the receipt payable to the bearer rather than to the individual depositor, it would be readily transferable without the need for a signature. He also realized that very few depositors ever came in at one time to demand their gold or silver.
So he began to think to himself (people hadn’t learned to think to others back then), “Why not take advantage of that little fact”? “Why not loan out more receipts than we have gold to back them and collect the interest on them? No one will be the wiser, nobody gets hurt, we get rich, and the world is indeed a very happy place”!
And thus, Fractional Reserve Banking was born. Or spawned, considering the source. And Jezebel, the bride of Baal, the Queen of Heaven, the Spirit of Babylon, dug her talons deeply into the hide of the world’s finance. And the world is indeed not a very happy place because of it.
The infographic below shows that after roughly 28 times of the fractional-reserve process, the banking system has created 9,000 dollars from the initial deposit of $1,000.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
How you ask? How do we come out of Babylon? Read this short history of the money changers’ control of nations first, then I’ll give you a couple of clues. As my Mama used to say, if the shoe fits, wear it. If the message isn’t for you, then I praise Yah you’ve begun clawing your way out of the clutches of the pervasive Babylonian system.
Money Changers – A Brief History
Around 50 B.C. Julius Caesar took control of the monetary system of the realm by minting coins to be used in daily commerce. With a plentiful supply of real money, the kingdom prospered, business flourished and everyone benefited. Everyone but the money changers that is, whose livelihood was turned upside down as their control over the nation’s finance was stripped out from under them.
Their power would not lie long dormant however. They set about scheming to retake control, and Caesar was assassinated shortly after. It wasn’t long that corruption returned, taxes increased and the money supply was reduced by 90%, causing businesses to fail, people lost homes and lands, and poverty became the norm. Sound familiar?
As an aside, the U.S. dollar has lost over 96% of its purchasing power since 1913 when the money changers (Federal Reserve) first took control of America’s money system.
30 A.D. Yahshua stormed the Temple with righteous anger, overturning the money changers’ tables and whipping them severely about the head and shoulders to run them out of the Temple, declaring “make not my Father’s house an house of merchandise.” These same money changers called for His death days later.
1000 A.D. The money changers had long ago discovered that control over a fraudulent money supply not only gave them control over the assets of the people, but in a very real way, control over the government of the people.
Here’s how they learned to make money on the backs of the people with the sanction of their own government:
Let’s say the goldsmith pays you, the depositor, 5% interest on gold you have deposited with him. He then charges you 5% interest for the “money”, or the receipts he loans you in return. A wash, right? Well, sort of. Except he now lends out ten times in fraudulent receipts what you have deposited with him.
You earn 5% while he’s earning 50%. ON YOUR GOLD! Did I say earn? Sorry. It’s theft, pure and simple.
They exacted their control by a process of easy money/tight money cycles. By making money easy to borrow, the amount of money in circulation is increased. When the money grubbers, err…changers are satisfied enough suckers have taken the bait, the trap is sprung.
The boom and bust cycles are all rigged:
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
Suddenly money supply is tightened. They make loans difficult or impossible to get which results in a decrease of money in circulation.
The end result was that a percentage of the people would be unable to repay their loans and being unable to make new loans, they went bankrupt, forced to sell their assets to the lenders for pennies on the dollar.
This trick is still being used to suck the financial life blood out of the people of the world to this day.
It’s called by sophisticated words like “boom and bust”, “the business cycle”, “inflation”, “recession”, “depression” and it keeps you and me confused and blind to their dark magic. The language has changed, but the fraud is the same as it always has been. And the world is indeed a much less happy place for it.
1100 A.D. The reign of King Henry I brings a new form of money that stripped the money changers of their unrighteous dominion over people and nations that lasted for over 700 years. He created a currency called a tally stick. It was a stick of polished wood with notches cut along one side, the number of which indicated the denomination of the amount of money represented by the stick.
It was then split lengthwise with each half bearing identical notches. One half went into circulation, the other half was kept by the king. It made counterfeiting impossible.
The system was a huge success, as the King’s taxes were to be paid by tally stick, which increased circulation and assured its acceptance as a legitimate form of money. It also kept the money changers from gaining control of the money supply.
Which didn’t sit well with them for a very long time. And the world was indeed a much happier place. More on the money changers in a future essay, which will deal more specifically with a certain Mr. Amschel Mayer Bauer and his progeny.
Meanwhile, back to the question of How To Come Out Of Babylon. Very simply in the words of our old friend Kaye Large - ADMIT IT AND QUIT IT! You certainly can’t “Come out of Babylon” if you don’t admit you’re in it!
Christmas and Easter are so obviously Babylonian in their historical roots that it astounds me so many Christians continue to celebrate them. Everyone has the internet these days. Do a search for the pagan roots of both of these holidays.
Deu 12:30-32 “Take heed to thyself that thou be not snared by following them, after that they be destroyed from before thee; and that thou inquire not after their gods, saying, How did these nations serve their gods? even so will I do likewise.
Thou shalt not do so unto the LORD thy God: for every abomination to the LORD, which he hateth, have they done unto their gods; for even their sons and their daughters they have burnt in the fire to their gods.
What thing soever I command you, observe to do it: thou shalt not add thereto, nor diminish from it.”
It was on the basis of this passage that I and my family turned from celebrating these holidays more than twenty five years ago. I say this in love, especially to those of my friends who have known me since then.
For the sake of yourselves, your children, the God you say you want to please, let His Word speak to you and then do as He says!
Modern "Commercial Law" Is Based On Ancient Babylonian Codes
A Historical Research Article Linking the "Slave-Trading Codes" of Ancient Babylon to the Modern Laws of "Commerce", "Equity", and Civil/Municipal Jurisdictions.
Meyer Amschel Rothschild said: "Permit me to issue and control the money of a nation, and I care not who makes its laws . . . enforced unemployment and hunger, imposed on the masses because of the power we have to create shortages of food, will create the RIGHT of Capital to rule more surely than it was given to the real aristocracy."
A new union between Babylonian religions, Babylonian banking and Babylonian law is returning the world to serfdom.
When the Romans Conquered the Nation of Israel, shortly before the time of Jesus Christ or Yeshuah Messiah; they set-up a "Puppet Regime" in Israel, so-as-to more effectively Mask the harsh reality that the Israelites were a Conquered People. And because "Law" was frequently administered by a "Priesthood" in these ancient cultures, a group of priests known as "Pharisees" thereunder Combined with the Romans to Deceive, Confuse, Plunder, and En-Slave the common Israelite People.
And because Christ / Messiah Jesus / Yeshuah was a Threat to that Oppressive / Despotic system; both factions of these over-lapping "special-interest-groups" Conspired to have Jesus / Yeshuah Nailed to the Cross / Stake.
The Pharisees were Direct Participants in this Lawless Conspiracy to Murder this Innocent Man; even tho is seems that it was Roman Soldiers who actually completed the execution.
These same Pharisees base their entire Religious Belief-System upon a body of Laws which is Not from the Ancient Jewish / Israelite Laws, which reach back to the teachings of Moses. Rather these Pharisees look to a body of so-called "Laws" which derive from "Slave-Trading Codes" in Ancient Babylon; and quite probably reaching back to Nimrod himself.
The fact that the religion of the Pharisees has never been recorded as having become extinct, indicates that they and their Slave-Trading practices continue on to exist to this very day. In their own literature, the modern practitioners of "Rabbinical Judaism" Admit (quietly) that they are decedents from those ancient Pharisees.
In their own book entitled "The Jewish Encyclopedia", and "prepared by more than Four Hundred Scholars and Specialists", and published by the "Funk and Wagnalls Company", in 1905, Page 665; the following text is presented:
"With the destruction of the Temple, the Sadducees disappeared all together, leaving the regulation of all Jewish affairs in the hands of the Pharisees.
Henceforth, Jewish life was regulated by the teachings of the Pharisees, the whole history of Judaism was re-constructed from the Pharisaic point of view, and a new aspect was given to the Sanhedrin of the past. A new chain of tradition supplanted the older, priestly tradition (Abot i. 1).
Pharisaism shaped the character of Judaism and the life and thought of the Jew for all the future."
Here is shown clearly that the ancient Pharisees are still alive and well writing textbooks for Funk and Wagnals in 1905, and disseminating such beliefs among their followers.
The ancient counterparts of these modern Pharisees had schools in Babylon from a very early pre-Christian date. We may read concerning these matters from a scholarly work entitled "The Babylonian Talmud", by Sedner Nezikin, London; The Soncino Press, 1935.
In the Foreword to this book is an introductory few pages by (The Very Rev. The Chief Rabbi) J.H. Hertz. Herein he speaks on pages 13, 14, 15 to say:
"The beginnings of Talmudic literature date back to the time of the Babylonian Exile in the sixth pre-Christian century . . . When a thousand years later, the Babylonian Talmud assumed final codified form in the year 500 of the Christian era, the Western Roman Empire had ceased to be. . .
When we come to the Babylonian Gerama, we are dealing with what most people understand when they speak or write of the Talmud. It's birthplace, Babylonia, was a autonomous Jewish center for a longer period than any other land, namely, soon after 586 before the Christian era to the year 1040 after the Christian era - 1,626 years . . . "
"For a long time it was held that the language in which the Babylonian Talmud was written defied grammatical formulation. This is now seen to be nothing but prejudice. . ."
"The style of the Babylonian Talmud is one of most pregnant brevity and succinctness. It is at no time "easy reading". Elliptical expression is a constantly reoccurring feature, and whole sentences are often indicated by as single word. In discussions, question and answer are closely interwoven, and there is an entire absence of demarcation between them.
"Hard thinking and closest attention are required under the personal guidance of an experienced scholar, or of an elaborate written exposition of the argument, for the discussion to be followed or to be understood. And that understanding cannot be gained by the aid of Grammar or Lexicon alone.
Even a student who has fair knowledge of Hebrew and Aramaic, but who has not been initiated into the Talmud by Traditional Jewish guides, will find it impossible to decipher a page!"
Here we have plain admissions from this J.H. Hertz (Chief Rabbi) wherein he reveals that the source of the material which is Codified within their "Talmud" is from "Babylon". Other sources affirm this also.
This "Babylonian Talmud" is that root-source-repository of so-called "Law" from which the modern Talmud draws its historical roots. J.H. Hertz (Chief Rabbi) and others of the same belief are all quite comfortable referring to it amongst themselves as the "Babylonian Talmud".
But as the ancient city of Babylon is clearly related to terms such as "Babble" aka: "Confusion", and as ancient Biblical texts indicate plainly that this is the source for all of the language confusion and much other problems which has spread throughout the entire world, it is understandable that these ones do seek to downplay the fact that "Babylon" is the spiritual source/center for Their body of "Spiritual-Law Codifications".
We here-in merely seek clear labels of what is going on with regard to this body of codifications which seemingly so significantly affect our modern sociological structures. We have a Right to ask these questions.
Everyone is affected by these concerns. And it seems clear that many who modernly claim to be "Jews" are following this set of Spiritual Codifications which have originated in ancient Babylon, and which thereunder are properly known and referable to as the "Babylonian Talmud".
We find similarly enlightening source material in a profoundly insightful work from a gentleman named Guy Carlton, Lee; of Johns Hopkins University in his work: "Historical Jurisprudence", 1922; Pages 12, 17, 18, 38-40, 188-189:
"The law of Babylonia has had an immense effect upon that of nearly all the countries of Europe . . . The literature of Babylon has perished; but the element of culture which has endured was greater than the literature. That element is law, an organized intelligible system of rights and duties enforced by the State. . .
The great work of the nation was the production of a system of law, necessary to the extended commercial activity of the city . . . The complex Babylonian civilization, which produced a commercial law in advance of any other ancient system . . . was . . . the product of . . . its relations to the other countries of the world.
The exercise of judicial functions, at least in matters of commercial law, seems to have been in the hands of the hierarchy. The reasons for this may have been in part those which, in the mediaeval period of European history, threw the control of legal procedure largely into the hands of the ecclesiastics. In Babylon, the custom of documentary evidence in almost all transactions . . .
and the wide extent to which written contracts were employed, made the notarial and judicial functions of the priests very extensive. But the part taken in business transactions by the priesthood was appropriate for another reason, which perhaps had more influence in the time of the early law, before the purely commercial side had been developed.
This was the part which was connected with contractual oaths, which at first were numerous. The contracting parties were obliged in their contracts to swear by the principal god of the country, and by the reigning prince, that they would abide by the conditions of the contract . . ."
The Babylonian Law developed to the fullest extent the idea of a Contract. Almost any possible business transaction was reduced to the form of a contract and was executed with the same formalities - i.e., with witnesses, notary, and signature. Thus the points as to deeds, sales, mortgages, loans, and banking are in no respect different in form from the matter of hiring, rent and leases, partnership, testaments, and domestic relations, including adoption.
Transactions so very different could be reduced to the same principle, or brought under the one head, only by a highly abstract conception of contract itself. From forms of contract . . . we pass to the relations of master and servant, leases, and future delivery of goods.
Sub-section A. Master and Servant. . . a man might well make a contract with another whom he hired for a year, or whom he contracted to serve for a year. . . example . . . In connection with this contract, it should be noted that Ubarru was regarded as a free agent, hiring himself out. But since he enters into a relation to his master in which he is temporarily in the condition of a slave, he has a representative, or guardian . . .
. . . In the case of a slave the name of the slave's father is never given. The slave is not regarded or spoken of as a man, but as a thing, and is reckoned in the same way as cattle. The actual point of this contract is the transfer of the right to a man's services. Such a transaction is but a part of the whole Babylonian system, whereby every credit or right was passed from one to another by means of contracts. . .
The law was very strict as to the beginning and termination of these contracts. . . If the servant did not appear, he could be arrested and brought to his master, as he was his master's man. ...
This species of . . . slavery was of great importance and very customary in Old Babylon.
Babylon('s) . . . commercial customs . . . became . . . the commercial law of the whole known world. Of . . . these Rome was . . . possessed from the earliest period . . . "
Here-under, we see a number of significant items for our study. But at this point it seems best to re-visit Chapters 17 and 18 of the Book of Revelation in the Bible. Here in is Revealed that a particular Body of People are recognizable as a "Great Prostitute" who "Rules over the Kings of the Earth" through the use of "Deception", "Magic", and "Merchants". This "Great Prostitute" who uses Deceptive Magic is clearly labeled therein as "BABYLON".
The above work from Johns Hopkins University by Mr Lee clearly recognizes that Babylon's Religious Priesthood is commonly recognizable as the source of all of the modern so called "Laws of Commerce".
These "Laws of Commerce" are shown to be a specific body of Codes which authorize the Administration of the Compelling Force of the State in the En-Force-ment of Contracts, mostly for Payments of Debts.
The ancient Babylonian Priests were involved because Contracts were deemed to be a form of "Oath" entered into by the contracting parties; and the approval of their Gods were invoked so as to more effectively legitimize / bamboozle the entire process in the minds and the consciences of the contracting parties and all public witnesses.
These Babylonian Religious Codes recognized the ability to buy and sell contracts between merchants in "Commerce". They sold and "bought . . . slaves and the souls of men" in the time of Christ, and before and after, just precisely as is recognized in Revelation 18: 11-13.
Under this system of Babylonian Codes, contracted-debtor-people were Forcibly Compelled to perform the contract regardless of Conscionability, or who was the original contract-creditor. This Babylonian Religious Commercial-Code depended in large part on a deeper set of Slave-Trading Codes. And these all are still recognizable and very frequently enforced under what modern legal text-books refer to as: "Master-Servant Relationships".
Under the ancient Babylonian Religious Codes, "Slavery" is clearly facilitated. People were not recognized as People there-under, but were items in Commerce.
The Slave could be arrested and assaulted by government officers for not showing up for work on time. The text-book says that "The slave is not regarded or spoken of as a man, but as a thing, and is reckoned in the same way as cattle".
Not too long ago, in American History, "Slavery" was a very Common Practice, both against the Black Race, and also against all other races, including Orientals and the economically disenfranchised Caucasian / White Race. The Problem of "Oppression" is Not a Race Problem, it is a Economic-Class and Religious Problem.
In the above quoted text, and with reference to these ancient Babylonian-based "Slave-Trading" Codes; Mr Lee goes on to make it clear they were passed down to the Roman Slave-Traders in his statement "Of . . . these Rome was . . . possessed from the earliest period . . . ".
History seems to tell that many Israelites had been Captured into Slavery in Babylon. Yet by the time of Jesus / Yeshuah, many had returned. During that Captivity; many of the Babylonian Commercial / Slave-Trader / Merchant Codes seemed to have Infected Israelite-Society. It does not take a lot of intelligence to suppose that this worked to Under-Mine the Godly Principles of the more ancient Israelite Torah-Laws.
Yet the "Pharisees" Openly Embraced this Babylonian System of Slave-Trading Codes. Christ / Messiah Jesus / Yeshuah and his followers were Crucified for speaking-out boldly against these Evils of the Romans and their False-Israelite Pharisee Puppet-drones. As revealed above, the Romans were already followers of those same Babylonian Slave-Trading Codes.
This indicates that the Connection between the Roman Slave-Traders and the Pharisees was more than a mere coincidence. This indicates that at some point in the even more ancient history; the Roman Slave-Traders and the Pharisee of Israel; were of Common Cultural Ancestry.
As the name signifies, the "Babylonian Talmud" contains much of the Commercial Slave-Trading Mercantile Codifications of "Master-Servant Relationships" which originated in Babylon.
Those of the "Pharisee" (Rabbinical-Judaism) belief-system, refer in their "Babylonian Talmud" to those who are Not of their culture; as "Goim" or "Gois".
These words translate to mean "Human Cattle".
This is precisely how historical textbooks indicate that the ancient Babylonians referred to their Slaves. As Mr Lee stated in his above quoted text, "The slave is . . . reckoned in the same way as cattle".
Though the "Babylonian Talmud" seems to contain few direct citations to Slavery itself, it does set forth a significant amount of evidence showing that Non-Pharisees "Goim" are to be treated with all of the contempt of "Slaves". Citations from the "Babylonian Talmud" read:
"All things pertaining to the Goim are like desert, the first person to come along and take them can claim them for his own." Babha Bathra 45.
"It is permitted to deceive a goi." Babha Kama 113b.
And though citations are not clear that this is directly from the Talmud, other Pharisaical Literature states:
"The Life of a Goi and all his physical powers belong to a Jew." A. Rohl. Die Polem. P.20
And articles published by Henry Ford's newspaper, the Dearborn Independent in 1920 - 1922 discuss the "Kol Nidre" as a Pharisaical:
"Prayer, named from its opening words, "All vows"," (kol nidre). It is based on the declaration of the Talmud: "He who wishes that his vows and oaths shall have no value, stand up at the beginning of the year and say: 'All vows which I shall make during the year shall be of no value.'""
The list goes on and on. The Historical Documentation is Massive of the Malicious Plunder-Oriented Slave-Trading Behavior of these people. Coke and others have defined them as "Infidels", precisely Because History has clearly Shown that the Sworn "Oath" of those ones Means Nothing to them.
They cannot be "Bound" by "Conscience", and they habitually "Lie" at every turn which may serve their own self-serving interests or those of their "Synagogue of Satan", as referred to by Christ Jesus at Revelation 2:9 and 3:9. This is the nature of their "Law", They Believe they have a God-Given Right to be "Slave-Masters".
They can-not be expected to be bound to tell the Truth. They feel that they are En-Titled by the Authority of their Evil God to Lie to others, so-as-to Control Them and there-by to reduce them to their unsuspecting Slaves.
Such "Infidels" were Expelled from almost every country in Europe between the 13th and 15th centuries for this precise Reason. Their tenacious adherence to this Dis-Honest Babylonian Master-Slave system of Human Conduct Codes, and their relentless Lying and Deception was the Direct Cause of their Ostracism from All of these European Nations.
The Sadducees apparently gave the Pharisees opposition against this corrupting influence, but their days were numbered, for after the destruction of the Temple by Rome in 70 AD, the religious belief system of the Sadducees had apparently met genocide and extinction.
The Pharisees (on the other hand) were conspicuously left in the position of authority over all Jews who did not profess Christianity. The ancient Religion of the Pharisees has been in Continuous Total Control of what is fashionably recognized as the "Jewish Religion", ever since the destruction of Solomon's Temple. Again quoted, but more focused and brief than above, it reads:
"With the destruction of there Temple . . . Henceforth, Jewish life was regulated by the teachings of the Pharisees . . . Pharisaism shaped the character of Judaism and the life and thought of the Jew for all the future."The Jewish Encyclopedia: (1905; Page 665)
With the extinction of the Sadducees, the only Jewish entity which thereafter stood in opposition to the Pharisees and their Babylonian Codified Talmud were the Christians. The powers in Rome itself were Compromised by this influence. As revealed else-where here-in, the Religion of the Pharisees continues to this day under their self-proclaimed banner of "Judaism" or "Jews".
These people are Not True "Jews". Nor are they Racial "Semites", or "Israelites", or even "Zionists". Rather they are of the "Synagogue of Satan", and they merely "Say they are Jews"; all precisely as Jesus/Yeshuah is declared to have clearly started in Revelation 2:9 and 3:9.
These modern Pharisees merely proclaim they are "Jews"out of a Strategy to effect their Ancient Plunder-Oriented Slave-Trading purpose. Approximately 85% of them are not even of the "Semitic" bloodline, but rather are of the Ashkenazi / Khazar Race / Bloodline.
They seem to have adopted the Pharisaical-Babylonian Talmudian Religion in about the year 740 or so, out of convenience. They know they are Not True Semitic / Israelites; yet they scream "Anti-Semite" with spine-chilling fervor when-ever anyone seeks to hold them to accountability for their crimes.
Multitudes of such Honorable Americans as Benjamin Franklin, George Washington, and Henry Ford; have all Documented their Culturally Evil-Agenda in great detail.
George Washington
Modern "Rabbinical Judaism" is the Religious Descendant of those very same Pharisees, and they all look to the same "Babylonian Talmud" Code of "Master / Slave Laws" as the Primary Written "Code of Conduct" for their lives.
The preponderance of Ashkenazi / Khazars who serve this modern dso-called "Religion" of "Rabbinical Judaism" (with its talmudian codifications designed to support slave-trading), all indicate to this author that the underlying Conflict between the True Nation of Israel (aka: the "True "Jews" (Revelation 2:9 and 3:9), and these Ashkenazi/Khazars, reaches back way Further than their professed "Conversion to Judaism" in the year 740-ad or so.
I am inclined to believe they are "Canaanites", in large part from the very obviously similar phonetics of their names. I also tend to believe this proposition because of the historically documented Evils of the Canaanite peoples. And I think those likely reach-back even further to "Cain"; the legendary son of "Adam", who allegedly first slew his brother "Abel".
. . . I feel it is undeniable that these very powerfully-intense forms of Evil still walk this earth, with every bit of acidic-venom of those other very ancient, evil, and suspiciously similarly-named cultures. [Overwhelmingly supported by such anthropologists as Ripley, Weissenberg, Hertz, Boas, Mead and Fishberg, Arthur Koestler's The Thirteenth Tribe proves the vast majority of today's Jews are descendants of the Khazars of South Russia as do the Scripture, encyclopaedias, and scores of historians.]
"Civil-Law" and "Municipal-Law" and Their History
Textbooks show plainly that Rome is the source of English and American "Civil Law". Civil Law is recognized in Black's Law Dictionary as synonymous with "Municipal Law"; as follows:
Civil Law: That body of law which every particular nation, commonwealth, or city has established peculiarly for itself; more properly called "municipal" law, to distinguish it from the "law of nature", and from international law. Laws concerned with civil or private rights and remedies, as contrasted with criminal laws.
Rome is well recognizable as an Aggressively Warring and Conquering nation. A reputable Textbook of History entitled "Apollo, History of Rome" by Cyril E. Robinson (1956), on pages 26 and 27 reads:
"Many factors contributed to (Rome's) success; but more important than her military powers, were the political methods where by she contrived to . . . conquer. . . In 381, after overcoming the . . . town of Tusculm, she . . . admitted it to terms . . . (under which it was) compelled to pay the war-tax, and . . . a town thus treated was known as a muni-cipum or "burden-holder".
Many of the peoples conquered by Rome were reduced to Slaves. No reputable historian contests this fact. Webster's New International Dictionary (1950, 2nd Edition) links the above term "Municipum" to our modern term "Municipal"; as follows:
Municipal: . . . munia official duties + root capere to take. . . . Rom. Hist. Of or pertaining to, or of the nature of, a municipum.
It further goes on to make the following most note-worthy statement:
Municipal District: A subdivision of a region inhabited chiefly by non-Christians.
The Roman merchants engaged in much Slave Trade. The establishment of "Slave-Markets" was one of their top priorities. Contracts Exchanged hands among Merchants for the Delivery of Slaves. The Codes which Governed these Contracts for Slaves was based on the Same Codes which the Babylonians had developed.
"Of . . . these Rome was . . . possessed from the earliest period . . . ". ("Historical Jurisprudence" - Lee, above).
Such Babylonian Master/Slave so-called "Law" is modernly still recognizable under either term of "Civil" or "Municipal" Law. [Rome is the Seven-Headed "Beast" described in Revelation.
The "Great Prostitute" there-in described as sitting on or controlling the "Seven-Headed Beast" of the Roman Empire which has gathered within itself all the power and evil of the previous three Gentile world powers, is the Roman Catholic church.]
This Beast was in existence at that time of Christ as the Civil / Military Government of Rome. . .
The Norman Conquest of England in 1066-AD
The Norman Conquest over the Anglo-Saxon / Celtic People of England in 1066 is vastly under-rated in its significance for understanding modern models of good government.
From Rome, the "Norman Invasion" had the "Solemn Blessings of the Pope". This is shown in many citations, among which is the following:
"William had some difficulty in securing the help of his barons for his proposed invasion of England; it was necessary to convince them individually by threats and persuasions.
Otherwise conditions were favorable. William secured the benevolent neutrality of the emperor Henry IV., and the expedition had the solemn approval of Pope Alexander II."Encyclopedia Britannica, Vol # 23, p.609; William 1: . . . Conquest of England . . .
The Pharisaical system of "Commercial Law", as codified in the "Babylonian Talmud"; was at that time Forcibly Imposed by the Romanistic-Normans over the previously Non-Romanized Christian / Common-Law Saxon-Anglo / English People.
This is shown as follows:
"The Jews, whom the Normans brought to England . . . [or who financed and followed the invasion - Ed.] brought a refined system of commercial law: their own form of commerce and a system of rules to facilitate and govern it.
. . Several elements of historical Jewish legal practice have been integrated into the English legal system. Notable among these is the written credit agreement - shetar, or starr, as it appears in English documents.
The basis of the shetar, or "Jewish Gage," was a lien on all property (including realty) that has been traced as a source of the modern mortgage. Under Jewish law, the shetar permitted a creditor to proceed against all the goods and land of the defaulting debtor. . .
Jewish law that debts could be recovered against a loan secured by "all property, movable and immovable" was a weapon of socio-economic change that tore the fabric of feudal society and established the power of liquid wealth in place of land holding. . . .
Jewish Law, wherein personal debt superseded rights in real property had become the law of the land." "Foootnote 11: H.C. Richardson, The English Jewry Under Angevin Kings 94 (1960) (Jews liquidation of land obligations broke down rigidity of feudal land tenure and facilitated transfer of land to new capitalist class). Footnote 15: CF. 1 F. Pollock and F.W. Maitland, supra note 3 at 469... (alien to English law for creditor not in possession of land to have rights in it)."
"The Shetar's Effect on English Law", The Georgetown Law Journal; V. 71, P 1179 - 1200); Judith A. Shapiro.
Here-under; the Pharisees worked with the Normans under the "Blessing of the Pope" of Rome. Here-under, Roman Civil/Municipal Codes were Forcibly Imposed over the Non-Romanized Christian/Common-Law People of England. As this Pharisee/Roman-Catholic Military Machine was Forcibly-Imposed, the above text makes clear (seemingly happily) that a "Weapon of Socio-Economic Change that Tore the Fabric" of the Society of the Anglo-Saxon/Celtic Peoples.
These ruthlessly shocking words are not composed by this author; but they are the words chosen by Ms Shapirro as they appear in her Georgetown Law Journal article.
It seems that the aggressively warring nature of that Babylonian-Talmudian based Code of Pharisaical Conduct is not in question among that circle of scholars. It seems to clearly be a body of Master's Slave-Trading Codes, which are designed to "Tear at the Fabric" of any Society which it targets.
[The invading Jews established the Exchequer - Ed.].
The "Shetar" is a corruption of the word "Star", and it refers to the infamously abusive "Star Chamber Courts". This is shown in the following citations:
"The name star chamber . . . has been thought to be . . . because the roof was originally studded with stars, because the Jewish covenants (called starrs or stars . . . ) were originally kept there." Bovier's Law Dictionary; 1860.
"Starr or starra. The old term for contract or obligation among the Jews, being a corruption from the Hebrew word "shetar", a covenant, . . . and Blackstone conjectures that the room in which the chests were kept was thence called the "Star-Chamber"."
"Star Chamber: A court which originally had jurisdiction in cases where the ordinary course of justice was so much obstructed by one party, . . . that no inferior court would find its process obeyed. . .
In the reign of Henry the 8th, and his successors, the jurisdiction of the court was illegally extended to such a degree (especially in punishing the kings arbitrary proclamations) that it became odious to the nation, and was abolished." Blacks Law Dictionary, 5th Edition
These courts of Pharisaical Commercial Master/Slave Codes became so heinous for their "Secret Proceedings" and for their infliction of "Cruel and Unusual Punishments", that they were abolished. They are the essence of our modern Anglo/American so-called "Equity" Jurisdiction.
It was all run by "Chancery Priests", and they were referred to deceptively as "Courts of Equity". The only thing "Equal" about them, is that all Conquered "Slaves" there-under were treated as "Equal-Slaves".
"Courts of Chancery" is the more honest name which they also frequently used, because a great "Chance" was being taken if a man were forced to go before them. The linkage between "Equity Jurisdiction" and Romanistic "Civil / Municipal Law", is shown in the following:
"The whole of equity jurisprudence prevailing in England and the United States is mainly based on the civil law". Boviers Law Dictionary; 1868.
"Civil Law" is from Rome. There was no "Equity Jurisprudence" in England prior to the Norman Conquest.
The Norman Conquest had the "solemn approval of the Pope" of Rome according to the above-quoted Encyclopedia Britannica, and many other sources.
The battle of Hastings
The obvious Conclusion is that the Norman's "War of Aggression" was jointly backed by the Pharisees and the Pope of Rome, all so as to Forcibly Impose the Roman Civil/Municipal Codes of Babylonian-Talmudian based Master / Slave relations. These were mere Tools for Slave Control which were early Imposed by Evil Men with great influence with-in the Pharisaical and Roman-Catholic religious communities.
All Conscience-Bound People will Recognize that No True Spirituality could Possibly have been brought in-to England at that time. The "Forces of Evil" Were In "Full Control" during the so-called "Norman Conquest". Just like at the Crusades; and at the Inquisition. The religious forces consistently behind these movements have a very consistently-evil track-record.
Evil men Aggressively made Religious War against the Christian / Common-Law - Anglo-Saxon / Celtic Peoples of England in 1066. The "Babylonian-Talmud" was completed well before the Norman Conquest of 1066. It's all the same basic Master / Slave Commerce form of Code of Human Conduct.
It all treats living / breathing People as "Merchandise" in Commerce to be bought and sold as those "Slaves and the Souls of Men" as referred to in Revelation 18:13.
This entire body of Codified Human-Conduct is all so amorally lacking in fidelity to the Supreme Laws of "Love of Neighbor" from YHVH, as taught by His Son Yeshuah; as to be clearly a policy of the "Synagogue of Satan" as referred to at Revelation 2:9 and 3:9.
It is easy to summarize that this is that precise same Code of Human Conduct of which the Pharisee "Money-Changers" were using to corrupt the Temple in Jerusalem, and of which Christ / Messiah Jesus / Yeshuah over-turned their tables and drove them out of His Father's House with the whip.
It is easy to summarize that this is the Code of Conduct upon which the Pharisees moved to whipp-up the mob into such a fervent state of Anarchy as to abort "Due Process of Law" and to have Yeshua the Christ/Mesiah Lawlessly Nailed to the Cross / Stake.
Modern Applications of Ancient Babylonian Slave-Trading Codes:
This Code of Conduct embodied within the "Babylonian Talmud" is very large, but it contains specific portions which are designed to "Tear at the Fabric" of the society which is its target. These are the words of Ms Shapirro, as set forth in the Georgetown Law Journal. This is not the wording of "Anti-Semitic Right Wing Extremists". Ms Shapiro's term "Tear" is specifically used to denote that process which obliterated the "Fabric of . . . Society", as it had existed prior to that War of Aggression.
It would seem Reasonable to conclude that this is a "Code of Human Conduct" based on "Terrorism". Certainly the word "Tear" seems related to "Terrorism". Certainly the Anglo-Saxon / Celtic Christian People were greatly Fear Inspired by the forcible imposition of this "Babylonian Talmud" based Code of Human Conduct.
The wording of Ms Shapirro Reasonably seems to be an acknowledgment that "Terrorism" was used by the Normans and the Pharisees "who call themselves Jews" as a "matter of Policy" under that Code of Human Conduct; all known as the "Babylonian Talmud".
This entire body of Roman "Civil-Law" is Designed to Centralize the "Decision-Making Authority" of the Entire Community in-to the Hands of a "Single Arbitrator".
This is How All "Contracts" were En-Forced in the "Court of Equity". It was early incorporated into what was known as English "Law Merchant", which many fine scholars have confused as being a true part of the English "Common-Law". Such happened only after the corrupting influence of the "Norman Conquest".
Contracts are only enforceable in Courts of so-called "Equity".
"Equity" jurisdiction was allowed to enter into American Jurisprudence by way of Article 3 Section 2-1 of the so-called "U.S. Constitution". Such was a slap in the face of Christ / Messiah Jesus / Yeshuah, and much Evil has worked its purpose in this land by way of that compromise of Godly Principles.
How-ever, in the USA at the Federal Level and most (probably all) State Levels; there are Protections in place against Summary Equity / Chancery Slave-Trader Jurisdictions being imposed over American People.
These Protections are available through Constitutional, Statutory, and Case-Law Precedent Provisions. A full explanation of these protections is not presented here; but in another study / document by this same author which is centered around the so-called "US Supreme Court"'s Case-Law Precedent of "Beacon Theaters v Westover".
Here-by; the "Equity" Jurisdiction is Purged from All of its Lawful Authority to adjudicate anything; If a proper "Due Process of Law" is invoked.
By presenting a "Counter-Complaint", which there-by super-cedes and over-rides what is there-by recognized as the constitutionally antagonistic "Equity" Jurisdiction; this modern essence of "Law" allows the people to Free Them-Selves from the Babylonian Master / Slave-Traders Jurisdiction of so-called "Equity".
The Inevitability Of A Peaceful Revolution March 2 2022 | From: LanceSchuttler / Various
The victory drums, to the tune of Maurice Ravel’s “Bolero,” are now commencing with the crescendo as this writing goes to press. Everywhere in our world we are now seeing the awakening of humanity speed up.
We are seeing massive rallies against corruption and rallies for peace spread. We are seeing tyranny, cover-ups and false flags exposed. And more importantly, we are seeing movements converging that offer solutions to these issues the world faces.
Comment: We have been given notice of potentially groundbreaking events on a scale that has never been seen before. Estimated timeframes have come and gone in past years. But it needs to be observed that NEVER before has the same message come from so many disparate sources that there are some enormous events that are going to transpire between now and the end of September of this year.
It appears that things really and truly are coming to a head. This does not necessarily mean negative events on many fronts - but it is looking like a truly revolutionary period of change, and it may get a little bumpy as the dark ones finally fall.]
Since the Occupy Wall Street protests in late 2011, the world has seen continued cries for justice, peace and equality. We have seen continued protests against Monsanto over the past several years as well as the hacker group Anonymous’ rallies for justice, transparency and peace.
In 2012 it was synchronized anti-austerity protests throughout all of Europe. In 2013, it was in the form of millions taking to the streets in Brazil.
Also in 2013, we saw over 8 million flood the streets of Cairo, Egypt as the military supported the people’s birthright to freedom by removing the corrupt regime. In 2014 in Catalonia, Spain we saw Europe’s largest peaceful rally as over 2 million Catalans took to the streets for independence from Spain.
2014 also saw the world’s largest march on climate change as well as Wal-Mart’s biggest strike in history on Black Friday. In early 2015 we then saw over 3 million unify for peace in Paris after an alleged terror attack.
Though the mainstream media desperately tries to continue the facade that all is well among the status quo and banking elite, reality has cracked open the egg of illusion and has spread everywhere it’s seeds of truth, freedom, equality and peace.
What we are now living through and witnessing is the sprouting of a new world.
People are rethinking and questioning the way things are done. We are seeing many people’s hearts and minds shifting from programmed thinking and acting due to elitist propaganda into ways of self-direction, freedom and abundance.
People’s inner worlds of heart and mind are breaking free and we are seeing this have direct and positive impacts in our outer world.
This inner drive for every single one of us to feel and be free in every way is causing the conditioned past to be transcended and is creating a convergence of hearts, minds, projects, ideas and visions now manifesting for the highest good of all.
Fortunately, we are not alone in this endeavor of creating inner and outer freedom.
Something Big and Positive is Happening
Over the past few years we here on Earth have been experiencing increased solar activity with an increased number of coronal mass ejections (CMEs) being received by our Earth’s magnetic field. CMEs are explosions of electricity and energy in the form of electrons and protons, according to NASA.
This ejected, self-organizing and coherent plasma usually takes between 3-4 days to reach our Earth’s magnetosphere which, if large enough, can create disturbances in radio signals and navigation systems.
Interestingly, these CMEs also affect humans down to the level of our DNA.
In 1984-1985, Dr. Peter Gariaev and his team of Russian linguists were studying DNA and the ways light, sound and frequencies interact with DNA. Their research led to many groundbreaking and paradigm-shifting discoveries with one of them showing that DNA is able to absorb and emit light (photons), which spirals along the double helix in sacred geometrical form.
They found that DNA has properties of a scalar/torsion field, which is;
“A self-sustaining vortex in the aether/time-space which is innately non-electromagnetic… By spinning, a vortex can excite photons or [pull] virtual photons out of the fabric of space/aether - and static torsion/scalar fields can harness and store light within them. ”
Literally, DNA creates magnetized wormholes in the time-space fabric. DNA acts as:
“Tunnel connections between entirely different areas in the universe through which information can be transmitted outside of space and time. The DNA attracts these bits of information and passes them on to our consciousness.”
They found that with the presence of light (photons), DNA activation and and thus evolution can occur. New neuro-pathways can be created. Our thought patterns can be reshaped to ways that better serve us. We can change how we deal with a situation.
We can change who we are. With the presence of photons always amidst us via our Sun, our DNA is constantly pulling in this light and continuing to change and evolve.
We can think of a solar flare as a boost of light from our Sun. This extra light equates to a higher upgrade in the evolution of our DNA and thus, who we are.
In fact, pioneering physicist Nassim Haramein’s holofractographic universe theory says that the “fundamental structure and dynamics of space-time are those of the black hole.”
In this view, any change to a part, in effect, changes the whole. This is true of any hologram. Every part contains the whole, and when something changes in a part of the object, the whole object then changes as well.
So we see that every time someone in our world thinks, does or says something to improve themselves, a situation or another, the entirety of humanity benefits.
We upgrade. We shift. We evolve. We also see that with the help from our Sun, our DNA and our consciousness is continuing to shift to higher octaves. And as our DNA continues to shift, the entire human race is impacted and benefited.
In other words, the deck is stacked in favor of humanity to continue growing and changing in ways that serve the whole. Peaceful revolution of the systems that suppress and no longer serve the humanity is inevitable.
“Where are these things being reflected in our outer world,” some might ask. Are there those “in the know” talking of this revolution? The answer is an unshakable yes. A notable figure is Benjamin Fulford. Benjamin is the former Asia-Pacific Bureau Chief for Forbes Magazine and has over 20 years of experience as a professional writer and journalist, along with several other accolades.
He resigned from his position in 2005 as he was disturbed by the “corporate censorship” and has for the past few years been writing a weekly geopolitical article, which has been exposing corruption between various government and banking representatives, and more importantly has been discussing the positive developments in the growing BRICS (Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa) alliance.
On July 18, 2014, the same day the Contingent Reserve Arrangement and the BRICS Development Bank were announced and implemented, Russian Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov said the BRICS is an alliance that will “reform the international financial system.”
Many economists believe this alliance, because of the amount of gold and silver several of these countries have been importing, are planning to reset the global financial system, which will be based on gold, silver and other metals and resources. (Something John F. Kennedy was reportedly very close to initiating with President Sukarno of Indonesia, via the Global Collateral Accounts.)
It is believed that in time, this reset will allow our world’s entire socioeconomic system to shift into a resource-based economy, a term coined by social engineer Jacque Fresco of The Venus Project. In this revolutionary, yet very practical system, technologies will be implemented that help improve the quality of life for every person on our planet by allowing food, shelter, clothing and social activities to be met necessities.
This will also shift our world away from oil and other destructive energy practices and will help transform the health of our earth.
Creating the World We Want
As famous author, speaker and physicist Gregg Braden has said:
“Our beliefs have the power to change the flow of events in the universe – literally to interrupt and redirect time, matter, and space, and then events that occur within them.”
We have the power to change our world and we are receiving help from many known and quiet sources. The change can begin with a thought. It can follow with an action. Inspire someone. Eat more organic fruits and vegetables and less meat and dairy. Soak up the sunlight as much as possible. Spark a movement. Transform negative thoughts into positive ones.
Use words carefully and specifically. Plant a garden. Above all, dream big and continue to be you.
Continue visualizing and feeling the changes you want in your personal live as well as for our world. We each have a vital role to play in the creation of a better world. The only thing that is certain is change.
With this world view and universal truth in mind, peaceful revolution is truly inevitable.
The Science Of The Heart March 1 2022 | From: UpliftConnect / Various
It does more than pump blood, it started beating before your brain was formed, and it has an electromagnetic field that can be detected across the room. It’s time that we explore the heart of the matter.
Science is hard at work de-mystifying the role of the heart in our lives and seeing beyond it’s function of pumping blood is perhaps the first step in unlocking the potential of living in the frequency of love.
This is not romantic love, it is a state of resonance (instead of discord) with your own mind, with the people around you, and with nature. The key to living in flow involves tuning in to your own center and letting your heart lead.
In my previous article, Beyond the Confines of Intellectwe took an honest look at the limitations of only engaging with the world through our thoughts, thus opening the door to understanding the wisdom inherent in feelings. The heart is actually part of our cognitive system, sending more messages to the brain than the brain sends to the heart.
Electrically, the heart is 40 – 60 times stronger than the brain and is many more times stronger than any other electrical impulse in the body.
"The sciences of psychology and medicine are in midst of a major paradigm shift as research findings have uncovered that the heart is a sensory organ that can learn, hold memory and make independent functional decisions.
Even more surprising is the fact that the heart displays qualities of neuroplasticity, and that it can reorganize itself by growing new neural connections, just as the brain can do."
Any Google search regarding heart and science will show a long list of links from the leader in this field of research, Heartmath.
They have pioneered in scientific study, but more importantly they have created practical applications to this research that are helping individuals thrive.
Increasing one’s Heart intelligence can have a profound effect on personal relationships, productivity in the workplace, reduce stress, while increasing optimism and problem-solving abilities.
"By using your heart as your compass, you can see more clearly which direction to go to stop self-defeating behavior."
– Doc Childre and Howard Martin, HeartMath
I think we all know what it feels like to do something we really don’t want to do, whether it’s taxes, a job we aren’t satisfied with, or acting out of integrity with our own beliefs.
Naturally this creates discordance and stress. Many times we are experiencing these feelings beneath the surface of our consciousness, yet our body is still responding to the dissonance.
Finding Coherence Within Ourselves
When our thoughts/brain are not in harmony with our feelings/heart this creates strain and resistance within our own system on a physiological level. Bringing awareness to this process helps us to make choices that have our system working in harmony with itself, thus increasing energy and producing heightened states of wellbeing.
This efficient, optimal, and harmonious functioning of the various systems within the body is known as coherence.
Want to experience flow? Increase coherence within yourself. Take this same principle and now apply it to your family, community, and ultimately the planet. The curse of competition has all of humanity, states, nations, religions, working against each other and against natural systems.
The best way to increase global coherence is to increase it on an individual level.
Thankfully HeartMath has a very simple and effective exercise called Freeze-Frame to help us develop greater coherence. It is a one-minute technique that allows a major shift in perception. More than positive thinking, it creates a definitive, heartfelt shift in how we view a situation, an individual or ourselves.
When under stress:
Shift out of the head, and focus on the area around your heart.
Keep your attention there for at least ten seconds.
Continue to breathe normally.
Recall a positive time or feeling you had in your life, and attempt to re-experience it.
Remember, try not simply to visualize it, but rather to feel it fully.
Ask a question from the heart: “What can I do in this situation to make it different?” or “What can I do to minimize stress?”
Hopefully this short blog will help send you on your way to increasing coherence within your system. Take some time to learn more about Heartmath and if you’d like to read more research on the topic, you will enjoy this online PDF.
The first step in healing the discord in the world is to heal it within ourselves. The science of the heart has the capacity to undo our stress and overwhelm as we transition to a more coherent, peaceful world.
New Zealand High Court: Vaccine Mandate Not ‘Demonstrably Justified,’ Breach Of Rights + Are We At The End Of The Pandemic? February 28 2021 | From: TheEpochTimes / Dr.Mercola / Various
Police and defence force staff challenge upheld.
The New Zealand High Court has upheld a challenge to a vaccine mandate for Police and Defence Force staff, stating that it was not a “demonstrably justified” breach of the Bill of Rights.
Justice Francis Cooke was asked by a group of Police and Defence Force personnel to judicially review the vaccine mandate enacted under the COVID-19 Public Health Response Act in December.
The mandate required all Defence Force personnel and all Police constables, recruits, and authorized officers to receive two doses of the vaccine by March 1.
But on Jan. 6, three unvaccinated staff who did not wish to receive the shots sought a judicial review of the mandate. They were supported by affidavits from 37 of their colleagues in the same position.
The group claims that two rights of the New Zealand Bill of Rights Act 1990 had been limited by the mandate: the right to refuse a medical treatment and the right to manifest religious beliefs.
Part of the group’s religious objections to the mandate were concerns over the fact that“the Pfizer vaccine had at some point been tested on cells that had been derived from a human foetus.”
According to UCLA Health, COVID-19 vaccines do not contain aborted fetal cells but Johnson & Johnson did use fetal cell lines when developing and producing their vaccine, and Pfizer and Moderna used them to test their vaccines to ensure they work.
The group claimed that “requiring vaccination by such a vaccine was in conflict with the religious beliefs of some of the affected persons.”
Cooke, in a judgment (pdf) released on Friday in New Zealand, did not accept some of the applicants’ arguments but agreed that the mandate“is not a reasonable limit on rights that can be demonstrably justified” and set the order aside.
"I conclude that the Order does not involve a reasonable limit on the applicants’ rights that can be demonstrably justified in a free and democratic society and that it is unlawful,”Cooke said.
“The order limits the right to be free to refuse medical treatment recognised by the New Zealand Bill of Rights Act (including because of its limitation on people’s right to remain employed), and it limits the right to manifest religious beliefs for those who decline to be vaccinated because the vaccine has been tested on cells derived from a human foetus which is contrary to their religious beliefs,” Cooke said.
However, he pointed out the court’s decision did not affect any other vaccine mandates or any internal vaccination policies of the police or Defence Force.
"In essence, the order mandating vaccinations for police and NZDF staff was imposed to ensure the continuity of the public services, and to promote public confidence in those services, rather than to stop the spread of COVID-19.
Indeed health advice provided to the government was that further mandates were not required to restrict the spread of COVID-19. I am not satisfied that continuity of these services is materially advanced by the order,” he said.
Cooke also concluded that the mandate affected only a small number of personnel: just 164 unvaccinated personnel in a police workforce of nearly 15,700. For the New Zealand Defence workforce, the mandate affected 115 of its 15,480 staff.
"Moreover there is no evidence that this number is any different from the number that would have remained unvaccinated and employed had the matter simply been dealt with by the pre-existing internal vaccine policies applied by police and NZDF. Neither is there any hard evidence that this number of personnel materially effects the continuity of NZDF and police services,” the judge wrote.
The judge also said it was apparent, based on evidence, that the Omicron variant of COVID-19 was highly transmissible and could affect a large number of New Zealanders including police or Defence temporarily but that the termination of jobs arising from the mandate was permanent.
"Vaccination has a significant beneficial effect in limiting serious illness, hospitalization, and death, including with the Omicron variant. But it was less effective in reducing infection and transmission of Omicron than had been the case with other variants of COVID-19,” the judge wrote.
However, Cooke stressed that his decision to set aside the order was not for “the purposes of limiting the spread of COVID-19” but for “the continuity of service of police and Defence.”
"But the order made in the present case is nevertheless unlawful and is set aside,” he wrote.
The applicants were awarded costs.
Associate Professor Helen Petousis-Harris, a vaccinologist at the University of Auckland told Stuff NZ that she was disappointed with the decision and that it legally and morally undermines the mandates.
“It’s really disappointing. These are temporary mandates. They are for the benefit of our whole community. Communities have always depended on our people cooperating and working together – right through time since we camped outside the caves. It’s an essential component of a successful society,” Petousis-Harris said.
“This isn’t working together. Right in the middle of a pandemic, it’s not in the spirit of trying to keep us all safe.”
Spokespersons for both Police and NZDF told The New Zealand Herald that terminations of staff who do not get vaccinated will be suspended while the decision is considered by the government.
The Epoch Times has contacted New Zealand Police and NZDF for comment.
After two years of fearmongering, in what is a remarkable Omicron U-turn following almost two years of censorship, the narrative is rapidly crumbling.
For nearly a year, experts have noted that the COVID shots cannot establish herd immunity to end the pandemic, as the gene transfer injections do not prevent infection or transmission.
It’s not rocket science, yet health officials and government leaders around the world have irrationally claimed otherwise, and censored any and all - regardless of credentials - who dared to suggest alternative approaches.
Now, all of a sudden, the narrative is rapidly changing, with loads of these same individuals - truthfully, if you can believe that - acknowledging that the COVID “vaccines” cannot end the pandemic and that we need to learn to live with the virus. Some have even started speaking out against repeated boosters, at least at intervals of three to four months.
It seems a major driver for this U-turn in the pandemic narrative is the emergence of the Omicron variant. While incredibly infectious, it causes only mild cold symptoms in the vast majority of people, so it’s essentially ripping through populations, leaving natural herd immunity in its wake. As a result, many are now claiming the end of the pandemic is in sight.
Moving on From COVID
In a January 15, 2022, Trial Site News article, Mary Beth Pfeiffer reported:
"The director of global infectious diseases at Massachusetts General Hospital is predicting what was unthinkable less than a month ago: The end of the pandemic. Dr. Edward Ryan made stunning and encouraging comments on the Omicron variant that give hope for a return to normalcy.
Among these: Omicron will make boosters unnecessary. The COVID virus will join the ranks of the ‘common cold.’ And the latest wave will enter ‘clean up mode’ shortly.
‘We are fighting the last war with COVID and should be pivoting back to normal life,’ the summary of Dr. Ryan’s comments states. ‘Spring/Summer will be really nice!’”
According to Ryan, nearly 100% of COVID cases in the Boston area are now Omicron, which is good news, considering it doesn’t appear to bring with it any of the more severe side effects seen with previous strains, including Delta.
In New England, the current outbreak is predicted to rapidly wane and disappear during the month of February 2022. Nationwide, Omicron was reportedly responsible for about 73% of all cases as of early January 2022.
Pfeiffer also reports that, according to Ryan, booster shots will not be needed for Omicron, as by the time a dedicated injection is released, the wave will already be over and done with. Ryan is reported to have stated that “we’re all going to get it, which will give us the immunity we need to get through it,” referring to the Omicron infection.
Ryan’s comments fly in the face of mainstream medical recommendations, which near-universally call for boosters for everyone, including children. Clearly, however, Ryan makes a lot of sense.
The boosters, while seemingly able to temporarily raise a double-jabbed person’s resistance against Omicron, it’s designed to protect against the original SARS-CoV-2 strain that no longer exists.
Overall, it appears the only reason a double-jabbed person would need a booster against Omicron is because the first two doses impaired their immune system such that they’re now more vulnerable, even to a milder strain.
This downward spiral of negative immunity can only continue if people continue to take boosters, especially mismatched ones.
Vaccine-Induced Herd Immunity Called Out as ‘Myth’
In early August 2021, the director of the Oxford Vaccine Group, professor Sir Andrew Pollard, actually spoke out against the idea that the COVID shots were the answer everyone was looking for.
At the time, he referred to the idea that vaccine-induced herd immunity against COVID was “mythical.” As reported by Yahoo! News, August 10, 2021:
"… Pollard … said … that herd immunity is ‘not a possibility’ with the current Delta variant. He called the idea ‘mythical,’ warning that vaccine programs should not be developed around it.
‘We know very clearly with coronavirus that this current variant, the Delta variant, will still infect people who have been vaccinated and that does mean that anyone who’s still unvaccinated, at some point, will meet the virus,’ Pollard told a session of the All-Party Parliamentary Group (APPG) on coronavirus.
He said that while vaccines might ‘slow the process’ of transmission down, they cannot currently stop the spread completely.
‘I think we are in a situation here with this current variant where herd immunity is not a possibility because it still infects vaccinated individuals,’ he said, predicting the next thing may be ‘a variant which is perhaps even better at transmitting in vaccinated populations.’
He added:‘So that’s even more of a reason not to be making a vaccine program around herd immunity.’”
During that same APPG meeting, professor Paul Hunter from the University of East Anglia stressed that variants capable of evading the COVID shots were “an absolute inevitability.”
Pollard and Hunter both turned out to be correct, as Omicron’s vaccine-evading capacity has now been documented.
The reprieve Omicron provides could not have come at a better time. At this point, after two years of repetitive fearmongering, most people have simply had enough.
It’s not often you put a hold on life for this long, and the general consensus appears to be that people are ready to brave life even if the threat of COVID remains.
"The determination to get on with our lives is deeply and perhaps unchangeably human … Whatever damage Omicron might wreak in the immediate future, we will, most likely, soon lead lives that look a lot more like they did in the spring of 2019 than in the spring of 2020.”
- Yascha Mounk, associate professor, Johns Hopkins University
In a December 22, 2021, Atlantic opinion piece, Yascha Mounk, associate professor at Johns Hopkins University and a senior fellow at the Council on Foreign Relations, noted that“No matter the severity of the variant, the appetite for shutdowns or other large-scale social interventions simply isn’t there.”
"It feels like everyone I know has COVID … The pattern among my circle of friends fits with what’s unfolding in South Africa, where the coronavirus’s new Omicron variant was first identified.
The number of cases in the country shot up quickly, but the number of deaths has so far increased much, much more gradually - possibly indicating that Omicron is more contagious but causes less severe disease than previous variants …
I wager that, whatever course Omicron - or future strains of the disease - might take, we are about to experience the end of the pandemic as a social phenomenon …
Despite skyrocketing caseloads, few pundits or politicians are proposing strict measures to slow the virus’s spread. The appetite for shutdowns or other large-scale social interventions simply isn’t there …
Scientists have their own way of deciding that a pandemic is over. But one useful social-scientific marker is when people have gotten used to living with the ongoing presence of a particular pathogen.
By that definition, the massive surge of Omicron infections that is currently coursing through scores of developed countries without eliciting more than a half-hearted response marks the end of the pandemic.”
Mounk, like others, pointed out that if Omicron turned out to be as mild as it initially appeared - which has been borne out since then - then natural herd immunity would develop as the highly infectious virus spread like wildfire.
With that baseline of natural immunity, populations would, in the future, be far better equipped to handle any new strains that emerge, “without a significant increase in mortality.”
Mounk goes on to discuss how, over time, people get used to and learn to live with all sorts of risks, including direct threats to life and limb, and that’s exactly the kind of resiliency we see building and spreading now:
"When I was growing up in Germany, I was fascinated by news reports about life in very dangerous places. Residents of Baghdad or Tel Aviv seemed to put themselves in danger simply by going shopping or meeting friends for a cup of coffee.
How, I wondered with a mixture of horror and admiration, could anybody be willing to accept such an existential risk for such a trivial pleasure?
But the truth of the matter is that virtually all humans have, for virtually all of recorded history, faced daily risks of disease or violent death that are far greater than those that the residents of developed countries currently face.
And despite the genuine horrors of the past 24 months, that holds true even now … The determination to get on with our lives is deeply and perhaps unchangeably human.
In that sense, the spring of 2020 will be remembered as one of the most extraordinary periods in history - a time when people completely withdrew from social life to slow the spread of a dangerous pathogen. But what was possible for a few months has turned out to be unsustainable for years, let alone decades.
Whatever damage Omicron might wreak in the immediate future, we will, most likely, soon lead lives that look a lot more like they did in the spring of 2019 than in the spring of 2020.”
Do You Have a Cold, Flu or COVID?
Based on what I’m seeing around me, it seems the prediction that Omicron will “get” just about everyone is likely to be true. People are sick in droves. The good news is that there’s little panic surrounding these cases. Most people are now realizing that there’s no need.
That said, I still recommend treating any COVID symptoms early and aggressively, just in case. As mentioned, the vast majority of SARS-CoV-2 infections are now related to Omicron, and the core symptoms are near-indistinguishable from the common cold and/or influenza.
The most commonly reported symptoms of Omicron infection are:
Fatigue
Cough
Congestion, sneezing and runny nose
Sore throat
Headache
Fever
In addition to these, other symptoms commonly reported with SARS-CoV-2 infection, up to and including Delta, include:
Loss of taste or smell
Stomach/gastrointestinal pain (which in some cases could be a sign of microclots in the intestines)
Nausea or vomiting
Diarrhea
A key difference in symptomology between Delta and Omicron is that Omicron does not appear to cause the loss of taste and smell, which often occurs with Delta infection (as with previous strains).
Fortunately, Omicron also does not seem to be associated with blood clots, like previous strains (especially the initial ones), and it’s also far less likely to cause severe lung infection and damage.
Considering the uncertainties around diagnosis, it’s best to treat any cold or flu-like symptoms early. At first signs of symptoms, start treatment. Perhaps it’s the common cold or a regular influenza, maybe it’s the much milder Omicron, but since it’s hard to tell, your best bet is to treat symptoms as you would treat earlier forms of COVID.
Considering how contagious Omicron is, chances are you’re going to get it, so buy what you’ll need now, so you have it on hand if/when symptoms arise. And, remember, this applies for those who have gotten the jab as well, since you’re just as likely to get infected - and perhaps even more so.
Early treatment protocols with demonstrated effectiveness include:
Cultural Imperialism And Perception Management: How Hollywood Hides 'US Government' War Crimes February 27 2022 | From: GlobalResearch / Various
There is an unspoken, yet very clear, bond between Hollywood and the US government that overtly supports US foreign policy.
The movie industry in Hollywood has been active in hiding US war crimes and sanitizing the US military campaigns in NATO-garrisoned Afghanistan, Anglo-American occupied Iraq, and elsewhere in the world.
Moreover, the dominance of Hollywood as a tool of cultural imperialism in Europe and the rest of the world make Hollywood films an excellent tool for getting Washington’s ideas out internationally and sedating global audiences with misleading narratives
Hollywood as a Tool of Cultural Imperialism and Perception Management
Aside from news media outlets, it should come as no surprise that most the ideas and notions that the general public in the US and elsewhere have about wars come from movies, television sets, radio programs, video games, and the entertainment industry.
Movies and the entertainment industry are ideal for identifying roles for audiences. In many instances movies and the entertainment industry surpass media outlets in shaping the perceptions of audiences about wars and conflicts.
Movies are used to identify which individuals, groups, peoples, and nations are heroes, victims, aggressors, and villains. In this regard Hollywood vilifies countries like Iran, China, Russia, Cuba, and North Korea while it lionizes the United States.
Hollywood also warps historical narratives and reifies revisionist narratives of history.
In a far stretch from the historical facts and reality, this is why most US citizens and many Western Europeans believe that the outcome of the Second World War in Europe was decided in the Atlantic by the US and not in Eastern Europe and Central Asia by the Soviet Union.
The perceptions of most people in the US and Western Europe are influenced by Hollywood and the entertainment industry and not history textbooks or scholarly works. Polls taken in France by the French Institute of Public Opinion about the Second World War demonstrate how US cultural imperialism by means of Hollywood’s influence has played out.
57 % of the French citizens polled in 1945 believed that Germany was defeated in the Second World War because of the Soviet Union whereas 20% believed it was due to the US and 12% thought it was because of the British.
These views become distorted by 1994 when 25% of the French citizens polled believed that it was because of the Soviets that Hitler was defeated whereas 49% believed it was because of the US and 16% believed it was because of Britain.
By 2004 only 20% of the French citizens surveyed recognized the Soviet Union as the main force for ending the Second World War in Europe whereas 58% believed it was the US and 16% thought it was Britain.
We can infer that the younger generations or birth cohorts that did not experience the Second World War are having their perceptions shaped by modern mass media, specifically movies and the entertainment industry.
This is why CNN’s Christiane Amanpour was able to boldly declared on June 6, 2014 at the Seventieth Anniversary of D-Day from the Chateau de Benouville in France that;
"The American effort - the supremely heroic effort of the United States - under General Eisenhower and President Roosevelt during World War II has been one that the whole continent [meaning, Europe] has thanked America for the last seventy years".
While taking a swipe at Russia and undermining its role in the Second World War, CNN’s Amanpour also said that the French government has emphasized:
"That this is a day to thank the United States" and thank the US "most particularly for turning around the course of history".
The Vertical Integration of Hollywood with the Military-Industrial Complex
The recognized establishment of ties between Hollywood and the US government began with the production of the silent war movie Wings in 1927. The silent movie was about the First World War and relied heavily on the United States Army Air Corps, which is the aerial wing of the US Army.
Ever since the making of Wings in 1927 there has been a close partnership between the Pentagon and Hollywood that has expanded and blossomed to include other government bodies and agencies, including members of the sixteen-member US intelligence community, such as the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA).
This has led to the vertical integration of Hollywood and the entertainment industry into the military-industrial complex, which has in essence reduced Hollywood movies to tools of cultural imperialism and camouflaged US propaganda.
The US government began to increasingly manipulate the contents of Hollywood movie script and to glamorize and lionize the US military and its campaigns. The Pentagon and US government will not assist movie or television productions that reveal the true malevolent role of US wars.
Financial and material assistance is only given to productions that make wars and US foreign policy look like a heroic and noble solution. The author of the book Operation Hollywood, Dave Robb, does an excellent job of documenting this.
For example, the Pentagon had the entire plot and script changed in the 1961 episode of Lassie named Timmy and the Martians. The episode was originally supposed to be about the protagonist dog Lassie howling to alert Timmy of a plane crash.
The producers originally wanted to do a show where a US airplane crashed because it had a design fault that Lassie could sense due to a high pitch noise and thus identify.
The US military, however, would not accept any script that would even remotely suggest that US military hardware could have a design fault.
This was because the US government and Pentagon did not want children to think that US military equipment could be faulty, because it would hurt future recruitment for the US military. So the circumstances of the airplane’s crash had to be rewritten for the show to get Pentagon support.
This relationship has in effect sanitized US wars and invasions while it has justified Washington’s foreign policy.
It has led to the production of historically twisted movies.
At one end of the spectrum in Hollywood this has led to Hollywood self-censorship whereas at the other end of the spectrum it has led to government subsidized propaganda.
Hollywood script writers draft movie scripts that are self-censored because they know that they will be asking for assistance from the Pentagon and US government which can significant reduce a Hollywood production’s budget and save its producers a lot of money.
Hollywood scripts are constantly modified in this regard and the Pentagon even has an entity in Los Angeles that deals with Hollywood directors and producers called the Film Liaison Unit.
Hollywood’s Role in Hiding US War Crimes
While the US uses films like Top Gun as promotional and recruitment material it used movies like the Green Berets to distort the role of US in wars and movies like Argo, which the CIA is reported to have fact checked, to distort the perception of history.
Hollywood movies like Iron Man and Lone Survivor never explain the circumstances behind the US military presence in Afghanistan and Central Asia. They merely present the US presence there as an invited one and even the US contingents there as simply peacekeepers.
Movies like Transformers, G.I. Joe, and Fantastic 4: Rise of the Silver Surfer portray the US as having a mandate to act with impunity anywhere in the world, including Russia and China, by disregarding the sovereignty of other nations and even placing US military bases on their soil.
The US military has no jurisdiction on Chinese soil nor does the Pentagon have a base in Russia’s territory. These Hollywood movies naturalize US interference in other countries and create the false impression that the US military has a right to do whatever it wants.
Aside from not addressing the darker side of US foreign policy, Hollywood movies like Forrest Gump carry subliminal messages. In the words of the US culture and entertainment magazine Rolling Stone:
"The message of Forrest Gump was that if you think about the hard stuff too much, you’ll either get AIDS or lose your legs. Meanwhile, the hero is the idiot who just shrugs and says ‘Whatever!’ whenever his country asks him to do something crazy."
What Rolling Stone is saying that listen to what you are commanded to do.
Then there are movies like American Sniper that collapse US foreign policy into the simplistic notion of individual characters. What this does is collapse the event and the soldiers into one, which means that if ones criticize a US war that you are attacking the soldiers and their convictions.
This is hiding behind the soldiers and detracting from the real issue of an illegal invasion and occupation. Nor is there any mention of Abu Ghraib or the false weapons of mass destruction lies. Rolling Stone had this to say about American Sniper:
"Sniper is a movie whose politics are so ludicrous and idiotic that under normal circumstances it would be beneath criticism.
The only thing that forces us to take it seriously is the extraordinary fact that an almost exactly similar worldview consumed the walnut-sized mind of the president who got us into the war in question".
"
It’s the fact that the movie is popular, and actually makes sense to so many people, that’s the problem," it also adds.
In fact, as a result of the movie there was an increase in hate crimes in the US and negative feelings towards Arabs and Muslims.
Nor was Chris Kyle in real life a hero protecting the US way of life as the Hollywood movie depicts him; he was part of an occupational force that should never have been in Iraq and he was fighting what he called an 'insurgency' that emerged to resist the occupation of Iraq.
Kyle also claimed that he was ordered to kill thirty fellow Americans in New Orleans because they were looting. He was also a known liar who also admitted that he loved killing Iraqis in his book.
Hollywood helps sanitize US war crimes and create false images. It should also come as no surprise that Hollywood movies are part of intelligence operations either. When Ben Affleck, the director of the movie Argo and an admirer of the CIA that collaborated with them in the making of Argo, was asked by Catherine Shoard if Hollywood was filled with CIA agents, his response was to say:
"I think that Hollywood is probably full of CIA agents".
It is worth quoting US Senator Tom Hayden about the CIA’s involvement in Hollywood:
"Think about that: it’s not that Hollywood is in bed with the CIA in some repugnant way, but that the Agency is looking to plant positive images about itself (in other words, propaganda) through our most popular forms of entertainment.
So natural has the CIA - entertainment connection become that few question its legal or moral ramifications. This is a government agency like no other; the truth of its operations is not subject to public examination.
When the CIA’s hidden persuaders influence a Hollywood movie, it is using a popular medium to spin as favorable an image of itself as possible, or at least, prevent an unfavorable one from taking hold. If incestuous enough, Jenkins argues, these relationships violate the spirit or letter of government laws."
The importance of movies as a tool of US foreign policy and warfare cannot be ignored. As an illustration of their importance, movies have even been censored inside the United States to hide US war crimes and reality.
The 1946 movie documentary Let There Be Light, which was about the lives of US soldiers that were traumatized from war and directed by John Huston, was banned for over thirty years from being watched in the US because of the awareness it would create among the US public.
Think Hollywood is neutral or that movie like Seth Rogen’s comedy The Interview, which promotes regime change in North Korea, is innocent?
Think again. Hollywood is helping Washington wage a war of perception management and to hide US war crimes.
All Wars Are Bankers' Wars February 26 2022 | From: MichaelRivero / Various Sources
A very eloquent and relatively concise video discourse on how and why the title of this piece is so tragically true, followed by a very detailed article for those who wish to read more.
This really is a must see / must read piece to be aware of the real history of banking and warmongering over the last 100 years - along with the how and why such nefarious plans were implemented; and to what ends.
This exposes the same plan that is being rolled out globally, not just in the United States.
"The common enemy of all human kind are private central banks issuing the public currency as a loan at interest, and as history will show, they will do anything up to, and including global war - to keep their lock on yours and your children's economic wellbeing and productivity.
We are not a free society. Media will tell us that we are free, but we are not free.
We are slaves, our slave chains are made of paper - and that paper is the Federal Reserve note [including the central bankster issued debt-based-notes of every other country]."
Too few of our leaders have tried to stand up to this system of enslavement, usually with lethal results. But if all of the people of the world stood up at the same time and said "No more private central banks", it will come crashing down, just as slavery did, just as rule by divine right did and we will be embarking on a new era in human history where the emphasis on human development is on the people and not on the money junkies.
[Note: This does not mean we should not remember the dead, who were duped into giving their lives for lies.]
"Banking was conceived in iniquity and was born in sin. The Bankers own the Earth. Take it away from them, but leave them the power to create deposits, and with the flick of a pen they will create enough deposits to buy it back again.
However, take it away from them, and all the fortunes like mine will disappear, and they ought to disappear, for this world would be a happier and better world to live in. But if you wish to remain slaves of the Bankers and pay for the cost of your own slavery, let them continue to create deposits."
- Sir Josiah Stamp, President of the Bank of England in the 1920s, the second richest man in Britain
All Wars Are Bankers Wars
I know many people have a great deal of difficulty comprehending just how many wars are started for no other purpose than to force private central banks onto nations, so let me share a few examples, so that you understand why the US Government is mired in so many wars against so many foreign nations. There is ample precedent for this.
The United States fought the American Revolution primarily over King George III's Currency act, which forced the colonists to conduct their business only using printed bank notes borrowed from the Bank of England at interest.
Interest Bearing bank note from the Bank of England, 1764
"The bank hath benefit of interest on all moneys which it creates out of nothing."
- William Paterson, founder of the Bank of England in 1694
King George III
After the revolution, the new United States adopted a radically different economic system in which the government issued its own value-based money, so that private banks like the Bank of England were not siphoning off the wealth of the people through interest-bearing bank notes.
"The refusal of King George 3rd to allow the colonies to operate an honest money system, which freed the ordinary man from the clutches of the money manipulators, was probably the prime cause of the revolution."
- Benjamin Franklin, Founding Father
Following the revolution, the US Government actually took steps to keep the bankers out of the new government!
"Any person holding any office or any stock in any institution in the nature of a bank for issuing or discounting bills or notes payable to bearer or order, cannot be a member of the House whilst he holds such office or stock."
- Third Congress of the United States Senate, 23rd of December, 1793, signed by the President, George Washington
But bankers are nothing if not dedicated to their schemes to acquire your wealth, and know full well how easy it is to corrupt a nation's leaders.
Founded in 1791, by the end of its twenty year charter the First Bank of the United States had almost ruined the nation's economy, while enriching the bankers.
Congress refused to renew the charter and signaled their intention to go back to a state issued value based currency on which the people paid no interest at all to any banker.
Congress still refused to renew the charter for the First Bank of the United States, whereupon Nathan Mayer Rothschild railed,"Teach those impudent Americans a lesson! Bring them back to colonial status!"
The British Prime Minister at the time, Spencer Perceval was adamently opposed to war with the United States, primarily because the majority of England's military might was occupied with the ongoing Napoleonic wars.
Spencer Perceval was concerned that Britain might not prevail in a new American war, a concern shared by many in the British government.
The First Bank of the United States
Then, Spencer Perceval was assassinated (the only British Prime Minister to be assassinated in office) and replaced by Robert Banks Jenkinson, the 2nd Earl of Liverpool, who was fully supportive of a war to recapture the colonies.
Click for larger imageof the Geneva Gazette for July 1, 1812, reporting on the assassination of Spencer Perceval together with the declaration of the War of 1812
"If my sons did not want wars, there would be none."
- Gutle Schnaper, wife of Mayer Amschel Rothschild and mother of his five sons
Financed at virtually no interest by the Rothschild controlled Bank of England, Britain then provoked the war of 1812 to recolonize the United States and force them back into the slavery of the Bank of England, or to plunge the United States into so much debt they would be forced to accept a new private central bank.
Once again, private bankers were in control of the nation's money supply and cared not who made the laws or how many British and American soldiers had to die for it.
The Second Bank of the United States
Bank Note from the Second Bank of the United States
Once again the nation was plunged into debt, unemployment, and poverty by the predations of the private central bank, and in 1832 Andrew Jackson successfully campaigned for his second term as President under the slogan, "Jackson And No Bank!" True to his word, Jackson succeeds in blocking the renewal of the charter for the Second Bank of the United States.
"Gentlemen! I too have been a close observer of the doings of the Bank of the United States. I have had men watching you for a long time, and am convinced that you have used the funds of the bank to speculate in the breadstuffs of the country.
When you won, you divided the profits amongst you, and when you lost, you charged it to the bank. You tell me that if I take the deposits from the bank and annul its charter I shall ruin ten thousand families. That may be true, gentlemen, but that is your sin!
Should I let you go on, you will ruin fifty thousand families, and that would be my sin! You are a den of vipers and thieves. I have determined to rout you out, and by the Eternal, (bringing his fist down on the table) I will rout you out!"
- Andrew Jackson, shortly before ending the charter of the Second Bank of the United States.
From the original minutes of the Philadelphia committee of citizens sent to meet with President Jackson (February 1834), according to Andrew Jackson and the Bank of the United States (1928) by Stan V. Henkels
News report of Jackson shutting down the Second Bank of the United States, Geneva Gazette, October 2, 1833
President Zachary Taylor, ca 1850
President James Buchanon
President Abraham Lincoln
Shortly after President Jackson (the only American President to actually pay off the National Debt) ended the Second Bank of the United States, there was an attempted assassination which failed when both pistols used by the assassin, Richard Lawrence, failed to fire.
President Zachary Taylor opposed the creation of a new Private Central Bank, owing to the historical abuses of the First and Second Banks of the United States.
"The idea of a national bank is dead, and will not be revived in my time."
- Zachary Taylor
Taylor died on July 9, 1850 after eating a bowl of cherries and milk rumored to have been poisoned. The symptoms he displayed are consistent with acute arsenic poisoning.
President James Buchanan also opposed a private central bank. During the panic of 1857 he attempted to set limits on banks issuing more loans than they had actual funds, and to require all issued bank notes to be backed by Federal Government assets.
He was poisoned with arsenic and survived, although 38 other people at the dinner died.
The public school system is as subservient to the bankers' wishes to keep certain history from you, just as the corporate media is subservient to Monsanto's wishes to keep the dangers of GMOs from you, and the global warming cult's wishes to conceal from you that the Earth has actually been cooling for the last 16 years.
Thus is should come as little surprise that much of the real reasons for the events of the Civil War are not well known to the average American.
"The few who understand the system will either be so interested in its profits or be so dependent upon its favours that there will be no opposition from that class, while on the other hand, the great body of people, mentally incapable of comprehending the tremendous advantage that capital derives from the system, will bear its burdens without complaint, and perhaps without even suspecting that the system is inimical to their interests."
- The Rothschild brothers of London writing to associates in New York, 1863
When the Confederacy seceded from the United States, the bankers once again saw the opportunity for a rich harvest of debt, and offered to fund Lincoln's efforts to bring the south back into the union, but at 30% interest.
Lincoln remarked that he would not free the black man by enslaving the white man to the bankers and using his authority as President, issued a new government currency, the greenback. This was a direct threat to the wealth and power of the central bankers, who quickly responded.
It will pay off debts and be without debt. It will have all the money necessary to carry on its commerce. It will become prosperous without precedent in the history of the world.
The brains, and wealth of all countries will go to North America. That country must be destroyed or it will destroy every monarchy on the globe."
- The London Times responding to Lincoln's decision to issue government Greenbacks to finance the Civil War, rather than agree to private banker's loans at 30% interest.
In 1872 New York bankers sent a letter to every bank in the United States, urging them to fund newspapers that opposed government-issued money (Lincoln's greenbacks).
"Dear Sir: It is advisable to do all in your power to sustain such prominent daily and weekly newspapers... as will oppose the issuing of greenback paper money, and that you also withhold patronage or favors from all applicants who are not willing to oppose the Government issue of money. Let the Government issue the coin and the banks issue the paper money of the country...
[T]o restore to circulation the Government issue of money, will be to provide the people with money, and will therefore seriously affect your individual profit as bankers and lenders."
- Triumphant plutocracy; the story of American public life from 1870 to 1920, by Lynn Wheeler
"It will not do to allow the greenback, as it is called, to circulate as money any length of time, as we cannot control that." -- Triumphant plutocracy; the story of American public life from 1870 to 1920, by Lynn Wheeler
"Slavery is likely to be abolished by the war power, and chattel slavery destroyed.
This, I and my European friends are in favor of, for slavery is but the owning of labor and carries with it the care for the laborer, while the European plan, led on by England, is for capital to control labor by controlling the wages. THIS CAN BE DONE BY CONTROLLING THE MONEY."
- Triumphant plutocracy; the story of American public life from 1870 to 1920, by Lynn Wheeler
Goaded by the private bankers, much of Europe supported the Confederacy against the Union, with the expectation that victory over Lincoln would mean the end of the Greenback. France and Britain considered an outright attack on the United States to aid the confederacy, but were held at bay by Russia, which had just ended the serfdom system and had a state central bank similar to the system the United States had been founded on.
Tsar Alexander II of Russia, who prevented France and Britain from invading the US during the civil war.
Following Lincoln's assassination, the Greenbacks were pulled from circulation and the American people forced to go back to an economy based on bank notes borrowed at interest from the private bankers.
Tsar Alexander II, who authorized Russian military assistance to Lincoln, was subsequently the victim of multiple attempts on his life in 1866, 1879, and 1880, until his assassination in 1881.
With the end of Lincoln's Greenbacks, the US could no longer create its own interest free money and was manipulated during the term of President Ruthford B. Hayes into borrowing from the Rothschilds banking system in 1878, restoring to the Rothschilds control of the US economy they had lost under Andrew Jackson.
Messrs. Rothschild & Sons to Mr. Sherman.
[Cable message.]
April 12,1878.
Hon. John Sherman,
Secretary of the Treasury, Washington D. C.:
Very pleased we have entered into relations again with American Government. Shall do our best to make the business successful.
ROTHSCHILDS.
James A. Garfield was elected President in 1880 on a platform of government control of the money supply.
"The chief duty of the National Government in connection with the currency of the country is to coin money and declare its value.
Grave doubts have been entertained whether Congress is authorized by the Constitution to make any form of paper money legal tender.
The present issue of United States notes has been sustained by the necessities of war; but such paper should depend for its value and currency upon its convenience in use and its prompt redemption in coin at the will of the holder, and not upon its compulsory circulation.
These notes are not money, but promises to pay money. If the holders demand it, the promise should be kept."
- James Garfield
"By the experience of commercial nations in all ages it has been found that gold and silver afford the only safe foundation for a monetary system.
Confusion has recently been created by variations in the relative value of the two metals, but I confidently believe that arrangements can be made between the leading commercial nations which will secure the general use of both metals.
Congress should provide that the compulsory coinage of silver now required by law may not disturb our monetary system by driving either metal out of circulation.
If possible, such an adjustment should be made that the purchasing power of every coined dollar will be exactly equal to its debt-paying power in all the markets of the world."
- James Garfield
"He who controls the money supply of a nation controls the nation."
- James Garfield
Garfield was shot on July 2, 1881 and died of his wounds several weeks later. Chester A. Arthur succeeded Garfield as President.
In 1896, William McKinley was elected President in the middle of a depression-driven debate over gold-backed government currency versus bank notes borrowed at interest from private banks.
McKinley favored gold-backed currencies and a balanced government budget which would free the public from accumulating debt.
"Our financial system needs some revision; our money is all good now, but its value must not further be threatened.
It should all be put upon an enduring basis, not subject to easy attack, nor its stability to doubt or dispute. Our currency should continue under the supervision of the Government.
The several forms of our paper money offer, in my judgment, a constant embarrassment to the Government and a safe balance in the Treasury." - William McKinley
McKinley was shot by an out-of-work anarchist on September 14, 1901, in Buffalo, NY, succumbing to his wounds a few days later. He was suceeded in office by Theodore Roosevelt.
Finally, in 1913, the Private Central Bankers of Europe, in particular the Rothschilds of Great Britain and the Warburgs of Germany, met with their American financial collaborators on Jekyll Island, Georgia to form a new banking cartelwith the express purpose of forming the Third Bank of the United States, with the aim of placing complete control of the United States money supply once again under the control of private bankers.
Owing to hostility over the previous banks, the name was changed to "The Federal Reserve" system in order to grant the new bank a quasi-governmental image, but in fact it is a privately owned bank, no more "Federal" than Federal Express.
The Federal Reserve; it is neither "Federal" nor does it have any actual "Reserves", creating as it does money out of thin air.
In 2012, the Federal Reserve attempted to rebuff a Freedom of Information Lawsuit by Bloomberg News on the grounds that as a private banking corporation and not actually a part of the government, the Freedom of Information Act did not apply to the "trade secret" operations of the Federal Reserve.
"When you or I write a check, there must be sufficient funds in our account to cover the check; but when the Federal Reserve writes a check, there is no bank deposit on which that check is drawn. When the Federal Reserve writes a check, it is creating money." -- From the Boston Federal Reserve Bank pamphlet, "Putting it Simply."
"Neither paper currency nor deposits have value as commodities. Intrinsically, a 'dollar' bill is just a piece of paper. Deposits are merely book entries."
- "Modern Money Mechanics Workbook" - Federal Reserve of Chicago, 1975
"I am afraid the ordinary citizen will not like to be told that the banks can and do create money. And they who control the credit of the nation direct the policy of Governments and hold in the hollow of their hand the destiny of the people."
- Reginald McKenna, as Chairman of the Midland Bank, addressing stockholders in 1924
"States, most especially the large hegemonic ones, such as the United States and Great Britain, are controlled by the international central banking system, working through secret agreements at the Bank for International Settlements (BIS), and operating through national central banks (such as the Bank of England and the Federal Reserve)...
The same international banking cartel that controls the United States today previously controlled Great Britain and held it up as the international hegemon.
When the British order faded, and was replaced by the United States, the US ran the global economy. However, the same interests are served.
States will be used and discarded at will by the international banking cartel; they are simply tools."
- Andrew Gavin Marshall
1913 proved to be a transformative year for the nation's economy, first with the passage of the 16th "income tax" Amendment and the false claim that it had been ratified.
"I think if you were to go back and and try to find and review the ratification of the 16th amendment, which was the internal revenue, the income tax, I think if you went back and examined that carefully, you would find that a sufficient number of states never ratified that amendment."
- U.S. District Court Judge James C. Fox, Sullivan Vs. United States, 2003.
Later that same year, and apparently unwilling to risk another questionable amendment, Congress passed the Federal Reserve Act over Christmas holiday 1913, while members of Congress opposed to the measure were at home.
This was a very underhanded deal, as the Constitution explicitly vests Congress with the authority to issue the public currency, does not authorize its delegation, and thus should have required a new Amendment to transfer that authority to a private bank.
But pass it Congress did, and President Woodrow Wilson signed it as he promised the bankers he would in exchange for generous campaign contributions.
News report of Wilson's signing the Federal Reserve Act. Under the Constitution, only a new Amendment could transfer the government's authority to create the currency to a private party.
President Woodrow Wilson
Woodrow Wilson later regretted that decision.
"I am a most unhappy man. I have unwittingly ruined my country.
A great industrial nation is now controlled by its system of credit.
We are no longer a government by free opinion, no longer a government by conviction and the vote of the majority, but a government by the opinion and duress of a small group of dominant men."
- Woodrow Wilson 1919
Thomas Edison, arguably the most brilliant man of the age, was also well aware of the fraud of private central banks.
"People who will not turn a shovel full of dirt on the project nor contribute a pound of material, will collect more money from the United States than will the People who supply all the material and do all the work.
This is the terrible thing about interest ...
But here is the point: If the Nation can issue a dollar bond it can issue a dollar bill.
The element that makes the bond good makes the bill good also.
The difference between the bond and the bill is that the bond lets the money broker collect twice the amount of the bond and an additional 20%.
Whereas the currency, the honest sort provided by the Constitution pays nobody but those who contribute in some useful way.
It is absurd to say our Country can issue bonds and cannot issue currency.
Both are promises to pay, but one fattens the usurer and the other helps the People.
If the currency issued by the People were no good, then the bonds would be no good, either.
It is a terrible situation when the Government, to insure the National Wealth, must go in debt and submit to ruinous interest charges at the hands of men who control the fictitious value of gold."
- Thomas A. Edison
The next year, World War One started, and it is important to remember that prior to the creation of the Federal Reserve, there was no such thing as a world war.
In 1913, the Rothschild KM was able to establish a beachhead by bribing crooked, treasonous members of Congress to pass the illegal, Unconstitutional Federal Reserve Act on Christmas Eve without a required quorum. The Act was then signed by a crooked, bought off President, who was a traitor to America, like the members of Congress who voted for it.
Archduke Franz Ferdinand, whose assassination triggered World War One
Hitler as TIME's man of the year
World War One started between Austria-Hungary and Serbia with the assassination of Archduke Ferdinand.
Although the war started between Austria-Hungary and Serbia, it quickly shifted to focus on Germany, whose industrial capacity was seen as an economic threat to Great Britain, who saw the decline of the British Pound as a result of too much emphasis on financial activity to the neglect of agriculture, industrial development, and infrastructure (not unlike the present day United States).
Although pre-war Germany had a private central bank, it was heavily restricted and inflation kept to reasonable levels.
Under government control, investment was guaranteed to internal economic development, and Germany was seen as a major power.
So, in the media of the day, Germany was portrayed as the prime opponent of World War One, and not just defeated, but its industrial base flattened.
Following the Treaty of Versailles, Germany was ordered to pay the war costs of all the participating nations, even though Germany had not actually started the war.
This amounted to three times the value of all of Germany itself.
Germany's private central bank, to whom Germany had gone deeply into debt to pay the costs of the war, broke free of government control, and massive inflation followed (mostly triggered by currency speculators), permanently trapping the German people in endless debt.
When the Weimar Republic collapsed economically, it opened the door for the National Socialists to take power.
Their first financial move was to issue their own state currency which was not borrowed from private central bankers.
Freed from having to pay interest on the money in circulation, Germany blossomed and quickly began to rebuild its industry.
The media called it "The German Miracle".
TIME magazine lionized Hitler for the amazing improvement in life for the German people and the explosion of German industry, and even named him TIME Magazine's Man Of The Year in 1938.
Once again, Germany's industrial output became a threat to Great Britain.
Germany's state-issued value based currency was also a direct threat to the wealth and power of the private central banks, and as early as 1933 they started to organize a global boycott against Germany to strangle this upstart ruler who thought he could break free of private central bankers!
"Should Germany merchandise (do business) again in the next 50 years we have led this war (WW1) in vain."
- Winston Churchill in The Times (1919)
"We will force this war upon Hitler, if he wants it or not."
- Winston Churchill (1936 broadcast)
"Germany becomes too powerful. We have to crush it."
- Winston Churchill (November 1936 speaking to US
- General Robert E. Wood)
"This war is an English war and its goal is the destruction of Germany."
- Winston Churchill (- Autumn 1939 broadcast)
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
As had been the case in World War One, Great Britain and other nations threatened by Germany's economic power looked for an excuse to go to war, and as public anger in Germany grew over the boycott, Hitler foolishly gave them that excuse. Years later, in a spirit of candor, the real reasons for that war were made clear.
"The war wasn't only about abolishing fascism, but to conquer sales markets. We could have, if we had intended so, prevented this war from breaking out without doing one shot, but we didn't want to."
- Winston Churchill to Truman (Fultun, USA March 1946)
"Germany's unforgivable crime before WW2 was its attempt to loosen its economy out of the world trade system and to build up an independent exchange system from which the world-finance couldn't profit anymore. ...We butchered the wrong pig."
-Winston Churchill (The Second World War - Bern, 1960)
As a side note, we need to step back before WW2 and recall Marine Major General Smedley Butler. In 1933, Wall Street bankers and financiers had bankrolled the successful coups by both Hitler and Mussolini. Brown Brothers Harriman in New York was financing Hitler right up to the day war was declared with Germany.
Marine Corps Major General Smedley Butler
And they decided that a fascist dictatorship in the United States based on the one on Italy would be far better for their business interests than Roosevelt's "New Deal" which threatened massive wealth re-distribution to recapitalize the working and middle class of America.
So the Wall Street tycoons recruited General Butler to lead the overthrow of the US Government and install a "Secretary of General Affairs" who would be answerable to Wall Street and not the people, would crush social unrest and shut down all labor unions.
General Butler pretended to go along with the scheme but then exposed the plot to Congress. Congress, then as now in the pocket of the Wall Street bankers, refused to act.
When Roosevelt learned of the planned coup he demanded the arrest of the plotters, but the plotters simply reminded Roosevelt that if any one of them were sent to prison, their friends on Wall Street would deliberately collapse the still-fragile economy and blame him for it.
Roosevelt was thus unable to act until the start of WW2, at which time he prosecuted many of the plotters under the Trading With The Enemy act.
The Congressional minutes into the coup were finally declassified in 1967, but rumors of the attempted coup became the inspiration for the movie, "Seven Days in May" but with the true financial villains erased from the script.
"I spent 33 years and four months in active military service as a member of our country's most agile military force - the Marine Corps.
I served in all commissioned ranks from second lieutenant to Major General. And during that period I spent more of my time being a high - class muscle man for Big Business, for Wall Street and for the bankers.
In short, I was a racketeer, a gangster for capitalism. "I suspected I was just a part of a racket at the time.
Now I am sure of it.
Like all members of the military profession I never had an original thought until I left the service. My mental faculties remained in suspended animation while I obeyed the orders of the higher-ups. This is typical with everyone in the military service.
Thus I helped make Mexico and especially Tampico safe for American oil interests in 1914. I helped make Haiti and Cuba a decent place for the National City Bank boys to collect revenues in.
I helped in the raping of half a dozen Central American republics for the benefit of Wall Street. The record of racketeering is long.
I helped purify Nicaragua for the international banking house of Brown Brothers in 1909-12. I brought light to the Dominican Republic for American sugar interests in 1916.
In China in 1927 I helped see to it that the Standard Oil went its way unmolested. During those years, I had, as the boys in the back room would say, a swell racket.
I was rewarded with honors, medals and promotion. Looking back on it, I feel I might have given Al Capone a few hints. The best he could do was to operate his racket in three city districts. I operated on three continents."
- General Smedley Butler, former US Marine Corps Commandant,1935
President John F. Kennedy
As President, John F. Kennedy understood the predatory nature of private central banking. He understood why Andrew fought so hard to end the Second Bank of the United States. So Kennedy wrote and signed Executive Order 11110 which ordered the US Treasury to issue a new public currency, the United States Note.
Presidents Kennedy and Soekarno
Kennedy was working with President Soekarno of Indonesia who was at that time the signatory for the Global Collateral Accounts which were intended to be used for humanitarian purposes but which were subverted at the time of the Bretton-Woods agreement at the end of WWII.
The intention of Kennedy and Soekarno was to end the reign of the globalist privately owned central banking system - which is the main reason that Kennedy was killed, and for his part Soekarno remained under house arrest for the rest of his life.
The efforts to regain control of the Global Collateral Accounts are now being led by Neil Keenan.
The West had been stealing from the Collateral Accounts
for nearly 100 years but this has now been stopped by Neil Keenan and his associates, who have gone to considerable expense and risk in their mission to ensure the Global Collateral Accounts are accessible - for the humanitarian purposes for which they were established.
Kennedy's United States Note - with the lack of reference to the FEDERAL RESERVE
Kennedy's United States Notes were not borrowed from the Federal Reserve but created by the US Government and backed by the silver stockpiles held by the US Government. It represented a return to the system of economics the United States had been founded on, and was perfectly legal for Kennedy to do.
All told, some four and one half billion dollars went into public circulation, eroding interest payments to the Federal Reserve and loosening their control over the nation. Five months later John F. Kennedy was assassinated in Dallas Texas, and the United States Notes pulled from circulation and destroyed (except for samples held by collectors).
John J. McCloy
John J. McCloy, President of the Chase Manhattan Bank, and President of the World Bank, was named to the Warren Commission, presumably to make certain the banking dimensions behind the assassination were concealed from the public.
As we enter the eleventh year of what future history will most certainly describe as World War Three, we need to examine the financial dimensions behind the wars.
Towards the end of World War Two, when it became obvious that the allies were going to win and dictate the post war environment, the major world economic powers met at Bretton Woods, a luxury resort in New Hampshire in July of 1944, and hammered out the Bretton Woods agreement for international finance.
The British Pound lost its position as the global trade and reserve currency to the US dollar (part of the price demanded by Roosevelt in exchange for the US entry into the war). Absent the economic advantages of being the world's "go-to" currency, Britain was forced to nationalize the Bank of England in 1946.
The Bretton Woods agreement, ratified in 1945, in addition to making the dollar the global reserve and trade currency, obligated the signatory nations to tie their currencies to the dollar. The nations that ratified Bretton Woods did so on two conditions. The first was that the Federal Reserve would refrain from over-printing the dollar as a means to loot real products and produce from other nations in exchange for ink and paper; basically an imperial tax.
That assurance was backed up by the second requirement, which was that the US dollar would always be convertible to gold at $35 per ounce.
The Bretton Woods resort, New Hampshire
The Federal Reserve, being a private bank and not answerable to the US Government, did start overprinting paper dollars, and much of the perceived prosperity of the 1950s and 1960s was the result of foreign nations' obligations to accept the paper notes as being worth gold at the rate of $35 an ounce.
Then in 1970, France looked at the huge pile of paper notes sitting in their vaults, for which real French products like wine and cheese had been traded, and notified the United States government that they would exercise their option under Bretton Woods to return the paper notes for gold at the $35 per ounce exchange rate.
The United States had nowhere near the gold to redeem the paper notes, so on August 15th, 1971, Richard Nixon "temporarily" suspended the gold convertibility of the US Federal Reserve Notes.
Nixon announced the end of gold convertability
Later termed the "Nixon shock", this move effectively ended Bretton Woods and many global currencies started to delink from the US dollar.
The "Nixon Shock"
Worse, since the United States had collateralized their loans with the nation's gold reserves, it quickly became apparent that the US Government did not in fact have enough gold to cover the outstanding debts.
Foreign nations began to get very nervous about their loans to the US and understandably were reluctant to loan any additional money to the United States without some form of collateral.
So Richard Nixon started the environmental movement, with the EPA and its various programs such as "wilderness zones", Roadless areas", Heritage rivers", "Wetlands", all of which took vast areas of public lands and made them off limits to the American people who were technically the owners of those lands.
But Nixon had little concern for the environment and the real purpose of this land grab under the guise of the environment was to pledge those pristine lands and their vast mineral resources as collateral on the national debt. This was part of the forerunner to the UN Agernda 21 "Sustainability" farce.
The plethora of different programs was simply to conceal the true scale of how much American land was being pledged to foreign lenders as collateral on the government's debts; eventually almost 25% of the nation itself.
All of this is illegal as the Enclave Clause of the Constitution limits the Federal Government to owning the land under Federal Government buildings and military bases, and that Enclave Clause was written into the Constitution by the Founding Fathers to specifically to prevent the Federal Government simply seizing the land belonging to the people to sell off, pledge as collateral, or rent!
With open lands for collateral already in short supply, the US Government embarked on a new program to shore up sagging international demand for the dollar.
The United States approached the world's oil producing nations, mostly in the Middle East, and offered them a deal. In exchange for only selling their oil for dollars, the United States would guarantee the military safety of those oil-rich nations.
The oil rich nations would agree to spend and invest their US paper dollars inside the United States, in particular in US Treasury Bonds, redeemable through future generations of US taxpayers.
The concept was labeled the "petrodollar". In effect, the US, no longer able to back the dollar with gold, was now backing it with oil.
Other peoples' oil. And that necessity to keep control over those oil nations to prop up the dollar has shaped America's foreign policy in the region ever since.
But as America's manufacturing and agriculture has declined, the oil producing nations faced a dilemma. Those piles of US Federal Reserve notes were not able to purchase much from the United States because the United States had little (other than real estate) anyone wanted to buy.
Europe's cars and aircraft were superior and less costly, while experiments with GMO food crops led to nations refusing to buy US food exports.
Israel's constant belligerence against its neighbors caused them to wonder if the US could actually keep their end of the petrodollar arrangement. Oil producing nations started to talk of selling their oil for whatever currency the purchasers chose to use.
Saddam Hussein
Iraq, already hostile to the United States following Desert Storm, demanded the right to sell their oil for Euros in 2000 and in 2002, the United Nations agreed to allow it under the "Oil for food" program instituted following Desert Storm.
One year later the United States re-invaded Iraq under the lie of Saddam's nuclear weapons, lynched Saddam Hussein, and placed Iraq's oil back on the world market only for US dollars.
The clear US policy shift following 9-11, away from being an impartial broker of peace in the Mideast to one of unquestioned support for Israel's aggressions only further eroded confidence in the Petrodollar deal and even more oil producing nations started openly talking of oil trade for other global currencies.
Gaddafi
Over in Libya, Muammar Gaddafi had instituted a state-owned central bank and a value based trade currency, the Gold Dinar.
Gaddafi announced that Libya's oil was for sale, but only for the Gold Dinar. Other African nations, seeing the rise of the Gold Dinar and the Euro, even as the US dollar continued its inflation-driven decline, flocked to the new Libyan currency for trade.
This move had the potential to seriously undermine the global hegemony of the dollar. French President Nicolas Sarkozy reportedly went so far as to call Libya a “threat” to the financial security of the world.
So, the United States invaded Libya, brutally murdered Qaddafi (the object lesson of Saddam's lynching not being enough of a message, apparently), imposed a private central bank, and returned Libya's oil output to dollars only. The gold that was to have been made into the Gold Dinars is, as of last report, unaccounted for.
General Wesley Clark blew the whistle on US plans to conquer the oil-rich Middle East, to attack and take over 7 countries in 5 years.
According to General Wesley Clark, the master plan for the "dollarification" of the world's oil nations included seven targets, Iraq, Syria, Lebanon, Libya, Somalia, Sudan, and Iran (Venezuela, which dared to sell their oil to China for the Yuan, is a late addition).
What is notable about the original seven nations originally targeted by the US is that none of them are members of the Bank for International Settlements, the private central bankers private central bank, located in Switzerland.
This meant that these nations were deciding for themselves how to run their nations' economies, rather than submit to the international private banks.
Now the bankers' gun sights are on Iran, which dares to have a government central bank and sell their oil for whatever currency they choose.
The war agenda is, as always, to force Iran's oil to be sold only for dollars and to force them to accept a privately owned central bank.
Malaysia, one of the few remaining nations without a Rothschild central bank, is now being invaded by a force claimed to be "Al Qaeda" and has suffered numerous suspicious losses of its commercial passenger jets.
With the death of President Hugo Chavez, plans to impose a US and banker friendly regime on Venezuela are clearly being implemented.
Germany's gold bullion. Where is it?
The German government recently asked for the return of some of their gold bullion from the Bank of France and the New York Federal Reserve. France has said it will take 5 years to return Germany's gold. The United States has said they will need 8 years to return Germany's gold.
This suggests strongly that the Bank of France and the NY Federal Reserve have used the deposited gold for other purposes, most likely to cover gold futures contracts used to artificially suppress the price of gold to keep investors in the equities markets, and the Central Banks are scrambling to find new gold to cover the shortfall and prevent a gold run.
So it is inevitable that suddenly France invades Mali, ostensibly to combat Al Qaeda, with the US joining in. Mali just happens to be one of the world's largest gold producers with gold accounting for 80% of Mali exports. War for the bankers does not get more obvious than that!
Mexico has demanded a physical audit of their gold bullion stored at the Bank of England, and along with Venezuela's vast oil reserves (larger than Saudi Arabia), Venezuela's gold mines are a prize lusted after by all the Central Banks that played fast and loose with other peoples' gold bullion.
So we can expect regime change if not outright invasion soon.
You have been raised by a public school system and media that constantly assures you that the reasons for all these wars and assassinations are many and varied.
The US claims to bring democracy to the conquered lands (they haven't; the usual result of a US overthrow is the imposition of a dictatorship, such as the 1953 CIA overthrow of Iran's democratically elected government of Mohammad Mosaddegh and the imposition of the Shah, or the 1973 CIA overthrow of Chile's democratically elected government of President Salvador Allende, and the imposition of Augusto Pinochet), or to save a people from a cruel oppressor, revenge for 9-11, or that tired worn-out catch all excuse for invasion, weapons of mass destruction. Assassinations are always passed off as "crazed lone nuts" to obscure the real agenda.
The real agenda is simple. It is enslavement of the people by creation of a false sense of obligation.
That obligation is false because the Private Central Banking system, by design, always creates more debt than money with which to pay that debt.
Private Central Banking is not science, it is a religion; a set of arbitrary rules created to benefit the priesthood, meaning the owners of the Private Central Bank.
The fraud persists, with often lethal results, because the people are tricked into believing that this is the way life is suppoed to be and no alternative exists or should be dreamt of.
The same was true of two earlier systems of enslavement, Rule by Divine Right and Slavery, both systems built to trick people into obedience, and both now recognized by modern civilizatyion as illegitimate.
Now we are entering a time in human history where we will recognize that rule by debt, or rule by Private Central Bankers issuing the public currency as a loan at interest, is equally illegitimate.
It only works as long as people allow themselves to believe that this is the way life is supposed to be.
But understand this above all; Private Central Banks do not exist to serve the people, the community, or the nation. Private Central Banks exist to serve their owners, to make them rich beyond the dreams of Midas and all for the cost of ink, paper, and the right bribe to the right official.
Behind all these wars, all these assassinations, the hundred million horrible deaths from all the wars lies a single policy of dictatorship. The private central bankers allow rulers to rule only on the condition that the people of a nation be enslaved to the private central banks.
Failing that, said ruler will be killed, and their nation invaded by those other nations enslaved to private central banks.
The so-called "clash of civilizations" we read about on the corporate media is really a war between banking systems, with the private central bankers forcing themselves onto the rest of the world, no matter how many millions must die for it.
Indeed the constant hatemongering against Muslims lies in a simple fact. Like the ancient Christians (prior to the Knights Templars private banking system) , Muslims forbid usury, or the lending of money at interest. And that is the reason our government and media insist they must be killed or converted. They refuse to submit to currencies issued at interest. They refuse to be debt slaves.
So off to war your children must go, to spill their blood for the money-junkies' gold. We barely survived the last two world wars. In the nuclear/bioweapon age, are the private central bankers willing to risk incinerating the whole planet just to feed their greed?
Apparently so. This brings us to the current situation in the Ukraine, Russia, and China.
The European Union had been courting the government of the Ukraine to merge with the EU, and more to the point, entangle their economy with the private-owned European Central Bank.
The government of the Ukraine was considering the move, but had made no commitments. Part of their concern lay with the conditions in other EU nations enslaved to the ECB, notably Cyprus, Greece, Spain, and Italy. So they were properly cautious.
Then Russia stepped in with a better deal and the Ukraine, exercising the basic choice all consumers have to choose the best product at the best price, dropped the EU and announced they were going to go with Russia's offer.
It was at that point that agents provocateurs flooded into the Ukraine, covertly funded by intelligence agency fronts like CANVAS and USAID, stirring up trouble, while the western media proclaimed this was a popular revolution. Snipers shot at people and this violence was blamed on then-President Yanukovich.
However a leaked recording of a phone call between the EU's Catherine Ashton and Estonia's Foreign Minister Urmas Paet confirmed the snipers were working for the overthrow plotters, not the Ukrainian government. Urmas Paet has confirmed the authenticity of that phone call.
This is a classic pattern of covert overthrow we have seen many times before.
Since the end of WW2, the US has covertly tried to overthrow the governments of 56 nations, succeeding 25 times.
Examples include the 1953 overthrow of Iran's elected government of Mohammed Mossadegh and the imposition of the Shah, the 1973 overthrow of Chile's elected government of Salvador Allende and the imposition of the Pinochet dictatorship, and of course, the current overthrow of Ukraine's elected government of Yanukovich and the imposition of the current unelected government, which is already gutting the Ukraine's wealth to hand to the western bankers.
Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa have formed a parallel financial system called BRICS, officially launched on January 1, 2015. As of this writing some 80 nations are ready to trade with BRICS in transactions that do not involve the US dollar.
Despite US economic warfare against both Russia and China, the Ruble and Yuan are seen as more attractive for international trade and banking than the US dollar, hence the US attempt to fan the Ukraine crisis into war with Russia, and attempts to provoke North Korea as a back door to war with China.
The US Corporate Government: "These are the enemies of everything we hold dear in America: Your children must kill them for us..."
Flag waving and propaganda aside, all modern wars are wars by and for the private bankers, fought and bled for by third parties unaware of the true reason they are expected to gracefully be killed and croppled for.
The process is quite simple. As soon as the Private Central Bank issues its currency as a loan at interest, the public is forced deeper and deeper into debt.
When the people are reluctant to borrow any more, that is when the Keynesian economists demand the government borrow more to keep the pyramid scheme working.
When both the people and government refuse to borrow any more, that is when wars are started, to plunge everyone even deeper into debt to pay for the war, then after the war to borrow more to rebuild.
When the war is over, the people have about the same as they did before the war, except the graveyards are far larger and everyone is in debt to the private bankers for the next century. This is why Brown Brothers Harriman in New York was funding the rise of Adolf Hitler.
As long as Private Central Banks are allowed to exist, inevitably as the night follows day there will be poverty, hopelessness, and millions of deaths in endless World Wars, until the Earth itself is sacrificed in flames to Mammon.
The path to true peace on Earth lies in the abolishment of all private central banking everywhere, and a return to the state-issued value-based currencies that allow nations and people to become prosperous.
"Banks do not have an obligation to promote the public good."
- Alexander Dielius, CEO, Germany, Austrian, Eastern Europe Goldman Sachs, 2010
"I am just a banker doing God's work."
- Lloyd Blankfein, CEO, Goldman Sachs, 2009
From the film "The International" which tells the story of the take-down of the corrupt Bank of Credit and Commerce International which was the 7th largest private bank in the world.
'The question the people of the world should be asking is not whether to raise debt ceilings, but rather why our governments, which are authorised to create and issue interest-free money, instead borrow that money at interest from a privately-owned central banking system, thereby plunging future generations into debt slavery to that bank?'
Three steps from Private Central Bank to World War: Step 1: Enslave the nation to a private Central Bank issuing the public currency as a loan at interest to trap the people in unpayable debt
Step 2: When the people cannot borrow any more, have the government borrow on their behalf (and without their permissiono) to keep the pyramid scheme working
Step 3: When both the people and the government can no longer borrow, start a world war to conquer other nations wealth to "balance the books"
An Revealing Look at the Interests of the United Nations bodies of NATO and the WTO:
Click the image above to open a larger version in a new browser window
The Light Side Of The Dark Night Of The Soul February 25 2022 | From: In5D
The phenomenon known as the Dark Night of the Soul is something which many spiritual seekers experience on their journey to re-enlightenment.
It can be a painful and frightening process, but it can also be liberating and empowering. It all depends on your perspective and your ability to remain detached.
The word ‘night’ is misleading. This is a process, and thankfully so. I doubt you would want to experience the purification process all at once. My own Dark Night journey began in 1994 and culminated this year (2013). While that may seem like an inordinate amount of time, I didn’t go through the process continually, thank heavens, but rather in stages. The length and intensity of the process is determined by the degree of purification one requires.
You feel totally alone. You don't know many, if any, people that have gone through this. You don't feel like being bothered with loved ones and friends that don't understand because they either think you are crazy and need help or their own fears arise about it and it make matters worse. You barely have any energy or interests anymore.
Think of this as peeling an onion. Each layer you strip away brings tears to your eyes. You stop for a while in order to recover, and then you proceed to the next layer. Once you reach the core, you are at the heart of your angst. This is often the toughest part of the process which is why it comes last. You build up your strength and your ability to face your core issue(s). Your higher self will not let you access this core until you are ready.
The good news is you have already faced the worst. Nothing that you unearth during this process will ever be as bad as the original pain you experienced. You were strong enough to face it once, so you are more than capable of releasing it now. And, once it’s purified, it is gone for good.
Ego Death
Essentially, the Dark Night of the Soul is the death of the (malignant) ego. I say ‘malignant’ because the ego is not inherently bad or in need of extinguishing. The ego provides the soul with the illusion of separation so that we may explore creations that differ from the unified field of Love from which we originate.
The ego in its present form, however, is overly dominant. We live in an egocentric era. The Cult to Self is celebrated through our worship of celebrity, fame, fortune, superficial beauty and power. Narcissistic behaviors are often rewarded in this ego-driven climate. The external world is a projection result of the malignancy of our collective ego state.
Needless to say, the ego does not take kindly to the awakening and enlightenment process. It sees the spiritual awakening process as a threat to its very existence and, in many ways, it is right. As you begin to remember more about your spiritual origins, the allure of ego lessens. This eventually breaks ego’s hold over you, and the ego begins to shrink away.
From the ego’s perspective, this equates to death. It, therefore, isn’t going to surrender without a fight. The key is not to resist the ego. That being said, non-resistance is not easy. In fact, your ego will do everything in its power to cling to the old, but your higher self knows better.
Existential Crisis
As we awaken from the shadows of our dream life on Earth to the limitless, formless, eternal nature of the Soul, the form and thought-based illusions of our life begin to dissolve. The very foundation of one’s human existence crumbles, leading to an existential crisis of faith.
Symptoms Include:
Deep introspection and angst
Questioning the meaning and purpose of life
Feeling that life is meaningless
Isolation; feeling alone, cut off from others
Facing mortality
Feeling empty, devoid of joy
Your existential crisis can cut you off from others. The battle you’re fighting is internal. It’s akin to depression, except that it is spiritual rather than mental in nature. The ego is fighting for its life, and thus it resists the purification process.
Remember though, these symptoms stem from the ego’s perspective on life. The soul knows that everything has meaning, pleasure and beauty. Once you supplant your ego with your soul, life becomes vibrant again.
Purification by Fire
As your ego’s domain is dismantled, your external world will reflect this internal process. That which does not serve your highest good falls away. While this stage may seem destructive and painful, it is actually helping to break ego’s hold over you by forcing it to surrender everything it holds dear.
It’s like the old adage says: “Beware the man who has nothing left to lose”. That man is absolutely fearless. When you lose everything your ego values, its fear-based hold on you shatters.
Please note, I’m not advocating that you must lose everything. I’m just explaining what sometimes happens during the process. For instance, if you find yourself facing loss (i.e. divorce, job loss, and bankruptcy) know that this has helped to shatter your ego’s hold over you. The more dramatic the loss, the more rapid the purification process.
As you empty yourself of ego/fear, you create more room to house your soul’s love, light, wisdom, beauty and joy.
The Phoenix Rises
At this point, things may appear bleak and hopeless; but, to quote another old gem, “It’s always darkest before the dawn”. I liken this to sinking into the murky depths. You feel like you will never see the light of day again, and that all is lost. Then, suddenly, your feet touch ground and you are able to push off the bottom giving you the momentum propel you back into the light.
You’re almost through this learning curve, and when you emerge on the other side of the Dark Night, you will rediscover the joy and beauty of the world. You are the phoenix, being purified by fire. Once you have rid yourself of the ego fears, you will be ‘reborn’ or transformed as a freer, happier higher-vibrational version of you.
Sanity-Saving Solutions Higher Perspective: Understand that darkness, fear and ego are all illusions. You’re a child of Love and Light. Your current experiences are simply a dream that your soul is having. It wants to better understand Love and Light but it cannot do so without contrast. Since the ego isn’t real, try changing its nature from a narcissistic dictator to a small, frightened child. Then, when it acts up, love and nurture it instead of fighting it or being controlled by it.
Non-Resistance:Do not resist the process. The greater the resistance, the more painful the symptoms. Remember, that which you resist persists. Don’t give your ego anything to push against. Just go with the flow. And remember, the ego is fighting for its life. Rather than seeking to destroy it, love it instead and teach it to trust your spirit to keep you safe. The ego can be retrained.
Non-Attachment: Release everything that no longer serves your higher good. No matter how scary it may seem, until you let go of the old ego-based elements in your life, nothing new and spiritually-uplifting can come in. Think of it as cleaning house. You’re ridding your vessel of darkness and density to make way for lightness.
Spiritual Guides:Enlist the help of the spirit realms. Call on your spirit guides; soul family; soul group; departed loved ones; the angels; ascended masters; animal totems; Mother Earth; Father Sun; the Creator/God/Goddess, and with whomever else you resonate. Be open to receiving help in all forms.
Kindred Support: Find like-minded souls with whom you can share your experiences. You are not alone. There are many others who are currently experiencing, or have recently gone through, the Dark Night of the Soul. Ask your spirit guides to help you find these people, or they you. Then, pay attention to the messages you receive intuitively. If a stranger stops to talk to you, s/he may be a kindred spirit.
TLC: You need extra love and gentle care right now. Be your own best friend. Talk gently and lovingly to yourself. Release obligations and commitments that are draining you. Set healthy boundaries with others. Treat yourself with kid gloves. Eat a healthy diet, drink plenty of pure water, sleep when you’re tired, and practice mindful exercise such as yoga, Tai Chi and Qigong. Energy medicine can also help alleviate the severity and duration of the symptoms. Above all, never forgot, you are a precious child of the divine.
Mana: The Power In Knowing Who You Are February 24 2022 | From: TEDxTalks
Tame explores how the old saying of "Te ka nohi ki te ka nohi" (Dealing with it eye to eye) creates a far more productive space for open dialogue around any issue
Tame Iti (Ngai Tuhoe/Waikato/Te Arawa) is known as many things... Activist, Artist, Terrorist and Cyclist. Literally wearing his Tuhoe heritage on his face, Iti is hard to miss in a crowd despite being just 5ft 4" tall.
Related: Maori Elders Explain The Meaning Of The Hongi And The Ancient Maori Traditions
His 40 year history of controversial and theatrical displays of political expression have included pitching a tent on parliament grounds and calling it the Maori embassy, shooting a national flag in front of government officials and the curious spate of public meetings where he appeared with a ladder so as to speak eye to eye with officials who were seated on stage.
Iti explores how the old saying of "Te ka nohi ki te ka nohi" (Dealing with it eye to eye) creates a far more productive space for open dialogue around any issue.
"No one can tell you that you are not important and your experience does not matter and if they do... I challenge them to say it to your face... where they can see your eyes and feel your breath."
Strawman - The Nature Of The Cage February 23 2022 | From: TheNatureOfTheCage
Strawman - The Nature of the Cage is a cutting edge documentary like no other. It highlights the truth around debt, the Legal Fiction, Lawful and Legal, Debt Collectors, Bailiffs, and modern day Policing.
The film gives a detailed overview as to how you can address these issues in your personal life, offering knowledge on how to Lawfully deal with any kind of authority, if you haven't broken any Laws.
Drawing on the expertise of Trailblazers whom have risked everything to deliver this usually unavailable information, Strawman will outline information that you would otherwise be completely unaware of.
John K Webster, who has spent 18 months researching and making this film, has one goal... having noticed the increase of suicides in the UK that relate directly to monetary worries, he says:
"If this film saves one life, my work is done."
This film applies to everyone, regardless of your personal situation. It is important to know how the system works and more importantly, how it is working you.
It is said, that you must first know that you are in a cage, before you can escape from that cage.
From The Archives: In September 2015, Agenda 21 Will Be Transformed Into The 2030 Agenda February 22 2022 [August 22 2015] | From:EndOfTheAmericanDream
If you didn’t like "Agenda 21", then you really are not going to like “The 2030 Agenda”. Next month, the United Nations is going to launch “The 2030 Agenda” at a major conference that will be held from September 25th to September 27th in New York City. [There are efforts underway to prevent this from happening - but there needs to be awareness of the presence of this plan].
The Pope is actually traveling to New York to deliver an address which will kick off this conference. Unlike Agenda 21, which primarily focused on the environment, the 2030 Agenda is truly a template for governing the entire planet.
In addition to addressing climate change, it also sets ambitious goals for areas such as economics, health, energy, education, agriculture, gender equality and a whole host of other issues. As you will see below, this global initiative is being billed as a “new universal Agenda” for humanity. If you are anything like me, alarm bells are going off in your head right about now.
This new agenda is solidly rooted in a document known as “Agenda 21″ that was originally adopted by the United Nations back in 1992. The following comes from Wikipedia.
"The full text of Agenda 21 was made public at the UN Conference on Environment and Development (Earth Summit), held in Rio de Janeiro on June 13, 1992, where 178 governments voted to adopt the program. The final text was the result of drafting, consultation, and negotiation, beginning in 1989 and culminating at the two-week conference.
Since that time, Agenda 21 has been modified and amended numerous times. Noteworthy changes occurred in 1997, 2002 and 2012.
But now the UN’s sustainable development program is being given an entirely new name, and the scope of this agenda is being broadened dramatically. The following is what the official United Nations website has to say about it…
"The United Nations is now in the process of defining Sustainable Development Goals as part a new sustainable development agenda that must finish the job and leave no one behind. This agenda, to be launched at the Sustainable Development Summit in September 2015, is currently being discussed at the UN General Assembly, where Member States and civil society are making contributions to the agenda.
Just a few days ago, the core document for the 2030 Agenda was finalized. When what is in this document starts getting out, it is going to create a huge stir among Americans that are concerned about the ambitions of the globalists. The following comes from the preamble of this document.
This Agenda is a plan of action for people, planet and prosperity. It also seeks to strengthen universal peace in larger freedom. We recognise that eradicating poverty in all its forms and dimensions, including extreme poverty, is the greatest global challenge and an indispensable requirement for sustainable development.
All countries and all stakeholders, acting in collaborative partnership, will implement this plan.We are resolved to free the human race from the tyranny of poverty and want and to heal and secure our planet. We are determined to take the bold and transformative steps which are urgently needed to shift the world onto a sustainable and resilient path. As we embark on this collective journey, we pledge that no one will be left behind.
The 17 Sustainable Development Goals and 169 targets which we are announcing today demonstrate the scale and ambition of this new universal Agenda. They seek to build on the Millennium Development Goals and complete what these did not achieve. They seek to realize the human rights of all and to achieve gender equality and the empowerment of all women and girls.They are integrated and indivisible and balance the three dimensions of sustainable development: the economic, social and environmental.
As you can see, this is not just a plan to fight climate change. This is literally a blueprint for transforming global society.
The core of the plan is a set of 17 specific goals:
Goal 1 End poverty in all its forms everywhere
Goal 2 End hunger, achieve food security and improved nutrition and promote sustainable agriculture
Goal 3 Ensure healthy lives and promote well-being for all at all ages
Goal 4 Ensure inclusive and equitable quality education and promote lifelong learning opportunities for all
Goal 5 Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls
Goal 6 Ensure availability and sustainable management of water and sanitation for all
Goal 7 Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and modern energy for all
Goal 8 Promote sustained, inclusive and sustainable economic growth, full and productive employment and decent work for all
Goal 9 Build resilient infrastructure, promote inclusive and sustainable industrialization and foster innovation
Goal 10 Reduce inequality within and among countries
Goal 11 Make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe, resilient and sustainable
Goal 12 Ensure sustainable consumption and production patterns
Goal 13 Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts*
Goal 14 Conserve and sustainably use the oceans, seas and marine resources for sustainable development
Goal 15 Protect, restore and promote sustainable use of terrestrial ecosystems, sustainably manage forests, combat desertification, and halt and reverse land degradation and halt biodiversity loss
Goal 16 Promote peaceful and inclusive societies for sustainable development, provide access to justice for all and build effective, accountable and inclusive institutions at all levels
Goal 17 Strengthen the means of implementation and revitalize the global partnership for sustainable development
Many of those sound very good. After all, who wouldn’t want to “end poverty” or “halt biodiversity loss”?
But as you read through that list, ask yourself what forms of human activity would be excluded from it.
Personally, I have a hard time coming up with much of anything.
As I discussed earlier this week, the globalists want to use “sustainable development” as an excuse to micromanage the lives of every man, woman and child on the entire globe.
We are told that individual liberty and freedom are “dangerous” because when everyone just runs around doing whatever they want it is “bad for the planet”.
For example, one of the goals of the sustainable development crowd is to push the human population into giant “megacities” and to allow nature to recapture much of what has already been settled by humanity.
The following map that comes from America 2050 is one example of what they want to do. A recent piece by Dave Hodges alerted me to this map, and it shows what the United States may look like in a few decades if the globalists have their way…
And of course this is just the tip of the iceberg.
Eventually, the globalists want to fundamentally transform virtually everything about our society. This includes our economy, our government, our entertainment, our social interactions, our families and even our religious beliefs.
So don’t let all of the nice language fool you.
This “new universal Agenda” is far, far more dangerous than Agenda 21 ever was, and it is a giant step forward into a one world system governed by bureaucratic control freaks.
The Jacinda Papers& Ardern’s Great Kiwi Reset + Canada Shows How The End Of COVID Is Going To Bring A Long-Overdue Reckoning For The So-Called Liberal Leaders Who Are Still Trying To Use It To Oppress Their People And Steal Their Freedoms February 21 2022 | From: TheDailyExaminer / Spectator / FreeNZ / DailyMail / Various
A remarkable trove of documents has been created in NZ by an organisation called Te Punaha Matatini - Covid-19 Modelling Aotearoa hosted by the University of Auckland but funded directly by the Department of the Prime Minister and Cabinet.
Covid-19 Modelling Aotearoa is headed by the wildly inaccurate Covid modeller Dr Shaun Hendy who once predicted 80,000 imminent NZ deaths (currently at 53 in NZ) and includes the participation of academics from universities across NZ.
The documents are remarkable because they indicate the genesis of the unique and blinkered pandemic perspective of our Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern which has diverged from that followed among other countries and from that found in global science publishing.
The documents in some cases exhibit in their referenced material, a lack of awareness of the extensive content of global science publishing on the pandemic.
It is hardly remarkable that the NZ government uses sophisticated computer systems to closely monitor the social media content of its citizens (what government doesn’t?), but the methods used and the starting point of evaluation are highly indicative of where the repressive and controlling NZ Labour government Covid policy began:
The paper accepts a number of controversial ideas as true at face value such as the zoonotic origin of Covid-19. It describes discussion of a bioengineered origin of Covid in a Chinese lab as Xenophobia and a conspiracy trope, when it actually was, at the time the article was published, a matter of general scientific debate.
Table 2 (excerpted above) designates some common types of scientific discussion around Covid-19 as ‘disinformation’, most of which were actually the subject of science publishing even in mid 2020. It dismisses them as fallacious without justification. Subsequent data analysis has upheld them in large part. Yet the rejection by Ardern of their moderating tone, was and is used to stoke fear in the whole population.
Concepts of herd immunity since found to play a highly significant role in reducing Covid severity are dismissed as oversimplification and misrepresentation despite their verified and time-honoured role in developing human immunity.
Assertions that Covid-19 disproportionately affects those already ill with comorbidities or the aged (a highly verified fact) are outrageously dismissed as the result of ableism.
Table 3 in the paper asserts additionally that suggestions that the vaccine might have adverse effects or may alter DNA is a conspiracy theory. Subsequently there have been over 1000 papers published worldwide examining the deficiencies in mRNA vaccination safety and adverse effects reporting including evidence published late in 2020 that RNA vaccine genetic sequences can and do integrate into the human genome.
Mainstream scientists like Dr. Simon Thornley, media personalities like Mike Hosking, and politicians including Gerry Brownlee are described as using conspiracy theories to recruit NZers to right wing causes. All of whom should rightly have been described as high profile public figures stimulating discussion around political and scientific policies affecting a complex subject. The attempt to marginalise Ardern’s political opponents is obvious.
The paper rejects health and wellbeing narratives, many of which are in fact grounded in mainstream medical advice, as misleading. Thus it specifically rejects self-care options. Yet prior and subsequent research has found many of these lifestyle and dietary options to be helpful if not critical to healthy Covid outcomes and avoidance of serious illness. These include adequate rest, exercise, a balanced diet, and nutritional supplements.
This rejection of the value of wellbeing programmes has found its obvious conclusion in the formation of NZ government mandates.Yet the paper describes the suspicion that there are hidden government agendas to introduce ‘forced vaccination regimes’ as an ‘opportunistic conspiracy theory’. As we now know, these suspicions voiced early on social media are almost indistinguishable from the actual oppressive NZ vaccination mandates which Ardern eventually introduced denying employment and impoverishing those wishing to avoid risk and continue to make their own medical choices.
The push to introduce the censorship of scientific information and discussion that characterises the Ardern government is evident throughout the paper.
Specific individual scientists tied to the government by both ideology, and in some cases by financial support, are picked out as people who should be the public’s sole sources of reliable informatiom.
These include: microbiologist Associate Professor Siouxsie Wiles, physicist Professor Shaun Hendy, and epidemiologist Professor Michael Baker.
A remarkable trove of documents has been created in NZ by an organisation called Te Punaha Matatini - Covid-19 Modelling Aotearoa hosted by the University of Auckland but funded directly by the Department of the Prime Minister and Cabinet.
Covid-19 Modelling Aotearoa is headed by the wildly inaccurate Covid modeller Dr Shaun Hendy who once predicted 80,000 imminent NZ deaths (currently at 53 in NZ) and includes the participation of academics from universities across NZ.
The documents are remarkable because they indicate the genesis of the unique and blinkered pandemic perspective of our Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern which has diverged from that followed among other countries and from that found in global science publishing.
The documents in some cases exhibit in their referenced material, a lack of awareness of the extensive content of global science publishing on the pandemic.
The paper says the aim of government messaging should take the form of ‘branding’ designed to teach the public to trust the government alone. Something so close to propaganda as to be almost indistinguishable.
Emphasis in social media on ‘individual rights’ is described as an undesirable import from America.
Ardern’s more recent rejection of protests as ‘imported ideas’ echoes Trudeau’s recent dismissal of protestors as ‘taking up space’, both of which hint at exclusionary agendas to come.
In conclusion the paper hints that:
"Simply relying on the successful multi-faceted science and public health communication approaches of the government earlier in the pandemic will not be sufficient to debunk’ what it describes as ‘increasing prevalence of conspiracy theories about state control and individual rights."
And continues:
"A wide-ranging response to the increasing discussion of unreliable sources, untrustworthy narrators, and conspiracy narratives in media, political, and civil society discourses is required."
It further reports that a computational methodology and process for on-going monitoring of the prevalence of mis- and dis-information, and conspiracy narratives, within Aotearoa New Zealand’s social and mainstream media ecosystems has been established.
It describes public access to a plethora of social media platforms, as a problem that needs to be addressed.
The very limited scientific outlook of Covid-19 Modelling Aotearoa is evident in the many other papers it has produced for the Department of the Prime Minister and Cabinet. In particular, their narrative has diverged in content from trends now well-understood through published data analysis around the world, including:
The strident saturation advertising of Covid-19 mRNA vaccination referring to its absolute safety
The Ardern doctrine that the government should be the public’s only source of information
The confidence Ardern extends to tentative and often subsequently falsified science without feeling the need to update policy
The encouragement the government has offered to social media sites to censor content
The politicisation of NZ’s Covid-19 policy
Obviously, the paper and others may have fuelled and validated Ardern’s limited understanding of science. Science is a global, rational, empirical endeavour to arrive at truth, not a process tailor-made to support ideology.
Perhaps its most frightening consequence is Ardern’s rejection of the notion of individual health rights which has obvious historical parallels.
Guy Hatchard PhD was formerly a senior manager at Genetic ID a food testing and certification company (now known as FoodChain ID). For more information: HatchardReport.com
Ardern’s Great Kiwi Reset Is Jacinda’s ‘well-being’ mantra basically sabotage?
Jacinda Ardern’s plummeting popularity indicates a country questioning not only her racist white-anting of our democracy, but the hypocrisy of her kindness and well-being mantras.
Her repeated emphasis on ‘well-being’ on which she stressed her intent to focus, instead of on GDP – when introducing her budget in 2019 – is apparently an important part of the World Economic Forum (WEF)’s ‘Great Reset’ agenda.
New Zealanders have been sold a pup. The economic, mental and emotional well-being of New Zealanders has been far from prioritised by her Labour coalition doing extraordinary damage – and determined on more of the same, judging from the controversial legislation it continues to ram through.
In its basic aim for world government, WEF intends that global leaders commit to taking responsibility for (i.e. virtually ruling) their countries.
Our Prime Minister’s 2019 address to the WEF Davos meeting in Switzerland made plain her intent to entrench reforms leading to permanent change.
Few New Zealanders realise that, to this end, she committed to a WEF artificial intelligence pilot programme, ‘spearheading a multi-stakeholder, evidence-based policy project in partnership with the Government of New Zealand’ – and that ‘The project aims at co-designing actionable governance frameworks for AI regulation’.
It would be a mistake to simply shrug off this as impenetrable gobbledygook. It facilitates an attack on our democratic processes – particularly given that Ardern regards our political parties recycling terms in office as ‘one of the biggest threats we have’.
This chilling statement is that of an ambitious leader antipathetic to people’s democratic choices. Not only is she pushing for neo-tribal rule over the country, and for the three-year parliamentary electoral cycle to be extended to four years, she also wants her hard-left government’s destructive policies ‘to endure beyond us as individuals’.
As recently as September 2021, addressing the United Nations, Ardern favoured adopting and implementing ‘an ambitious and transformational post-2020 global biodiversity framework’ – claiming untruthfully, that ‘New Zealand is committed to this’.
We have not even been consulted. She has no mandate for continued assertions that New Zealanders are behind her.
And what does she mean by stating that ‘we must not use the post-Covid recovery to return to business as usual’.
Business as usual?
Because of her government’s draconian control measures, thousands of businesses have been ruined – individuals and livelihoods destroyed beyond any chance of recovery.
Ardern’s Labour government has turned a blind eye to the sheer cruelty underpinning so much current policy. In this benighted country we have had a lottery with a totally inadequate number of managed isolation and quarantine (MIQ) places periodically opened for New Zealanders desperate to get home – some no longer with jobs, or being unable to pay rent overseas.
Yet her government closed off this applications procedure, refusing to commit to when more MIQ facilities would become available for those forced to quarantine, coming into the country.
But what democratic country can refuse to allow its own citizens to enter? It’s been a familiar pattern, happening worldwide, access denied to dying relatives, as with a New Zealander recently forced to watch on a video link his mother dying in Ireland.
However, the pregnant New Zealand journalist in Afghanistan refused entry, applying for Taliban protection, now has a placing, as a result of pressure.
And as a result of a nationwide protest spearheaded by National MP Chris Bishop, the government has been forced to change tactics, to allow staged entry times for vaccinated New Zealanders, then others across the world, to self-isolate, with no longer any need to be imprisoned in MIQ facilities guarded by the military.
Pressure can go the other way with Ardern refusing to comment on claims her fiancé, Clark Gayford, tried to get rapid antigen tests for his musician friends, despite their not being eligible.
Questions had already been asked why international DJs were conveniently allocated places in MIQ when fully vaccinated New Zealanders were still denied entry. The incident reported by a pharmacist involved a group of vaccinated musicians requesting these tests.
When informed that Ministry of Health rules required them to instead get a laboratory-based PCR test, they contacted Gayford who reportedly told the pharmacist there had been a change in guidance and these people should be given RATs – which was quite wrong.
Gayford subsequently apologised for ‘any issue of confusion this may have caused to pharmacy staff’, but did not respond when asked directly whether it was appropriate for him to be giving pharmacies health advice.
For any political leader invoking well-being to be overseeing so many sad or disgraceful incidents where people have been treated shockingly is unforgivable. What about the nightmare of a scheduled ten days in MIQ turning into 40 days and nights for a family catching Covid in turn, constantly having their imprisonment goalposts extended while restricted to two hotel rooms, and being allowed in an exercise yard for only thirty minutes a day?
No wonder the children struggle, one little girl bursting into tears and crying she just wanted to go home – when told another 14 days lay ahead. Utterly inhumane – when they could be isolating at home.
What of pensioners trapped overseas beyond the permissible date allowed, refused entry, threatened with having to pay back their pensions? What about the Kiwi hailed as a hero in an attempted robbery in 2019? His family of five left their Australian jobs last year, removing children in school, to return home to his dying mother.
With the closing of our borders, they move from family to friends, living on their savings. Where has the concern been for the well-being of so many needy individuals desperate, even ill, both physically and mentally, being denied the ability to simply come home – even by self-isolating?
The Ardern government’s forced move to enable home quarantine and open the borders is too little, too late. Its staged and delaying tactics are typical of the over-control exercised for so long.
New Zealanders are not going to forget that the plight of so many of our people was simply ignored by this mistress of well-being.
Canada Shows How the End of COVID Is Going To Bring a Long-Overdue Reckoning For The So-Called Liberal Leaders Who Are Still Trying To Use It To Oppress Their People And Steal Their Freedoms
Two years on since the pure evil that is Covid-19 arrived, leaked most probably from a Chinese lab, in the UK at least there feels reason to hope that divisive corona politics are starting to fizzle out.
It's possible to leave the house without a mask; the pubs are packed; even friends and relatives who were terrified just a few months ago are, quite frankly, over the scaremongering broadcast media, modellers and scientific advisers still trying to control our lives.
But, most fundamentally, in England at least, society is not divided into two tiers.
Boris Johnson's short-lived and unworkable experiment with ghastly vaccine mandates for care home workers and NHS staff has been wisely ditched.
While there are still clear divisions between a hard-core of lockdown/mask fanatics and sane folk who are desperate for the old normal, there is a chance for Brits to emerge from the dark days of this pandemic as one.
That's not an opportunity being given to the citizens of America, Canada, New Zealand and France – so-called liberal democracies buckling under the hatefulness of vaccine division advanced by their leaders.
Joe Biden, Justin Trudeau, Emmanuel Macron, Jacinda Ardern in particular have been exposed as the real Covid extremists, tearing their societies apart with divisive mandates and draconian restrictions no longer backed up by scientific evidence.
It's hard to believe the need to say it in 2022, but any leader who truly believes segregation is a way to advance society needs their head read.
That's why the inspirational Freedom Convoys that first won many millions of hearts in Canada are now spreading across the globe, despite the best efforts of Biden and Trudeau to demonise them as 'swastika-waving' far-right extremists.
We're not buying the bulls*** from these international leaders who try to convince us it is these folk – many of whom have lost their jobs because they believe in bodily autonomy – who are the ones trying to divide us.
While swathes of the mainstream media, taking cues from their revered prime ministers and presidents, may try and dismiss the various Freedom Convoys as the domain of racist and violent conspiracy theorists, that's not what we're seeing with our own eyes on the various live streams provided by the honest folk on the ground.
At the forefront of this hypocrisy are Canada's Trudeau and New Zealand's Ardern, Prime Ministers whose 'Be Kind' mantras are being exposed as meaningless drivel.
It's this pair of lefties who are the nasty ones, doing all they can to drive a wedge through their once harmonious and quiet societies, where most people don't like making a fuss.
The rhetoric from both has been downright nasty – and it's worth taking a closer look at how their own words have fuelled unnecessary discord.
Trudeau, who fled Ottawa and claimed he had Covid rather than enter any form of dialogue with the Convoy, was first out the gates.
In an extraordinary intervention that helped encourage the formation of the Freedom Convoy, he made sweeping statements about Canadians who had chosen, for whatever reason, not to be vaccinated.
In an incendiary TV interview, Trudeau said: 'They don't believe in science/progress and are very often misogynistic and racist. It's a very small group of people, but that doesn't shy away from the fact that they take up some space.'
That's right, Mr Blackface himself, a Prime Minister who seemed to spend his entire adolescence smearing dark paint over his smug mug, had the cheek to brand those who turned down a jab as being discriminatory.
But he wasn't done there. Trudeau went on: 'This leads us, as a leader and as a country, to make a choice: Do we tolerate these people? Over 80 per cent of the population of Quebec have done their duty by getting the shot. They are obviously not the issue in this situation.'
Do we 'tolerate these people'? These people! It's hard to believe a virus fast becoming endemic with a sky-high survival rate would take us to such a divisive place. Especially given Omicron has made it abundantly obvious that even being triple jabbed doesn't stop transmission.
So what is this really about? Well, for one, the 'tolerant' left simply will not tolerate anyone with views different to their own.
'When people see that we are in lockdowns or serious public health restrictions right now because of the risk posed to all of us by unvaccinated people, people get angry,' Trudeau threatened.
If you’ve had enough of their lies, rules, and bullying around mask mandates, and you want to put an end to the madness - sharing this video is a powerful way to help make a difference.
Since then, the weak PM – who eventually crept out of hiding – has done all he can to smear the Freedom Convoy, when the vast majority of the protests are peaceful and, at most times, purely joyful.
'People of Ottawa don't deserve to be harassed in their own neighbourhoods, don't deserve to be confronted with the inherent violence of a swastika flying on a street corner, or a confederate flag, or the insults and jeers just because they're wearing a mask. That's not who Canadians are,' he raged, disingenuously focussing on reports of bad behaviour by a tiny proportion of the protesters.
When demonising the Convoy for causing disruption to day-to-day life, it's impossible not to laugh at the barefaced hypocrisy of it all, given Trudeau has been responsible for some of the world's toughest lockdowns, which rendered it impossible to run many businesses for months on end or live a normal life in Canada.
Ardern, who once assured her Kiwi population that she would never countenance mandates for Covid vaccination, has since become the wicked face of such a policy approach, even if she does it with that incessant toothy grin.
Last October she was asked by a journalist from the New Zealand Herald: 'You've basically said, and you probably don't see it like this, but two different classes of people if you're vaccinated or unvaccinated. If you're vaccinated you have all these rights.'
Ardern replied sinisterly while nodding: 'That is what it is. Yup, yup.'
Ardern's vaccine mandates have seen teachers, midwives, nurses and many others lose their jobs, while seeing 13-year-olds whose parents choose not to jab them banned from school balls and from playing competitive sport.
This week a peaceful Kiwi Freedom Convoy set up shop on the lawn outside the New Zealand Parliament buildings in Wellington, with children in attendance and singing, dancing and the performance of powerful hakas by the Maori contingent in attendance.
Just like in Ottawa, most protestors are clear they are pro-choice when it comes to the vaccine and simply want the removal of mandates, then they will happily leave.
But Ardern has refused a dialogue and instead gone on a Trudeau-style media tour to disingenuously brand the Convoy a far-right mob of anti-vaxxers 'imported' from the US.
'I've seen Trump flags on the forecourt, I've seen Canadian flags on the forecourt,' she said.
Ardern added later: 'I very clearly have a view on the protesters and the way that they've conducted their protest, because it has moved beyond sharing a view to intimidation and harassment of the people around central Wellington. That cannot be tolerated.'
Both Trudeau and Ardern were staunch supporters of the imported Black Lives Matter movement, which was responsible for far more violent riots, especially across the US.
Of course, Canada and New Zealand should have taken the warning from Europe, where countries as diverse as the Netherlands, France and Austria have become hotbeds of discontent as a result of mandates and mandatory jab policies.
Macron has been the most arrogant in his defence of such division, admitting of the unvaccinated: 'I really want to p*** them off.'
He added chillingly:
"We have to tell them you will no longer be able to go to the restaurant. You will no longer be able to go for a coffee. You will no longer be able to go to the theatre. You will no longer be able to go to the cinema. We will continue to do this, to the end. This is the strategy.”
Such a strategy comes at a cost: Despite the policy, Covid rates soared far higher than the UK throughout late winter and social cohesion has been smashed.
The long-term consequences of pursuing a strategy of division can only be grim.
Of course, we have already seen that in the US, where Sleepy Joe has presided over lazily draconian policies and the causal denigration of Republican states where freedom has resulted in better health outcomes.
Nevertheless, his grumpy attacks on the unvaccinated have continued ad nauseum for months.
He said last October:
"My message to unvaccinated Americans is this: What more is there to wait for? What more do you need to see? We've been patient, but our patience is wearing thin. And your refusal has cost all of us, so please, do the right thing.”
And Biden later added:
"This is not about freedom, or personal choice, it's about protecting yourself and those around you, people you work with, people you care about the people you love.”
Not surprisingly, the President has missed the fundamental point: People get vaccinated to protect themselves.
You only have to look to Israel, one of the world's most vaccinated countries, to see that transmission remains rife, even among the quadruple vaccinated.
What none of these leaders has been prepared to do is address genuine concerns that many of the protestors have about the vaccination, especially in regards to heart conditions like myocarditis in children, whose chances of becoming seriously ill from Covid is minuscule.
It's also a complete misnomer to dismiss the protestors as anti-vaxx rather than anti-mandate.
I am personally vaccinated; I made the choice after carefully weighing up my own health profile with the risks and thinking of how difficult my life would become if I made another choice, given I need to travel.
But further boosters no longer make sense for me, especially given I have had Covid twice (the Wuhan strain in March 2020 and Omicron in December 2021).
In fact, much of the science suggests further jabs could do more harm than good. Hence, I have been and remain anti-mandates.
It's always intrigued me that the leaders prepared to throw out the principle of bodily autonomy are always on the pro-choice side of the abortion debate. How do they marry up those positions?
Surely, the only way to emerge from this pandemic with any respect for each other is to understand and learn from each other's choices when it comes to what medical procedures we undergo and what we put into our own bodies.
As the UK government proves, it's never too late to stare down the crazed health officials and mandate fanatics and say: ENOUGH!
Boris did just that before Christmas, ignoring fanciful suggestions from his discredited scientists of 6,000 deaths a day; making that bold call is probably the only reason he has survived the Partygate scandal thus far.
Trudeau, Ardern, Biden and Macron have done very little other than employ the politics of fear since the start of the pandemic – and now they're going to have to deal with the consequences.
That includes the presence of Freedom Convoys for many weeks and possibly even months – because their participants have been unfairly cast out of society.
I'd be stunned if voters decide to stick with these hate-filled leaders when they realise the devastation of the societal division they have wrought.
The world will be better off when they're out of power.
The World Economy Explained With Just Two Cows February 20 2022 | From: NewstalkZB
“You have two cows” is a common political satire involving variations of scenarios of two cows and how they work within various economic systems. [Some of this is toungue-incheek and some is an accurate summary, however unfortunate it may be].
It’s also frequently used as a joke in entry-level economics courses, whereby the professor will use the two cows as metaphors for currency, capital, property, and their relationships. Here are the major world economic theories, explained with two cows:
Related:
The World’s Best Economist
Socialism encourages sharing and co-operative management. When you have two cows, you’re expected to share one with your neighbor. When your neighbor later gets two cows, you can expect a similar favour.
Communism is a more extreme form of socialism. In this system, the State gets to have your cows and redistribute them as it sees fit. As a result, you have zero control over the cow, only what they produce.
The most tyrannical of the listed economic systems, fascism takes away your cows without a just cause. It then uses the stolen goods to to milk even more profit out of you. In a Fascist society, you want to make sure your cows are hidden from the State.
Large governments are commonly blamed for being bureaucratic. Complicated chains of command end up obscuring the real goal. In the end, none of the actions seem to make sense. Why waste a perfectly healthy cow?
Then you have traditional capitalism, which is the most stable system of them all. You buy two cows, nurture them, and give them room to prosper and multiple. With the power of compounding interest, the two cows will become an entire herd by the time you retire. You, the cows, and everyone buying the cows’ milk live happily ever after.
Venture capital relies on a small number of cows producing so much milk that they overshadow the rest of the loser cows. The rules get complicated as more farmers want a piece of the cow.
Molto bella!
The French are notorious with strikes. If they don’t get three cows, no one gets any cow.
Wall Street is notorious for being ruthless about milking profits out of corporations. If the cows don’t produce a certain volume of milk every quarter, it gets whipped. After they get sick to the point that they’re unable to produce any more milk, you pay a large fee to hire a vet.
Switzerland is famous for its neutrality. It doesn’t want the drama of owning cows. Instead, it rents out land for nurturing your cows.
The Corporation is a Canadian documentary film written by Joel Bakan, and directed by Mark Achbar and Jennifer Abbott. The documentary examines the modern-day corporation, considering its legal status as a class of person and evaluating its behavior towards society and the world at large as a psychiatrist might evaluate an ordinary person.
This is explored through specific examples. Bakan wrote the book, The Corporation: The Pathological Pursuit of Profit and Power, during the filming of the documentary.
Further to this, the documentary provides insighst into very poignant hostorical points, including the role of IBM in providing computational hardware and services to the Nazis - and some very interesting truths about the Nazi creation of Coca Cola's Fanta. Enjoy. If possible.
In Socialist Theocracy, Getting ‘Woke’ Brings Absolution
February 15 2021 | From: TheEpochTimes / Various Double standards are a hallmark of socialist movements.
The infamous “community organizer” Saul Alinsky established their tenets simply: “Accuse the Other Side of That Which You Are Guilty.”
And in their hypocrisy, they extend this tenet to their cohorts, under Alinsky’s rule to “never strike left.”
Because of this, a politician can loudly claim to oppose racism in all forms, yet turn a blind eye when a member of his own camp is exposed as a racist.
A basketball star can claim to oppose oppression, then defend state oppression in the next breath. They can march in lockstep, crying foul about all the wrongs of the world, while ignoring the wrongs in their own camp.
It all comes down to the sins of the fathers. In Western religion, this goes back to the story of original sin, the temptation in the Garden of Eden, and the curse from the Tree of Knowledge.
It holds that man is born into sin, and that through baptism and repentance, we may find redemption.
The socialist religion also holds that people are born into sin, but the extent of this sin is determined by the color of each person’s skin, their gender, and how closely they follow the traditions, or “old ideas,” that socialism seeks to eradicate.
Rather than believing that people can repent and improve themselves to overcome original sin, socialism holds that white people should be forever guilty of historical slavery, men should be forever guilty of patriarchy, and the wealthy should be forever ashamed of their own gains.
Yet they offer their own form of repentance: getting “woke.”
To be forgiven for politicized sin, the socialists must proclaim their hatred of who they are.
The white person must proclaim their hatred of “white privilege,” the man must proclaim his hatred of “toxic masculinity,” and the business owner must announce his opposition to “capitalism.”
After being born again through this political baptism, they’re no longer held accountable to the narratives of their camp. By proclaiming their wokeness to the church of the state, they are granted absolution from all political sins past and present - just as long as they continue to voice their hatred of all they once were.
Socialism is very much a theocratic system. In its destruction of God, it aimed to replace God; and in its destruction of morals, it has looked to create a new morality.
The statist theocracy now rules, and those who sit in its pews can preach to their masses about how they, too, were once lowly sinners in the ever-changing crimes of political correctness.
History is merely repeating itself, regardless of how the adherents to this state belief try to separate their “new” socialism from the tyrannical history of the “old” socialism.
Thomas Molnar explained this principle in his book “Utopia: The Perennial Heresy,” saying that in every practical regard, socialism functions as a theocracy.
And to guard its forced theocratic rule, it demands that all beneath proclaim their enthusiasm: to speak their wokeness, lest the unclean elements of society should rise up in revolt.
Theocracy, Molnar explained;
"May never relent, for, as long as danger exists - and the very absence of enthusiasm for theocratic rule is interpreted as danger - the repressive force may not relax.
Wielders of such force must be shown proof that their subjects, candidates for perfection, live in a permanent state of enthusiasm.”
And because danger to such systems will always exist, he explained, “the elect will insist on regular enthusiastic demonstrations of consensus.”
"Under Communist regimes, for example, the individual may not simply retire into silence; he must enthusiastically speak, write, approve, and proclaim louder than the next fellow.”
Of course, socialism has no problem contradicting its own principles - and this has held true for leaders of its systems and ideology from the get-go. Pol Pot killed the intellectuals but was an intellectual himself.
Marx hated the bourgeois class, of which he and his aristocratic wife were a part. Lenin killed the peasants to protect the working man. And Mao destroyed belief to create consensus for his own.
The vague political goal always shines on the horizon, and the socialist tyrant points to it, claiming that we can reach it tomorrow, if only the privileged elements of society could be destroyed today.
Tyranny and oppression then become the tools to destroy “oppression,” and through their contradictory double-think, the socialists believe that through their own tyranny, they’ve fought tyranny.
Molnar explains that this contradictory thought - and the demand in socialist regimes that all “true believers” demonstrate their enthusiasm for its principles, lest they fail to be absolved of the past - is part of the ongoing hypocrisy that has always plagued socialist Utopianism.
Molnar explains, “The same paradox characterizes all Utopian thinkers: they believe in unrestrained human freedom; at the same time, they want so thoroughly to organize freedom that they turn it into slavery.”
How An Austrian And British Malthusian Brainwashed A Generation Of Americans [Westerners] January 17 2022 | From: Zerohedge / Various
The creation of false opposites has been a long-standing obstacle to human progress.
From the ancient pleasure-seeking Epicureans who argued against the logic-heavy Stoics of ancient Rome to the war of “salvation through faith vs works” that schismed western Christianity, to the chaotic emotional energy driving the Jacobin mobs of France whose passions were only matched by the radical Cartesian logic of their Girondin enemies; humanity has long been manipulated by oligarchs who knew how to set the species to war against itself.
Although these operations have taken many forms, the desired effect has always been the same: divide-to-conquer bloodbaths which drowned out the saner voices of Cicero (executed in 44 BCE), Thomas More (executed in 1535 CE), or Jean Sylvain Bailly (executed in 1793 CE).
Today’s polarization across the Trans-Atlantic world has reached a fevered pitch with the “right wing conservatives” shouting for liberty and less government while left wing liberals call for more government and top-down reforms of the system (with Great Reset technocrats laughing in the background).
Everyone with half a brain should be able to sense that the danger of civil war and economic meltdown hang over our destinies like a sword of Damocles, but instead of hearing calls for restoring the SCIENTIFICALLY PROVEN traditions of American System banking that author Ellen Brown recently documented in her powerful new essay, we find only feuding sects that assert we must EITHER have top-down centralized planning OR bottom-up free markets laissez faire policies devoid of any government intervention.
In this first of a three-part series, I will argue that the source of this confusion among Americans was first concocted in London during the height of the depression, centering on the figures of two London-based Malthusian hedonists.
One was top-down economist John Maynard Keynes (1883-1946) and the other played the role of his supposed opponent in the form of “bottom up” advocate Friedrich von Hayek (1899-1992).
To put it another way, these two fundamentally anti-republican ideologues whose lives were each devoted to the hereditary systems of empire constructed a widely publicized debate that asserted two opposing economic theories, either:
1. Government must spend arbitrarily to create jobs or:
2. Government must cut budgets, end social safety nets and public services and let the strong survive leaving each unit of society to its own (supposedly) self-regulating passions.
The constants among both apparent opponents (who remained friends throughout their lives) were that:
1. Neither believed that INTENTION or MIND should govern economic policy (Keynes believed in arbitrary “make work” which could not differentiate between the qualitative difference of a $100 paycheck to a digger of random holes vs $100 paycheck to an engineer building a dam), an:
2. Both believed equally in the universal validity of Malthus’s population theories, and of Bernard Mandeville’s satanic belief that personal vice creates public virtue. Both theories have underpinned British imperial grand strategy for over two centuries.
This operation, in which both Keynes and von Hayek were thoroughly enmeshed, demanded fascist regimes control the world under a “scientifically managed” bankers’ dictatorship.
One month after the London Times October 17, 1932 publication began to print arguments from proponents of both schools on how to best end the depression, Franklin Roosevelt was elected to the U.S. presidency.
With his presidential victory, a specific form of economic planning was restored to the republic that had nothing to do with either school of Keynes or Hayek and everything to do with something uniquely embedded in the U.S. Constitutional traditions that petrified the hereditary empires of Europe’s old nobility.
In the years leading up to his victory, FDR had worked closely with a grouping of bipartisan American congressmen and senators to revive a form of political economy which involved the paradoxical coexistence of increased government involvement together with massive increase in entrepreneurism, and private sector growth.
The fact that FDR is attacked by communists for being a capitalist shill while being simultaneously attacked by capitalists for being a communist shill to this very day is a sign of this ongoing confusion and a testament to the effectiveness of British intelligence propaganda.
The systemic inability for modern Americans to resolve the ‘FDR paradox’ today is due entirely to a sleight of hand pulled by the very same imperial power that has never forgiven the USA for declaring its independence in 1776.
What Ben Franklin Created
When Benjamin Franklin (1705-1790) had orchestrated his life-long project of establishing a new nation on this earth founded upon the principle of the sanctity of the individual (enunciated in the 1776 Declaration of Independence) and the sanctity of the General Welfare (as outlined in the Constitution’s 1787 pre-amble), he and his leading co-thinkers demonstrated a profoundly philosophical understanding of the political economy and also nature of true freedom which citizens must re-learn – quickly.
In order to give practical meaning to the ideals of individual (bottom up) freedom and national (top down) collective well-being enshrined in America’s founding documents, a new system of political economy was created by Franklin and his closest followers among the founding fathers.
This new system did not arise ex nihilo but was itself based upon the greatest traditions of French dirigisme of Jean-Baptiste Colbert (1619-1683), and earlier Cameralist schools of economic planning which grew out of the creation of the first modern nation states of France’s Louis XI and England’s Henry VII.
For the first time in history (at least since the short-lived effort by Charlemagne in the 8th century), the idea of “money”, “value”, “profit” were tied not to the passive capital off which feudal landlords fed parasitically, or bounty to be looted, but rather the improvement of the lives of people from whom the legitimacy of government was recognized to originate.
Throughout the 18th century, Benjamin Franklin became a leading American force for this school of thought which was outlined in his 1729 On the Necessity for a Paper Currency.
In this influential essay, the young scientist argued for a system of finance, colonial scrip, and value governed by the growth of manufacturing and full spectrum economics. In his essay Franklin battled the British establishment who argued that the colonies should forever remain agrarian, backward and cash cropping, saying:
“As Providence has so ordered it, that not only different Countries, but even different Parts of the same Country, have their peculiar most suitable Productions; and like wise that different Men have Genius’s adapted to Variety of different Arts and Manufactures, Therefore Commerce, or the Exchange of one Commodity or Manufacture for another, is highly convenient and beneficial to Mankind.”
Some of Franklin’s leading protégé’s who carried this tradition into the 19th century included the first U.S. Treasury Secretary Alexander Hamilton (1755-1804), John Jay (1745-1829), Gouverneur Morris (1752-1816), Robert Morris (1734-1806), Isaac Roosevelt (1726-1794) (great-great grandfather to Franklin Roosevelt) and later Henry Clay (1777-1852), John Quincy Adams (1767-1848), Matthew Carey (1760-1839). Matthew Carey’s son Henry C. Carey (1793-1879) became a leading economic advisor to Abraham Lincoln.
All of these figures defended the right of the young republic to develop “full spectrum economics” in order to gain true independence from the City of London.
Leaders of the American System: Benjamin Franklin, Alexander Hamilton, John Jay, Isaac Roosevelt, Gouverneur Morris, Robert Mirris, Matthew Carey, Henry Clay, John Quincy Adams, Henry C. Carey
“Two systems are before the world; the one looks to increasing the proportion of persons and of capital engaged in trade and transportation, and therefore to diminishing the proportion engaged in producing commodities with which to trade, with necessarily diminished return to the labor of all; while the other looks to increasing the proportion engaged in the work of production, and diminishing that engaged in trade and transportation, with increased return to all, giving to the laborer good wages, and to the owner of capital good profits…
One looks to pauperism, ignorance, depopulation, and barbarism; the other in increasing wealth, comfort, intelligence, combination of action, and civilization.
One looks towards universal war; the other towards universal peace. One is the English system; the other we may be proud to call the American system, for it is the only one ever devised the tendency of which was that of elevating while equalizing the condition of man throughout the world.”
What Did the “American System” Do?
While the British System of laissez fair free trade demanded that governments do nothing, regulate nothing and plan nothing in order for the magical creative animal spirits of the self-regulating markets to “do their thing”, the American System took a very different approach.
By applying protectionism, national banking, internal improvements and public credit, the American System was driven by the idea that “value” was located not in money or any material thing existent in the ephemeral “now” but rather in the development of the creative powers of mental activity of the people.
Lincoln outlined this concept beautifully in his powerful “On Discoveries and Inventions” (1858) and this principle governed the creation of the Greenbacks when private bankers made every effort to cripple the Union’s access to credit needed to win the war.
Using protection, all nations have the right and even duty to prevent the cheap dumping of foreign goods by imposing a tariff upon imports, thus ensuring that local production be favored.
Dumping was an old practice of economic warfare which the British had honed since the 17th century crushing its colonies’ efforts to build up local manufacturing on countless occasions (and continues to be a key element of economic warfare masquerading behind the veneer of globalization in our current age).
As demonstrated in the LPAC documentary 1932, whenever American System-followers in Russia, Germany, Italy, Japan, China, Spain and France applied protection, rail, and dirigiste credit, prosperity, independence and abundance flourished. Whenever these policies were abandoned, those nations were crippled and manipulated into wars by foreign interests.
Between 1880-1930, this system was led by nationalist forces affiliated with President Garfield (1831-1881), President Ulysses Grant (1822-1885), Governor William Gilpin (1813-1894), President McKinley (1843-1901), Secretary of State James Blaine (1830-1893), and President Warren Harding (1865-1923). Each time it began to take hold the system was derailed by timely assassinations and it was only able to emerge once more in 1932.
Post-Civil War American System leaders: President Garfield, President Grant and Governor Gilpin, President McKinley, Secretary of Stae Blaine and President William Harding
How Franklin Roosevelt Revived the American System
With Roosevelt’s entry into office, the British Empire (using its Wall Street lackies) that had intentionally orchestrated the Great Depression in 1929 had realized that the American System was coming back to life for the first time in decades.
While Warren Harding’s short-lived presidency saw a few noble attempts to resurrect the McKinley-Lincoln traditions of the republican party, his convenient “death by oyster poisoning” in 1923 ensured that the revival of the American System would not succeed.
Over Harding’s dead body, free trade, bank deregulation, and speculation ran rampant throughout the “roaring twenties” led by Andrew Mellon, the Morgan dynasty and their puppet Calvin Coolidge.
This decay turned the once-productive industrial economy of America into a casino of bubbles built on unpayable debts and over-extended broker call loans that went up in smoke in 1929.
The “solution” that the financial oligarchy provided to the world in anticipation of the fear and starvation unleashed by the planned meltdown of the banking system was a novel economic miracle solution called “fascism”. This system soon swept the world from Italy, Germany, Austria and Spain.
Within Britain, Canada and the USA, Wall Street/London sponsored fascist movements arose with lightning speed offering to solve all financial woes “and put food on the table” for millions of traumatized citizens. In a world of fear and instability, the masses were proving all too willing to ignore Ben Franklin’s sage advice by giving up their liberties to achieve a bit of security.
It was within this context that Franklin Roosevelt’s call to kick the money changers out of the temple and declare war on the abuses of Wall Street was an unexpected breath of fresh air for millions of suffocating citizens.
After putting dozens of leading bankers in prison, prosecutor Ferdinand Pecora described the operation years later:
“Under the surface of the governmental regulation of the securities market, the same forces that produced the riotous speculative excesses of the ‘wild bull market’ of 1929 still give evidence of their existence and influence.
Though repressed for the present, it cannot be doubted that, given a suitable opportunity, they would spring back to their pernicious activity.”
In Washington, a bi-partisan network of patriotic statesmen representing the Lincoln-McKinley-Harding traditions rose to prominence and shaped in large measure the policies which came to be known as the New Deal together with associated bank reforms of the Glass-Steagall, national credit, protectionism, and large-scale megaprojects known as the “four corners” vision (Tennessee Valley authority/Rural Electrification, Hoover Dam, Grand Coulee dam/Colorado River development, and St Lawrence Seaway).
Much like the Belt and Road Initiative today, these large-scale macro projects governed the tens of thousands of smaller state, county and municipal “micro” projects within a top-down dynamic.
The Keynesian Myth
Even though today’s popular narrative has asserted that FDR’s New Deal was a Keynesian innovation managed by the nebulous “Brain Trust”, the reality is that Keynes believed that FDR was a buffoon and FDR believed the Fabian eugenicist could only be considered a detached ivory tower mathematician but not a competent economist.
In her autobiography, FDR’s Secretary of Labor Frances Perkins recorded the 1934 interaction between the two men when Roosevelt told her:
“I saw your friend Keynes. He left a whole rigmarole of figures. He must be a mathematician rather than a political economist.”
In response Keynes, who was then trying to coopt the intellectual narrative of the New Deal stated he had “supposed the President was more literate, economically speaking.”
Those forgotten forces who have been nearly written out of history were American statesmen who had battled against the Federal Reserve Act in 1913, stood up to the police state apparatus begun by Teddy Roosevelt’s FBI in 1908, and against America’s turn towards imperialism with the death of McKinley.
They were the men who risked much to stand up against the League of Nations World government schemes launched in 1919, and against the Wall Street / CFR takeover of U.S. foreign and internal policy.
Senator George Norris showcasing the web of controls managed by the Wall Street oligarchs
These names which should be celebrated today, interfaced closely with FDR and his allies Harry Hopkins and Henry Wallace. Some of their names include Senator Robert Lafollette Jr (R-Iowa) (1895-1953), Sen. Robert Wagner (D-NY) (1877-1953), Sen. Peter Norbeck (R-SD) (1870-1936), Sen. Edward Costigan (D-Colo.) (1874-1939), Senator George Norris (R-Neb) (1861-1944) and Rep. William Lemke (R-N.D.)(1878-1950).
These were a few of the leading men that some historians have dubbed “the American System Caucus”, and while this article doesn’t leave room for their story, rest assured that more will be said about them in a future installment.
While it would be a lie to say that there was no such thing as a “Brain Trust” or that Keynesian economists and Rhodes Scholars were not to be found among this group, the idea that this was the “cause” of the New Deal is a pure fiction.
American System Caucus: Senator Robert Lafollette, Senator Robert Wagner, Senator Peter Norbeck, Senator George Norris, Senator Edward Costigan, Representative William Lemke
While surgery was begun on the cancerous financial system and unpayable debts depriving the nation of the credit needed to commence a reconstruction policy of the physical economy (over 50% of U.S. industrial potential was destroyed and unemployment hit 25%), Franklin Roosevelt’s long time ally Harry Hopkins worked with Harold Ickes to provide emergency work for over 3 million people in the first months under the Public Works Administration and Works Progress Administration.
Although FDR could not destroy the private Federal Reserve that had taken control of U.S. monetary policy 30 years earlier, he was able to impose his own man (Marinner Eccles) onto it in 1934, forcing the beast to start obeying national law for the first time ever.
Despite this maneuver, Wall Street oligarchs continued to sabotage FDR’s recovery by constricting credit, refusing to purchase treasury notes at strategic moments, or even speculating against the U.S. dollar itself.
To get around these manipulations, the Reconstruction Finance Corporation (RFC) was brought online to function as a surrogate national bank channeling billions of dollars into small and medium businesses, industrial growth, and infrastructure projects.
Psy Ops vs the New Deal: The Rise of the Austrian School
Throughout the 1930s and 1940s, Mellon-Morgan-Rockefeller interests ran a multifaceted psychological war against the population. After their coup plans failed due to Gen. Butler’s brave whistleblowing in 1934, these groups created a think tank calling itself the “American Liberty League”.
The irony of the word “Liberty” used by an organization whose controllers sponsored fascism before and even during WWII should not be lost on anyone.
Through powerful oligarchs like William Randolph Hearst, Henry Luce, the Morgans, the Warburgs, the Duponts, and the Rockefellers, the Liberty League controlled the majority of mainstream media outlets, radio stations, and publishing houses in the USA, at the same time they co-ordinated with the newly re-organized FBI under J. Edgar Hoover.
These groups worked hard to paint FDR as a Keynesian who only created inflationary “make work jobs” without any concrete intention for the future productive powers of labor.
Through this sleight of hand, FDR’s enemies were able to invent a straw man that they could then refute by promoting the anti-Keynesian model known as the “Austrian School” that had formerly grown out of the British System inspired theories of Carl Menger (retainer for the Habsburg empire) and his aristocratic disciples Ludwig von Mises, Friedrick von Hayek, Frank Knight, and Sir John Claphan.
By 1940, the American Liberty League formerly disbanded. However with FDR’s death its cabal of controllers spawned dozens of new think tanks that were enmeshed with the Council on Foreign Relations and Mont Pelerin Society mothership founded in 1947 by von Hayek and a group of eugenics-loving oligarchs whom we will encounter in a following report..
Over the coming decades, the Liberty League morphed into hundreds of new think tanks which began with the American Enterprise Association (AEA) [later American Enterprise Institute] founded by Liberty League leader Raymond Moley and sponsored by General Mills, Chemical Bank and Bristol Meyers.
Other think tanks built up by this network over the years included the Heritage Foundation, Cato Institute, Hudson Institute, Mises Institute, Manhattan Institute etc… which would set the groundwork for the later “conservative revolution” of the 1970s.
This “Austrian School” revolution would spring to life once the 1945-1971 Keynesian perversion of Bretton Woods ended with the 1971 floating of the dollar off of the fixed exchange rate gold reserve system.
Under this post-1971 era, a new god of the “markets” would replace the old god of “the state” and a new ethic of post-industrial consumerism would replace the former system of Keynesian controls that defined the post-WWII era.
Those anti-Keynesian leaders of the American System tradition such as Henry Dexter White, Franklin Roosevelt, Wendell Wilkie, Sumner Welles, and Harry Hopkins were taken out of power through various means between 1945-1946 as the Anglo-American establishment regained control over U.S. foreign and internal policies.
This Keynesian takeover destroyed the positive potential of the Bretton Woods Institutions which were designed originally to internationalize the New Deal via the creation of cheap credit for global development and win-win cooperation.
Nine Indisputable Truths About “Conspiracy Theorists” February 16 2022 | From: ZenGardner
The day the masses wake up and understand what the term “conspiracy theory” really means and recognise the truth about “conspiracy theorists,” who they are, what they stand for, the world ruling elite’s hold on humanity will be over.
Their deceptive cover would have been blown wide open and indeed there will be consequences.
So, in light of the above, here are 9 indisputable truths about “conspiracy theorists.”
“Conspiracy Theorists”
1. …have to put up with much ignorance, and as a knee-jerk reaction, baseless accusation of “conspiracy theory.” “Conspiracy theory” carries with it the deriding insinuation that there are no conspiracies (no conspiracy facts, just theory). Who could be so brainwashed, unquestioningly ignorant, or naïve enough to believe that no country has ever conspired?
2. Are conspiracy factualists. Using evidence they expose the truth about what’s really going on in the world. They expose the deceitful criminal perpetrator networks and authorities. Therefore, the term “conspiracy theorist” is a misnomer.
3. Give credible accounts of events, diligently challenging the official versions filled with lies, inconsistencies, fake bogeymen enemies and false paradigms… manufactured for power, profit and political gains. Many official versions of these false flag events have big enough holes in their stories to drive double-decker buses in and out of.
Further, they expose financial, health, environmental, educational and war agendas, the secret occult societies, paedophilia, organ harvesting and black ops projects… the ruling elite enslavers don’t want you know about.
Then there are the eugenics, trans-humanism and depopulation agendas… these blatantly obvious conspiracy facts are there for all to see.
4. As a consequence of 3, are perceived by the ruling elite and their associates as a threat. In order to get away with their crimes and deception they know that “conspiracy theorists” have to be ignored, invalidated, or ridiculed by the masses:
The term “conspiracy theory” was originally a 1960s’ CIA invention. Over the years the ruling elite’s owned and controlled intelligence agencies such as the CIA and their mainstream media propaganda machine have used this term to expand its effect of negatively stigmatizing “conspiracy theorists” so that the masses will never realize that these people were right all along.
5. …Therefore are truther messengers running the risk of getting shot. They are targeted individuals. Targeted by the likes of the UK’s ex-Prime Minister David Cameron, calling them “non-violent domestic extremists” as one of the many attempts to silence such people who have seen right through the phoney baloney.
6. Are not “coincidence theorists.” How can anyone dismiss the overwhelming number of coincidences pointed out by “conspiracy theorists” to be indicators of crimes and cover-ups tied in with false flag events? Is it really a mere coincidence that it’s always the elite few; the banksters, the puppet senior politicians, the owner/controllers of mega-corporations that benefit from these events?
7. Are the freethinking minority able to think for themselves against the backdrop: a world full of sheep-like people going into agreement with the general consensus of the masses while blindly accepting authority viewpoints blurted out in the ruling elite’s bought-off, owned and controlled mainstream media…
8. Consistent with Arthur Schopenhauer’s statement, in time, with their conspiracy facts, could be the majority stage-3: “…accepted as being self-evident.”
9. …Are who the world’s needs most: Unstoppable, increasing in numbers and gathering in momentum. They are laudable investigators.
They are peaceful activists, spreading the truth about what’s really going on in the world. Many do their inner work to co-create a turnaround, away from the planned doom and gloom. Thus, it is their intention to co-create freedom: A new paradigm experience, a world that truly makes a difference for everyone.
A shift in mass consciousness is the underlying key principle. This is how these consciously awakened individuals will bring about that freedom.
Not an attempt at an exhaustive A-Z account, I realize, but that concludes my 9 indisputable truths about “conspiracy theorists.”
Our generation has inherited this Pyramid of Lies and only now are we beginning to see its tentacles of deception within our societies, governments, financial institutions, and even families as this web has entrapped us.
Some say that this all began with the Father of all Lies - Satan - but how many people have actually met this bloke of smoke? Or is he just a religious fantasy of distraction - The Blame Game?
Actually the Lie begins with YOU and ME as we are the ones that give credence and support and repeat the Lie over and over again as part of our personal Belief systems.
So if change is to occur, it has to come from personal understanding and recognition of the Lies and then doing what needs to be done by exposing the Lies in the light of Truth and then presenting viable Solutions.
That is the gist of this essay.
Upside Down Pyramids
Most of us think of pyramids as being large at the bottom and pointed at the top. We are programmed to believe that this is the proper shape and model that we should follow.
All our social, religious, political, governmental, financial, economic and corporate structures are based on “Top-Down” models with the “All Seeing Eye” of the FEW (0.1%) at the TOP who make the rules for their untouchable benefit - always.
In reality that is a fallacious Lie as the actual structure is an “Upside Down Pyramid” with the small pointed end being the FOUNDATION POINT upon which a larger structure of lies is constructed.
A simple example is the basic government structure. You have a small portion of a population that are full time non-governmental workers paying taxes to support government workers that create welfare and budget deficit programs that create inflation and that then impoverish the workers that are holding up the whole system...
So by design or stupidity, the whole pyramid collapses and from the rubble of war a new phoenix pyramid system emerges which historically repeats the LIE.
In the US, 100 million workers support 50 million government employees that support 160 million people dependent upon some form of welfare that the government finances by issuing trillions of Dollars in Debt that supports banks and financial markets that leverage this through fractal banking to create $2-5 quadrillion in derivatives and $56 quadrillion in loans to hedge funds that cannot service the interest on these loans so the system is doomed to failure, especially if you kill off or tax to death the foundation of creative workers.
So the Financial Debt Pyramid of Lies is based on a small foundation of fungible REAL MONEY in gold, silver and precious metals often loosely referred to as “The Global Collateral Accounts” as the real assets backing the fraudulent fractional global financial system.
To this is added Annual GDP which is what is actually created new assets produced by the productivity of hard working people. This is the base that supports the fake colored paper debts and their “phantom assets” or “Ghost Money”.
And even the amount of gold above ground as determined by the London Gold Council is limited to only 190,000 tons mined since the beginning of time, whereas, current annual global gold extraction is accounted at 6,000 tons per year.
Extrapolate 6,000 over 50 years of modern mining and you have potentially over 300,000 tons above ground. And going back in time you add Sumarian gold, Solomon’s mines, South Africa, Spanish/American hoards, California, Alaska and Yukon Gold Rushes, Russian and Asian gold reserves and London Liars are called out.
Keep the amount available small and the price goes higher, that is the con and lie perpetrated.
And the real gold money supporting the financial pyramid at current gold price of $ 1,500/oz the 190,000 tons would be worth only $ 9.164 Trillion but only 13% of physical gold is in financial bars or coins held by banks, central banks, institutional investors and private holdings.
That is only $ 1.2 Trillion physical collateral supporting the actual financial pyramid.
This financial Debt morass also supports organized and rigged casinos like paper gold, stocks, bonds, derivatives and financial debt instruments of all kinds.
These paper casinos are all based on a small foundation of assets that are always in a “disconnect” with the paper that they represent as a direct result of fractal banking leveraging at 10:1, 100:1 or even higher.
Take for example the “rigged gold price”. Commodity markets like the London Bullion Metals Association (LBMA) and COMEX in Chicago deal principally in “Paper Gold” which is “phantom gold” created out of thin air with little or NO physical gold backing or physical gold delivery.
The daily “price” is FIXED in a back room with no transparency or accountability for the true value of the fake paper that it is based on. The fantasy fraud pricing then enters the market as a key valuation basis for other financial contracts and the phantom gold is then used as collateral!
The only real gold physical delivery occurs on the Shanghai Gold Exchange (SGE) but that price is linked to the fake LBMA and COMEX paper prices and none of the physical gold transacted can leave China so it is not a real trade market.
And now as Chinese banks are failing, the Chinese Government is considering confiscating GOLD! Sounds like 1933 in the US all over again.
So what happens if there is a “disconnect” between fake paper gold and real physical gold? Simply the price of physical gold will go UP and paper gold will become worthless.
The basic financial model is one based on GREED and DEBT. It is a SCAM MODEL. It is based on the old carnival saying that “a sucker is born every day”.
The modus is based on a “get rich quick” approach by selling a piece of colored paper and a glorious false promise that the paper will be worth a fortune some day.
The paper is then traded in a rigged casino where the sheep always get fleeced because the originators of the colored paper sell it for higher and higher prices, selling out at a peak and then cause a market collapse that leaves the sheep sheared.
The most recent financial scam is the “crypto-currency scam” better known as “Bitcoin”. This scam starts off with the issue of a fixed number of “digital coins” on the originators computer. He then sells 50% to the gullible public say at a penny a coin.
The coin Buyers then sell some of their coins at 2 cents and make 100% profit. The next Buyer sells his coins at 4 cents and makes 100% profit. This doubling of profits accelerates rapidly with the number of greedy Buyers bidding up coin prices and cashing in on daily on-line trading.
But remember that the underlying value per coin is only a penny and that the originator of the coins kept 50% which he cashes-in and becomes an instantaneous digital millionaire.
The whole price structure is just based on greed and the more greedy ignoramuses that can be encouraged to buy into the scam the better.
And now you can buy 0.1 % of a coin, or a derivative based on coin price movements, or swap one crypto for another, which are scams based on scams. And the feeding frenzy continues!
But be AWAKE! Governments and major banksters (IMF) are now actively promoting “cashless societies” where everything you do is digitally recorded - well, at least until someone hacks the system or pulls the plug.
This is a major society “control” model - all based on fraudulent money created out of thin air and false promises. And people believe it is good for them! Model Programming for the brain dead.
But the Casino Scam Model is also seen in Stock Markets, Bond Markets, Currency Markets, Commodity Markets, Derivative Markets and in so many creative paper scams around the world.
I personally own the controlling stock in the London Bridge. Any Buyers? I just printed out the certificates.
And why are Stock Markets rising to record levels at the same time that the FED is printing BILLIONS of digits out of thin air to prop up the liquidity shortfall of major banks by funding the Overnight Market, where the loans then get extended to 3-days, 7-days, 1-month or 1-year.
The banks get low interest (essentially FREE) money which they use to play the markets through their own financial subsidiaries or loans to their hedge fund buddies - all pocketing huge profits.
The FOREX (Foreign Exchange) Markets are in on it too. Trading in currencies is $ 6.6 TRILLION PER DAY with 88% Dollar denominated on one side of the trades instigated by institutional banks, brokers funded by banks and bank financial subsidiaries that account for 90% of all trades.
And this is based on only $6.0 TRILLION in global currencies in physical circulation! So where do the currencies come from? “Only the Phantom knows for sure”.
And the banksters are actively promoting these frauds by creating more fake money colored paper out of thin air and loaning it to whomever they can.
This is the classic “Debt Slavery Model” where one tries to buy oneself out of debt with more debt in an ever increasing death spiral. And the creation of more money to feed the interest deficit is what causes the devaluation of money through INFLATION.
Simply in this Debt based financial model, whenever there is “interest” more money has to be CREATED.
Look again at the QUADRILLIONS AND QUINTILLIANS of colored paper and computer digits that make-up the Financial Pyramid of Lies. Think for a minute how much 1% INTEREST is and that has to be CREATED each year OUT OF THIN AIR!
NOW you are beginning to see why the Debt / Slavery Model always collapses and the Elites then send the stupid masses to WAR and devastation and distraction while they then resurrect a NEW Debt / Slavery Model from the ashes.
WAKE-UP People! It didn’t work before. It won’t work again that way either!
So now you see that we are on the brink of another global financial collapse. No one can meet the humongous global interest payments.
Now the talking heads are tooting GCR’s (Global Currency Resets), RV’s (Revaluations), Debt Jubilees and all kinds of nonsense that will never happen as THEIR solutions are just a REPEAT with new colored paper. No real system changes. The Elite stay IN CONTROL.
EXPECT A COLLAPSE. SOON. EXPECT A WHOLE BUNCH OF LIES. SCAMS. CONS.
What Needs to be Done?
Capitalism works if you have real market forces determining prices of goods and services. But the current model does not allow for free open markets, only controlled casinos. That has to change.
A famous Swiss study found that 187 major multinational corporations, energy giants and large banks through their interlocking Boards virtually control the entire global economy.
They own the land, factories, communications, transportation, pharmaceutical, energy and the financial structure that controls all including the “incorporated” governments and central banks - and through Birth Certificates, they claim that they own YOU (and the Pope claims he owns YOUR SOUL!).
Obviously such a control system needs to be reigned-in with more effective “anti-monopoly” laws and the cutting of cross linkages at Board levels, but even deeper structural changes have to take place.
Money
The fundamental foundation of MONEY is based on FAITH. Do WE BELIEVE in the intrinsic value of what we assume is MONEY.
Originally MONEY was based on precious metals which had tradable value based on the commonly accepted “perception” that a piece of metal with a picture on it was worth so much of a commodity or hours of labor.
Thus the Elite created the CON of TOKENS and controlled the mints and printing presses to their advantage.
But what is the true value of MONEY? Is it the value of PRODUCTION? Or is it the value that CONSUMERS give to PRODUCTION? Is it the value of LABOR inputs to PRODUCTION?
But what about those in society that cannot be productive like children, elderly, physically disabled, addicted, lazy, etc.?
Obviously humanity is at a transition point where the real VALUE of MONEY has to be determined on a global basis. It is a delicate process of balancing the YIN (PRODUCTION) with the YANG (CONSUMPTION).
This transitioning is happening NOW regardless of fraudulent attempts to reboot the old defunct model. Going back to the “Gold Standard” or creating a phony “Cyber Alternative” is doing the same stupid thing all over again. But these are transitory steps in the Game to create real monetary VALUE. They are NOT the End Game.
Several years ago I wrote a paper promoting the creation of an “International Dollar” (an ID or $ with a single line through the S).
This was another transition proposal whereby all overseas US Dollars being held as reserve currencies and used in active commodity TRADE would be converted into new International Dollars managed by an independent International Board that would be responsible for determining and pegging the Exchange Rate between the ID and each nation’s currency being valued against REAL PRODUCTION AND CONSUMPTION statistics.
This is a closer step to a proper economic goal but again it is NOT the end-all approach.
The VALUE of MONEY is a matter of FAITH.
FAITH is the result of doing things the RIGHTEOUS WAY and universally from a position of GIVING.
Our focus should be on what WE value and why WE place such a value on something, then we have to agree on how we account for it We are the Consumers and Producers so WE determine VALUE. Markets must be OPEN and not determined by “Backroom Boys”, syndicates or banksters and their buddies.
VALUE is a honest and moral foundation of a global society. Creating such a foundation from the current model will be a slow process as it is based on fraud, but perseverance and transitioning from the old model to a new one IS taking place.
Reverting back to a Gold Standard, creating equitable digital algorithms, re-valuations or an International Dollar that all currencies can be pegged to, are steps along the way provided there is a global moral consensus and an equitable balance created.
Economic structuring in our immediate future is up to all of US and we can easily do this without going to devastating wars simply because one country or another has run out of real MONEY to back its debts.
We can have wealth, prosperity and health for all by just shifting some of the insane phantom money from the casinos into PRODUCTION and LABOR thereby creating CONSUMERS.
For only USD30 Billion we can provide clean drinking water for everyone. Another USD40 Billion and we feed all the hungry and starving of the world. Why does the US need over $1.0 TRILLION per year for Defense Budgets when such a small portion of such budgets can heal and prosper the entire World?
MONEY is changing. WE are awakening. It is time to review what can be done is now. WE all need to seek viable and righteous alternatives and give this to the collective consciousness.
The old Debt/Slavery Model is worn out. WE are changing OUR MONEY. The Who, What, Where, When, Why and How is now up to US to determine. The next Model, however, will not be based on FRAUD and a Pyramid of Lies.
It will be based on real asset values and be equitable for all mankind.
Postscript
As of 2018 the Money Game has changed. It was at that time that the World had a new elected AMANAH (the Global Collateral Trustee) who is now recognized as the principal Trustee for many of the historical bunkered assets in Asia stored there by various Dragon Family members .
The estimated wealth stored in vaults and bunkers in Asia is currently valued in QUADRILLIONS of US Dollars of real physical assets such as gold and precious metals, gem stones, currencies, bonds and titles and priceless artifacts.
The AMANAH thus has sufficient wealth to provide clean drinking water and food for all mankind in short order. He is also investing in providing “free energy” devices to those in need, and advanced frequency based healing computers to heal the poor for free.
These planned humanitarian projects will have an immediate impact on humanity by improving health and by creating more opportunities that will increase human PRODUCTION and CONSUMPTION.
This is currently outside current economic models thus it will be a major GAME CHANGER.
And that is just the beginning. Since the AMANAH’s entrusted wealth is principally in “hard” assets, this will form a new financial foundation that is very much stronger than the Pyramid of Lies. This is real collateral backing of REAL MONEY.
The countries of the EAST will be the first to benefit and their economies will strengthen. The WEST’s fiat colored paper will suffer unless they become more cooperative in curbing their fraudulent ways.
The casinos will suffer as their tokens and colored paper will lose value.
The AMANAH is a harbinger of financial and economic CHANGE.
Right now, all eyes are on Wellington, and the world watched our politicians cower behind a wall of shamefully compromised police officers.
Their yellow bellies were on full display, and millions are witnessing their despicable actions. Regardless of what happens next, exposure of their deplorable behaviour will go down in history as a massive turning point in the battle for freedom.
The lies and tyranny will collapse under the weight of truth piling up. Soon, someone will break ranks, and the dominoes will begin to fall.
We will keep pushing forward until it happens. Some politicians are even starting to make noises in this space as they recognise that this is not a fringe minority.
But, we must keep the pressure on..
Vax mandates divide our nation, impact New Zealanders' ability to work and provide for their families, and participate in life in general. It remains our goal to increase public awareness of these things.
By awakening enough of the people of New Zealand, the mandates will inevitably fall.
Whether it happens today, at the next demonstration, or the one after, it will happen; it is unstoppable.
And, until then, every single action makes a difference.
Here are some incredible wins to acknowledge so far with the Freedom Convoy and EVERYONE involved!
Kiwis in their tens of thousands have stood up and spoken out – they drove in cars, trucks, motorhomes, motorbikes and even push-bikes in the convoy. They stood on roadsides and over-bridges and shared on social media.
People have rallied around to supply food, water, necessities, and support to those dedicated to the cause. THIS is the New Zealand we all know and love.
Hundreds of thousands of New Zealanders have seen us. They have seen the heart of this peaceful movement. They are beginning to understand we are many, and we are standing for them.
The disgraceful behaviour of our politicians and police has been in full sight. The people have seen the refusal of the MPs to come outside Parliament and listen to legitimate democratic protest. They have witnessed the completely unnecessary police brutality in the face of a peaceful stand.
Even the mainstream media has been unable to ignore us any longer, with all newspapers and television channels covering the story (albeit facts often losing to their fiction).
National and Act have shown we have no true opposition in this Government. All are captured. However, they have at least had to move to demand a timeframe to the end of the mandates.
Finally, we have seen ex MPs speaking up - Rodney Hide, Matt King and Winston Peters have been forthright in their condemnation of the Government's treatment of New Zealanders making a peaceful stand.
Our voice and message are being heard. Now is not the time to give up - it is time to think and act strategically.
Those in Wellington are calling for support - and numbers matter!
People ARE legally permitted to gather on the streets surrounding the grounds, so if you are willing and able, let's wrap our support around Wellington.
We know that more people plan to convoy down to Wellington from other parts of the country. If this is your plan, please be mindful of the situation you will be entering and come prepared. Make sure you have somewhere to stay, food, water, and appropriate clothing.
And a reminder that Voices for Freedom stands for integrity, honour and respect. We do not condone aggressive, violent or unlawful behaviour. We encourage people to act calmly and respectfully, even when opposed or challenged, in line with our Code Of Conduct.
In The Meantime..
Let's continue to show the rest of the country, and indeed the world, that Kiwis are peaceful and dedicated in their stand for our freedoms! Let's get out on the streets to stand in solidarity throughout New Zealand.
>>>> AND BE SURE TO CAPTURE IT ON CAMERA <<<<
Remember, we're all in this together. We are going to get out of it together too.
Core Edicts Of The Khazarian Zionist Mafia Top Command (Part III) February 13 2022 | From: VeteransToday / Various
A core edict of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia Top Command is to transform the masses into self-hating, self-defeating, mind-kontrolled dupes who can never understand what is being done to them by the Khazarian Zionist Mafia.
The Khazarian Zionist Mafia (KM) has an age-old inter-generational agenda, and it us necessary for the KM to maintain abject secrecy otherwise the masses will revolt with pitchforks:
We now know for certain there is a method and an age-old inter-generational agenda behind the seeming madness and unimaginable evil of the KM’s Top Chieftains, the soulless criminal psychopaths that control the Khazarian Mafia and set USG policy.
"Yet the individual is handicapped by coming face to face with a conspiracy so monstrous he cannot believe it exists. The American mind simply has not come to a realization of the evil which has been introduced into our midst.
It rejects even the assumption that human creatures could espouse a philosophy which must ultimately destroy all that is good and decent.”
-
FBI Director J. Edgar Hoover, The Elks Magazine, August 1956.
The Khazarian Zionist Mafia agenda is specific:
It is now known that the KM has a specific Agenda. That agenda is to establish the KM’s desired end state, a One-world Global NWO system governed by Lucifer. These Top KM Chieftains believe they will be regenerated to immortality upon the arrival of their descended master Lucifer.
And the Khazarian Zionist Mafia has a select set of methodologies deployed to attain this evil agenda:
And it is now known that the KM has a set of select methodologies used over the last 1,000 years to attain their agenda which is now close to attainment.
And these methodologies include sophisticated mind-kontrol, deployment of synthetic terror and manufactured wars, induced drug addiction slavery, Fiat debt slavery, and a general strategy of “divide and conquer” to create ongoing chaos.
They would perhaps already have attained their unimaginably evil agenda but for recent blockages due to the alternative news of the Internet and a spontaneously emerging populism inside America and Europe because of it.
In their quest to always improve their ability to spy on the masses, the Secret Shadow Government (SSG) which is a KM creation, set up the Internet, believing it would be the greatest spy tool yet devised.
That turned out to be true, but there was a serious side-effect that the Top Chieftains of the KM never expected. That was the quick emergence of the alternative media on the Internet and the steady increase in its users who left their Controlled Major Mass Media (CMMM) to habitually use it to get the news and to start researching current events as well as historical events of the past.
The KM countered this by setting up hundreds of misinformation websites. However, in order to gain any following at all they had to play the “limited hangout” game. They had to include a fair proportion of truth in their stories or no one would use their sites or be subject to any of their propaganda as “bad payloads”.
A lot of these misinformation websites supported by KM Cutouts and proprietaries would put out about 70-80% good info with a periodic very bad misinforming payload. Glenn Beck has been fingered by some as a typical example, others identify Alex Jones too, but there are likely many others. It is known that both periodically do carry some good stories too.
Top of the Pyramid kissing their god of the black sun Satan
What ended up happening with many users was that they became so sophisticated in their processing and understanding of how the world really works that they were not fooled by this”limited hangout” strategy.
Many of these alternative news website users have been able to ignore the bad payloads and select the truth nuggets and connect these dots from many different websites in their heads, and come up with composites of what is really happening that are fairly accurate.
Plus, there are some alternative media websites like Veterans Today or Rense.com which are often the first to dump serious hidden facts and Intel out there for all to use as they wish.
What is the Specific End Game for the Top Chieftains of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia?
These Select Few KM criminal psychopaths believe that as they seat Lucifer in their NWO temple in Jerusalem to be their ruling world master, they will personally be transformed into eternal gods, and will rule the universe forever with their master Lucifer.
The sad fact is that this Khazarian Mafia is just the current expression of this secret sect of Luciferians, going back all the way to ancient Babylonia and beyond. It is the Order of the Snake, but has many other names and is ancient Baal worship driven by a set of root beliefs called Babylonian Talmudism, but it is also known as Luciferianism, Satanism, High Freemasonry, OTO, and many more.
The big problem the KM’s top Chieftains now face is the fact that slowly but surely the masses are finding out about who they are specifically and what their evil agenda is.
Should these KM Top Chieftains be surprised when Goyim find out about this and want them indicted, arrested, jailed and executed for a whole laundry list of unimaginably evil capital crimes including mass-murder, war crimes, terrorism and crimes against humanity, and before the KM can complete its notoriously anti-human, anti-Goyim Globalist NWO Agenda?
More Actual Core Belief Patterns of the KM Top Chieftains
The actual core belief patterns of the KM Top Chieftains are based on their deep Babylonian Talmudic (Luciferian/Satanic) values which they use to determine their Core Edicts by which they establish policies while sitting at the top of their pyramidal Establishment Hierarchy.
The actual core belief patterns of the KM Top Chieftains is an age old secret of these inbred “bloodline” families that form the nexus of the Khazarians and old black nobility. It is allegedly all based on their common secret occult network which insiders call the “Order of the Snake”.
Others have called it the Black Sun, the Reich of the Black Sun, the Great Dragon (the alien ET beast, Draco), the Serpent”, but they all represent the Order of the Snake and ancient Babylonian Talmudism, aka secret Baal worship.
It has been reported that this occult network which covers most of the world, is nothing more than the deep secret of the worldwide Satanic Cult network that is centered in the USA, the UK and Europe that serves up little kids to pedophiles to abuse and more than rarely tortures and sacrifices them.
Here is a secretly recorded, later leaked video clip from a High Freemason ritual in which the first part involved hired women to provide “special” entertainment. You can only guess what is not included in this video clip, former High Freemasons who have attended such special meetings have suggested that these events ended up getting pretty spicy with top floors of expensive hotels rented and prepaid high class hookers for all.
The UK is run by High Freemasonry top to bottom, the police, the courts, the government and this is a poorly kept secret.
In America a lot of these institutions are run by smaller numbers of High Freemasons and OTO members, but this is a closely guarded secret. Some are openly members of the Satanic / Pedophile network that traffics in child sex victims over the whole western world and much of the rest of the world too.
Hitler and his top Nazi command were deeply involved in the Reich of the Black Sun, believed by some researchers to be covert Satanism. Some researchers believe human sacrifice rituals were done in the basement pit of Wewelsberg Castle. And during a short time, it was reported that 17,000 political prisoners were sacrificed in a special building that had hydraulically operated guillotines.
"The only reference I could find was a UK story that documented 16,500 executions by guillotine, but no mention of the hydraulic guillotines."
The Core Edicts of the KM Top Chieftains are oriented to managing Western institutions and culture in such a way to mind-kontrol and manipulate the masses and We The People become dirtied up with drugs and alcohol and self-defeating, shameful behaviors.
But these destructive behaviors also appear to cause individuals to self-hate, self-abuse further, and can lead also individuals to become self-defeating enemies of themselves, their families and society. This of course makes the KM’s attainment of their evil Globalist NWO Agenda so much easier.
In order for the Khazarian Zionist Mafia to attain it Globalist NWO Agenda, the KM must attain its goals:
Destruction of normal male female sex roles;
Diversity, perversity and political correctness as the “new normal”;
Loss of American borders, culture and language;
Out of control medical costs and costs of living due to inflation built created and mandated by the private Federal Reserve System;
No more living wages for employment;
The destruction of the family unit;
No more interest on saving and investments that will match the inflation caused by FRS FIAT “fake money”;
Massive unemployment and no more job security;
The end of unions;
And massive taxation, massive debt slavery and usurious credit card loans;
Corruption of the Judiciary and discarding of the US Constitution by the USG and the Judiciary at all levels;
Proliferation of weird occult networks and sometimes secret promotion of strange blood practices to extend the life of the rich super-elites;
Massive weapons and drug trafficking into American Urban centers by the CIA and the promotion of gangs and use of terror entrapment ops to gain more central power and taxpayer financing;
Socially engineered massive addiction to legal and illegal drugs and alcohol to promote gangs, foment massive chaos, and to destroy the general morality and character of the American Masses;
A generally poor and completely irrelevant public education system secretly designed inside the beltway to dumb kids down and make them good KM mind-kontrolled debt-slaves;
To poison the food and water with GMOs and endocrine disruptors;
To over-vaccinate with toxic vaccines that often cause mini-strokes and autism spectrum disorders in alarmingly high rates in innocent children unable to give adequate consent for themselves with parents too dumbed-down to know better; and
To entrain the masses through super high tech psychotronic induction means, including orbital based Helium 3 powered scalar transmitters, use of cell phone systems and WI-FI, mass-mind-kontrol through TV “programming”, as well as certain secretly deployed ELF ground wave systems and the little understood Lilly waves which can be transmitted through the power grid.
But all these KM curses being deployed against the American Masses have only been able to be deployed because they first got control of almost every single institution, including those of the Federal and State governments, the Judiciary, the Congress, private business, the NGOs and private foundations and think-tanks, the Administration, the High Military Command, American Intel and a now largely militarized LE system absorbed by the new KM-created and -run Homeland Security (DHS).
"Unless people wake up soon and start standing against these KM monsters en masse at every level inside and outside the governments and even within the KM itself, the West will be soon destroyed, depopulated by 90% and there will be no future for our young children at all."
Your mind is always the main target of the Top Command of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia, then your assets and then your very life...
Without the Earth shattering disclosures made by Gordon Duff at the International Counterterrorism Conference in 2014, you would never be reading about the Khazarian Mafia by name anywhere on the Internet, even here.
It was VT Chairman Gordon Duff that first disclosed that the root cause of so-called “world terrorism” was actually the world’s largest organized crime syndicate.
Gordon Duff did not specifically name this world’s largest organized crime syndicate in the first part of his speech which was unclassified and made public. Within minutes of its delivery, this historical ground-breaking speech was scrutinized by every major government and Intel agency, and sent shock-waves around the world.
A short time later it was VT’s Financial Editor and Talk Show host Mike Harris that named this world’s largest organized crime syndicate publicly for the first time ever, and referred to it specifically by its proper name as the Khazarian Mafia.
Without these bold first-time disclosures of Gordon Duff and Mike Harris, VT readers would not have been able to connect the dots and begin to understand what the Khazarian Mafia (KM) is or how it has parasitized America and most of the world.
Comment: Some of these statements are a bit blow-hard, as many have been aware of the 'New World Order' agenda for some time now. All these people really have done is to identify the Khazarian / Zionist element.
Nor would they be able to understand what the KM has done to rise to such world power and where it is within striking distance to take down the whole world and complete its evil Globalist NWO one-world agenda.
And without these bold disclosures you would continue seeing and feeling the negative effects of this world’s largest organized crime syndicate the KM everywhere in your daily life, but you would not know its name, its history, its composition, what empowers it.
Nor would you understand what the overall agenda of this world’s largest organized crime syndicate is. And this syndicate’s agenda just happens to be asset stripping, induced death, war and destruction for profit, power, and world domination, all intended to produce Globalist NWO one-world government end-state run by this world’s largest organized crime syndicate.
And it is now pretty clear that without the emergence of some very high level, very informed and very disgusted Intel Cowboys from all over the world, there would be no major leaks of the secret evil that the Khazarian Mafia (KM) has been perpetrating all over the world and in America, their home economic and military base.
The KM has always known that if various renegade Intel disclosed their secret evil this could be a serious threat to their syndicate’s power.
"That is why they set up so many advanced procedures to compartmentalize all areas of Intel - the higher you go, the more narrow the scope."
This has all been done in an effort to keep high ranking Intel from connecting the dots and understanding that they are working as part of system to destroy their own nation, their own families and humankind itself.
Because when some Intel gain too much information about the KM crimes committed under the cover of invoked “national security” a certain percentage will secretly rebel. That secret rebellion can take the form of sandbagging (working hard but producing little) or leaking damaging information through various complex means.
In recent years Intel Cowboys from all over the world have rebelled because they could not accept the big picture they discovered in their jobs. Some have organized into groups which have become such powerful factions that are able to openly speak out and resist the evils of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia.
It is now known beyond any shadow of a doubt that the KM Top Chieftains who sit at the top of the pyramidal Establishment Hierarchy are the top policy-makers and maintain a set of Core Edicts upon which they base their policy mandates on. These are reflected in USG Laws and most large corporate policies.
This series of articles has disclosed many of their Core Edicts. It’s a fact that the Top Chieftains of the KM control the CIA and other Intel agencies and use so-called “National Security” as cover for their crimes.
The KM cannot continue to exist without their ability to maintain abject secrecy and everyday the Internet, the world’s New Gutenberg Press is eroding that secrecy.
Use of National Security as cover for these serious RICO and International crimes by the KM is itself a most serious crime against the USA, We The People and the World.
The KM is the biggest RICO crime syndicate in America and commits the most serious US and International crimes ever.
Some of these crimes are so serious that they are almost unimaginable such as engineered staged wars with millions of dead and wounded with many are innocent civilians, women and children.
Right now the main Intel agency used by the KM inside America is the Central Intelligence Agency. The CIA is bifurcated and employs many innocent analysts and agents who collect Intel by various means but do not engage in evil, anti-human covert operations.
But there is an evil covert part of the CIA which engages in frequent wetwork, abroad and inside the USA, massive mind-kontrol operations against We The People using super high tech Psychotronics, working with the US Military to traffick in trillions of dollars of illegal narcotics and weapons to raise “off the books” black ops money.
Limitless off-the-books Black Ops money underwrites synthetic terror and advances fascistic agendas
"But the most important function that the CIA and the other Intel agencies that are completely controlled by the KM are the covert operations deployed to create synthetic terror, fake enemies, which are needed to start wars and justify huge military deployments. Mercenaries are hired for this, but there are even more sinister methods used."
Saudi Arabia has always provided a great deal of funding to pick up young orphans off the street and place them in special schools to raise them and mind-kontrol them to function as crazed, suicidal terrorist bombers, painted as Islamic extremists.
These mind-kontrolled subjects can then be triggered anytime they are needed to sacrifice themselves and produce the mass terror needed to start wars and justify more and more centralization of KM power exhibited as invisible Secret Shadow Government (SSG) power and visible USG power.
The Khazarian Zionist Mafia Top Chieftains love to consolidate institutions, and industries in order centralize power and make it much easier for themselves to exert control over the USG and We The People.
That is why they used their Gladio-style, inside-job false-flag attack on America on 9-11-01 as an excuse to consolidate all American Alphabets and Law Enforcement into one centralized hierarchy they labelled Homeland Security (DHS). The name “Homeland Security” itself a mockery of the US Constitution and everything our Founding Fathers fought for in the Revolutionary War.
This new Centralized hierarchical control of all such agencies by the KM’s Top Chieftains makes it easy for the KM to implement their Core Edicts as USG policies (many remaining secret, some made public).
These Top Chieftains of course installed perverted, deeply compromised doofuses at the head of DHS to run it, soulless dupes who will do whatever the KM Top Chieftains mandate, no matter the US Constitution and common decency.
Anyone who crosses them significantly gets whacked by their soulless wetboy teams, usually “arkencided”, a term that arose because of all the Dixie Mafia murders for the CIA surrounding the Mena operation and the Clintons.
The term “arkencide” is when the CIA wetboys murder a whistle-blower or someone deemed as a potential threat for knowing too much that they could become an unnecessary risk later on, or someone who has stepped outside allowed parameters.
In the typical arkencide, it is customary for local police to stand-down at the request of Intel and for a crooked coroner and mortuary to be used. Absurd circumstances are knowingly created to serve as a warning message to anyone else who might be tempted to step outside of allowed parameters.
Here is the bottom line of the Core Edicts of the KM Top Chieftains: To foment large criminal operations to make vast fortunes by which they plan to buy up the whole world and run it themselves, step by step.
These operations include: massive counterfeiting (their own private Fiat Currency rented out to the American users); massive illegal drug trafficking; massive illegal and legal arms trafficking; massive money laundering; bust out schemes against the American People using color of law like the S&L scam, the Enron Scam, the Mortgage Bubble/MERS scam, and the “Bailouts”; Wall Street Plunge Protection Street scam where the USG has acquired about 1/2 of all US stocks through proprietaries, thus driving the stock prices up synthetically; sophisticated eugenics programs to promote obesity, disease and mass death in order to thin the herd by 90%; a secret space war program and secret alliances with certain Alien ET groups; electronic weather control and warfare; and last but the most important operation, large scale psychotronic mind-kontrol.
This Jesse Ventura interview with Dr. Robert Duncan can not be embedded in this article, but for the time being can be watched here.
Conclusion
The bottom line is that the KM is driven by an unimaginably evil inter-generational Globalist NWO Agenda to create a one-world government run by them alone.
Their power is gained and exercised through their counterfeit FIAT Money Power. They have been able to capture most of the world in their spider web of fake money which is nothing but printed and issued debt notes.
And the rest of the world is now catching on, especially the Russian Federation and China. Khadafy caught on, and the KM murdered him and plundered his nation through US Dept. of State doofus Cutouts.
Assad and Syria have caught on and the KM is working overtime trying to depose Assad and destroy Syria’s infrastructure and Putin and the Russian Federation have now completely checkmated the KM in Syria and have decimated the KM/Israeli/USG created ISIS mercenaries.
Iran has caught on and you can bet that the Russian Federation will also protect this ally from KM destruction like they have Syria. The whole world is now closing in on the KM, and it’s going to be a battle to the end; the KM is going to go down hard, but it will go down.
The KM’s game has always been to take over the whole world and rule it themselves as kings running a feudal kingdom, with everyone else their serfs and slaves – at least those remaining 10% who have not all been mass murdered by the time they plan to exercise complete world control.
To complete their evil Globalist NWO one-world Agenda, the KM must continue creating massive wars and running large scale international organized crime scams. They must control the lives and hearts and minds of We The People and convince us that our serfdom is desirable, or at least we are powerless to do anything about it.
Every day the KM’s control is waning, as more and more of their Colossal lies are revealed. We are now all in a race to the finish point, there is only room for one victor, We the People or the Top Chieftains of the Khazarian Mafia. You can be sure of this one thing however.
"If the KM were to have won and complete their agenda they would whack all their doofus Cutouts because they would no longer need them. None of these folks would ever expect such a result, but it’s a given if the KM would have won this battle for Planet earth."
Looking at you John - you are just "the help" - no matter what your higher-up psychopaths have sold you in on
Yes, it’s now a major race between the KM’s efforts to control the people and the people’s public activism to expose these large scale KM crimes anstop them before they mass-murder most of us.
If We The People lose this battle, darkness will ded scend completely over America and the rest of the world.
Putin and the Russian Federation and the Chinese are now hip to this KM evil Agenda and have created a major financial firewall against the KM consisting of the BRICS Nations, the AIIB and new Chinese money wire system and the coming silk road railway and commerce lanes.
In time, this will likely produce an end to the US Petro Dollar as the world’s exchange currency, and may push America over a financial cliff. That alone could mean the end of the KM hegemony.
How much better it would be if We The People rose up at every level and organized to take control of our government before that happens.
How The Frankfurt School Changed American / Western Culture February 12 2022 | From: GarretGalland
How many times have you heard someone lament how much the world has changed from the good old days? You know, the simpler pre-PC period when the world operated according to fairly predictable principles.
But then we woke one day in a world with every bastion of what some might call normalcy under attack. Institutions that 100 years ago appeared unassailable - marriage, for example - are increasingly seen as antiquated. Even the idea of a national character is viewed as wrong-minded and, in the successful societies of the West, as exclusionary and even racist.
How did all this come about? Or, more colloquially, what was the number of the bus that hit us? This article shines the light on the Frankfurt School, an insidious movement that set down roots in the early 1900s.
As you’ll read, it is at the feet of the Frankfurt School that we can lay much of the blame for setting the modern world culturally adrift.
After reading, please pass this edition along. People need to understand the agenda behind much of what is now accepted as the new normal.
How the Frankfurt School Changed American [Western] Culture
The 1950s were a simple, romantic, and golden time in America. California beaches, suburbia, and style. Atlas Shrugged was published, NASA was formed, and Elvis rocked the nation. Every year from 1950–1959 saw over 4 million babies born. The nation stood atop the world in every field.
It was an era of great economic prosperity in The Land of the Free. So, what happened to the American traits of confidence, pride, and accountability?
The roots of Western cultural decay are very deep, having first sprouted a century ago. It began with a loose clan of ideologues inside Europe’s communist movement. Today, it is known as the Frankfurt School, and its ideals have perverted American society.
When Outcomes Fail, Just Change the Theory
Before WWI, Marxist theory held that if war broke out in Europe, the working classes would rise up against the bourgeoisie and create a communist revolution.
Well, as is the case with much of Marxist theory, things didn’t go too well. When war broke out in 1914, instead of starting a revolution, the proletariat put on their uniforms and went off to war.
After the war ended, Marxist theorists were left to ask, “What went wrong?”
Two very prominent Marxists thinkers of the day were Antonio Gramsci and Georg Lukács. Each man, on his own, concluded that the working class of Europe had been blinded by the success of Western democracy and capitalism. They reasoned that until both had been destroyed, a communist revolution was not possible.
Gramsci and Lukács were both active in the Communist party, but their lives took very different paths.Gramsci was jailed by Mussolini in Italy where he died in 1937 due to poor health.
In 1918, Lukács became minister of culture in Bolshevik Hungary. During this time, Lukács realized that if the family unit and sexual morals were eroded, society could be broken down.
Lukács implemented a policy he titled “cultural terrorism,” which focused on these two objectives. A major part of the policy was to target children’s minds through lectures that encouraged them to deride and reject Christian ethics.
In these lectures, graphic sexual matter was presented to children, and they were taught about loose sexual conduct. Here again, a Marxist theory had failed to take hold in the real world. The people were outraged at Lukács’ program, and he fled Hungary when Romania invaded in 1919.
The Birth of Cultural Marxism
All was quiet on the Marxist front until 1923 when the cultural terrorist turned up for a “Marxist study week” in Frankfurt, Germany. There, Lukács met a young, wealthy Marxist named Felix Weil. Until Lukács showed up, classical Marxist theory was based solely on the economic changes needed to overthrow class conflict. Weil was enthused by Lukács’ cultural angle on Marxism.
Weil’s interest led him to fund a new Marxist think tank - the Institute for Social Research. It would later come to be known as simply The Frankfurt School.
Freud (above) was the uncle of Edward Bernays who was an Austrian-American pioneer in the field of public relations and propaganda, referred to in his obituary as "the father of public relations". Bernays' public relations efforts helped to popularize Freud's theories in the United States. Coincidence?
In 1930, the school changed course under new director Max Horkheimer. The team began mixing the ideas of Sigmund Freud with those of Marx, and cultural Marxism was born.
In classical Marxism, the workers of the world were oppressed by the ruling classes. The new theory was that everyone in society was psychologically oppressed by the institutions of Western culture. The school concluded that this new focus would need new vanguards to spur the change. The workers were not able to rise up on their own.
As fate would have it, the National Socialists came to power in Germany in 1933. It was a bad time and place to be a Jewish Marxist, as most of the school’s faculty was. So, the school moved to New York City, the bastion of Western culture at the time.
Coming to America
In 1934, the school was reborn at Columbia University. Its members began to exert their ideas on American culture.
It was at Columbia University that the school honed the tool it would use to destroy Western culture: the printed word.
The school published a lot of popular material. The first of these was Critical Theory. Critical Theory is a play on semantics.
The theory was simple: criticize every pillar of Western culture - family, democracy, common law, freedom of speech, and others. The hope was that these pillars would crumble under the pressure.
The schedule of damaged created by Marx. Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Next was a book Theodor Adorno co-authored, The Authoritarian Personality. It redefined traditional American views on gender roles and sexual mores as “prejudice.” Adorno compared them to the traditions that led to the rise of fascism in Europe.
Is it just a coincidence that the go-to slur for the politically correct today is “fascist”?
The school pushed its shift away from economics and toward Freud by publishing works on psychological repression. Their works split society into two main groups: the oppressors and the victims. They argued that history and reality were shaped by those groups who controlled traditional institutions. At the time, that was code for males of European descent.
From there, they argued that the social roles of men and women were due to gender differences defined by the “oppressors.” In other words, gender did not exist in reality but was merely a “social construct.”
A Coalition of Victims
Adorno and Horkheimer returned to Germany when WWII ended. Herbert Marcuse, another member of the school, stayed in America. In 1955, he published Eros and Civilization.
In the book, Marcuse argued that Western culture was inherently repressive because it gave up happiness for social progress. The book called for “polymorphous perversity,” a concept crafted by Freud. It posed the idea of sexual pleasure outside the traditional norms.
Eros and Civilization would become very influential in shaping the sexual revolution of the 1960s.
Marcuse would be the one to answer Horkheimer’s question from the 1930s: Who would replace the working class as the new vanguards of the Marxist revolution? Marcuse believed that it would be a victim coalition of minorities - blacks, women, and homosexuals.
The social movements of the 1960s - black power, feminism, gay rights, sexual liberation - gave Marcuse a unique vehicle to release cultural Marxist ideas into the mainstream.
Railing against all things “establishment,” The Frankfurt School’s ideals caught on like wildfire across American universities.
Marcuse then published Repressive Tolerance in 1965 as the various social movements in America were in full swing. In it, he argued that tolerance of all values and ideas meant the repression of “correct” ideas.
It was here that Marcuse coined the term “liberating tolerance.” It called for tolerance of any ideas coming from the left but intolerance of those from the right.
It was here that Marcuse coined the term “liberating tolerance.” It called for tolerance of any ideas coming from the left but intolerance of those from the right.
One of the overarching themes of the Frankfurt School was total intolerance for any viewpoint but its own. That is also a basic trait of today’s political-correctness believers.
To quote Max Horkheimer, “Logic is not independent of content.”
Recalling the Words of Winston (Not That One)
The Frankfurt School’s work has had a deep impact on American culture. It has recast the homogenous America of the 1950s into today’s divided, animosity-filled nation.
In turn, this has contributed to the undeniable breakdown of the family unit, as well as identity politics, radical feminism, and racial polarization in America.
It’s hard to decide if today’s Western culture is more like Orwell’s 1984 or Huxley’s Brave New World.
Never one to buck a populist trend, the political establishment in America has fully embraced the ideas of the Frankfurt School and has pushed them on American society through public miseducation. Barack Obama and Hillary Clinton, the beacons of progressivism, are both disciples of Saul Alinsky, a devoted cultural Marxist.
And so we now live in a hyper-sensitive society in which social memes and feelings have overtaken biological and objective reality as the main determinants of right and wrong.
Political correctness is a war on logic and reason.
To quote Winston, the protagonist in Orwell’s dystopia, “Freedom is the freedom to say that 2+2=4.” Today, America, and the West, are not free.
Segregation is back! At this school, white children are taught about their “privilege” while black children are coddled and brought to dedicated spaces to “voice their feelings.” Thank God for their “diversity director.”
The Mainstream Media Lies
February 11 2022 | From: FinalWakeUpCall The media is the Deep State’s most valuable tool - How to protect yourself against brainwashing.
Disinformation: The world is waking up to the fact that for our entire lives we have been lied to. From where we come from, to where we are headed, everything is a huge lie. But the lie we have been living is about to come to a screeching halt.
The Protocols of Zion are the Blueprint for the Deep State’s One World Government-control-operation. Protocol 12 affirms; “In our official statements, we always use an opposite view, and continually do our best to look honest and cooperative.
The words of a statesman do not have to correspond with his actions”. It is advisable to take fifteen minutes of your time to read the Protocols. Don’t just read them. Study them. They explain in precise detail what is going on in the world today and why.
“The media will print halve truths, they will lie, fabricate facts or contradict themselves. We will tranquillise the public mind on political matters, persuade and confuse them.
We will triumph over our opponents, who do not own the press and cannot give full expression to their views. Journalists will be bound by professional secrecy. Not one journalist will betray this secret. To practice journalism, they must have a dark past and the fear of it being exposed”.
The Protocols further explain that the goal of world domination will be achieved by controlling the thinking of the public by monitoring what it hears and by creating new conflicts or restoring old relationships through hunger, poverty, and the spreading of pests and diseases, seducing and diverting the attention of the youth.
“With the help of these methods and more, we will weaken the countries so that they are forced to offer us control over the world”; at least this is their way of thinking; their goal.
Control the narratives over economics and commerce and you control economics and commerce. Control the narratives about politics and government and you control politics and government. This control mechanism is used by the controllers to funnel power to the Elite, in this way effectively turning society into one giant energy farm for the elite class.
So, the media serves selfish goals; often mindlessly; unjustly and untruthfully. The majority of the public have no idea of the fact on whose side the press stands. “We must keep the press firmly under our control. No message may reach the public outside of our consent.”
Thus, in other words, don’t trust the mainstream media to explain the socio-political processes shaping our world with any real accuracy and certainly not without infusing it with their own insidious agendas.
Society is made up of narratives; identity, language, etiquette, social roles, opinions, ideology, religion, ethnicity, philosophy, agendas, rules, laws, money, economics, jobs, hierarchies, politics, government.
They’re all purely mental constructs which exist nowhere outside of the mental noises in our heads.
Zealous journalists learn that they progress much further in their careers by advancing narratives that favour the establishment upon which the plutocrats who own the big media companies have built their kingdoms. They manipulate the narratives of groups.
The master manipulators, are the corporate kings of the modern world. They have learned the secret that every ruler since the dawn of civilisation has known:
Whoever controls the narratives that are believed by a society, is the controller of that society. And that is exactly what President Trump and his Team are doing now.
The Mainstream media may be more widespread because they are better funded but while they have the power of money, we have the power of many. And we have the facts on our side. We need to unite in our fight against the disinformation machine and there are many ways in which everyone can help.
Remember, the mainstream media didn’t just happen one day. It dates back to hundreds of years ago. Media has always been a part of their tactics. Fast forward to today; be aware that government Intelligence took control of the media as early as 1948 and probably even earlier.
The media, to government and their control system is very important. It is their most valuable tool. They can push away any thoughts or arguments that do not serve their agenda.
That is what mass media news is all about. All innocent, honest news can be brushed aside. – The Trump Team has said from the beginning that the Cabal Media will be the last to fall. People are now witnessing the turn of the cabal media happening in real time.
Here are three simple things you can do to read mainstream media news and know instantly what to make of the story and how to categorise the story in your mind, instead of believing it blindly, just because you saw it on TV or read it in a mainstream media newspaper, magazine, or on a website. Think of this as an exercise in mental freedom.
1.
Look at the news through the eyes of history. Does it fit into what is known of historical events? Or are those enforcing mainstream media narratives asking you to believe a sequence of events or a narrative that doesn’t add up logically?
An example; mainstream media reports yet another new war on terror, but historically speaking, it is widely known that the war on terror equals massive loss of liberties and freedoms, massive increases of the State’s power and control over we, the people, while there is no real evidence of the purported terrorism being stopped.
So why accept this piece of mainstream media news?
2.
Look at the news in the light of the stated goals of the Nation; on a ship, no one would ever go out to sea without a compass and a map. So why believe blindly mass media news for what it is, without gauging where this story is heading?
The government and the control system is focused on getting their new world order implemented.
They have admitted and stated this publicly and many papers have been written outlining this. Illegal wars have been launched, and decisions and legislation have been passed consistent with these publicly stated goals of wanting to control the world.
Believe the seriousness of these clearly stated goals of the Deep State and then consider all pieces of mass media events in the light of these clearly stated goals.
Then try to see how the agenda fits into the goals. People actually believe the direction of the world and the news is all one big coincidence without any connection between them. Which is untrue.
3.
People have been brainwashed into thinking that the simple and easy patterns we observe are all a This magical coincidence theory of life and news is the signature of a brainwashed state and a symptom to be avoided at all costs.
Try to grasp what the media is not saying. Look at the news from the inside out, critically analysing mainstream media news. Focus on what they are not saying.
Mainstream media has admitted that their stories are controlled by the government. They are not even hiding this fact. It is up to the people to critically walk through the process and convince yourself why you will not blindly believe mainstream media news.
Break Through the Mainstream Media Hypnosis
These three suggestions will help you to break through mainstream media hypnosis and arrive at the other side, otherwise known as reality.
It’s about reshaping how people think and arming their thinking with common sense in the light of known historical events and stated goals instead of being sucked in by professional powerful Deep State-propaganda.
You may think that propaganda won’t get to you, but these propaganda tricks and media techniques have been proven to work very subtly.
They have been proven to convince even the smartest of people throughout history and they will fool you too if you are not astute and watching carefully with a vigilant mind.
The above techniques are simple methods you can apply to be smarter, instead of a brain-dead zombie who absorbs increasingly more mainstream media lies and propaganda with every day that goes by.
Keep in mind that literally, while you sleep at night they are brewing new stories for the next day. It is all about protecting your mind and your thoughts from the outside world of deception and lies.
Solidly Grounded in Truth and Mental-Reasoning, Free from Fakery and Deception
In time, you will notice, as you become solidly grounded in truth and reason, that mainstream media is not even that good at shaping their lies and deceit. You will start to see the comedy and the surreal nature of the whole circus known as mainstream media news.
You will also see the wide disconnect mainstream media has from the actual reality of truth and reason.
Once you see it this way, you will notice that you are completely mentally free from fakery and deceptive government-controlled mainstream media lies. And, that will be a good reason to celebrate hugely.
As an example; waking up to the news of ISIS is no big deal. ISIS is another new fake terror experiment that the Intelligence agencies have funded and armed in order to maintain their long-term plans. The stated goals are clear and easy to understand.
Mental Stability
Understanding these simple techniques to help shape your mental discernment prior to hearing mainstream media breaking news stories, will give you a mental stability that you cannot imagine.
Just become conscious by choosing it. By acting on those synchronicities, the so-called meaningful coincidences: Acting on calls for moves that inspire us, by taking action through listening to your inner voice coming from your inner-being; your inner-knowing.
Discernment is made possible by paying attention to these instinctive feelings and basic intuitions.
Consciousness means coming from the heart, getting in touch with and going into a state of intuitive knowing. Hence, in contrast to accessing the internet, consciousness allows us to access our ‘inner-net.’
Choosing to become conscious, means detaching oneself from the mind control programming; escaping the effects of the physical, mental, emotional and spiritual prison, devised and erected by the Deep State.
Choosing consciousness puts us on a pathway that’s been denied to us as a race since ancient times.
Not many people know this, but they need to raise their heads above the cosy fortifications and have the courage and conviction to express their intuitive inner thoughts with regard to right and wrong.
Having broken free from the mind programming and the imposition of others, with multidimensional consciousness, escaping the dualistic confinements of matter, energy and space-time, makes anything possible.
The Foundations of Physical Freedom
In fact, there are only two kinds of people on earth and not more. Those who want to control and oppress and those who want to be left alone and be free. Life really is that simple.
Once we see the simplicity of it all, you can be sure that we will begin to taste ‘true freedom’; mental freedom, which is akin to spiritual freedom which is where true freedom actually begins.
The controllers know that their armoury is a lot more fragile, weaker and more vulnerable than what they have led us to believe. They have simply created a fake reality for us to live in, built on air and false words.
Remember, the foundation of physical freedom is the freedom we tend to think of as the only kind of freedom. On the contrary, before you can truly be free, you must be mentally and spiritually free.
Are you taking steps toward the latter? Or are you vulnerable to enslavement with each waking day?
Over the last three days, thousands of kiwis have lined the roads and bridges throughout New Zealand, cheering and waving their flags as the Convoy 20220 NZ, made it's way to Wellington, with a message from the people of New Zealand.
Leave our kids the hell alone. We stand with resolve and will defend our inalienable right to FREEDOM.
We need even more boots on the ground immediately, to backup the hundreds that are at parliament peacefully holding the line for our children.
Everyone needs to mobilize and get to Wellington now!
Support all the thousands of kiwis who lined the roads and bridges throughout the country, cheering and waving their flags in hope as the Convoy passed them carrying their clear message from New Zealand to the government.
Leave our kids the hell alone.
We stand with resolve and will defend our inalienable right to FREEDOM.
Drop what you are doing and get to Wellington now! Call to action information and video coming here.
Bring Resources With You:
Food (For you and to share with others) Water (And means to collect more when it rains on location if you can) Fuel Generators Megaphones Pa systems Video cameras Phones Backup power packs Batteries Solar chargers Hand held radios for communication Banners/Signs (if you already have them prepared)
Organise ongoing backup teams of people and resources to follow you. This is the fight between good and evil, for the future of our beautiful country.
Lives have been destroyed, businesses ruined, children have been injured and killed. Are you going to choose FREEDOM or Tyranny?
Do it for your children, and grandchildren. The time is now!z
“Never Was So Much Owed By So Many to So Few.”
- Winston Churchill
Join CONVOY 2022 NZ Group on Telegram here. View - LIVE stream coverage: www.counterspinmedia.com
Please consider forwarding this email on to share with a friend. Your friend can Sign Up, if they wish to receive important Updates/Information to their inbox. (An unsubscribe link is also included in the footer of every email we send out)
Mathematical Report Proves Human Society Is Too Complex To Be Ruled By A Government February 9 2022 | From: TheMindUnleashed
Society is past the point of being governed. We no longer need a president to function as a healthy society. In fact, the idea of central bodies of government ruling over differing classes of people is just absurd.
We are all just too complex for a ruler! At least, this is what a recent report suggests.
Prior to election day, Vice’s Motherboard published a report called Mathematics, which included proof that democracies are irrelevant to our society today. Social policy, or the idea that one process can work for everyone, has been deemed ludicrous as society is much too complex, and government always fails us in our expectations.
A Complex Organism
We, as humans, have become increasingly complex over time, which has no relation to democracy or communism. And this complexity matters, saysYaneer Bar-Yam, the New England Complex Systems Institutes (NECSI)’s director,
“There’s a natural process of increasing complexity in the world that at some point will run into the complexity of the individual. Once we reach that point, hierarchical organizations will fail.”
Bar-Yam realized how ridiculous it was to organize society into sections of a few. Government officials are, in most cases, detached from individual situations from lack of experience in the area.
Bar-Yam told Motherboard,
“We are raised to believe that democracy is good for us.”
Is this true? I think Democracy is over-rated, and so are other systems such as dictatorships and communism. Their centralized processes and democracies only focus on one or few groups of individuals, still leaving others with no ample representation. It just fails!
Human Complexity
When discussing the individual needs of society, “human action” takes form as a possible solution to this problem. If you look at the human as a unique creature as compared to another, you may get the idea of why we are much too complex to be ruled as a group.
Humans are made from atoms, which make cells and then organs. If you try to describe an individual atom, it’s almost impossible. It’s only possible in relation to collective behavior of the whole. At least, it’s a bit easier.
This works in much the same manner when describing an individual person in a job, as opposed to a workforce. It’s easier to understand the pattern of an entire workforce than to catalog the daily behavior of one worker.
Is There a Solution?
Bar-Yam suggests a solution called a “control hierarchy”, which enables an individual to control only their own actions separately from others. With this, one individual can influence others into taking the same actions.
If this works, it will prove much more effective than hoping the government will influence a larger group into following their lead.
In fact, what government does, in a nutshell, is control groups of people as if they are much simpler beings.
Human Action
In fact, these aren’t new ideas. They are, in fact, ideas that surfaced in 1949 as well. Praxeology, or the study of purposeful behavior (human action), said that humans exist and act for a reason, basically.
“Action is will put into operation.”
Economist Ludwig von Misessaid that those who are detached from a situation cannot possibly know what will happen inside the situation. Although science is pretty accurate at predicting what will happen in a situation, it cannot predict the future without question.
And no matter the similarities from one situation to the next, there will always be incomplete knowledge with any given event or within any new group. It’s apparent that Mises understood the complexity of society way before Bar-Yam was involved in the study.
“Government means coercion and compulsion and is the opposite of liberty.”
Both Mises and Bar-Yam concluded that complexities of the human being, especially the level in which humans have attained at this point, makes it almost impossible for the government to rule effectively.
As we saw with the elections, numerous people refusing to vote, the desire for the governmental rule is on the decline. Choosing leaders obviously doesn’t matter as much anymore, and working as individuals to solve problems may just be what we need to thrive as human beings.
The Dystopian Western World February 8 2022 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various
The West is living the worst of Orwell’s 1984 and Raspail’s Camp of the Saints. As the second decade of the 21st century comes to an end, democracy and free speech no longer exist in the Western World. In all its respects, Western civilization no longer exists.
In the United States, which poses as the model for democracy, a presidential election has just been stolen in full view of everyone.
There is expert testimony by qualified experts about how the voting machines and software were used to bias the vote count for Biden.
There are hundreds of signed affidvits of eyewitnesses who saw the fraudulent use of mail-in ballots to boost Biden’s vote count.
We know for facts that dead people were voted, illegal aliens were voted, out of state residents were voted, and some precincts had more votes cast than there are registered voters and even residents in the precincts.
Despite the abundance of evidence, except for members of state legislatures in some of the swing states, no one is acquainted with the evidence.
The presstitutes speak with one voice and deny that any evidence exists. So do the Democrat election officials in the Democrat-controlled counties in the swing states where the presidential election was stolen.
The courts have refused to even look at the evidence.
The presstitutes misrepresent the courts’ refusals to examine the evidence as the judiciary’s ruling against the validity of the evidence despite the fact that no court has looked at the evidence.
The level of hostility of Biden supporters toward those who protest the electoral fraud is extraordinary. Biden supporters threaten Trump supporters with loss of employment and with arrest and prosecution.
Tucker Carlson on Fox News reviews the extraordinary situation here.
Radicalized blacks, unaware that they are being used by the Establishment, see the stolen election as their chance to rule and to displace white people. That the winner is the Establishment is beyond their grasp.
It is obvious that if the evidence of election theft were bogus, the media would seize the opportunity to discredit President Trump and his supporters’ claims of electoral fraud by investigating the evidence for that purpose.
The Supreme Court knows that that the evidence is real. Being an Establishment institution, the Court does not want to damage America’s reputation by ruling that the election was stolen.
Moreover, the Supreme Court Justices know that the American Establishment and its presstitutes would not accept a decision that the election was stolen.
The Supreme Court understands that the Establishment intends to rid government of a non-establishment president who is hostile to the Establishment’s agendas, which include globalism, destruction of the American middle class, war, more profit and power for the ruling class, and fewer civil liberties for the governed class.
The American Establishment includes the Republican Party.
In order to protect its agendas - war and US hegemony, the concentration of income and wealth, the elimination of the middle class which gave stability to the country and limited the ability of the Establishment to exercise complete control, and the overthrow of the First Amendment and our other civil liberties which limited the Establishment’s ability to control all explanations - the Establishment is willing to pay the price of the destruction of public confidence in American institutions.
The Establishment assumes that it can use the ensuing conflict to its advantage. The country will be further split apart and less able to unite against the Establishment’s self-serving agendas.
Conservatives blame the presstitutes for the Russiagate hoax that for three years kept Trump from his agenda and the subsequent attempt to impeach Trump over false charges that he bribed the Ukrainian president.
In actual fact, these efforts to destroy an elected president of the United States were orchestrated by the CIA and FBI.
It was CIA director John Brennan who alleged Trump was a traitor in league with the Russians, and it was FBI director James Comey who contrived false indictments and false prosecutions of General Flynn, Michael Cohn, Paul Manafort and Roger Stone hoping to extract in exchange for leniency false testimony against Trump.
It is difficult for patriotic conservatives to get their mind around the fact that the CIA and FBI, which they think protect Americans against Russian and Chinese communists and Muslim terrorists, are in fact internal enemies of the people of the United States.
Except for a few Internet websites unknown to the majority of the people in the Western world, the only information people in the West receive is controlled explanations that serve the agendas of the Establishment.
Consider Covid, for example. All experts who are critical of lockdowns, mask mandates, the suppression of effective treatments and the focus on vaccines, and who are skeptical of the seriousness of the pandemic are censored by the print and TV media and by Facebook, Twitter, and Youtube.
And by experts I do not mean doctors and nurses brainwashed in their training by Big Pharma - who are skeptical of the agenda of public health authorities than experts who support lockdowns and vaccines.
The presstitutes serving Fauci portray the dissenting experts’ views as “conspiracy theory.” But clearly Dr. Kamran Abbasi, executive editor of the British Medical Journal and editor of the Journal of the Royal Society of Medicine, is not a conspiracy theorist.
As I recently reported, he has this to say:
"Science is being suppressed for political and financial gain. Covid-19 has unleashed state corruption on a grand scale, and it is harmful to public health. Politicians and industry are responsible for this opportunistic embezzlement.
So too are scientists and health experts. The pandemic has revealed how the medical-political complex can be manipulated in an emergency - a time when it is even more important to safeguard science.
“The UK’s pandemic response relies too heavily on scientists and other government appointees with worrying competing interests, including shareholdings in companies that manufacture covid-19 diagnostic tests, treatments, and vaccines.
Government appointees are able to ignore or cherry pick science - another form of misuse - and indulge in anti-competitive practices that favour their own products and those of friends and associates.”
Yet in place of such expert informed opinion, Western peoples only hear the ignorant propaganda from the bought-and-paid for whores on CNN, NPR, MSNBC, New York Times, Washington Post, and the rest of the paid liars.
There can be no democracy, no accountability, when people only have conrolled explanations that serve the ruling agendas.
The disrespect for free inquiry, the only known basis for the discovery of truth, is so powerful today throughout the Western world that even in the West’s most famous universities - Oxford and Cambridge - censorship is entrenched.
Any student, especially a privileged “person of color” can brand any scientific fact, any historical fact, any expressed view or opinion to be “offensive.”
Those found to be the most offensive are white people whose statues and memorials are being taken down at both Oxford and Cambridge.
The founder of the famous Oxford University Rhodes Scholarships himself has been erased.
Cambridge University’s white academics and administrators have accepted a person of color as their political commissar to control their lectures, choice of words, and reading lists in order to ensure that no truth can emerge that might be declared by some ignorant student “offensive.”
Of course, white students cannot complain that it is offensive to denigrate the white creators of British accomplishments as racists.
The use of political commissars to control what can be spoken was the way Stalin controlled Russia. This Stalinist practice has now been institutionalized throughout the Western world in schools, universities, media, corporations, and government.
Oxford University, in an act of contrition, has proudly announced that admission to Oxford will no longer be based on the outmoded and racist concept of merit.
Oxford University declared that the university is reserving 25 percent of its annual admissions to those unqualified to be at Oxford.
How are those unqualified to be at Oxford to succeed in graduating?
According to Oxford, before they begin on their degree studies they will be given up to two years in remedial preparation so that they become qualified to attempt receiving a degree.
In other words, they will be coached through the process. Such an act of contrition cannot possibly be permitted to fail.
In other words, Oxford has abandoned merit and is discriminating against those students who displayed merit (and their parents who fostered merit) in favor of those who did not.
Twenty-five percent of those qualified to be at Oxford will not be permitted to be there in order that those not qualified to be there can be. This is what “affirmative action” amounts to.
Cambridge has abandoned academic freedom and subjected the knowledge of its distinguished faculty to censorship in subservience to the idea that truth can hurt feelings and be offensive.
A university that values feelings more than truth is not a place where learning can take place.
In the event you think I am exaggerating the direness of the situation, here is an emeritus professor at the Uniersity of Kent in Canterbury explaining the factual situation:
The situation is so bad that even the professor himself is trapped in his opponents’ use of language. He refers to the truths under attack as the “dissident views.”
In the Western World the policing and censorship of thought and expression has now been institutionalized.
As the native-born white inhabitants of these countries have no right or privilege to censor the attacks on them, they are set-up for second class citizenship leading eventually to extermination.
Their civilization will proceed them in extermination. Indeed, it is already gone. White people are people without a culture and without a country.
The Bullshit Philosophy Of Positive Thinking
February 7 2022 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit Are you tired of hearing people tell you to just "stay positive" when life kicks you in the teeth and all you want is to cry? Are you fed up with reading self-help books that promise to help resolve your life problems, when in reality all they advice you is to "keep a positive mindset" and do nothing more?
If so, I'm sure my new article will resonate with you. It's titled "The Bullshit Philosophy of Positive Thinking" - and for a good reason. I wrote it because, like you, I'm done with all the bullshit the self-help industry is trying to sell us and so many people fall for.
My aim behind writing this is to dispel the myth of "positive thinking", and to show how we can effectively deal with our problems, not by negating them - as the philosophy of positive thinking urges us to do - but by accepting them.
“Just think positively and all your problems will vanish into thin air. Don’t care about taking action to create the life you want – just sit where you are and visualize with positive intent that everything’s going to be alright.”
This is the philosophy that many self-help coaches, authors and so-called spiritual teachers are preaching. It has been named “positive thinking” and is selling pretty well, considering that the positive thinking industry is a multi-billion dollar industry.
But what if I told you that it’s total bullshit?
You might be thinking: “What the hell, Sofo, have you gone crazy? Your entire blog is about how to overcome suffering and live a better life – in other words, about how to let go of the negative and experience the positive – and now you are telling me that positive thinking is bullshit?”
Yes, that’s exactly what I’m telling you. But before you’re too quick to judge, let me explain myself.
Shutting Your Eyes Won’t Make Your Problems Disappear
If you look at life without the filters of ideology, you will see that it contains both positive and negative realities: There’s pleasure and pain, love and hate, peace and war, and so on and so forth.
According to the philosophy of positive thinking, however, we shouldn’t think about the negative side of life, and, in fact, we should pretend that it doesn’t even exist. This way, we are told, we won’t be affected by it.
Not only that; if we don’t think about it and instead focus on the positive side, the negative will go away just like that.
“Don’t worry about the starving children in Africa. Just pray for them and they will be alright.”
“Don’t worry about rising sea levels, environmental pollution, and biodiversity loss. Just keep a positive mindset and our planet will recover from all the damage that has been inflicted on it.”
“Don’t worry about your job that you hate or your relationships that are messed up. Just visualize that you’re already living the life of your dreams and you will soon find the ideal partner and the perfect career.”
Needless to say, positive thinking won’t do a damn thing about all the above. The African children will keep on dying in millions from starvation, our planet will keep on being harmed, and your life will keep on sucking.
In fact, things will get even worse. By not paying our problems any attention and actually doing something to resolve them, with time they are bound to become more and more complicated and hence increasingly affect us and the world we live in.
“Look, here’s the little trick I use that makes all my problems disappear.” - Master Positive Thinker
To give you an analogy, positive thinking is like being in a house that’s on fire, while trying to convince yourself that everything’s OK, believing that this way the fire is going to disappear. Of course, the fire will keep on burning and growing wilder until it eventually consumes the entire house and yourself along with it.
That’s why I call positive thinking a bullshit philosophy: Not only doesn’t it work, it’s counterproductive too – that is, it creates the exact opposite results of what it seeks. The question, then, is why do so many people buy into it?
The Appeal of Positive Thinking
Somewhere I read the following profound words:
“Do not be afraid to accept ugly truths, and never be afraid to reject beautiful lies.”
Unfortunately, the wide majority of us (and by “us” I mean “humans”) don’t hesitate for a moment to accept lies that are beautiful and reject truths that are ugly.
That’s because ugly truths remind us of serious life problems that we need to resolve, and to do so we need to go through a lot of hardship and pain. And who likes to experience hardship and pain?
So we tend to avoid facing our problems. And what’s the best way to do so? To not look at them at all, in a desperate effort to fool ourselves that they don’t exist.
It’s no wonder, therefore, that so many people buy into the (bullshit) philosophy of positive thinking. They want to hear beautiful lies that will make them feel that everything’s alright, and hence that they needn’t stress about anything.
And since we are living in a world where money is the ruling force, of course there are going to be some cunning individuals who are willing to sell positive thinking and exploit others’ insecurities for their financial gain.
Personally, through my writing I like to state the truth as it is, even if it’s at times terribly ugly. I know that many of you - my readers - might be put off by it, but I also know that this is the only way to face our problems and deal with them, on a personal and a collective level.
So if you’re a long-time fan of The Unbounded Spirit, I’d like to take a moment to praise you for being such a badass reader and a committed seeker of truth.
From Positive Thinking to Realistic, Action-Based Thinking
Imagine you are chronically ill, suffering from a painful, debilitating disease. You can pretend all you want that your disease isn’t serious, and have faith that you’ll soon recover to good health, without doing anything to treat your condition. However, in reality this will do nothing to help you heal - your disease will keep on being there, and chances are that it will be worsening as you age.
Now imagine that you, instead, decided to let a doctor have a look at you and tell you what is the underlying cause of your disease and how to treat it. The doctor might inform you that the treatment involves some pain - it could be that you need surgery or to take a heavy dose of medication with possible side effects.
But you know that, no matter the extra pain you may undergo during the treatment, in the end it will be worth it. That’s because afterwards you’ll be relieved of the chronic pain caused by your disease, while the additional pain caused by the treatment will only be temporary. So you decide to treat your disease, and get back to being healthy.
Like in the above example, if we wish to overcome our life problems, then we need to do something about them. By that I don’t mean to merely repeat positive affirmations in our minds and wish that all is going to be perfectly fine.
Rather, I mean to stand up from our chairs, roll up our sleeves and take concrete action. But first we need to accept our problems, instead of denying them, as the philosophy of positive thinking urges us to do.
We need to look at them in the eye, examine why they are there, and search for ways to effectively deal with them.
Of course, this can be quite a tough thing to do. To admit that something is wrong with our lives is a bitter pill to swallow. And to change it might require painstakingly hard work.
But, whether we like it or not, there’s no other way to go about it.
Either we work our problems out and suffer for a short while, or we ignore them and suffer for as long as we’re alive.
New Mind-Blowing Experiment Confirms That Reality Doesn’t Exist If You Are Not Looking At It
February 6 2022 | From: TheMindUnleashed According to a well-known theory in quantum physics, a particle’s behavior changes depending on whether there is an observer or not. It basically suggests that reality is a kind of illusion and exists only when we are looking at it.
Numerous quantum experiments were conducted in the past and showed that this indeed might be the case.
Now, physicists at the Australian National University have found further evidence for the illusory nature of reality. They recreated the John Wheeler’s delayed-choice experiment and confirmed that reality doesn’t exist until it is measured, at least on the atomic scale.
Thought-Provoking Findings
Some particles, such as photons or electrons, can behave both as particles and as waves. Here comes a question of what exactly makes a photon or an electron act either as a particle or a wave. This is what Wheeler’s experiment asks: at what point does an object ‘decide’?
The results of the Australian scientists’ experiment, which were published in the journal Nature Physics, show that this choice is determined by the way the object is measured, which is in accordance with what quantum theory predicts.
“It proves that measurement is everything. At the quantum level, reality does not exist if you are not looking at it,” said lead researcher Dr. Andrew Truscott in a press release.
The original version of John Wheeler’s experiment proposed in 1978 involved light beams being bounced by mirrors. However, it was difficult to implement it and get any conclusive results due to the level of technological progress back then. Now, it became possible to successfully recreate the experiment by using helium atoms scattered by laser light.
Dr. Truscott’s team forced a hundred of helium atoms into a state of matter called Bose-Einstein condensate. After this, they ejected all the atoms until there was only one left.
Then, the researchers used a pair of laser beams to create a grating pattern, which would scatter an atom passing through it just like a solid grating scatters light. Thus, the atom would either act as a particle and pass through one arm or act as a wave and pass through both arms.
Thanks to a random number generator, a second grating was then randomly added in order to recombine the paths. This was done only after the atom had already passed the first grate.
As a result, the addition of the second grating caused interference in the measurement, showing that the atom had traveled both paths, thus behaving like a wave. At the same time, when the second grating was not added, there was no interference and the atom appeared to have traveled only one path.
The Results and Their Interpretation
As the second grating was added only after the atom had passed through the first one, it would be reasonable to suggest that the atom hadn’t yet ‘decided’ whether it was a particle or a wave before the second measurement.
According to Dr. Truscott, there may be two possible interpretations of these results. Either the atom ‘decided’ how to behave based on the measurement or a future measurement affected the photon’s past.
“The atoms did not travel from A to B. It was only when they were measured at the end of the journey that their wave-like or particle-like behavior was brought into existence,” he said.
Thus, this experiment adds to the validity of the quantum theory and provides new evidence to the idea that reality doesn’t exist without an observer. Perhaps further research in the field of quantum physics and more thought-provoking evidence like this will completely change our understanding of reality one day.
“If quantum mechanics hasn’t profoundly shocked you, you haven’t understood it yet.”
- Niels Bohr
David Wilcock is a researcher, writer, author and lecturer who has generated an enormous amount of material on this subject and many related ones. Discover more at: DivineCosmos
Is The Globalist "Reset" Failing? The Elites May Have Overplayed Their Hand December 16 2020 | From: Zerohedge / Various
One aspect of narcopaths (narcissistic sociopaths) that is important to remember is that they live in their own little world in which their desires and bizarre dysfunctions are normalized.
They believe themselves superior to most people because they are predatory, and don’t suffer from annoying hang-ups like empathy and conscience. They generally tend to believe they have pulled the wool over everyone’s eyes the majority of the time. They think that you are a submissive idiot, and that when they bark an order, you will simply jump to attention because you “believe”.
Almost every aspect of the globalists and their behavior indicates they are a club or cult of narcopaths.
Their obsessive need to control as well as to corrupt and destroy in order to get what they want is not an extension of mere greed, it is a deep-seated aspect of who they are as beings. It is a defining mechanism at the core of their character.
They are real world monsters, like vampires attempting to blend into an unsuspecting population.
In their arrogance, then tend to expect they can drain the public dry at will without being resisted or exposed. The problem is, as soon as they start to feed and destroy they draw attention to themselves.
Eventually, they will attract the suspicions of the public, along with some vampire hunters. Unless they find a way to hide a stake through the heart is inevitable.
I have been writing about the threats of globalism and the “reset” for many years now, and I have noted for some time two separate quandaries; one affecting the liberty movement and the other affecting the globalists:
1.First, criminals tend to brag about their crimes when they think that it’s too late for anyone to do anything about them.
I predicted the globalists would be very open in revealing their agenda the moment they believed themselves “untouchable”.
For the freedom loving public this suggests that in 2020 going into 2021 that the elites must think there is nothing that can be done to stop the machine; they are so blatant in their calls for the global “reset”, a cashless society, totalitarian lockdowns and a surveillance state that no one in their right mind can claim these notions are “conspiracy theory” anymore.
The fact is, the “conspiracy theorists” were RIGHT ALL ALONG, and now there is nothing anyone can say about it.
2.Second, I have also argued in the past that the globalist push for a “new world order” is a double edged sword that could very well end up annihilating them.
As they attempt to initiate their reset agenda, they become more and more exposed; they can no longer lurk in the safety of the shadows and there is no going back once the process is started.
Once the globalists become widely known, they must either swiftly take control through engineered chaos and collapse, or face retribution that could eliminate a cabal that took them centuries to build.
Vampires must make the rest of the world a dark place before leaving the shadows, or they risk dying in the light of day
There are two schools of thought in the liberty movement; one suggesting that the globalist agenda is fixed and unstoppable and that the best anyone can do is survive.
The second suggests that the reset can be stopped and the globalists can be brought to justice. I stand in both camps.
There are aspects of the reset that are indeed fixed and that cannot be undone.
For example, numerous national economies including the US are in the midst of a stagflationary collapse and there is nothing that can be done to reverse it. Perhaps a decade ago we could have changed course, but now it is too late.
The pain can be reduced if people quickly end their dependency on the system and create localized trade networks of their own, but the economy as we know it right now is dead and it is not coming back anytime soon.
I do not see this, though, as a win for the elites. Crashing the economy is one thing, rebuilding it into the collectivist dystopia they desperately want is another.
I am seeing some encouraging signs these days that the globalist reset is NOT a sure thing, and those that know my work know I have never been one for misplaced optimism. Specifically, the exploitation of the pandemic response as a means to ram through numerous draconian restrictions does not seem to be going exactly as the elites planned.
I have to look back at Event 201 to really gauge the state of the game, because what the elites planned and what has happened do not completely match up.
For those not familiar, Event 201 was a type of “war game” held by globalists from the World Economic Forum and the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation.
The scenario? A pandemic outbreak of a coronavirus which would spread like wildfire and kill a predicted 65 million people. The simulation was held only a couple of months before the real thing happened at the start of 2020.
In the year since the outbreak, the globalists have attempted to enforce nearly every plan that was outlined during Event 201, including using social media to censor or restrict any news or information outside of the establishment approved narrative (Yes, narrative control was discussed at the event in great detail).
Klaus Schwab of the World Economic Forum has consistently and excitedly applauded the pandemic crisis as a “perfect opportunity” to institute the “reset” that the globalists have been talking about for years.
Unfortunately for them, the virus has not been anywhere near as deadly as they appear to have hoped.
With a death rate of well below 1% for anyone outside of a nursing home with preexisting conditions, the establishment has now been forced to pump up infection numbers as a means to terrorize the populace because the death numbers are not enough to convince people to willingly hand over their freedoms.
The Infection Fatality Rate (IFR) for Covid 19 not counting nursing home deaths with preexisting conditions is only 0.26% of those infected.
There is a propaganda meme being passed around these days that tries to exaggerate the danger of death from Covid, and it goes a little something like this:
"Covid has killed more people that the Vietnam War and the Gulf Wars combined in a single year, therefore your freedoms are forfeit…”
This is an idiotic talking point but luckily no one is buying it.
Over 40% of Covid deaths are people that are already sick and on the verge of dying anyway(And no, refusing to wear masks is not the same as endorsing “death panels”, because a death panel is about socialists refusing treatment to people at risk because of their age.
No one is suggesting that old people be refused treatment, and they always have the option of staying under quarantine if they fear they will become infected. They are already retired and receiving social security, perhaps if we are going to stimulate then the bailout money should go to those most at risk so that the rest of us can continue on with normal life?)
Dr Shiva - The Elite Have Enslaved Us In Their Illusion, It’s Time To Back The Country
Hundreds of thousands of people die every year from diseases and illnesses including the flu, common colds and pneumonia, yet, the prospect of abandoning the Bill of Rights, submitting to economic shutdowns and wearing a muzzle on our faces wherever we go was never brought up before.
Why should we ask 99.7% of Americans or the world to accept medical tyranny just to make .26% of the population feel safe?
People who question the mandates are called “selfish”, but even if I was one of the people susceptible to the virus, I would NEVER demand that 99% of the population bow to totalitarianism at the off chance that I might live a little while longer. Now THAT would be selfish.
Though Big Tech has sought to suppress or censor studies that run contrary to the mainstream narrative, this has only led more people to question the motivations of governments pushing the mandates.
After all, the mainstream media keeps saying that we should “listen to the science”, but they ignore or censor the science.
So, if the pandemic response is not based in science, then it must only be about control.
Many Westerners are not as stupid as the elites think. They see the inconsistencies in the rhetoric and the data and they are increasingly prone to refuse to comply.
This might be why the establishment is suddenly rushing out at least two Covid vaccines in the span of half a year; they have to get the vaccine phase of the Reset underway before too many people jump from the panic bandwagon.
The vaccine rush and the claims of effectiveness of 94% to 95% from Pfizer and Moderna are suspect. The average effectiveness of most vaccines is around 50% or less, and these are vaccines with hundreds of trials and years of usage.
Somehow, Pfizer and Moderna were both able to produce a vaccine for a SARS type virus when multiple governments tried for over a decade to produce vaccines for SARS in China and were unsuccessful, and they were able to achieve 95% effectiveness?
Many people are not buying the vaccine story, and this is perhaps why the elites are jumping headlong into vaccination so fast. Consider this fact:
Here I think we have our explanation for the vaccination bonanza. The elites know that a third of Americans (and probably Europeans) will not take the vaccine regardless of any propaganda they dish out.
They also know that 60% of Americans are unlikely to take the vaccine unless they can show an effectiveness rate of at least 75%.
Neither Moderna nor Pfizer have actually produced any evidence that their vaccines are capable of prevented severe illness or death from Covid, so, their effectiveness rate is based on “projections” of success according to their minimal trials.
Meaning, the effectiveness rate of 95% is completely arbitrary.
Why did they go with such a high number instead of a more realistic 50% to 60%? Because the polls say they need an epic effectiveness rate in order to convince Americans to take the vaccine. I think it is really as simple as that.
Americans are skeptical of the vaccines for a number of reasons. The reality that they are minimally tested and rushed out in less than a year is one reason .
The fact that the government and the media have been caught censoring or lying about Covid data is another reason.
People just don’t trust the elites, and who can blame them?
Who would trust a cabal of psychopaths to inject them with an unknown viral cocktail? Maybe their intentions are not so pure?
Maybe this is what Bill Gates meant when he stated in his Ted Talk that “vaccines and reproductive services” could help contribute to a reduction of the Earth’s population of 10% to 15% as a means to “stop global warming."
Why would Bill Gates mention vaccines in the same breath as “reproductive services” in reference to population reduction?
Aren’t vaccines supposed to help people live longer?
Well, the Pfizer VP’s warning about the Covid vaccine is ringing bells for me. Maybe the Covid vaccine won’t make you sick, or kill you.
Maybe you will live a long life free of coronavirus, but you’ll find out a few years after taking the vaccine that you won’t ever be able to have kids.
Watch the movie ‘Children Of Men’ to get a sense of what the future might be like if the globalists get their way.
In the meantime, the elites are trying with everything they have to convince the public that they must abandon notions of civil liberties in the name of survival and “the greater good”.
They are already talking about how things will never go back to normal, and the changes being made today will stay in place for many years to come.
Governments are in the media right now claiming the vaccines “will not be mandatory”. This is a lie.
At the same time they are putting mandates in place to require you to prove you are vaccinated in order to go to public places and even to go to work. Basically, you take the vaccine or you die from poverty. This is not a choice.
But, I see millions of Americans standing in opposition to this agenda. I see sheriffs and police across the country refusing to enforce the agenda, even in hard-left states like California.
I see protests in lockdown states like Michigan, California and New York. I see mass protests in Europe. I see the Reset scheme being exposed and the truth breaking into the mainstream.
I see something rising to the surface, and I smell that gunpowder scent of rebellion, and I like it.
I’m not pessimistic about the future. I know a crash is coming. I know a fight is coming. But right now what I see is a fight that can and will be won by those that respect the principles of freedom.
From 2018: Remember The Pandemic That Was Going To Wipe Out Humanity? We’re Still Here February 4 2022 / August 22 2018 | From: JonRappoport
Every few years, a new virus shows up that, experts tell us, can wipe out half the world in six months... and then it doesn’t happen.
I could give you several examples. In this piece, let’s harken back to SARS, the vague flu lookalike that suddenly showed up in 2003 and was going to decimate the Earth.
When SARS hit, the World Health Organization (WHO) put the world on notice not to fly into Toronto. The city lost billions of tourism dollars.
The fabled “coronavirus,” touted as the cause of SARS, was evil and covert and unique. So said ten WHO labs, which took over all official research on the “plague.”
But on May 1, 2003, Dr. Frank Plummer, head of the WHO lab in Winnipeg, issued a blockbuster to a SARS summit in Canada. He was now finding the coronavirus in ZERO percent of SARS cases.
Weeks before, Plummer had said eighty percent of patients showed the virus, then that had dropped to sixty, forty, thirty, and now it was ZERO.
You have to understand that even eighty percent is not sufficient to call the virus the cause of any disease condition.
But ZERO?
Yes, they all have the disease, the same disease, and we have the virus behind it all. The virus is present in ZERO percent of cases.
And the doctor saying this is a consummate insider, the chief honcho at Canada’s WHO lab. WHO being the agency, along with the CDC, that is in charge of all research on SARS.
Understand, given the fact that SARS is supposedly composed of a list of vague symptoms - cough, fever, fatigue, lung infection - the coronavirus is the only thing that is tying these cases together - AND WHEN THAT VIRUS PROVED TO BE MEANINGLESS, all the cases were set adrift, so to speak, joining the ranks of regular old flu and lung infection.
And the SARS death rate was low, so low the whole thing turned out to be a dud. A phony dud.
Of course, no one at the CDC or WHO admitted this. These people are experts at “moving on.” And they’re adept at writing history to revise facts and cover their backsides.
But a whole parade of fake pandemics - and attendant dire warnings - does, over time, achieve one objective: it conditions people to accept the lie that vaccines are the best solution to illness.
And that’s no small feat. It’s especially important when you consider the fact that the CDC, which is tasked with overseeing vaccine safety and efficacy, buys and sells $4 billion worth of vaccines a year. This is BUSINESS we’re talking about, and in order to promote business, PR people cook up all sorts of schemes.
Pandemics, even if they don’t pan out, are clever propaganda.
Also, the horror story of GERMS that can cause plagues anywhere in the world at the drop of a hat - the ceaseless drumbeat of germs, germs, and more germs - obscures all sorts of environmental causes of illness and death.
For example, toxic chemicals produced by major and favored corporations.
“It’s the virus”is the greatest cover story on planet Earth.
Don’t forget that one.
Oh - you want to know the official figures on SARS? 8,000 cases worldwide, 774 deaths, between 2002 and 2003. No cases on the record since 2004.
By any standard, that’s a DUD. But go ahead, read the official accounts and histories. See if you can find one clear admission that the whole thing was nonsense. Good luck.
Remember, it’s not the pandemic that’s important. It’s the warning about the pandemic. That’s what moves product off the shelves…
Resetting Politics And The Media February 3 2022 | From: NZPCR / A / Various
It seems a Government with absolute power is not averse to breaking election pledges.
Before the election, Labour was clear – they would not introduce a capital gains tax, nor a wealth tax. The only change in income tax would be an increase to the top rate of tax from 33 cents to 39 cents for those earning over $180,000 a year.
When pressed on whether there might be other tax increases by Newstalk ZB’s Heather du Plessis-Allan, Finance Spokesman Grant Robertson was clear: “there’ll be no other changes to tax beyond what we’ve announced.”
When Heather asked, “What about the bright-line test?” Grant Robertson said, “No”.
“Not the rate, and not the years?” asked Heather. “No”, said Grant, clearly ruling out any increase at all to the bright-line test.
The bright-line test treats gains from the sale of residential property – excluding the family home – as income if the property is sold within the regulated period. When National introduced the test in 2015, the regulated period was set at 2 years. In 2017 Labour extended it to five years, and now Grant Robertson has asked Treasury’s advice on extending it even further.
If they go ahead and extend the test, Labour’s pre-election promises will count for nothing.
This week we also saw our super-hero PM rising in Parliament to address a crisis. It seems we are all in such peril that a ‘climate emergency’ has had to be declared for New Zealand.
But it was all show. There is no real-life climate emergency. The only climate emergency is a political one created by the United Nations’ alarmist climate models.
Any computer model that tries to predict the future climate by only taking into account the impact that the 4 percent of carbon dioxide produced by mankind has on the climate – and not the other 96 percent produced by nature, nor the influence of the sun, the clouds, precipitation, wind, oceans, and the myriad of other factors that significantly influence the climate – is always going to be wrong.
At least when Professor Neil Ferguson of Imperial College in London produced his Covid-19 forecasts that grossly exaggerated the number of deaths, causing governments around the world – including ours – to impose harsh lockdowns, his computer models were quickly discredited.
Not so with the UN’s flawed climate models – in spite of the best efforts of scientists over the years, including 500 who challenged the UN just last year claiming, “The general-circulation models of climate on which international policy is founded are unfit for their purpose”.
Regrettably, nothing changes. Governments continue to squander vast amounts of taxpayers’ money on damaging climate policies based on the UN’s defective models.
The problem is, that for politicians like Jacinda Ardern, who understands better than most that the language of panic and fear is one of the most effective instruments of political control, those climate models are gold – they are creating the alarm that is paving the way for the introduction of extremist policies that will destroy our economy in the name of saving the planet.
This week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator Gideon Rozner, a journalist and Director of Policy at the Australian Institute of Public Affairs, believes that as a result of the election, “New Zealand is in for a dangerous three years” – at the hands of a “brilliant politician” but a “grossly incompetent administrator”:
"New Zealand has been hit particularly hard by the Ardern government’s heavy-handed coronavirus response… According to the OECD, New Zealand’s GDP could fall by 10 percent in 2020. Likewise, unemployment is tipped to rise to just under 9 percent in 2021 as New Zealand’s $14bn corona wage subsidy program ends. Public debt will soar from 19 percent of GDP in 2019 to 56 percent in 2026…
“As for what Ardern has planned for a second term, the details are patchy. Labour ran something of a ‘small target’ strategy during the election, relying on the Prime Minister’s star power and perceived success in warding off the coronavirus.
“But from what we do know about their ‘policy-lite’ platform, Labour will likely exacerbate New Zealand’s economic woes. Hiking income tax, re-regulating the industrial relations system and a bloodcurdling plan for 100 per cent renewable energy by 2030 could turn the corona-induced economic shock into a permanent state of impoverishment for thousands of Kiwis…
“The only hope for New Zealand now is that whatever horrifying plans that Labour has in store, Jacinda Ardern is just as hopeless at actually implementing them in her second term as she was in her first.”
Gideon wrote his article just after the election, saying, “Jacinda Ardern is perhaps the worst person to lead New Zealand through this economic turbulence”, in light of her “hard-left political temperament, a degraded and politicised public sector, and a largely uncritical and compliant media.”
He’s not wrong. And as far as the media is concerned, things are getting a whole lot worse.
Stuff, one of the country’s biggest media businesses, not content with becoming an echo chamber for radical climate activism – to the point where they will not publish anything that challenges the validity of UN’s fabricated climate crisis – has now lost what remaining semblance of credibility they had by becoming a mouthpiece for Maori sovereignty extremism.
Monday’s grovelling front page apology to Maori for racist reporting, left the public gobsmacked. There now appears to be no hope of balanced reports on racial issues in any of their newspapers.
Not only that, but they are now even refusing to publish advertising that promotes democracy – when it involves Maori seats on local councils. Northland Democracy is currently exercising its legal right to petition three of the four local councils that voted to introduce Maori wards.
With one of those – the Northland Regional Council – even writing to the Minister of Local Government requesting a moratorium on petition rights, had Stuff been a media group of merit, it would have reported on those bullying tactics, instead of refusing to publish innocuous advertisements promoting democracy – see the details here.
New Zealand needs an independent Fourth Estate and balanced reporting from the media – not political activism. One wonders how Stuff will reconcile their new position with the principles of the Media Council, which state:
"Publications should be bound at all times by accuracy, fairness and balance, and should not deliberately mislead or misinform readers by commission or omission. In articles of controversy or disagreement, a fair voice must be given to the opposition view.”
How far Stuff will go with its political activism remains to be seen. But without a doubt, never has the need for a strong Fourth Estate been as great as it is now – especially in light of our Prime Minister’s global ambitions.
Jacinda Ardern is already incorporating the UN’s radical socialist Agenda 2030 into New Zealand’s legal and regulatory framework:
"My Government is doing something not many other countries have tried. We have incorporated the principles of the 2030 Agenda into our domestic policy-making in a way that we hope will drive system-level actions.”
But that is not enough.
She’s planning to advance her socialist world-view onto New Zealand using the economic destruction created by the pandemic to ‘reset’ the economy and ‘build back better’.
During the lockdown, Grant Robertson outlined the Government’s plan:
"We must make this the opportunity to reset our economy, to take account of the massive disruption to some sectors, but also to address some of the long standing challenges we face…
This work will require us to develop new ways of working and break down the barriers between partners in our economy. We have formed a core Ministerial Oversight Group for this work with the Prime Minister, the Deputy Prime Minister, myself and Minister Parker.
We will soon be reaching out to both Ministerial colleagues but also the private sector, unions and more to have input into this work.”
“While Covid-19 and climate change provide a shock to the system, they also provide us with an opportunity, a chance to reset our focus and build back better.
Do this right and we end up with a stronger, more profitable and more sustainable economy.”
Earlier this month Jacinda Ardern informed an audience:
"I don’t need to tell you all that any recovery plan for New Zealand cannot, and should not, be a return to the status quo.
It is about taking a crisis and turning it into a once in a life time opportunity to build back better.”
Building back better was also one of the main themes of last week’s ‘Speech from the Throne’, which was delivered by the Governor General at the State Opening of Parliament.
She explained the Prime Minister has three ‘overarching’ objectives – keeping New Zealanders safe from Covid-19, accelerating our economic recovery, and laying the foundations for a better future.
According to the PM, “the recovery offers an opportunity to reshape the way things are done in New Zealand, to innovate and improve our position and our economy”.
She outlined “a broader view of success… New Zealand’s response to COVID would be insufficient if it were to simply return us to the way we were before the virus.”
She wants to use the power of the State to re-shape New Zealand:
"Recovering and rebuilding entails determined and connected action by government.
That action can, and will, be used to reshape the economy to be more productive, more sustainable, and more equitable… The way we choose to govern is also a tool for change.”
British MP the Rt Hon Sir John Redwood, a former Chief Policy Advisor for Margaret Thatcher, could have been responding to our PM’s speech, when he stated:
"I have no problem with the idea of building better or investing in a better future, but I do have problems with some of the agendas drawn up in the name of the Great Reset."
The Great Reset agenda, which lies behind Labour’s ambitions, is clearly being more openly discussed in the UK than it is in New Zealand.
With its plan to replace the free market economic system with a form of progressive socialism, Sir John has serious misgivings:
"Taxing work, enterprise and success more is a bad idea. Many of the great advances in living standards and quality of life have come from the innovation and enterprise of the private sector. It was not government effort that launched billions of smart phones and electronic pads on the world."
“It was not government which provided the cars to liberate many more people with flexible personal transport, or supplied the great entertainments of stage, screen and events.
It is important that as we build back from lock downs these gains are banked and enhanced, with broadening of reach to ever more people."
“When the agenda proposes taxing and regulating the very products of the digital revolution and the transport revolution that have offered to the many the freedoms and advantages that used to be the preserve of the few I worry that build back better just becomes a cover for more state control over our lives."
Britain is one of many countries around the world, including New Zealand, that is being encouraged to embrace the Great Reset – as the Prime Minister of Canada, Justin Trudeau explained:
“This pandemic has provided an opportunity for a reset. This is our chance to accelerate our pre-pandemic efforts to reimagine economic systems that actually address global challenges like extreme poverty, inequality and climate change.”
This agenda to reset the world economy is not something to be ignored.
Driven by an elite group associated with the World Economic Forum, they will roll out the details of their plan for more equal, inclusive, and sustainable economies at their annual gathering in Davos, Switzerland, in January.
For those who support free markets, the Great Reset is alarming – as is the reset that is presently taking place within our media.
The Truth About Addiction And Recovery April 2 2021 | From: Peele / Various
A radical new approach to recovery - using methods proven more effective than medical treatment or twelve-step programs.
Drawing on the latest research and detailed case studies, the authors expose the best-kept secrets in the recovery field:
Addictions - whether to food, cigarettes, sex, alcohol, or drugs - are not diseases, and they’re not necessarily lifelong problems.
Many more people give up addictions on their own than are helped by medical treatment or twelve-step programs.
Developing values, skills, and life resources enables people to quit addictions - and to shed the addict identity altogether.
In their revolutionary “Life Process Program” for overcoming all kinds of addictions, the authors emphasize self-help and treatment through coping with stress and achieving one’s goals. As helpful as it is controversial, The Truth About Addiction and Recovery will forever change the way we view and treat addiction.
“A classic.” - John Norcross, PhD, ABPP, Distinguished Professor of Psychology at the University of Scranton and author of Changing for Good
Addiction
What causes addiction? Easy, right? Drugs cause addiction. But maybe it is not that simple.
Why It Doesn’t Make Sense To Call Addiction A “Disease”
We frequently hear from people who say: “I drink too much sometimes, but I don’t think I’m an alcoholic. And I don’t want to stand up and talk about myself in front of a group. Is there any other way I can change the way I drink?”
“I’m overweight, but I understand that people are born to be fat and there’s not much you can do about it. I know I’ve tried to lose weight a million times and failed. Does this mean I’m doomed to be overweight?”
“I saw an ad saying the only way to lick your addiction to nicotine is by going to a doctor. Is that really true? Don’t people ever quit smoking on their own?”
“My father was an alcoholic. Does that mean I’m likely to become an alcoholic myself? Should I play it safe and quit drinking altogether? A friend of mine joined a ‘Children of Alcoholics’ group, even though she’s never even been drunk. Should I join such a group? And what about my kids?”
“My son was caught smoking marijuana. Now I’m told that, unless I place him in an expensive residential treatment program, he could escalate his drug use and die. I don’t have the money for this but, of course, if I have to save his life I’ll mortgage the house!”
People are much concerned about bad habits (which sometimes reach life-consuming proportions) that they’d like to do something about-drinking, smoking, overeating, taking drugs, gambling, overspending, or even compulsive romancing.
We hear more and more that every one of these things is a disease, and that we must go to treatment centers or join twelve-step support groups like Alcoholics Anonymous in order to change any of these behaviors.
Is there really no other way to change a powerful habit than to enter treatment for a disease? Do personal initiative, willpower, or just maturing and developing a more rewarding life have anything to do with people’s ability to overcome addictive habits?
As children, as spouses, as parents, as employers, as consumers, and as citizens we must struggle to understand and master the destructive potential of drugs, alcohol, and related addictions.
The kinds of questions so many people face today include: What do we do if we discover our children are smoking marijuana, or worse? Should we put them in a treatment center that will teach them they are chemically dependent for life?
How can we tell if co-workers, employees, and friends are secretly addicts or alcoholics? What is the most appropriate way to react to people who drink too much or do anything that harms themselves and others?
Click on the image above to open a larger versioj in a new window
Furthermore, as a society, how should we deal with these problems? Are our incessant wars on drugs really going to have the positive impact the generals in these wars always claim? Or is there some more sensible or direct way to reduce the damage people do to themselves through their uncontrollable habits?
Rather than arrest drug users, can we treat addicts so that they stop using drugs? And if we expand the treatment for all the addictions we have seen - like shopping and smoking and overeating and sexual behavior - who will pay for all this treatment?
Finally, does addiction diminish people’s judgment so that they can’t be held accountable for their behavior, or for crimes and financial excesses they commit while addicted?
This book is for those concerned with such questions. But what you will read here is not the same as what you see and hear in newspapers and magazines, on television, in addiction treatment centers, in twelve-step groups, and in most physicians’ and therapists’ offices or what your children are learning in school.
For in its desperate search for a way out of the convulsions caused by drug abuse and addiction, our society has seized upon a simple, seductive, but false answer that this book disputes. What we say is, indeed, so different from most things you hear that we have provided extensive documentation at the back of the book.
The simple but incorrect answer we constantly hear is expressed by the familiar statement, “Alcoholism is a disease.” In other words, we can treat away these problems in a medical setting.
This viewpoint has proved so appealing that it has been adopted by professional organizations and government agencies as well as by groups like Alcoholics Anonymous. And now the “disease” label is applied not only to alcoholism, drug addiction, cigarette smoking, and overeating, but also to gambling, compulsive shopping, desperate romantic attachments, and even committing rape or killing one’s newborn child!
A.A.’s image of “powerlessness over alcohol” is being extended to everything that people feel they are unable to resist or control.
But what lies behind the claim that alcoholism and other addictions are diseases? How accurate is it? What evidence supports it? Most important, what good does it do us to believe it? Will it really help you or someone you care about to overcome an addiction?
This book will show that the answer is no - that, in fact, it may do more harm than good. What’s wrong with calling a tenacious and destructive habit a disease?
Three things:
1.
It isn’t true.
2.
It doesn’t help most people (even those it does help might succeed just as well in a less costly, less limiting way).
3.
It prevents us from doing things that really would help.
In this chapter we will summarize what the disease model says, why it is wrong, and why it is harmful. As you will see, there is no good reason to label yourself or people you know as forever marked by an addictive “disease.” Challenging this useless folklore is the first step toward understanding addiction and doing something about it.
Then we will present an alternative way of thinking about and dealing with addiction called the Life Process Program. The accompanying table previews the major differences between the Life Process Program and the disease model of addiction.
Myths Versus Reality
To highlight some of the surprising facts we will reveal, here are some common beliefs about various addictions:
A person needs medical treatment or a program like Smokenders to quit smoking.
Attending Alcoholics Anonymous meetings is the most effective way for alcoholics to stop drinking.
Nearly all regular cocaine users become addicted.
Very few people who have a drinking problem can ever drink in a normal, controlled manner.
Drunk drivers who undergo treatment for alcoholism are less likely to repeat the offense than those who receive normal judicial penalties such as license suspension.
Most people with an alcoholic parent become alcoholics themselves.
Most people who are binge drinkers in their twenties go on to become alcoholics.
Most of the American soldiers who were addicted to heroin in Vietnam remained addicted or became addicted again after they returned home.
The fact that alcoholism runs in families means that it is an inherited disease.
Fat children, because they have inherited their obesity, are more likely to be fat in later life than are people who become fat as adults.
Actually, the best scientific evidence available today indicates that none of these statements is true. Such specific misconceptions grow out of a foundation of false assumptions about the nature of addiction generally.
Ten Assumptions that Distinguish the Life Process Program from the Disease Model
DISEASE MODEL
LIFE PROCESS PROGRAM
1. Addiction is inbred and biological.
1. Addiction is a way of coping with yourself and your world.
2. The solution is medical treatment and membership in spiritual groups such as A.A.
2. The solution requires self-awareness, new coping skills, and changing your environment.
3. Addiction is all-or-nothing; you are or you aren’t an addict.
3. Addiction is a continuum; your behavior is more or less addicted.
4. Addiction is permanent and you can relapse at any moment.
4. Addiction can be outgrown.
5. Addicts are “in denial” and must be forced to acknowledge they have a disease.
5. You should identify problems and solutions in ways that work for you.
6. The recovering addict / alcoholic is the expert on addiction.
6. Those without an addiction problem are the best models.
7. Addiction is a “primary” disease.
7. Addiction stems from other life problems you have.
8. Your main associates must be other recovering addicts.
8. You should associate with a normal range of people.
9. You must accept the disease philosophy to recover.
9. Getting better is not a matter of believing a dogma.
10. Surrendering to a higher power is the key to recovery.
10. You must develop your own power to get better.
At first, it seems hard to understand what is meant by saying that something a person regularly does (such as· drinking alcohol) is a disease.
Habitual, voluntary behavior of this sort does not resemble what we normally think of as a disease, like cancer or diabetes. What is more, A.A. - and even hospital programs for alcoholism - don’t actually treat any biological causes of alcoholism.
After all the claims we have heard in the past decade about biological discoveries concerning alcoholism, not one of these findings has been translated into a usable treatment. Instead, the same group discussions and exhortations that have been used for the last fifty years are employed in hospital programs.
Nor is any biological method used to determine whether someone is an alcoholic other than by assessing how much that person drinks and the consequences of this drinking.
And if we have no special biological information about treating or identifying alcoholism, we surely know nothing about the biological causes of “diseases” such as compulsive gambling, shopping, and loving, which have nothing to do with drugs or alcohol.
There is, however, a standard way those who claim addiction is a disease describe addictive diseases. This description has been developed by groups such as Alcoholics Anonymous, by the medical profession, and by various popularizers of the idea that alcoholism is a disease.
What they say is in every regard wrong.
When they tell you that you have the “disease” of alcoholism, “chemical dependency,” obesity, compulsive shopping, or whatever, this is what they mean:
The basis of the disease is inbred and/or biological. There is no need to look for the causes of the disease in your personal problems, the people you spend time with, the situations you find yourself in, or your ethnic or cultural background. Addiction is bred into you from birth or early childhood. Your current experience of life has nothing to do with it; nothing you can do makes you either more or less likely to become addicted.
It involves complete loss of control over your behavior. Once involved in your addiction, you are utterly at its mercy. You cannot choose whether, or how much, to lose yourself in the involvement. No matter how costly it may be in a given situation, you will go all the way. You cannot make reasonable, responsible choices about something to which you are addicted.
Addictions are forever. An addictive disease is like diabetes - it stays with you as long as you live. The mysterious bodily or psychic deficiency that lies at the root of addiction can never be remedied, and you can never safely expose yourself to the substance to which you were addicted. Once an addict, always an addict.
It inevitably expands until it takes over and destroys your life. “Irreversible progression” is a hallmark of addictive diseases as they are conceived today. The addiction grows and grows until it devours you, like AIDS or cancer. No rewards, no punishments, not even the most momentous developments in your life can stay its course, unless you completely swear off the addictive substance or activity.
If you say you don’t have it, that’s when they really know you have it. According to this “Catch22” of the disease theory, anyone suspected of having an addictive disease who insists that he or she doesn’t have the disease is guilty of the added offense of “denial.” In this way, the “disease” label is like a web that traps a person more firmly the harder the person fights to get out of it.
It requires medical and/or “spiritual” treatment. Thinking you can cure your addiction through willpower, changes in your life circumstances, or personal growth is a delusion (like denial), according to disease-theory proponents. Addiction is a disease of the body that can be controlled only by never-ending medical treatments.
It is also a disease of the soul requiring lifetime membership in a support group like Alcoholics Anonymous. Why supposed medical treatment consists mainly of going to group meetings and why people can’t develop their own spiritual approaches to life if they choose are questions disease theory adherents ignore.
Your kids are going to get it, too. Since addiction is an inherited disease, the children of addicts are considered at high risk for developing the same disease - no matter what you or they do or how careful you are. Logical deductions from this viewpoint are that you should have your kids tested for their genetic predisposition to alcoholism or addiction before they start school, or that you should simply teach them never to touch a drop of alcohol or expose themselves to whatever your addiction is.
Obviously, this approach presents special difficulties in dealing with addictions to eating, shopping, and making love. Where did these notions come from - notions that, when examined in the clear light of day, often seem quite bizarre and contrary to common experience?
The disease theory takes a set of precepts that were made up by and about a small group of severe, long-term alcoholics in the 1930s and applies them inappropriately to people with a wide range of drinking and other life problems. The original members of Alcoholics Anonymous, realizing they would soon die if they did not give up alcohol, adopted wholesale the dogma of the nineteenth century temperance movement.
The one major difference was that the A.A. members said drinking was a disease only for them, and not for everyone who drank - therefore not everyone needed to eschew “demon rum,” as temperance advocates had insisted.
When he co-founded Alcoholics Anonymous (AA) to offer a support group for those addicted to alcohol, Bill Wilson made the first major advance in addressing alcoholism.
A fact which is less well-known is that Bill Wilson also made the second major advance when he became aware of, and later promoted the use of niacin vitamin B3 as a treatment for chronic drinkers.
Orthomolecular Medicine and Alcoholism
Even as Alcoholics Anonymous slowly expanded, many of Bill Wilson's personal and financial problems lingered, especially his depression.
Canadian biochemist Dr. Abram Hoffer, M.D., Ph.D., a psychiatrist and physician, writes: "I met Bill in New York in 1960. Humphry Osmond and I introduced him to the concept of megavitamin therapy. Bill was very curious about it and began to take niacin, 3,000 mg daily. Within a few weeks fatigue and depression which had plagued him for years were gone."
Dr. Hoffer, in his foreword to the book "Alcoholism: The Cause and The Cure", describes how he and Bill Wilson investigated together the effect of Niacin vitamin B3 on alcoholics.
Dr Hoffer writes: “Bill understood it first hand, for even though he had been abstinent for many years, he was still unwell. He suffered from immense anxiety, tension, and fatigue, but was able to function in spite of what might have been disabling.
After taking 3 grams of niacin daily for two weeks, his symptoms vanished and he remained free of addiction. This was a peak experience that he never forgot. He became determined to give as many AA members as possible the benefit of the same healing vitamin,”.
Dr. Hoffer further writes: “Without telling me that he was doing so, Bill conducted a trial of niacin on 30 friends and colleagues in New York. Most of them were very productive and sober members of AA, but they all suffered from the common mind and mood afflictions that people formerly addicted to alcohol experience, even when they are not drinking.
After three months he showed me his data. After one month, ten of the subjects were well. After the second month another ten had recovered, and the remaining one-third had shown no improvement after the third month. By this time I had also treated a number of people addicted to alcohol and had seen similar recoveries.”
Beyond AA Meetings
Between 1960 and his death in 1971, Bill Wilson shared this information with physician members of AA in a series of 3 brochures, Communications to Alcoholics Anonymous.
Bill’s findings were unfortunately dismissed by the AA’s International Board, because he was not an "M.D." and the fact that Alcoholics Anonymous is a social support structure, not a medical treatment provider.
The A.A. model has struck a responsive chord among Americans. Obviously, with the rejection of Prohibition, the United States had decided against a national policy that everyone should abstain from drinking.
Yet Westernn society continues even today to show a deep unease about alcohol and about intoxication, which many people seek even while fearing its disturbing effects.
Given this national ambivalence, we have been drawn to the “old-time religion” of temperance, as represented by A.A., now cloaked in the modern language of medicine and the neurosciences.
But, as this book will make clear, the operative assumptions about addiction have never arisen directly from biological sciences. Rather, they have been superimposed on scientific research, much of which directly contradicts the assumptions of the disease theory.
Why the Disease Model Is Wrong
Every major tenet of the “disease” view of addiction is refuted both by scientific research and by everyday observation.
This is true even for alcoholism and drug addiction, let alone the many other behaviors that plainly have little to do with biology and medicine.
No biological or genetic mechanisms have been identified that account for addictive behavior.
Even for alcoholism, as the following chapter will show, the evidence for genetic inheritance is unconvincing. By now, probably every well-informed reader has heard announcements that scientists have discovered a gene that causes alcoholism.
In fact, as one of us wrote in The Atlantic, this is far from the case, and the study that prompted these claims has already been refuted by another study in the same journal.
Moreover, if a gene were found to influence alcoholism, would the same gene cause drug addiction?
Would it be related to smoking? Would it also cause compulsive gambling and overeating? If so, this would mean that everyone with any of these addictions has this genetic inheritance.
Indeed, given the ubiquity of the problems described, the person without this inheritance would seem to be the notable exception.
How could an addiction like smoking be genetic? Why are some types of people more likely to smoke than others (about half of waitresses and car salesmen smoke, compared with about a tenth of lawyers and doctors)?
And does believing that an addiction like smoking is genetic help the person quit (are all those smokers who quit not “genetically” addicted)?
Returning to alcohol, are people really predestined biologically to become alcoholics and thus to become A.A. members? Think about the rock group Aerosmith: all five members of this group now belong to A.A., just as they once all drank and took drugs together.
How unlikely a coincidence it is that five unrelated people with the alcoholic / addictive inheritance should run into one another and form a band!
The idea that genes make you become alcoholic cannot possibly help us understand how people develop drinking problems over years, why they choose on so many occasions to go out drinking, how they become members of heavy-drinking groups, and how drinkers are so influenced by the circumstances of their lives.
Genes may make a person unusually sensitive to the physiological effects of alcohol; a person can find drinking extremely relaxing or enjoyable; but this says nothing about how the person drinks over the course of a lifetime.
After all, some people say, “I never have more than one or two drinks at a time, because alcohol goes straight to my head.”
As we document here and in the following chapter, we can actually predict the likelihood of people’s becoming addicted far more reliably from their nationality and social class, from the social groups they join, and from their beliefs and expectations about alcohol or drugs (or other activities), than from their biological makeup.
Often, people who become addicted set themselves up by investing a substance or an experience with magical powers to transform their beings (“Getting drunk is great”; “When I drink I’m really at ease”; “Drinking makes me attractive to people of the opposite sex”).
It is simply not within the chemical properties of alcohol or a drug, or the experience of an activity like shopping, to offer people what they want and seek from an addiction.
People find this in an addiction when they believe they can’t achieve the feelings they need in ordinary ways. Clearly, attitudes, values, and the opportunities available in a person’s environment have much to do with whether the person has a significant risk for a particular addiction.
People do not necessarily lose control of themselves whenever they are exposed to the object of their addiction.
On the contrary, many practice their addictions quite selectively. For example, military and religious personnel are often deprived of tobacco during training or on retreats, and business people realize they can’t smoke in certain rooms.
Orthodox Jews who smoke heavily abstain from smoking on the Sabbath, showing that their religious values mean more to them than nicotine does. Alcoholics in experiments routinely control their drinking when it is in their interest to do so - say, when they must leave a cozy room with television and companionship in order to get more to drink.
These variations occur in real life just as they do in the laboratory - for example, when people avoid drugs or cigarettes when they are with people who won’t tolerate those habits. When something they really care about is jeopardized if they continue to drink, smoke, or whatever, most people will stop or cut down accordingly.
Addiction usually does not last a lifetime. “Once an addict, always an addict” is a pessimistic notion that is both wrong and harmful. It leaves people two choices: either you stay constantly addicted and miserable until you die; or you abstain for life while attending group meetings and viewing yourself as the perpetually “recovering” person.
Sadly, a small number of people do die of their addictions; and another group succeeds in quitting drinking, drug taking, or whatever by maintaining the role of the recovering addict.
But most people are more resilient and resourceful than that. Most people who have addictive habits moderate or eliminate these habits over the course of their lives.
And they do it without having to say “I am an alcoholic” or “I am an overeater” or “I am a sex addict” as long as they live.
Remember that, today, a majority of adults who have ever smoked have quit and nearly all did so without treatment.
Progression is not inevitable - it is the exception. If the majority of people give up addictive habits, then the idea of “inevitable progression” doesn’t hold water. Calling addiction a “progressive disease” comes from looking at the few who have progressed to severe addiction and tracing the path by which they got there.
The progression of addictive problems only seems inevitable after the fact. For example, the great majority of college overdrinkers, even those who black out at fraternity parties, become moderate drinkers in middle age.
When you consider that even most of the people who use narcotics and cocaine do not end up addicted, you can see that drug-and-alcohol use patterns are many and varied, even when a person uses a substance abusively for a time.
Treatment is no panacea. Contrary to all the advertising we hear, treatment for addictions is often no more effective than letting addiction and recovery take their natural course.
The vast majority of people who have given up addictions (beginning with more than 90 percent of the forty-four million Americans who have quit smoking have done so on their own.
This does not mean that treatment for addictions cannot work - research has shown that some forms of treatment are effective. But the ones that are more effective are not the ones that have become popular in the United States.
You can outgrow an addictive habit on your own or in therapy, but either way the principles of the Life Process Program are the same.
What about joining support groups such as Alcoholics Anonymous? Here, too, research reveals the opposite of what we have been led to believe.
A.A is a valuable community resource for those who find support in a certain type of religiously oriented group ritual.
But the best we can say about A.A is that it works for those for whom it works. Meanwhile, there are plenty for whom it doesn’t work. There is no scientific evidence that A.A. works better than other approaches when randomly selected alcoholics are assigned to A.A. or other treatments.
In fact, the evidence is that the people who are now often compelled to attend A.A - after being arrested for drunk driving or being sent by a company Employee Assistance Program - do worse than those who are left on their own.
How can we reconcile this finding with the glowing testimonials we hear about A.A.? The people we see in A.A. are the ones who like it, find it helpful, and stick it out. But there are many others who don’t go to A.A. or who don’t like it and drop out.
And as we show below, those who seriously try to stop drinking on their own are more likely to maintain their abstinence than those who attend A.A.
In addition, since many more people try to quit on their own than through therapy or joining a group, the number of self-curers is triple or more the number of successful treatment or A.A cases.
But such self-curers are not very visible, because they are individuals without an organized group to publicize their success.
These, then, are the key fallacies of the popularly held view of addiction. Even generally well-informed people may be astonished that we contradict such widely held beliefs. All of our refutations of conventional wisdom are carefully documented in the notes at the back of the book.
But you don’t need to read scholarly articles and scientific reports to test the accuracy of what we say. Just check it out against your own experience and observation. Don’t you know anyone who used to drink excessively, at times uncontrollably, but who no longer drinks at all or now drinks in a normal, appropriate manner?
Obviously, most people who used to drink excessively but who have now cut back (or even quit) do not attend meetings where they must rise and declare, “I am an alcoholic.”
How many people of all ages do you know who quit smoking? How many of them did it by going through a medical program or joining a support group, and how many finally just decided to quit and made good on that resolve? What happened to all the people you knew who used illegal drugs in college, some quite heavily?
How many of them are “chemically dependent” now? If we simply examine the cases of most of those we are close to personally, we will see how addictions usually do not follow the disease course.
Why the Disease Model Doesn’t Work - Why It Even Does More Harm than Good
The assumption that calling addiction a “disease” actually helps people crumbles when subjected to critical scrutiny. Some people feel comfortable thinking of their addiction as a disease and are able to function better on this basis for a time.
But whatever short-term benefits medical, disease-oriented treatment produces are double-edged even for the individuals who claim it has helped them.
Many of the most “successful” recipients of disease treatment might achieve a real breakthrough by learning to think about addiction differently.
Meanwhile, for the majority of people, the disadvantages of the disease approach clearly outweigh the advantages from the start.
The disadvantages of the disease approach are that it:
Attacks people’s feelings of personal control and can thus become a self-fulfilling prophecy;
Makes mountains out of molehills, since it fails to differentiate between the worst alcoholics and addicts and those with minor substance-use dependence;
Stigmatizes people - in their own minds - for life
Iinterrupts normal maturation for the young, for whom this approach is completely inappropriate;
Holds up as models for drinking and drug use the people who have shown the least capacity to manage their lives;
Isolates alcoholism and addiction as problems from the rest of the alcoholic’s or addict’s life;
Limits people’s human contacts primarily to other recovering alcoholics or addicts, who only reinforce their preoccupation with drinking and drug use;
Dispenses a rigid program of therapy that is founded - in the words of the director of the government’s National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism (NIA.A.A) - “on hunch, not evidence, and not on science,” while attacking more effective therapies.
How can therapy that so many people believe in and swear by actually do more harm than good? To illustrate this point, consider the case of a famous psychiatrist who evaluated his hospital’s alcoholism program - one he felt was among the most outstanding in the world.
This program first detoxified the alcoholic in the hospital, then mandated A.A. attendance, and finally actively followed patients’ progress with an outreach counseling program.
When the psychiatrist running the program, Dr. George Vaillant, evaluated how well his patients were doing two years and eight years after treatment, however, he found they had fared about as well as comparable alcoholics who received no treatment at all!
How could Vaillant have been so wrong as to think his patients were doing phenomenally well, when actually they were doing no better than if he had left them alone completely?
Naturally, he wanted to think it worked. But his research prevented his rose-colored views from distorting the actual results of his treatment.
When he counted all his patients, not just his successes, when he scrutinized and verified what they were telling him in order to see exactly how well they were doing, and when he compared them with alcoholics out on their own instead of just assuming that all these people died without the help of treatment like his, Vaillant found that his expensive hospital treatment was close to useless.
Very few people in the treatment industry or in A.A. are as scrupulous as is Vaillant. When we hear from A.A. boosters, they tell us only about those who have stuck with the program and are currently sober. The same is true of treatment programs. They parade their best stars up front.
We don’t hear about all their failures. Yet Vaillant, in a book that is cited as the major source of support for the benefits of treating alcoholics according to the disease model, concluded as follows:
“If treatment as we currently understand it does not seem more effective than the natural healing processes, then we need to understand those healing processes better.”
Indeed, Vaillant repeats another researcher’s conclusion that “it may be easier for improper treatment to retard recovery than for proper treatment to hasten it.”major source of support for the benefits of treating alcoholics according to the disease model
What are the dangers of this kind of disease treatment? Here are explanations of the disadvantages listed at the beginning of this section:
It sets people up for failure.
All disease treatments emphasize how much out of control “patients” are, and what a delusion it is for them to feel they can exert any control over their addictions. Is it possible that such a message can do more harm than good?
William Miller and Reid Hester, reviewing all the comparative studies on treatment for alcoholism, made a surprising finding: in the only two studies in which alcoholics were randomly assigned either to A.A., to other forms of treatment, or to no treatment, those assigned to A.A. did no better or actually suffered more relapse than those who received other treatment or who weren’t treated at all!
Intrigued by this outcome, one of us wrote George Vaillant and asked him whether subjects he studied who abstained without entering formal treatment did better if they joined A.A. Again, A.A. members were less likely to maintain their abstinence.
Why would people be more likely to relapse if they entered A.A. than if they quit drinking on their own? There are several reasons. For one, people who enter A.A. are told they cannot succeed on their own. Therefore, if they should stop attending A.A., many are convinced that they will soon resume alcoholic drinking.
A.A. and disease treatments are especially defeatist in dealing with relapse. Accepting the disease-oriented philosophy of inevitable loss of control thus makes it more likely that the alcoholic will binge if he or she ever has a drink.
Yet, Vaillant found, nearly all alcoholics will drink again at some time.
It makes matters worse than they are. Can attending A.A. or going into addiction treatment really cause people to develop some of their alcoholism symptoms? In his book Becoming Alcoholic, sociologist David Rudy reports on the time he spent observing A.A. meetings.
Rudy found that most people had to learn their role as alcoholics. An important “rite of passage” is the first time members tell their story for the group, beginning by acknowledging, “I am an alcoholic.” In Rudy’s words;
“The alcoholic’s tale “is made up of two parts: a story about how bad it was before A.A. and a story about how good it is now.”
Narcotics anonymous is the drug users version of AA, although is generally accepting of AA members as well
This presentation is warmly greeted by the member’s sponsor in A.A., and the entire membership responds with enthusiastic acceptance of the convert.
When alcoholics introduce their experiences and symptoms in or treatment, the group or therapist homogenizes them through interpretation and clarification. For example, most people who enter have not had blackouts, which are more typical of long-term alcoholics than of the younger drinkers now flooding into treatment and A.A.
But blackouts are taken as the badge of alcoholism, and according to Rudy, “members learn the importance of blackouts as a behavior that verifies their alcoholism, and an indeterminable number of members who may not have had blackouts report them.” Rudy continues:
"When newcomers to A.A. claim that they cannot remember if they had any blackouts or not, other members use this claim as evidence of the event in question. As one member put it to a newcomer:
The reason you can’t remember is because alcohol fogs your brain. If it fogs your brain now after not drinking for a few days it must have fogged your brain before. See, you must have had blackouts then.”
A large part of alcoholism and drug treatment consists of group meetings where alcoholics or addicts “confront” one another and their problems.
Newcomers who don’t report the correct symptoms are treated with knowing condescension or are actively hazed - sometimes quite abusively - until they “get” and repeat the party line.
When Dwight Gooden entered the alcoholism-andcocaine program at the Smithers Alcoholism Center, he described being assailed by his fellow residents there during the constant group-therapy sessions. “My stories weren’t as good as theirs. . . . They said, ‘C’mon, man, you’re lying.’ They didn’t believe me. . . . I cried a lot before I went to bed at night.”
After he left the Betty Ford Center, Chevy Chase reported that he had often been angry at the counselors, who heckled the residents mercilessly, constantly denigrating them and claiming they had been living worthless lives.
Does all this sound like good therapy technique? It is simple common sense that belief in your personal value and your own strength is superior to having these things denigrated for getting your life under control.
It stigmatizes people for life. The disease model puts a label on you that you can never outgrow. Once diseased, always diseased. The effects of this defeatist view are especially tragic - and unjust - in the case of people to whom the “disease” label is most inappropriately applied in the first place: teenage binge drinkers, most drunk drivers, “adult children of alcoholics,” recreational drug users discovered through drug tests, and - in areas not involving drugs or alcohol - overweight adolescents or “hyperactive” or “learning-disabled” children.
It brutalizes and brainwashes the young. The largest single age group of people undergoing hospital treatment today for chemical dependency, eating disorders, depression, and so forth is adolescents. A.A. members are also much younger today, on average, than when the fellowship was founded by a group of men with serious, lifelong drinking problems.
Nonetheless, virtually none of these young people meet clinical standards of alcoholism or drug addiction.
Indeed, numerous cases have been identified in which young people have been hospitalized for smoking marijuana or even for being suspected of using drugs.
When one such case was revealed on national television, an unusually forthright consultant for the National Association for Alcoholism Treatment Programs confessed, “I’m afraid this happens far more than people in the field want to admit; it’s something of a scandal.”
Meanwhile, A.A. and Alateen (for teenage children of alcoholics) groups now pervade high-school and college campuses.
What is the impact of treatment that forces teenagers to take on the identity of addicts or alcoholics or children of alcoholics?
Young people are warned that their substance abuse is a permanent trait, even though we have seen that a large majority will outgrow substance-abuse problems as they mature.
Presenting this message to the young can only prolong or exacerbate their substance abuse, since it denies their own capacity for change and forces them to believe that any substance use for the rest of their lives will lead them back to excess, addiction, and drunkenness.
Young treatment grads who constantly relapse and return to treatment are the norm, as in the cases of Carrie Hamilton, Erinn Cosby, Drew Barrymore, and other young “patients” whose stories are less well publicized.
Of course, the relapses are then attributed to their “disease” and to their failure to heed the treatment’s warning to abstain forever.
These programs fairly frequently involve emotional abuse. Such “treatments” for children include “refusing to allow them to wear street clothes, keeping them in isolation for prolonged periods, or forcing them to wear self-derogatory signs, engage in other humiliation rituals . . . , or submit to intense and prolonged group confrontation” all of which, psychologists believe, “may destroy the youngsters’ already fragile self-esteem.”
When we describe these experiences, treatment specialists often argue in response, “Well, what if the kids would end up dead if we didn’t do this to them?” In other words, to object to these programs is likened to promoting intoxication leading to death.
Certainly, it is crucial to prevent children from harming themselves, and it can be worthwhile to remove children from a problem home, whether through a residential program or a visit to a sympathetic relative.
But brainwashing, emotional blackmail, denigration, and psychological torture never work, except to make people so unsure of who they are or what they value that they will temporarily consent to the demands of those in charge.
Worst of all, therapies that were devised for the most incorrigible children - though they don’t benefit even these unfortunate kids have been spreading down the ladder to more and more children whose behavior represents typical adolescent exploration and insubordination.
Parents are then confronted over whether they want to “save” their kids or allow them to die, as though the latter were the normal outcome of adolescence. The threat of their children’s dying is then used as emotional blackmail to make parents accept the sacrifices necessary to place their children in expensive residential treatment programs.
It presents the alcoholic or addict as someone to emulate. Prominent graduates of treatment programs, like Drew Barrymore, Betty Ford, Kitty Dukakis, and a host of athletes now lecture to others about chemical dependency.
If alcoholics and drug abusers suffer from a disease and are now recovering, then they can educate others about the disease and even about how young people should live and behave.
If, on the other hand, we think of them as people who are tremendously poor at self-management, then it is indeed stupid for the rest of us, who have not been seriously addicted, to ask them for advice and information.
Someone like former football star Bob Hayes explains that he took and sold drugs as a result of an inherited disease.
One reviewer’s reaction to Hayes’s book, Run, Bullet, Run, could stand for any and all of these confessional tracts: “Aside from a brief closing statement on personal responsibility, he self-servingly portrays himself as a victim throughout the book.”
Alcoholics and addicts like Hayes regularly come into schools to relay their tortured drinking experiences and to reiterate that alcohol is a dangerous drug. But nearly every child in these schools will drink.
It is as though the schools wished to undermine children’s sense of self-control and to attack their chances of becoming normal drinkers, which in most cases their “nonexpert” parents are.
In treatment itself, “recovering” addicts and alcoholics counsel the drug or alcohol abuser - who usually has not drunk as destructively and hurt himself or herself as much as the counselors!
In all types of twelve-step groups, the most severely debilitated person tends to become the leader and model for others, so that the most out-of-control shopping addict tells others about the nature of their problems.
Who should be counseling whom? In the case of drug abuse, a number of reviews have found that informational and scare lectures by recovering addicts produce the worst results of all prevention programs. These programs have never yet been found to reduce drug use; on the contrary, several studies have found increased drug use in their aftermath.
It ignores the rest of the person’s problems in favor of blaming them all on the addiction.
When someone like Carrie Hamilton lectures about her youthful drug abuse and delinquency (often alongside her mother, Carol Burnett), she makes drug abuse and family failures sound like mysterious, unavoidable illnesses that some people and their parents “have.”
Of course, this excuses her and her mother from dealing with painful problems they would prefer to avoid.
But by adopting the disease identity as her protection through the rest of her life, the youthful convert guarantees that she cannot grow beyond the limitations of her adolescent family life.
Can people hope for more than this?
When treatment views alcoholics as being victims of a different body chemistry that forces them to become alcoholics, the treatment process ignores the person’s life problems and the functions drinking serves for the alcoholic.
For example, in family therapy where the alcoholic’s drinking is addressed as simply the result of a disease, the therapist and the family are not able to understand that some people use alcohol to air feelings they cannot express when sober.
Ignoring dynamics like these leaves the drinker unable to cope with the things that led him or her to need to drink - such as doubts about self-worth, a difficult relationship with a spouse, roles (such as homosexuality) that create conflict for the person, and so on.
If the labeling of alcoholism as a disease provides welcome relief from the shame of overdrinking. it also prevents people from confronting the emotional tasks they need to accomplish to attain personal wholeness.
It traps people in a world inhabited by fellow disease-sufferers. Many “recovering” people report that they feel comfortable only with others in exactly the same plight. They find they can’t create intimacy outside of treatment and that they are driven constantly to talk about their alcoholism or addiction.
This is a frequent hang-up for recovering alcoholics who attend A.A. meetings so religiously that they can’t maintain a life outside of the group. The phenomenon of compulsive therapy attendance has made many people ask us, “Is there such a thing as addiction to treatment?” Indeed there is, when people rely on a twelve step group or therapy to the point where it disables them from conducting outside relationships and activities.
One of us has treated a number of A.A. members or treatment graduates who now fear they can’t deal with normal society. One man, who was regularly asked to head his local A.A. group, had dated a series of women he met at A.A. Unfortunately, all of these relationships had ended in bitterness and mutual recriminations.
But when he tried to date outside the group, he discovered that nonalcoholic women found him overbearing and compulsive.
“I don’t want to be limited for the rest of my life to dealing with alkies - I’d like to think I can advance beyond that; “ he plaintively told us.
This man felt that dealing exclusively with alcoholics was debilitating him, and yet he couldn’t escape A.A.
It excludes other approaches, many of which are more successful. Even if one accepts that many A.A. members are happy and successful, it is simply absurd to discourage people from trying to recover without A.A. The National Council on Alcoholism and Drug Dependence (NCADD) frequently announces statistics about the continually rising costs of alcoholism and the increasing number of alcoholics in our society.
But, then, the NCADD is capable only of calling for more of the standard approach to treating alcoholism that has accompanied these increases, while discouraging all alternative approaches.
Why should things improve all of a sudden if we simply do more of the same? The A.A. approach to people’s drinking problems has shown conclusively that it cannot make a decisive difference for most active problem drinkers, since there are very few alcoholics who aren’t already aware of - or who haven’t already attended - A.A.
Meanwhile, greater numbers of people are being forced to enter private treatment centers and A.A. as a result of court orders, Employee Assistance Programs, or school counseling programs.
Despite the almost universal belief that compelling people to attend standard treatment programs is helpful, these programs regularly demonstrate they are no more effective than self-initiated programs for curing addictions.
Psychologists William Miller and Reid Hester, reviewing all the comparative studies on treatment for alcoholism, made a surprising finding:
“Virtually all of them [the standard treatments] lacked adequate scientific evidence of effectiveness.”
At the same time, they discovered, the “treatment approaches most clearly supported as effective... were very rarely used in American treatment programs.”
What don’t really work in the long run are the conversion-experience type treatments; what do work are therapies that teach people skills at self-management and coping.
Nonetheless, most American treatment personnel seem hell-bent on eliminating any other treatment for alcoholism besides twelve-step programs. In the United States, discredited disease-treatment programs - ones that NIAAA Director Enoch Gordis believes may be “frequently useless and wasteful and sometimes dangerous” - proliferate and spread into whole new areas of behavior.
This issue is important because the United States spends more money on health care than any other country - and the percentage of our gross national product that we spend on health care is growing faster than that in any other country.
The fastest-growing component of the health-care system is substance abuse and related mental-health treatments. According to a hospital trade publication;
“Psychiatric, chemical dependency and rehabilitative hospital care - all largely unregulated by government payment mechanisms - are booming.”
This is one reason so many companies are being forced to cut insurance benefits or are asking employees to pay a greater share. What if your insurance rates were raised to pay for a fellow employee who was undergoing a repeat treatment for cocaine addiction, since he had relapsed one or more times?
How would you feel about sharing the bill for a colleague who entered an expensive hospital eating-disorders clinic?
Do you think that smokers who want to quit should enter treatment programs and be excused from work, with pay, while they concentrate on quitting? And, especially, how would you react if you had quit smoking on your own?
It is morally and economically necessary for us to evaluate the effectiveness of alcoholism and other addiction treatments. For we are wasting limited health-care resources to place people in expensive treatments - treatments that have not shown they do more than inexpensive, straightforward skills counseling or than people accomplish on their own - often more reliably!
Kitty Dukakis: “Chemical Dependency” Reduced to Absurdity
Kitty Dukakis became the paradigm of the addicted person of the 1990s. Kitty Dukakis has been eager all along to accept the “disease” and “chemically dependent” labels. Advertisements for her autobiography, Now You Know, trumpet the opening line of the book, “I’m Kitty Dukakis and I’m a drug addict and an alcoholic.”
Mrs. Dukakis seemingly has been either addicted or in treatment throughout her adult life. Shortly before she joined her husband in his 1988 presidential campaign, she revealed that she had been treated for a twenty-six-year reliance on diet pills, which she began before she married Michael Dukakis.
Soon after her husband’s defeat in the election, she began to drink herself unconscious and underwent a series of treatments for her alcoholism and for a variety of emotional problems.
That treatment did not succeed. Mrs. Dukakis only began getting drunk after the election, for which she first entered the Edgehill Newport hospital.
But soon after this treatment experience, she began having explosive relapses in which she drank rubbing alcohol, nail polish remover, hair spray, and other commercial products containing alcohol.
Moreover, she discovered during the course of writing her book that she suffers from another disease - manic-depressive disorder - and as a result she ends the book with the revelation that she is receiving lithium treatment.
Previously, Mrs. Dukakis had been prescribed Prozac, a drug featured on the cover of Newsweek in 1990 as a new miracle in the treatment of depression, to no avail.
Mrs. Dukakis appears, in the book and on television, a forlorn being. Indeed, syndicated columnist Ellen Goodman, who had known Mrs. Dukakis, wrote a column entitled “Do Our Drug Treatment Programs Label Patients as Losers?” Ms. Goodman wondered aloud how labeling oneself as sick and without hope is helpful.
“What happens when those who wrestle with problems of self-esteem are required to wear such a label? . . . Today, Kitty Dukakis describes herself by diagnosis. Drug addict. Alcoholic. Manic-depressive.”
Ms. Goodman ended her column by wishing that Kitty Dukakis might see the brighter qualities that others have seen in her, and which seem entirely to have disappeared thanks to her various diagnoses and cures.
It seems clear that excessive drinking is only the tip of Mrs. Dukakis’s problems, and that medical treatment will never get to the bottom of them. Labeling Kitty Dukakis as a “sick” person who needs medical treatment is a palliative for her uncomfortable marital and personal problems.
Reviewers have commented about how insensitive and unaware of her problems Michael Dukakis appeared to be, yet Kitty never reflects on the limitations of her spouse or their relationship.
Somehow, her never-ending disease-oriented treatment fails to raise crucial issues for Mrs. Dukakis about a life and marriage she seems to have found intolerable.
Will Kitty Dukakis be writing another book in which she reveals she has discovered she is suffering from one more dis-ease that of codependence?
With Kitty Dukakis as a prominent model of the addict/alcoholic, those who look to her life for answers are being fed yet another self-defeating solution. To call Kitty Dukakis’s and her audiences’ problems diseases is to evade reality, much as Mrs. Dukakis used diet pills and alcohol to do.
Whether the pain Mrs. Dukakis and others feel is temporary or persistent, relatively mild or relatively severe, it does not need to rule the rest of their lives. Kitty Dukakis and the rest of us are more than our misery and problems.
Moreover, what troubles her and those like her are life problems, not diseases. And when we have reduced them to life size, we can begin to deal with them reasonably and hopefully.
The Experience of Addiction
The question is: “If addiction isn’t a disease, then what is it?” An addiction is a habitual response and a source of gratification or security.
It is a way of coping with internal feelings and external pressures that provides the addict with predictable gratifications, but that has concomitant costs.
Eventually these costs may outweigh the subjective benefits the addiction offers the individual. Nonetheless, people continue their addictions as long as they believe the addictions continue to do something for them.
It is important to place addictive habits in their proper context, as part of people’s lives, their personalities, their relationships, their environments, their perspectives. The effort to change an addiction will generally affect all these other facets of a person’s life as well.
An addiction may involve any attachment or sensation that grows to such proportions that it damages a person’s life.
Addictions, no matter to what, follow certain common patterns. We first made clear in Love and Addiction that addiction - the single-minded grasping of a magic-seeming object or involvement; the loss of control, perspective, and priorities - is not limited to drug and alcohol addictions. When a person becomes addicted, it is not to a chemical but to an experience. Anything that a person finds sufficiently consuming and that seems to remedy deficiencies in the person’s life can serve as an addiction.
The addictive potential of a substance or other involvement lies primarily in the meaning it has for a person.
A person is vulnerable to addiction when that person feels a lack of satisfaction in life, an absence of intimacy or strong connections to other people, a lack of self-confidence or compelling interests, or a loss of hope.
Periods such as adolescence, military service, and times of isolation or grief may for a time make people especially susceptible to an addiction.
Under some circumstances, a harmful involvement can become so important to a person that addiction is very likely, as heroin addiction was for many in Vietnam.
Situations in which people are deprived of family and the usual community supports; where they are denied rewarding or constructive activities; where they are afraid, uncomfortable, and under stress; and where they are out of control of their lives - these are situations especially likely to create addiction.
The relationship between hopelessness, lack of opportunity, and persistent addiction is, of course, a template for lives in ghettos. Recognizing the connection between these situational factors and addiction will explain why our wars on drugs, including the latest, never succeed.
The “hook” of the addiction - the thing that keeps people coming back to it - is that it gives people feelings and gratifying sensations that they are not able to get in other ways. It may block out sensations of pain, uncertainty, or discomfort.
It may create powerfully distracting sensations that focus and absorb attention. It may enable a person to forget, or feel “okay” about, insurmountable problems.
It may provide artificial, temporary feelings of security or calm, of self-worth or accomplishment, of power or control, of intimacy or belonging.
These benefits explain why a person keeps coming back to the addictive experience - an addiction accomplishes something for that person, or the person anticipates that it will do so, however illusory these benefits may actually be.
Addiction, drug abuse, alcoholism, obesity, and smoking all involve and are fueled by value choices. Think of people whose lives are “together” - who enjoy strong emotional bonds with others, productive work, satisfying feelings of competence and of fun, and a sense of responsibility toward others.
Will they become addicted to drugs or alcohol because of some physiological susceptibility and allow the addiction to undo the fabric of their lives? For you personally, can you imagine getting so drunk that you would abuse your infant child? It just doesn’t happen that way.
If you have better things to do and value other things more than escape into intoxication, then you won’t make intoxication the center of your life.
And if you are addicted, you can best overcome it by creating or re-creating those personal strengths and values.
Whatever the subjective benefits of an addiction or the values that drive an addiction, the person pays a price for an addictive involvement.
Addictions make people less aware of and less able to respond to other people, events, and activities. Thus, the addictive experience reinforces and exacerbates the problems the person wanted so badly to get away from in the first place.
In the person’s inner, subjective experience, the addiction may make things seem better.
But in the real world, it only makes things worse. With the worst addictions, jobs and relationships fall away; health deteriorates; debts increase; opportunities disappear; the business of life is neglected.
The person is increasingly “out of touch” with nourishing contacts and essential responsibilities.
This growing disengagement from the realities of life sets the person up for the trauma of withdrawal. When the addictive experience is removed, the person is deprived of what has become his or her primary source of comfort and reassurance.
Simultaneously, the person “crash-lands” back onto an inhospitable world, a world from which the person has been using the addiction to escape.
Compared with these existential torments, the purely physical dislocations of withdrawal are, even for most heroin addicts, not particularly debilitating.
After all, nearly everyone who receives powerful narcotics in the hospital gives them up after returning home or when the illness is over. Consider also that drug addicts and alcoholics indicate that the most unbearable drug withdrawal is from cigarettes.
And if one puts all withdrawal on a scale, probably the worst of all occurs in the case of failed love relationships.
The experience of withdrawal, like that of addiction, is shaped by the way a person interprets it. In therapeutic communities like Daytop Village in New York, addicts are not excused from their normal duties when they undergo withdrawal; as a result, withdrawing addicts - even those who have had several withdrawal episodes previously - continue mopping floors and carrying out other duties.
Cultural beliefs also play a crucial role in addiction - for example, beliefs that are widely propagated about the power of a drug to enslave a person and the difficulty of escaping it actually contribute to the difficulties of withdrawal.
Equally important are the person’s readiness to confront withdrawal and belief that he or she can manage it.
If you are convinced that withdrawal will be intolerably painful and that you cannot withstand it, or if you don’t have sufficiently powerful reasons to confront withdrawal experiences, you won’t be prepared to withdraw from your addiction.
The addict who feels incapable of existing without a drug can never successfully withdraw, and doesn’t want to try.
Ironically, one of the beliefs that most contribute to the susceptibility to addiction is the belief in the power of addiction itself.
Believing that drugs are stronger than you are means you will become addicted more easily and stay addicted longer.
But if you recognize that drugs and alcohol never take away your own responsibilities and capacity to control your destiny - even if you have alcoholic relatives or have had addictive problems in the past - you always stand a better chance of avoiding addiction or dealing with it successfully.
A Commonsense Way of Thinking About Overcoming an Addiction
Although the schematic description above is useful for understanding what addiction is and how it comes about, we need not think of all our troublesome habits or fixations in such dire terms.
In fact, when we overdramatize our addictions, we may do ourselves an injustice and make change more difficult.
An addiction may be more or less severe - and a person may be more or less able to give it up - depending on the circumstances of the person’s life.
Addiction is more likely in stressful times, times when gratifications are slim, times when a person is less together or secure.
Likewise, one type of excess may be more stubbornly entrenched in a person’s routine, or more closely linked to a person’s self-doubt and insecurity, than another.
Addiction occurs along a continuum - there is no easy test to tell you whether you have an addiction or just a bad habit.
For example, by some estimates, half of all Americans are overweight. Are they all addicted overeaters?
Many people encounter significant health risks because of the way they eat (recall that heart disease is America’s major killer). Are these the addicts? Some people are preoccupied day and night with their eating; they are suffused with guilt over eating too much, yet they are unable to change their eating habits.
Surely, these are the addicts, we think. A still more limited group of people encounter major health problems through their overweight, severely restricting their lives, but are unable to modify their eating habits.
At the furthest extreme of addiction are the minuscule number of people who become so fat they are completely immobile - people we sometimes see on television who may not even be able to fit through their doorways.
If we call only these people - people who have given up all effort to control their eating - true addicts, we end up with a fraction of a percentage of addicted overeaters, and books wouldn’t need to be written for millions of people who fear they have food addictions.
Moreover, for this minuscule group, concepts such as “denial” hardly seem to have meaning - does the twelve-hundred-pound man who hasn’t left his house in years really need to be told that he has an addictive eating problem?
For most people, the exercise of drawing the line that divides “addicted” from “normal” is not very helpful.
We need to remember that nearly all people cut back and forth across these categories at different points in their lives and in different situations.
Although letting your urges overcome you to gain total control of your life is a relatively rare phenomenon, everyone has addictive urges and sometimes gives in to them. Addiction characterizes some aspect of everyone’s life - this is one reason why it is so ridiculous to think of it as a disease.
Thin people whom we envy for their self-control will tell us there are some treats they can’t keep in the house because otherwise they would eat them all at once.
Remember that people whom we admire for having had the strength to quit smoking used to search ashtrays desperately looking for a butt when they ran out of cigarettes!
What we most need to know is not how bad off or how genuinely addicted we are but, rather, how people learn to resist successfully the addictive or unhealthy urges that come with being human.
How do they construct full lives, develop alternatives to addiction, learn the strength to stop after having started or, when necessary, not to start at all?
Let us start, then, with alcoholism, the addiction most commonly referred to as a disease. There must be - there is - a better way to understand and redirect the paths people take into and out of problem drinking.
The Three Varieties Of Money
February 1 2022 | From: FinalWakeupCall / Various
The Illusion of Money: Money and banks are founded on faulty public sentiment. Money should be a symbol of value, the same way a little stone or carved piece of wood is a symbol of God. But, in the modern world, money is a commodity, like beer and cheese.
There are a many different kinds of money in exactly the same way as there are many brands of beer and cheese, and they all present their own national characters and peculiarities.
However, there is a profound difference between money which has a value in-and-of-itself, such as a gold coin that has intrinsic value, and legal tender currencies, like bonds, notes and letters of credit. At the same time there is additionally, a market in other securities, like stocks and commodity futures.
More precisely, todays’ money is valuable only as long as there is not too much of it. The market can absorb a little counterfeited money, but there’s a limit.
And that limit has been greatly exceeded, thanks to, a worldwide overcapacity in output, financed by former lending and a huge excess of cheap labour, largely financed by the credit expansion of the last 30 years.
Without these two unique circumstances, central banks’ irresponsible QE and ZIRP policies would probably have caused inflation to rise into the double-digit range or even higher, much earlier, maybe as far back as a decade ago?
Nowadays there is no further need to worry about how much governments borrow. Central banks buy government bonds – hold them on their balance sheets – return the interest payments – and the whole thing is set up in such a way as to be swiftly forgotten.
And when the bonds expire, central banks can use the repaid principal to buy more government debt!
In effect, today’s central banksters are doing something they previously could only dream of doing: printing money without causing a noticeable inflation. Politicians, too, are enjoying this once-in-a-lifetime opportunity of unaccounted for recklessness.
They are able to do what none could do before: borrow money without paying it back. The public has not read about these malpractices in the press yet, but it should be coming soon.
Regular readers who understood the earlier explained money scam know already that there is in actual fact no need for governments to repay their loans to central bankers, as the money governments borrow from central banks, doesn’t come from taxpayers, it comes from nowhere; from thin air, like the rest of the world’s money.
Three Varieties of Money
Think of the word “money” for a moment. What’s the first picture that comes to mind? Perhaps the folded pieces of paper in your wallet. Or the balance in your bank account.
Or perhaps the investments in your brokerage account. In today’s financial system, where unelected central bankers wield totalitarian control over the financial system, all three of these forms represent money, but the relationship between them is very shaky, and risky.
Physical cash, no matter where you live in the world, is used by every civilised nation on the planet. All nations have some form of physical currency in various denominations.
Dollars, Pounds, Euros, Yen, Renminbi. These pieces of paper are passed around as a medium of exchange. Go to the grocery store, and as long it is the local currency, you can pay for anything with physical cash. It is that simple.
Bank balances make it slightly more complicated. When logged into your bank’s website, you see a balance displayed on the screen. Don’t think for a second that there are a corresponding number of pieces of paper sitting in your bank’s vault. In fact, most banks have very little cash on hand.
Your balance is nothing more than an accounting entry on your bank’s balance sheet, which is likely maintained in a computer database. There’s no physical ‘money’ backing up this bank balance. It’s an annotation in a computer. Each bank customer’s savings is part of this complex system of accounting entries.
When you transfer money, the bank doesn’t send that amount in cash. They merely make an entry in the ledger, reducing your balance and increasing the one you are sending the money to for the same amount.
The same thing happens when a credit card is swiped to pay for something; banks exchange accounting entries that credit the vendor’s account and debit yours.
Nothing physical ever changes hands, it all takes place in digital ledgers. Given that this type of money exceeds physical cash by a factor of at least 10:1, it is correct to conclude that most modern currencies are in effect digital.
Government bonds are another form of money that most people often forget about. Generally, people will keep the majority of their life’s savings in their bank account. But, big banks or companies that have tens of billions don’t keep such vast sums of money in the bank. Certainly not all of it.
Companies, institutions, banks, and even foreign governments around the globe buy government bonds precisely because of their ‘cash equivalent’ status. This means that if the Chinese government is doing a deal with an African government for $1 billion, they can conduct the transaction using US government bonds as payment currency.
Varieties Exchange Rate
But, here is the problem we have as a society: Right now, each of these three types of money is basically considered as the same thing.
They just are different varieties of the same money, i.e. $1 million in government bonds equals a $1 million bank balance, which equals one million pieces of paper. But in actuality, they are three entirely separate currencies: Physical cash, digital cash, and government IOUs.
At this moment in time, these three varieties of money have a 1:1:1 exchange ratio, i.e. they’re freely interchangeable at parity. But this 1:1:1 variety exchange ratio (VER) actually depends on financial stability. And when there are serious problems, the exchange rate breaks down rapidly.
For example; in 2013 when the government of Cyprus froze bank accounts across the entire country. No one could access their bank balances for weeks. Clearly in an instance like this, the value of a bank balance becomes worthless. The only way to conduct a transaction was with physical cash.
So, in the event of a banking crisis, the variety exchange ratio changes quickly. Physical cash becomes much more valuable. It is the same thing in a government debt crisis. It is bizarre to think that the bonds of a bankrupt government are a widely accepted form of ‘risk-free’ savings among institutions.
But what happens when that bankrupt government defaults, or has to restructure its debt? The entire system breaks down. Suddenly the bonds are no longer ‘cash equivalents’, and there is a scramble to dump them and find another safe, reliable investment.
Cash is King
Similarly, the 1:1:1 VER quickly breaks down, just like it did in Greece. This is ultimately why it makes sense to hold some physical cash. You certainly won’t be worse off for holding some physical cash savings in a safe at home, especially since interest rates on bank balances are essentially zero.
Physical cash is by no means a magic bullet; it’s nothing more than a piece of paper printed by a government agency at the behest of an unelected central bank committee. Fundamentally, it has zero intrinsic value and in the long run all paper currencies will ultimately reach their intrinsic value of ZERO.
Future historians will wonder in utter disbelief how people could be so foolish as to assign any value whatsoever to paper and accept it as payment for delivered goods or services. – Nevertheless, in the short term, holding at least some physical cash makes sense as a hedge against financial calamity.
Trust and Debt Money Scam
To further expand on the concept of money, there are two more kinds of money in circulation, namely trust money, created out of people’s energy during the exchange between ordinary individuals, and debt money, created out of thin air by central banks and the banking industry through the fractional reserve scam.
The misuse of energy in the form of energy money causes suffering and death and is in violation with Galactic Law.
By legally equalising trust-money with debt-money, with an exchange rate of 1:1, debt money is given the same value as trust money, resulting in the fact that hardly anyone notices the scam that energy value equals with nothing.
Actually, debt money should have a much lower rating as there is a risk that the issuer could default on the debt!
This aqualisation results in inflation, which in itself is forthright theft; as the increase of the money supply goes far beyond social trust.
The conflict between the two kinds of money – trust versus debt money – must be clear: as a dollar can be spent only once – in principle for private transactions between citizens, but due to this manipulation scheme, it is also promised by governments to pay off the public debt to the central banks.
Through this scheme, governments are engaged in a crime scam, as they allocate and commit people’s money without the consent, nor knowledge and understanding of their citizens.
Government is Our Enemy
To keep it analytically simple: the creditor of the money is to be paid back – which is the Central Bank – with the same money created out of nothing.
This is an abusive scam between the Central Bank and the citizens of the world. By erecting a smoke screen, most people don’t notice the swindle: This is due to the fact that the government REQUIRES that citizens PAY their taxes in the currency of the central bank.
In short this commitment defines the essence of debt money.
As a result of this scheme, Inflation occurs, due to nothing more and nothing less than the injection of fiat money – debt money – into the existing amount of trust money. This is actually an ‘abuse of trust’ with regard to the people, or plainly defined FRAUD.
Everyone knows that debt must always be paid off, so the people collectively continue to pay off a debt to which they never made a commitment. This is a deliberate and blatant SCAM of the government.
This scam results in the following consequences: if all debt were to be repaid, then there would be no money left in circulation. Because the first component of the money supply – trust money – serves as collateral for the second – debt money – while the second is for the purchase of the first, so both shape the illusion of money. In other words,
Public debt is required to create money while the people are told that their money is needed to pay off public debt, which is, of course, complete nonsense and a huge lie!
The pledge of trust money is a promise. The collateral of debt money that arises from “debt” requires collateral for which taxes are created, collected by the government to pay off the ‘never-ending’ or perpetual debt to the Central Banks in the currency that the central bank itself has issued out of thin air.
This is subsequently mixed with the trust money already in circulation, making the SCAM invisible.
The System is Seen for What it Really is
So, the government is obviously our enemy. We have been betrayed. We should be angry and want to cry from frustration. But on the other hand, we must be glad and thankful to finally see through this scheme and see the system for what it really is, one that is physically and financially ruining us.
Let’s stop putting our trust in this impostor, the government, which, under the guise of being our faithful friend and a good provider, has betrayed us in favour of the multinationals and world financiers, the Deep State’s Brotherhood.
Let’s no longer ask for help, assistance, laws, etc., from our enemy. From today on, we should adopt the attitude of automatically being suspicious of all proposals, decisions or gifts coming from government. Always look this gift horse in the mouth.
If it suggests that we go right, we should go left. Even if we don’t know why, we will be sure to make the right decision, because government works against us, moving in the opposite direction should reap victory.
Remember; we do give the Deep State power by staying ignorant of their existence or by remaining angry about what they do without taking the appropriate action!
Read and use the information provided in the book THE GREAT AWAKENING – soon to be released in English – to combat your government, authorities and the evil Elite.
Don’t accept your slavery status any longer. Victory can be attained by simply walking away from it!
Agenda 21: Awareness And Activism + UN 2030 Agenda Decoded: Blueprint For The Global Enslavement Of Humanity Under Corporate Masters January 31 2022 | From: AmericanPolicyCenter / NaturalNews / Various
Sustainable Development: The Transformation of the Western World
Some think that the planet is in danger of global warming and over consumption. They really believe that the only way to fix the problem is to control the flow of resources and wealth, which literally means changing human civilization and the way we live.
This is an immense subject and many more articles are available in the Agenda 21 section of this website. This article is from the US but the principles of Agenda 21 are global - it came from the UN.
The problem is, that requires a forced transformation of our entire society to comply, and that ultimately leads to a thirst for power and topdown control – that will eventually lead to tyranny.
In his book, Earth in the Balance, Al Gore warned that a “wrenching transformation” must take place to lead Western countries away from the “horrors of the Industrial Revolution.”
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
The process to do that is called Sustainable Development and its’ roots can be traced back to a UN policy document called Agenda 21, adopted at the UN’s Earth Summit in 1992.
Sustainable Development calls for changing the very infrastructure of the nation, away from private ownership and control of property to nothing short of central planning of the entire economy – often referred to as top-down control.
Where and when did the term Sustainable Development originate?
The term “sustainable development” was born in the pages of “Our Common Future,” the official report of the 1987 United Nations World Commission on Environment and Development, authored by Gro Harlem Brundtland, Vice President
of the World Socialist Party.
For the first time the environment was tied to the tried and true Socialist goals of international redistribution of wealth. Said the report;
“Poverty is a major cause and effect of global environmental problems. It is therefore futile to attempt to deal with environmental problems without a broader perspective that encompasses the factors underlying world poverty and international inequality.”
The term appeared in full force in 1992, in a United Nations initiative called the U.N. Sustainable Development Agenda 21, or as it has become known around the world, simply Agenda 21. It was unveiled at the 1992 United Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED), ballyhooed as the Earth Summit.
In fact, the Earth Summit was one of the provisions called for in the Brundtland report as a means of implementing Sustainable Development around the world. More than 178 nations adopted Agenda 21 as official policy. President George H.W. Bush was the signatory for the United States.
What is Sustainable Development?
The 1989 Webster’s Dictionary defines “Sustainable Yield” as a requirement that trees cut down in a forest area be replaced by new plantings to ensure future lumber supplies.” That’s what most people think Sustainable Development means.
Proponents of Sustainable Development argue that it is about preserving resources for future generations. What’s wrong with that? Nothing in theory.
That would be sustainable with a small “s.” Just common sense usage of natural resources. The problem is, major forces now promoting it intend for Sustainable Development to be spelled with a capital “S.” They intend for a Socio-economic political movement that probes, invades and changes every aspect of human civilization.
And that’s the problem.
Imagine a world in which a specific “ruling principle” is created to decide proper societal conduct for every citizen.
That principle would be used to consider regulations guiding everything you eat, the kind of home you are allowed to live in, the method of transportation you use to get to work, what kind of work you may have, the way you dispose of waste, perhaps even the number of children you may have, as well as the quality and amount of education your children may receive.
Sustainable development encompasses every aspect of our lives.
According to its authors, the objective of sustainable development is to integrate economic, social, and environmental policies in order to achieve reduced consumption, social equity, and the preservation and restoration of biodiversity.
Top Sustainability Fallacies:
Lie: Sustainability is about protecting the environment
Reality: It is a political movement to replace capitalism with governement control of everything
Lie: Free market capitalism is the principle cause of planetary degradation and is not sustainable
Reality: It is government control of the economy that is not sustainable
Lie: Private property is a source of social injustice, and too valuable to be subject to free markets
Reality: The right to own and use private property is a fundamental source of wealth creation
Lie: Green energy creates jobs
Reality: Green energy is unreliable, uncompetitive and renders industry unable to compete in world parkets
Lie: C02 is a pollutant
Reality: C02 is the gas that all plants and crops breathe. More C02 = better agricultural production
Lie: The sustainability movement isn't trying to take away anyone's property rights or freedoms
Reality: The sustainability movement is relentlessly attacking property rights and freedoms
Lie: Climate change is catastrophic and anthropogenic and must be addressed through C02 abatement schemes
Reality:Man made climate change is a hoax with numerous provable data points and thousands of scientists going on the record - which is ignored by the cabal-controlled mainstream media
Lie: Compact development reduces pollution
Reality:Reality: Dense development is always correlated with intense pollution levels
Lie: Subways and mass transit can replace cars
Reality: They cannot. If they could there would be no cars in Manhattan
Lie: Compact urban development is more affordable for government
Reality: Empirical evidence proves compace development requires higher tax rates. Urbanisation strains police, fire, educational and social services
Lie: Afforable housing for people of all income levels will ensure healthier better balanced neighbourhoods
Reality: Low income housing usually creates more problems than it solves thereby damaging communities
The Sustainablists insist that society be transformed into feudal-like governance by making Nature the central organizing principle for our economy and society, not human need or wants.
This idea essentially elevates nature above Humans [we are all on this planet, their premise is bullshit]. As such, every societal decision would first be questioned as to how it might effect the environment.
To achieve this, Sustainablist policy focuses on three components; land use, education, and population control and population reduction.
Here is a direct quote from the report of the 1976 UN’s Habitat I conference which said:
“Land... cannot be treated as an ordinary asset, controlled by individuals and subject to the pressures and inefficiencies of the market. Private land ownership is also a principle instrument of accumulation and concentration of wealth, therefore, contributes to social injustice.”
Some officials claim that Sustainable Development is just a local effort to protect the environment and contain development -- just your local leaders putting together a local vision for the community.
Yet, the exact language and tactics for implementation of Sustainable Development are being used in nearly every city around the globe from Lewiston, Maine to Singapore.
Local indeed.
In short, Sustainable Development is the process by which the world is being reorganized around a central principle of state collectivism using the environment as bait.
One of the best ways to understand what Sustainable Development actually is can be found by discovering what is NOT sustainable.
According to the UN’s Biodiversity Assessment Report, items for our everyday lives that are NOT sustainable include:
Ski fields
Grazing of livestock
Plowing of soil
Building fences
Industry
Single family homes
Paved and tarred roads
Logging activities
Dams and reservoirs
Power line construction
Economic systems that fail to set proper value on the environment (capitalism, free markets).
Maurice Strong, Secretary General of the UN’s Rio Earth Summit in 1992 said;
“… Current lifestyles and consumption patterns of the affluent middle class – involving high meat intake, use of fossil fuels, appliances, home and work airconditioning, and suburban housing are not sustainable.”
This goal is exactly the policies that are written into such legislation as Cap and Trade, the Clean Air Act, the Clean Water Act.
It is also the policy behind the many corporate commercials seen nightly on television which advocate “Going Green".
They are all part of the efforts to modify consumer behavior to accept less, deal with higher energy prices, restrict water use and place severe limitations on use of private property – all under the environmental excuse.
And one of the most destructive tools used to enforce Sustainable Development policy is something called the “precautionary principle.”
That means that any activities that might threaten human health or the environment should be stopped - even if no clear cause and effect relationship has been established - and even if the potential threat is largely theoretical.
That makes it easy for any activist group to issue concerns or warnings by news release or questionable report against and industry or private activity, and have those warnings quickly turned into public policy – just in case.
Many are now finding non-elected regional governments and governing councils enforcing policy and regulations.
As these policies are implemented, locallyelected officials are actually losing their own power and decision-making ability in their elected offices. More and more decisions are now being made behind the scenes in non-elected “sustainability councils” armed with truckloads of federal regulations, guidelines, and grant money.
According to its authors, the objective of Sustainable Development is to integrate economic, social, and environmental policies in order to achieve reduced consumption, social equity, and the preservation and restoration of biodiversity.
The Sustainable Development logo used in most literature on the subject contains three connecting circles labeled along the lines of Social Equity; Economic Prosperity; and Ecological Integrity (known commonly as the 3 E's).
Social Equity
Sustainable Development’s Social Equity plank is based on a demand for “social justice.” Social Justice is described as the right and opportunity of all people “to benefit equally from the resources afforded us by society and the environment.”
According to Sustainablist doctrine, it is a social injustice for some to have prosperity if others do not. It is a social injustice to keep our borders closed.
It is a social injustice for some to be bosses and others to be merely workers. Social justice is a major premise of Sustainable Development.
Another word for social justice is Socialism or Marxism. Karl Marx was the first to coin the phrase “social justice.”
Most recently the theory of social justice has been used to justify government takeover of health care. Today, the phrase is used throughout Sustainablist literature.
The Sustainablist system is based on the principle that individuals must give up selfish wants for the needs of the common good, or the “community.”
This is the same policy behind the push to eliminate our nation’s borders to allow the “migration” of those from other nations into the United States to share our individually-created wealth and our taxpayers-paid government social programs.
Say the Sustainablists, “Justice and efficiency go hand in hand.” “Borders,” they say, “are unjust.”
Under the Sustainablist system, private property is an evil that is used simply to create wealth for a few. So too, is business ownership. Instead, “every worker / person will be a direct capital owner.”
Property and businesses are to be kept in the name of the owner, keeping them responsible for taxes and other expenses, however control is in the hands of the “community” (government).
Under Sustainable Development individual human wants, needs, and desires are to be conformed to the views and dictates of social planners.
Harvey Ruvin, Vice Chair of the International Council on Local Environmental Initiatives (ICLEI) said:
“Individual rights will have to take a back seat to the collective” in the process of implementing Sustainable Development.
Economic Prosperity
Sustainable Development’s economic policy is based on one overriding premise: That the wealth of the world was made at the expense of the poor.
It dictates that, if the conditions of the poor are to be improved, wealth must first be taken from the rich.
[But this mandate does not apply to not the "elite" of course].
Consequently, Sustainable Development’s economic policy is based, not on private enterprise, but on public / private partnerships.
In the free-market of the past, most businesses were started by individuals who saw a need for a product or service and they set out to fill it. Some businesses prospered to become huge corporations, some remained small “mom and pop” shops, others failed and dissolved.
Most business owners were happy to be left alone to take their chances to run their businesses on their own, not encumbered by a multiplicity of government regulations.
If they failed, most found a way to try again. In the beginning of the American Republic, government’s main involvement was to guarantee they had the opportunity to try.
In order to give themselves an advantage over competition, some businesses -- particularly large corporations – now find a great advantage in dealing directly with government, actively lobbying for legislation that will inundate smaller companies with regulations that they cannot possibly comply with or even keep up with.
This government / big corporation back-scratching has always been a dangerous practice because economic power should be a positive check on government power, and vise versa. If the two should ever become combined, control of such massive power can lead only to tyranny.
One of the best examples of this was the Italian model in the first half of the Twentieth Century under Mussolini’s Fascism.
Together, select business leaders who have agreed to help government impose Sustainablist green positions in their business policies, and officials at all levels of government are indeed merging the power of the economy with the force of
government in Public / Private Partnerships on the local, state and federal levels.
As a result, Sustainable Development policy is redefining free trade to mean centralized global trade “freely” crossing (or eliminating) national borders.
It definitely does not mean people and companies trading freely with each other. Its real effect is to redistribute manufacturing, wealth, and jobs out of our borders and to lock away natural resources.
After the regulations have been put in place, literally destroying whole industries, new “green” industries created with federal grants bring newfound wealth to the “partners.” This is what Sustainablists refer to as economic prosperity.
The Sustainable Development “partnerships” include some corporations both domestic and multination. They in turn are partnered with the politicians who use their legislative and administrative powers to raid the treasury to fund and enforce the scheme.
Of course, as the chosen corporations, which become a new elite, stamp out the need for competition through government power, the real loser is the consumers who no longer count in market decisions. Government grants are now being used by industry to create mandated green products like wind and solar power.
Products are put on the market at little risk to the industry, leaving consumers a more limited selection from which to choose. True free markets are eliminated in favor of controlled economies which dictate the availability and quality of products.
Ecological Integrity
“Nature has an integral set of different values (cultural, spiritual and material) where humans are one strand in nature’s web and all living creatures are considered equal.
Therefore the natural way is the right way and human activities should be molded along nature’s rhythms.” from the UN’s Biodiversity Treaty presented at the 1992 UN Earth Summit.
This quote lays down the ground rules for the entire Sustainable Development agenda.
It says humans are nothing special – just one strand in the nature of things or, put another way, humans are simply biological resources.
Funny that, the Cabal see us as "Human Resources" also. What a coincidence...
Sustainablist policy is to oversee any issue in which man interacts with nature – which, of course, is literally everything.
And because the environment always comes first, there must be great restrictions over private property ownership and control.
This is necessary, Sustainablists say, because humans only defile nature. Under Sustainable Development there can be no concern over individual rights.
Individual human wants, needs, and desires are conformed to the views and dictates of social planners.
The UN’s Commission on Global Governance said in its 1995 report:
“Human activity… combined with unprecedented increases in human numbers… are impinging on the planet’s basic life support system.
Action must be taken now to control the human activities that produce these risks.”
Under Sustainable Development, limited government, as advocated by our Founding Fathers, is impossible because, we are told, the real or perceived environmental crisis is too great.
Only government can be trusted to respond. Maurice Strong, Chairman of the 1992 UN Earth Summit said:
“A shift is necessary toward lifestyles less geared to environmentally-damaging consumption patterns. The shift will require a vast strengthening of the multilateral system, including the United Nations.”
The politically based environmental movement provides Sustainablists camouflage as they work to transform systems of government, justice, and economics.
It is a masterful mixture of socialism (with its top down control of the tools of the economy) and fascism (where property is owned in name only – with no individual owner control).
Sustainable Development is the worst of both the left and the right. It is not liberal, nor is it conservative.
It is a new kind of tyranny that, if not stopped, will surely lead us to a new Dark Ages of pain and misery yet unknown to mankind.
UN Report: Habitat I Conference:
"Land cannot be treated as an ordinary asset, controlled by individuals and subject to the pressures and inefficiencies of the market.
Private land ownership is also a principle instrument of accumulation and concentration of wealth, therefore, contributers to social injustice."
Six months after his inauguration, President Bill Clinton issued Executive Order #12852 which created the President’s Council On Sustainable Development (PCSD) on June 29 1993.
The Council’s Membership included:
Twelve Cabinet-level Federal Officials
Jonathan Lash, Pres. World Resources Institute
John Adams, Ex. Dir. National Resources Defense Council
Dianne Dillon-Ridgley, Pres. Zero Population
Michelle Perrault, International V.P., Sierra Club
John C. Sawhill, Pres. The Nature Conservancy
Jay D. Hair, Pres. World Conservation Union (IUCN)
Kenneth L. Lay, CEO, Enon Corporation
William D. Ruckelshaus, Chm., Browning-Ferris Industries & former EPA Administrator
Some of these members were representatives of the same groups which helped write Agenda 21 at the UN level, now openly serving on the President’s Council to create policy for the implementation of Sustainable Development at the federal level.
With great fanfare the Council issued a comprehensive report containing all the guidelines on how our government was to be reinvented under sustainable development.
Those guidelines were created to direct policy for every single federal agency, state government and local community government. Their purpose was to translate the recommendations set forth in Agenda 21 into public policy administered by the federal government.
They created the American version of Agenda 21 called “Sustainable America - A New Consensus”.
The Four Part Process Leading to Sustainable Development
So how is this “wrenching transformation” being put into place? There are four very specific routes being used. In the rural areas it’s called the “Wildlands Project.”
In the cities it’s called “Smart Growth.” In business it’s called “Public / Private Partnerships.” And in government it’s called “Stakeholder Councils.”
The Wildlands Project
"WE MUST MAKE THIS PLACE AN INSECURE AND INHOSPITABLE PLACEFOR CAPITALISTS AND THEIR PROJECTS... WE MUST RELCAIM THEROADS AND PLOWED LANDS, HALT DAM CONSTRUCTION, TEAR DOWNEXISTING DAMS, FREE SHACKLED RIVERS AND RETURN TO WILDERNESSMILLIONS OF TENS OF MILLIONS OF ACRES OF PRESENTLY SETTLEDLAND.”
- Dave Foremen, Earth First.
The Wildlands Project was the brainchild of Earth First’s Dave Foreman and it literally calls for the “re-wilding” of 50% of all the land in every state – back to the way it was before Christopher Columbus set foot on this land.
It is a diabolical plan to herd humans off the rural lands and into human settlements. Crazy you say! Yes. Impossible? Not so fast. From Foreman, the plan became the blueprint for the UN’s Biodiversity Treaty and quickly became international in scope.
But how do you remove people from the land? One step at a time. Let’s begin with a biosphere reserve. A national park will do. A huge place where there is no human activity.
For example, Yellowstone National Park, devoid of human habitation can serve as its center. Then a buffer zone is established around the reserve.
Inside the buffer only limited human activity is allowed. Slowly, through strict regulations, that area is squeezed until human activity becomes impossible.
Once that is accomplished, the biosphere is extended to the former buffer zone borders – and then a new buffer zone is created around the now-larger biosphere and the process starts again. In that way, the Biosphere Reserve acts like a cancer cell, ever expanding, until all human activity is stopped.
And there are many tools in place to stop human activity and grow the reserve.
Push back livestock’s access to river banks on ranches, many times as much as 300. When the cattle can’t reach the stream, the rancher can’t water them -- he goes out of business. Lock away natural resources by creating national parks.
It shuts down the mines -- and they go out of business. Invent a Spotted Owl shortage and pretend it can’t live in a forest where timber is cut. Shut off the forest.
Then, when no trees are cut, there’s nothing to feed the mills and then there are no jobs, and -- they go out of business.
Locking away land cuts the tax base. Eventually the town dies. Keep it up and there is nothing to keep the people on the land – so they head to the cities. The wilderness grows – just like Dave Foreman planned.
It comes in many names and many programs. Heritage areas, land management,wolf and bear reintroduction, rails to trails, conservation easements,open space, and many more.
Each of these programs is designed to make it just a little harder to live on the land – a little more expensive – a little more hopeless, literally herding people off their land and into designated human habitat areas – cities.
In the West, where vast areas of open space make it easy to impose such polices there are several programs underway to remove humans from the land. Today, there are at least 31 Wildlands projects underway, locking away more than 40
percent of the nation’s land.
The Alaska Wildlands Project seeks to lock away and control almost the entire state.
In Washington State, Oregon, Idaho, Montana parts of North and South Dakota, parts of California, Arizona, Nevada, New Mexico, Wyoming, Texas, Utah, and more, there are at least 22 Wildlands Projects underway.
For example, one project called Yukon to Yellowstone (Y2Y) – creates a 2000 mile no-man’s land corridor from the Arctic to Yellowstone.
East of the Mississippi, there are at least nine Wildlands projects, covering Maine, Pennsylvania, New York, West Virginia, Ohio, Virginia, Tennessee, North and South Carolina, Georgia and Florida. Watch for names of Wildlands Projects like Chesapeake Bay Watershed, Appalachian Restoration Project and Piedmont Wildlands Project.
How Did We Get Here? J. Gary Lawrence - Bill Clinton's Advisor for Sustainable Development:
"Participating in a UN advocated planning process would very likely bring out many... right wing conspiracy groups... who would actively work to defeat any elected official... undertaking Local Agenda 21.
So we call our process something else, such as "Comprehensive Planning", "Growth Management", or "Smart Growth.""
Smart Growth
The second path is called Smart Growth. The process essentially puts a line around a city, locking off any growth outside that line.
Such growth is disdainfully labeled “Urban Sprawl.” The plan then curtails the building of more roads to cut off access to the newly created rural area. Inside the circle, concerted efforts are made to discourage the use of cars in preference to public transportation, restricting mobility.
Because there is a restriction on space inside the controlled city limits, there is a created shortage of land and houses, so prices go up. That means populations will have to be controlled, because now there is no room to contain more people.
Cities are now passing “green” regulations, forcing homeowners to meet strict guidelines for making their homes environmentally compliant, using specific building materials, forcing roof replacements, demanding replacement of appliances, and more.
Those not in compliance will be fined and will not be able to sell their homes. There are now efforts underway to impose so-called “smart meters” which replace thermostats in homes.
Homeowners will not have control of such meters. Instead, the electric company will determine the necessary temperature inside each home.
Government agencies or local policy boards will be tasked with the responsibility to conduct an energy audit in each home to determine the steps necessary to bring the home into energy compliance. In Oakland, California, such restrictions will cost each homeowner an estimated $36,000.
The Cap N Trade bill contains a whole section on such restrictions for the nation, and most local communities are now busy creating development plans that encompass many of the same restrictions.
There is now a new push to control food production under the label of Sustainable Farming. Food sheds are now being advocated.
These are essentially government run farms located just outside the smart growth area circling the city.
Food is to be grown using strict guidelines which dictate what kinds of food is to be produced and the farming practices to be used.
These are essentially based on the blue print of Chinese Agrarian villages that cannot possibly grow enough food to feed the community unless populations are tightly controlled. True Sustainable farming programs discourage importing goods from outside the community.
A Red Agenda Marked With a Pretty Green Name: "Sustainability"
Agenda 21 spread like an INFECTION: UN Agenda 21 > ICLEI > NGO's > Central / Regional Planners
Planning associations provide sample ordinances based on ECLEI doctin that originated in UN Agenda 21
Municipal plans become manifestos
Stake Holder Councils
Inside the cities, government is increasingly controlled by an elite ruling class called stake holder councils. These are mostly Non-governmental organizations, or NGOs, which, like thieves in the night, converge on the community to stake their claim to enforce their own private agendas.
The function of legitimately – elected government within the system votes to create a system of boards, councils and even regional governments to handle every aspect of day-to-day operation of the community.
Once in place, the councils and boards basically replace the power of elected officials with non-elected, appointed rulers answerable to no one.
The councils are controlled by a small minority in the community, but they are all - powerful. They force citizens to seek permission (usually denied) for any changes to private property.
They use such excuses as historic preservation, water use restrictions, energy use, and open space restrictions. They will dictate that homeowners must use special “green” light bulbs and force stores to only use paper bags, for example.
They over-burden or even destroy business, creating stiff regulations on manufacturing and small business in the community. They may dictate the number of outlets a business may have in a community, not matter what the population
demands. For example, in San Francisco there can only be seven McDonalds.
They can dictate the kind of building materials owners can use in their private home – or whether one can build on their property at all.
Then, if they do grant a permit for building, they might not decide to let the property owner acquire water and electricity for the new home – and they may or may not give you a reason for being turned down.
As part of Sustainable health care, they may even dictate that you get the proper exercise – as determined by the government. Again, San Francisco has built a new federal building – the greenest ever built.
The elevators will only stop on every third floor so riders are forced to use stairs – for their own health, of course.
These councils fit almost perfectly the definition of a State Soviet: a system of councils that report to an apex council and then implement a predetermined outcome. Soviets are the operating mechanism of a government-controlled economy.
So Many Things Making So Little Sense: (US)
EPA drives industries overseas where the pollution increases
EPA embraces ethanol while blaming farming for pollution
Master plans across America overtly ignore property rights
Environmental nooses rob property rights and individual freedoms based on unsettled science, distorted statistics and exaggerated predictions
Focus on Social Equity eclipsing life-liberty property (Why?)
Municipal master plans have become manifestos
People in tears across America
Public / Private Partnerships
The fourth path to imposing Sustainable Development is Public/Private Partnerships (PPPs). Unfortunately, today, many Conservative / Libertarian organizations are presenting PPPs as free enterprise and a private answer for keeping taxes down by using business to make a better society.
There are certain areas where private business contracts to do jobs such as running school cafeterias through a competitive bid system. That type of arrangement certain does serve the tax payers and provides better services. That’s not how PPPs are used though Sustainable Development.
In truth, many PPPs are nothing more than government-sanctioned monopolies in which a few businesses are granted special favors like tax breaks, the power of eminent domain, non-compete clauses and specific guarantees for return on their investments.
That means they can fix prices, charge beyond what the market demands, and they can use the power of government to put competition out of business. That is not free enterprise. And it is these global corporations that are pushing the green agenda.
If you can stomach reading this horse shit, click on the image above
PPPs were the driving force behind the Trans Texas Corridor, using eminent domain to take more than 580,000 acres of private land - sanctioned by the partnership with the Texas government. And PPPs are taking over highways and local water treatment plants in communities across the nation.
PPPs in control of the water system can control water consumption – a major part of the Sustainable Development blueprint.
Fueled by federal grant programs through the EPA, the auto industry has produced and forced onto the market “green” cars that no one wants to buy, such as the Chevy Volt.
For its part of the partnership, government passed regulations that keep gas prices high to make them more inviting.
The federal government has entered into many partnerships with alternative energy companies in a move to force wind power and solar power on an uninterested public. Again, such industries only exist though the power and of government determined to enforce a certain political agenda. They would never survive in an honest free market.
Using government to ban its own product, General Electric is forcing the mercury- laden green light bulb, costing 5 times the price of incandescent bulbs. Such is the reality of green industry, which depends more on government subsidy and grants than on customers.
The North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) is the root of the “Free Trade” process and the fuel for PPPs between international corporations and government, thereby creating an “elite” class of “connected” businesses – or what Ayn Rand called “the power of pull.”
Success in the PPP world is not based on quality of product and service, but on who you know in high places.
To play ball in the PPP game means accepting the mantra of Sustainable Development and helping to implement it, even if it means going against your own product. That’s why Home Depot uses its commercials to oppose cutting down trees and British Petroleum advocates reducing the use of oil.
It is not free enterprise, but a Mussolini-type fascism of government and private industry organized in a near impenetrable force of power. And it’s all driven by the Agenda 21 blueprint of Sustainable Development.
ICLEI: Charter 1.7 - Principles
The Association shall promote, and ask its individual members to adopt, the following Earth Charter Principles to guide local action:
6. Prevent harm as the best method of environmental protection and, when knowledge is limited, apply a precautionary approach.
7. Adopt patterns of production, consumption, and reproduction that safeguard Earth’s regenerative capacities, human rights, and community well-being. (Communitarianism with forced sterilization?)
(9) Eradicate poverty as an ethical, social, and environmental imperative.
9. Eradicate poverty as an ethical, social, and environmental imperative.
10. Ensure that economic activities and institutions at all levels promote human development in an equitable and sustainable manner.
11. Affirm gender equality and equity as prerequisites to sustainable development and ensure universal access to education, health care, and economic opportunity.
14. Integrate into formal education and life-long learning the knowledge, values, and skills needed for a sustainable way of life.
What Kinds of Groups Promote this in the U.S.A.?
Many people ask how dangerous international policies can suddenly turn up in state and local government, all seemingly uniform to those in communities across the nation and around the globe.
The answer – meet ICLEI, a non-profit, private foundation, dedicated to helping locally elected representatives fully implement Agenda 21 in the community.
Originally known as the International Council for Local Environmental Initiatives (ICLEI), today the group simply calls itself “ICLEI – Local Governments for Sustainability.”
In 1992, ICLEI was one of the groups instrumental in creating Agenda 21.
The group’s mission is to push local communities to transform the way governments operate, creating a “community plan,” creating a wide range of non-elected planning and councils which then impose severe regulations and oversight policies, affecting every homeowner, every business, every school; literally every aspect of the citizen’s lives.
And it’s having tremendous success.
Currently there are over 600 American cities in which ICLEI is being paid dues with tax dollars from city councils to implement and enforce Sustainable Development. ICLEI is there to assure that the mayors keep their promises and meet their goals. Climate change and the goal to cut the communities carbon footprint is, of course, the ICLEI mantra.
Here’s just some of the programs ICLEI provides cities and towns, in order to spread their own particular political agenda in the name of “community services” and environmental protection, they include:
Software programs to help set the goals for community development – which leads to controlling use of private property;
Access to a network of “Green” experts, newsletters, conferences and workshops – to assure all city employees are in the process;
Toolkits, online resources, case studies, fact sheets, policy and practice manuals, and blueprints used by other communities;
Training workshops for staff and elected officials on how to develop and implement the programs;
And, of course, there’s Notification of relevant grant opportunities – this is the important one – money – with severe strings attached.
ICLEI recommends that the community hire a full time “sustainability manager,” who, even in small towns, can devote 100% of his time to assure that every nook and corner of the government is on message and under control.
Using environmental protection as the excuse, these programs are about reinventing government with a specific political agenda. ICLEI and others are dedicated to transforming every community in the nation to the Agenda 21 blueprint.
In addition to ICLEI, groups like the Sierra Club, Nature Conservancy and Audubon Society, NGOs which also helped write Sustainable Development policy have chapters in nearly every city. They know that Congress has written legislation providing grants for cities that implement Sustainablist policy. They agitate to get the cities to accept the grants.
If a city rejects the plan, they then agitate to the public, telling them that their elected representatives have cost the city millions in “their” tax dollars. In the end, through such tactics, the NGOs usually get their way.
The NGOs are joined in their efforts by professional planning groups and associations such as the American Planning Association (APA), The Renaissance Planning Group, and the International City/County Management association (ICMA). IN fact there are literally hundreds, if not thousands, of non-profits, NGOs and planning groups living off the grant money, working to enforce Sustainable Development policy at every level of government.
The APA - Professional Planners [or Anti-Capitalist Political Advocacy?] APA embraces ICLEI Programmes(s)
1.1 "The built envoronment is a primary contributor to climate change" ...Business as usual will not suffice."
1.3 Social Equity and Climate CHange (&Environmental Justice)
2.4 #6: "Should reduce reliance on coal..."
2.4 #10: Growe food for local consumption(Starve the world?)
2.4 #14: Reduce VMT (Vehicle Miles Travelled)
2.4 #15: Cap & Trade for carbon ...needed.
Land Use #15: Create city-funded housing repair programs
Transportation #4: Increase CAFE standards
Here Are Just a Few to Watch For:
The American Planning Association (APA) is the nation’s leading enforcer of Sustainable policy. It came into being in 1978 and can be found in literally every community in the nation. It doesn’t have the same open ties to the UN as does
ICLEI, but is every bit as involved, if not more so.
The APA’s “Growing Smart Legislative Guide Book” is found in nearly every university, state and county in the country. It is the planning guide preferred by most urban and regional planners.
The American Planning Association is one of many members of the PCSD. They partner with ICLEI & ICMA in the implementation of sustainable development. ICMA, International City / County Management Association, is an organization
of professional local government leaders building sustainable communities worldwide.
Christchurch, New Zealand
ICMA provides technical and management assistance, training, and information resources in the areas of performance measurement, ethics education and training, community and economic development, environmental management, technology, and other topics to its members and the broader local government community.
They are aided in their efforts through such as the U.S. Conference of Mayors, National Governors Association, National League of Cities, the National Association of County Administrators and several more groups that are supposed to
represent elected officials.
The Renaissance Planning Group is an urban planning firm. They played a critical role in Florida’s “Forever Program”. The Forever Program is Florida’s premier conservation and recreation lands acquisition program. Florida Forever is the
largest public land acquisition program of its kind in the United States.
With approximately 9.8 million acres of conservation land in Florida, more than 2.4 million acres were purchased under the Florida Forever and P2000 programs.
Propaganda from idiots for idiots
In 2007, the Virginia state legislature passed HB 3202 mandating that counties with the prescribed growth rate establish high density urban development areas. As a result, to date, 67 counties in the Commonwealth of Virginia are required to establish “urban development areas”.
The process and proposed land use planning that is being implemented, follows the very same policies called for in Agenda 21’s biodiversity plan. This requirement by the state forces local governments to compromise your private property through zoning measures called for in the Smart Growth program for sustainable development.
The American Farmland Trust (AFT) formed in 1980, works to acquire and control farmer development rights and the purchase of Agriculture Easements which drastically reduce, if not eliminate private ownership of the land.
"We believe planning should be a tool for allocating resources... and eliminating the great inequalities of wealth and power in our society... because the free market has proven incapable of doing this."
The Danger is in the “Process”
Sustainable policies are being sold universally to the public as a means to protect the environment and control growth. That is simply the excuse for the policies being implemented in its name.
The real problem is the “PROCESS” through which Sustainable Development is being forced on unsuspecting citizens.
The comprehensive land use plans are being steered by planning groups through manipulation by facilitated stakeholder consensus councils.
Though their meetings are “open” to the public, they are void of any public input.
The predetermined outcome severely restricts land use and compromises private property ownership in an already distressed market.
They answer to no one and they are run by zealots with their own political agenda imposing international laws and regulations.
Local homeowners have no say in the process and in most cases are shut out. Sometimes they are literally thrown out of council meetings because they want to discuss how a regulation is going to affect their property or livelihood.
Communities have dealt with local problems for 200 years. Some use zoning, some don’t. But locally elected town councils and commissioners, which meet and discuss problems with the citizens, are how this nation was built and prospered.
Today, under Sustainable Development, NGOs like ICLEI and the APA move in to establish non-elected boards, councils and regional government bodies.
Despite the Senate’s refusal to ratify the Biodiversity Treaty in 1994, the Agenda 21 policies called for by the convention, are being implemented nationwide. No matter where you live, rest assured Agenda 21 policies are being implemented in your community.
Proponents of Agenda 21 and Sustainable Development attempt to ridicule those who oppose the programs as being paranoid radicals who are spreading conspiracy theories about what they call an “obscure 20 year old UN document.”
Yet, in 2012 the UN sponsored Rio+20, in which 50,000 delegates from around the world to celebrate Agenda 21 and find means to complete its implementation.
Sustainable Development is not about “saving the environment.” It is about a revolutionary coup. It is about establishing global governance and abandoning the principles of Natural Law on which America was founded.
The politically-based environmental movement provides Sustainablists camouflage as they work to transform global systems of government, justice, and economics.
It’s a masterful mixture of Socialism, (with its top-down control of the tools of the economy); fascism (where property is owned in name only – with no private control); and Corporatism, (where partnerships between government and private business create government sanctioned monopolies.)
Sustainable Development is the worst of both the left and the right. It is bad policy pushed by both liberal and conservatives.
It is a new kind of tyranny that, if not stopped, will surely lead all human kind to a new Dark Ages of pain and misery.
What has Sustainability Become? Unfortunately, the environmental movement has been hijacked as a convenient excuse to attack capitalism; blame America; transfer wealth; impinge on Constitutional rights; and install a government-run socio-economic system.
United Nations paradigm:Capitalism and private property rights are not sustainable, and pose the single greatest threat to the world's ecosystem and social equity.
How to Fight Back Against Sustainable Development
Be aware of the world in which your elected officials live.
See below: ICLEI doesn't come with flashing lights that say "ICLEI".
It comes wrapped in a plain green package labelled "Smart Growth" or "Sustainability":
You need to know who the players are and you need to understand the political world your officials are operating in.
This may help you to understand that perhaps they aren’t all evil globalists, but, perhaps, good people who are surrounded by powers that won’t let them see the reality of the policies they are helping to implement.
I’m certainly not making excuses for them, but before you rush in and start yelling about their enforcing UN policies on the community, here are some things you should consider.
In most communities, you mayor, city council members and county commissioners are automatically members of national organizations like the National Conference of Mayors, National League of Cities, and the national associations for city council members, and the same for commissioners.
Those in the state government also have the National Governors Association and state legislators have their national organization.
For the past twenty years or more, each and every one of these national organizations have been promoting Sustainable
Development and related policies. The National Mayors Conference and the National Governors Association have been leaders in this agenda, many times working directly with UN organizations to promote the policy.
That is the message your local elected leaders hear; from the podium; from fellow officials from other communities; from “experts” they’ve been told to respect; in committee meetings; from dinner speakers; from literature they are given at such meetings.
They are told of legislation that will be soon be implemented, and they are even provided sample legislation to introduce in their communities.
Back home, they are surrounded by a horde of “stakeholder” groups, each promoting a piece of the agenda, be it policies for water control, energy control, development control, specific building materials control, historic preservation and control of “downtown” development, conservation easements and development rights for control of rural property.
These groups like ICLEI, the American Planning Association, the Renaissance Planning Group, and many more, are heavily involved with state and federal plans. They arrive in your community with blue prints, state and federal plans, grants and lots of contacts in high places.
There are official programs for “going Green,” Comprehensive land use plans, and lots of programs for the kids in the classrooms.
There is also a second horde involved in the Sustainablist invasion – state and federal agency officials including EPA agents; air and water quality agents; Interior Department officials, HUD officials, energy officials, Commerce Department officials, and on and on – all targeting your locally elected officials with policy, money, regulations, reports, special planning boards, meetings, and conferences, all promoting the exact same agenda.
And don’t forget the news media, both locally and nationally, also promoting the Sustainablist agenda, attacking anyone not going along, ready to quickly use the “extremist” label against them.
The message is clear - Sustainable Development is reality – politically correct, necessary, unquestionable, and it has “consensus.”
Is your head spinning yet? Think of the affect all of this has on a poor local official who just thought he would run for office and serve his community. This is his reality. This is what he thinks government is supposed to be because, after all, everyone he is dealing with says so.
Now, as he is surrounded by all of these important, powerful folks, along comes a local citizen who tells him that some guy named Tom DeWeese says all of these programs are from the UN and are taking away our liberty.
Who? He said what? Come on, I’m not doing that. And I don’t have time to talk about it. I have another meeting to go to.
If we are going to successfully fight Agenda 21, it is vitally important that we all recognize this reality as we plan to deal with it and defeat it. With that in mind, I offer the following ideas.
How to Fight Back
First and foremost, don’t try to fight alone. If you try to attend local meetings by yourself you will be ignored. You will need others to plan and implement strategy.
You have family and friends. Start with them. Ask them to help look into some local policies. Even if they start off skeptical about your concerns, it won’t take them long to see the truth.
Check out of there is a local tea party or even a local Republican group. Churches are a target of such policies. Alert people at your church and ask them to help fight back.
Find people to help you!
Research: Don’t even begin to open up a fight until you know certain details. First, who are the players in your community. What privately funded “stakeholder” groups are there? What is their agenda?
What other communities have they operated in? What projects? What results? Who are their members in your community?
Are they residents or did they come from “out of town?” (That could prove to be valuable information later in the fight). Finding this information may be the hardest of your efforts. They like to operate out of the spotlight.
It’s not likely that the town will carry official documentation of who it is working with. It probably will require that you attend lots of meetings and hearings. Take note of who is there and their role. Do this quietly. Don’t announce to the community what you are doing. Don’t make yourselves a target. You may have to ask questions and that may raise some eyebrows. But stay out of the way as much as possible.
Second, get all the details on the plans your community is working on. Has there already been legislation passed? Most of this information can be found on the town website. Knowing this information will help you put together a plan of action.
Once you have it, you can begin to take your fight public.
With the information you have gathered, begin to examine the effect the policies will have on the community and its residents. Find who the victims of the legislation or regulation may be. This will be of great value as you confront city council. People understand victim stories – especially if it is them. It is the best way to undermine the process – and help get people to join your cause.
You will find that Conservation Easements have raised taxes as much of the county land is removed from the tax rolls – someone has to make up for the lost revenue and the payment of easements. Are “stakeholder” groups helping to get landowners to sign up for the easements – and if so – do they get any kind of kickbacks?
Who are getting the easements? You may find the rich land owners have found a great loophole to cut their own property taxes as the middle class makes up the short fall. This will help bring usually disinterested people to your cause.
Does the community plan call for reduction of energy use? If so, look for calls for energy audits and taxes on energy use. The audits mean that the government has set a goal to reduce energy use. It may follow that government agents are going to come into your home to inspect your energy use.
Then they are going to tell you what must be done in your home to cut usage. That will cost you money. Don’t fall for the line that it is all voluntary – to help you save money.
They haven’t gone to this much trouble to be ignored. Regulations are not voluntary.
These are just a couple of examples of what to look for as you do your research.
There are many more, including meters on wells to control water use, smart meters to take away your control of your thermostat; non elected boards and councils to control local development and implement smart growth, leading to
population growth; Public / Private Partnerships with local and large corporations to “go Green;” creation of open space; pushing back live stock from streams, enforcing sustainable farming methods that restrict energy and water use in farming practices; and much more.
It all leads to higher costs and shortages, in the name of environmental protection and conservation and controlling growth (anti-sprawl, they call it).
Your goal is to stop Sustainable Development in your community. That means a campaign to stop the creation of non-elected regional government councils that are difficult to hold accountable.
It means to stop local governments from taking grants that come with massive strings attached to enforce compliance.
And it means you must succeed in removing outsider organizations and Stakeholder groups that are pressuring your elected officials to do their bidding. Civic Action: Armed with as much information as you can gather (and armed with the ability to coherently discuss its details) you are ready to take your battle to the public.
First, it would be better for you to try to discuss it privately with some of your elected officials, especially if you know them. Tell them what you have found and explain why you are opposed.
First discuss the effects of the policies on the average citizen. Explain why they are bad. Only very slowly should you bring the conversation around to the origin of such polices - Agenda 21 and the UN.
Don’t start there. It is important that you build the case to show that these policies are not local, but part of a national and international agenda. If this conversation does not go well (and it probably won’t) then you have to take it to the next level – to the public.
Begin a two fold campaign. First, write a series of letters to the editor for the local newspaper. Make sure that you are not alone.
Coordinate your letters with others who will also write letters to back up and support what you have written. These will generate more letters from others, some for your position and other against you.
Be prepared to answer those against you as they are probably written by those “Stakeholders” who are implementing the policies in the first place. This may be a useful place for you to use what you’ve learned about these groups to discredit them.
Second, begin to attend Council meetings and ask questions. The response from the council members will determine your next move. If you are ignored and your questions met with silence or hostility, prepare a news release detailing your questions and the background you have as to why you asked those questions.
Pass the news release out to the people at the next meeting as well as the news media. Attend the next meeting and the next demanding answers. Be sure to organize people to come with you.
Don’t try this alone. If necessary, have demonstrators outside city hall carrying signs or handing out flyers with the name and picture of the officials who won’t answer your questions along with the question you asked – including the details you have about the policy.
The point in all of this is to make the issue public. Take away their ability to hide the details from the public. Expose the hoards of outsiders who are dictating policy in your community. Force the people you elected to deal with YOU – not the army of self-appointed “stakeholders” and government officials. Shine a very right spotlight on the roaches under the rock.
If the newspaper is with you, great, but you will probably find it working with the other side. It may be difficult to get a fair shake in the newspaper or on radio.
That’s why you deliver your news releases to both the media and the public. Get signs, and flyers in stores if necessary. And keep it up for as long as it takes. Don’t stop the public demonstration until you had acquired victory, or at least started a public debate.
The final step is to use the energy you have created to run candidates for office against those who have ignored and fought you. Ultimately, that is the office holders worst nightmare and may be the most effective way to get them to respond and serve their constituents.
New Tactic
As mentioned in the beginning, over the past couple of years, as we’ve educated people on Agenda 21 and its UN origins, the natural reaction by concerned citizens and activists has been to rush into city hall and accuse their elected representatives of implementing international policies on the town.
This has, of course, been met with skepticism and ridicule on the part of some of the elected officials (egged on by the NGO stakeholder groups and planning organizations).
Today, the promoters of Agenda 21, including ICLEI and the American Planning Association (APA) have worked overtime to paint our movement as crazed conspiracy theorists wearing tin foil hats and hearing voices.
So, it’s time to change tactics.
Here is an undeniable fact: Agenda 21 / Sustainable Development cannot be enforced without usurping or diminishing private property rights. So, we need to begin to challenge the plans that affect private property rights.
However, as we move in that direction, we must have a clear understanding of what property rights are. Many people today have little or varying ideas of property rights.
Forty years ago people understood things like “No Trespassing,” “My home is my castle,” and “step across that line and suffer the consequences.” Such ideas today seem quaint and antiquated to many, especially with government invading private property at will.
Sometimes, in order to purchase property or to get access to services, we sign documents that say government or utility agents are free to come on our property at will. The idea of “Keep Out” is almost unheard of.
However, to demand that your private property be honored and protected a definition must be established before you start the effort.
As you stand in front of the elected officials at their regular meeting, ask them simply;
“As you bring these planners into our community and begin to implement their programs, what guarantees do I have that you will protect my private property rights?”
At this point you haven’t mentioned Agenda 21, and you haven’t attacked planning. You are simply asking a non-combative question.
They will assure you that they are in full support of protecting private property.
And then you say;
“Well, I’m happy to hear that. But, I would really like to have that in writing.”
And you present the resolution to them. If you can read it aloud to the meeting, so much the better. They may say they need to take it under consideration and will get back to you. Fine.
Make sure you are back at the next meeting to ask about it. If they say “No.” You simply ask “Why?” and take it from there.
Do not attempt this alone. The key to this effort is persistence and organization.
If they have refused to sign it then you need 5 or 10 people to stand up and ask why. You need to escalate this at each meeting until it becomes a public issue -
“Why won’t your elected officials sign a simple document that says they will protect your private property rights? What are they hiding in the plans they are presenting to us?”
This can and will lead to protests, letters to the editor and other media available to you. Put the elected officials’ names on signs carried by protestors who are rallying outside the next council or planning meeting.
Make them the issue. What you are really doing is laying the ground work for a campaign to defeat them in the next election. It is also important to do research into what planning groups, non-governmental organizations (NGO’s) federal grants and agencies may be involved in the process. All of them have a background.
Find out who they are and what they have done in the past in other communities and present that info to your fellow citizens as a warning of what is to come. I recommend that you create a “rapid response team” to be prepared to immediately respond in the media to anything they do. Make them scared to act.
If ICLEI is in your city, the details about Agenda 21 and the UN connection is easier. Your community is paying them dues with your tax dollars. Here is how to handle them:
If your council derides your statements that their policies come from the UNs Agenda 21, simply print out the home page from ICLEI’s web site: www.iclei.org
This will have all of the UN connections you’ve been talking about, in ICLEI’s own words.
Pass out the web page copies to everyone in the chamber audience and say to your elected officials;
“Don’t call me a radical simply for reporting what ICLEI openly admits on its own web site. I’m just the one pointing it out – you are the ones who are paying our tax dollars to them.”
Then demand that those payment stop. You have proven your case.
Stopping Consensus Meetings
Most public meetings are now run by trained and highly paid facilitators whose jobs is to control the meeting and bring it to a preplanned conclusion. If he is good at his job, the facilitator can actually make the audience think the “consensus” they have reached on and issue or proposal is actually their idea.
This is how Sustainable Development is being implemented across the nation, especially in meetings or planning boards that are advertised as open to the public.
They really don’t want you there and the tactic is used to move forward in full view of the public without them knowing what is happening. There is nothing free or open about the consensus process.
It is designed to eliminate debate and close discussion.
To bust up the process you must never participate, even to answer a question.
To do so allows the facilitator to make you part of the process. Instead, you must control the discussion.
Here is a quick suggestion on how to foul up the works:
Never go alone to such a meeting. You will need at least three people – the more the better.
Do not sit together. Instead, fan out in the room in a triangle formation.
Know ahead of time the questions you want to ask: Who is the facilitator?
What is his association with the organizers? Is he being paid?
Where did these programs (being proposed) come from? How are they to be funded?
One question to ask over and over again, both at facilitated meetings and city council meetings, is this:
“With the implementation of this policy, tell me a single right or action I have on my property that doesn’t require your approval or involvement. What are my rights as a property owner?”
Make them name it.
You will quickly see that they too understand there are no property rights left. By asking these questions you are putting his legitimacy in question, building suspicion among the rest of the audience, destroying his authority.
They
will try to counter, either by patronizing and humoring you, at first, or, then becoming hostile, moving to have you removed as a disruptive force.
That’s where the rest of your group comes in. They need to back you up, demand answers to your questions. If you have enough people in the room you can cause a major disruption, making it impossible for the facilitator to move forward with his agenda.
Do not walk out and leave the room to him. Stay to the end and make him shut down the meeting.
In Conclusion
These suggestions on how to fight back are, admittedly, very basic and elementary. They are meant only to be a guideline. You will have to do your homework and adapt these tactics to your local situation.
These tactics are designed to create controversy and debate to force the Agenda 21 issue out of the secret meetings and into public debate where they belong.
Many of these same tactics can be used at all levels of government, right up and into national legislation.
Our plan is to demand answers from elected officials who want to ignore us.
They must be taught that such actions have consequences. As we learn new, successful tactics, I’ll share them with activists across the world.
The American Policy Center is now a partner in a new effort to create tactics and provide education to activists called Sustainable Freedom Lab - and hopefully it can serve as a resource for thw eorld, not just America. Here activists can share their findings, successful tactics and research with the rest of the movement.
The exciting news is that, finally, people are starting to understand that Agenda 21 is destroying our nations and they are beginning to fight back. The UN Agenda 21 house of cards is being exposed and it will fall with continued efforts and exposure by the people, and for the people - not just America - Worldwide.
The battle to stop the UN’s Agenda 21 is ragging on the local level across the world.
This document describes nothing less than a global government takeover of every nation across the planet.
The "goals" of this document are nothing more than code words for a corporate-government fascist agenda that will imprison humanity in a devastating cycle of poverty while enriching the world's most powerful globalist corporations like Monsanto and DuPont.
In the interests of helping wake up humanity, I've decided to translate the 17 points of this 2030 agenda so that readers everywhere can understand what this document is really calling for.
To perform this translation, you have to understand how globalists disguise their monopolistic agendas in "feel good" language.
Here's the point-by-point translation. Notice carefully that nowhere does this document state that "achieving human freedom" is one of its goals.
Nor does it explain HOW these goals are to be achieved. As you'll see here, every single point in this UN agenda is to be achieved through centralized government control and totalitarian mandates that resemble communism.
Translation of the UN's "2030 Agenda Blueprint for Globalist Government" (Controlled by Corporate Interests)
Goal 1. End poverty in all its forms everywhere
Translation: Put everyone on government welfare, food stamps, housing subsidies and handouts that make them obedient slaves to global government. Never allow people upward mobility to help themselves.
Instead, teach mass victimization and obedience to a government that provides monthly "allowance" money for basic essentials like food and medicine. Label it "ending poverty."
Goal 2. End hunger, achieve food security and improved nutrition and promote sustainable agriculture
Translation: Invade the entire planet with GMOs and Monsanto's patented seeds while increasing the use of deadly herbicides under the false claim of "increased output" of food crops.
Engineer genetically modified plants to boost specific vitamin chemicals while having no idea of the long-term consequences of genetic pollution or cross-species genetic experiments carried out openly in a fragile ecosystem.
Goal 3. Ensure healthy lives and promote well-being for all at all ages
Translation: Mandate 100+ vaccines for all children and adults at gunpoint, threatening parents with arrest and imprisonment if they refuse to cooperate. Push heavy medication use on children and teens while rolling out "screening" programs. Call mass medication "prevention" programs and claim they improve the health of citizens.
Goal 4. Ensure inclusive and equitable quality education and promote lifelong learning opportunities for all
Translation: Push a false history and a dumbed-down education under "Common Core" education standards that produce obedient workers rather than independent thinkers. Never let people learn real history, or else they might realize they don't want to repeat it.
Goal 5. Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls
Translation: Criminalize Christianity, marginalize heterosexuality, demonize males and promote the LGBT agenda everywhere. The real goal is never "equality" but rather the marginalization and shaming of anyone who expresses any male characteristics whatsoever.
The ultimate goal is to feminize society, creating widespread acceptance of "gentle obedience" along with the self-weakening ideas of communal property and "sharing" everything.
Because only male energy has the strength to rise up against oppression and fight for human rights, the suppression of male energy is key to keeping the population in a state of eternal acquiescence.
Goal 6. Ensure availability and sustainable management of water and sanitation for all
Translation: Allow powerful corporations to seize control of the world's water supplies and charge monopoly prices to "build new water delivery infrastructure" that "ensures availability."
Goal 7. Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and modern energy for all
Translation: Penalize coal, gas and oil while pushing doomed-to-fail "green" energy subsidies to brain-dead startups headed by friends of the White House who all go bankrupt in five years or less.
The green startups make for impressive speeches and media coverage, but because these companies are led by corrupt idiots rather than capable entrepreneurs, they always go broke. (And the media hopes you don't remember all the fanfare surrounding their original launch.)
Goal 8. Promote sustained, inclusive and sustainable economic growth, full and productive employment and decent work for all
Translation: Regulate small business out of existence with government-mandated minimum wages that bankrupt entire sectors of the economy. Force employers to meet hiring quotas of LGBT workers while mandating wage tiers under a centrally planned work economy dictated by the government. Destroy free market economics and deny permits and licenses to those companies that don't obey government dictates.
Goal 9.) Build resilient infrastructure, promote inclusive and sustainable industrialization and foster innovation
Translation: Put nations into extreme debt with the World Bank, spending debt money to hire corrupt American corporations to build large-scale infrastructure projects that trap developing nations in an endless spiral of debt.
See the book Confessions of an Economic Hit Man by John Perkins to understand the details of how this scheme has been repeated countless times over the last several decades.
Goal 10. Reduce inequality within and among countries
Translation: Punish the rich, the entrepreneurs and the innovators, confiscating nearly all gains by those who choose to work and excel. Redistribute the confiscated wealth to the masses of non-working human parasites that feed off a productive economy while contributing nothing to it... all while screaming about "equality!"
Goal 11. Make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe, resilient and sustainable
Translation: Ban all gun ownership by private citizens, concentrating guns into the hands of obedient government enforcers who rule over an unarmed, enslaved class of impoverished workers.
Criminalize living in most rural areas by instituting Hunger Games-style "protected areas" which the government will claim are owned by "the People" even though no people are allowed to live there. Force all humans into densely packed, tightly controlled cities where they are under 24/7 surveillance and subject to easy manipulation by government.
Goal 12. Ensure sustainable consumption and production patterns
Translation: Begin levying punitive taxes on the consumption of fossil fuels and electricity, forcing people to live under conditions of worsening standards of living that increasingly resemble Third World conditions.
Use social influence campaigns in TV, movies and social media to shame people who use gasoline, water or electricity, establishing a social construct of ninnies and tattlers who rat out their neighbors in exchange for food credit rewards.
Goal 13. Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts
Translation: Set energy consumption quotas on each human being and start punishing or even criminalizing "lifestyle decisions" that exceed energy usage limits set by governments. Institute total surveillance of individuals in order to track and calculate their energy consumption.
Penalize private vehicle ownership and force the masses onto public transit, where TSA grunts and facial recognition cameras can monitor and record the movement of every person in society, like a scene ripped right out of Minority Report.
Goal 14. Conserve and sustainably use the oceans, seas and marine resources for sustainable development
Translation: Ban most ocean fishing, plunging the food supply into an extreme shortage and causing runaway food price inflation that puts even more people into economic desperation.
Criminalize the operation of private fishing vessels and place all ocean fishing operations under the control of government central planning. Only allow favored corporations to conduct ocean fishing operations (and make this decision based entirely on which corporations give the most campaign contributions to corrupt lawmakers).
Goal 15. Protect, restore and promote sustainable use of terrestrial ecosystems, sustainably manage forests, combat desertification, and halt and reverse land degradation and halt biodiversity loss
Translation: Roll out Agenda 21 and force humans off the land and into controlled cities. Criminalize private land ownership, including ranches and agricultural tracts. Tightly control all agriculture through a corporate-corrupted government bureaucracy whose policies are determined almost entirely by Monsanto while being rubber-stamped by the USDA.
Ban woodstoves, rainwater collection and home gardening in order to criminalize self-reliance and force total dependence on government.
Goal 16. Promote peaceful and inclusive societies for sustainable development, provide access to justice for all and build effective, accountable and inclusive institutions at all levels
Translation: Grant legal immunity to illegal aliens and "protected" minority groups, which will be free to engage in any illegal activity -- including openly calling for the mass murder of police officers -- because they are the new protected class in society. "Inclusive institutions" means granting favorable tax structures and government grants to corporations that hire LGBT workers or whatever groups are currently in favor with the central planners in government.
Use government agencies to selectively punish unfavorable groups with punitive audits and regulatory harassment, all while ignoring the criminal activities of favored corporations that are friends of the political elite.
Goal 17. Strengthen the means of implementation and revitalize the global partnership for sustainable development
Translation: Enact global trade mandates that override national laws while granting unrestricted imperialism powers to companies like Monsanto, Dow Chemical, RJ Reynolds, Coca-Cola and Merck.
Pass global trade pacts that bypass a nation's lawmakers and override intellectual property laws to make sure the world's most powerful corporations maintain total monopolies over drugs, seeds, chemicals and technology. Nullify national laws and demand total global obedience to trade agreements authored by powerful corporations and rubber-stamped by the UN.
Total enslavement of the planet by 2030 As the UN document says, "We commit ourselves to working tirelessly for the full implementation of this Agenda by 2030."
If you read the full document and can read beyond the fluffery and public relations phrases, you'll quickly realize that this UN agenda is going to be forced upon all the citizens of the world through the invocation of government coercion.
Nowhere does this document state that the rights of the individual will be protected.
Nor does it even acknowledge the existence of human rights granted to individuals by the Creator.
Even the so-called "Universal Declaration of Human Rights" utterly denies individuals the right to self defense, the right to medical choice and the right to parental control over their own children.
The UN is planning nothing less than a global government tyranny that enslaves all of humanity while calling the scheme "sustainable development" and "equality."
1984 has finally arrived. And of course it's all being rolled out under the fraudulent label of "progress."
However, it is not too late. Awareness is required before action may be taken.
5G Cell Phone Radiation: How The Telecom Companies Are Losing The Battle To Impose 5G Against The Will Of The People + French NGOs Demand Stop To ‘Out Of Control’ 5G Network
January 30 2022 | From: GlobalResearach / Connexion / Various The telecommunications companies and the mainstream media would have you believe that the race to roll out 5G is unstoppable. That you are nothing and no one in the face of a lethal multi-trillion-dollar agenda imposed by some of the most powerful entities on the planet.
They thought that if they called their new, alleged “communications technology”, adapted from the military Active Denial Technology, “5G” or fifth generation, the public would just assume that it was more of the same as 4G, 3G or 2G.
And if they could characterise the rollout as a race, the public would not have enough time to find out what a killer technology 5G is. How wrong they were!
Not only has the public found out, but now they know how lethal previous generations of wireless technology – to be used concurrently with 5G – are as well.
Below is the evidence from a number of different countries that the pushback is huge and growing.
The telcos have lost the propaganda war, despite their control of the mainstream media, from which not a whisper of the dangers of 5G is heard, and of social media and Youtube, who have been desperately deleting millions of accounts to silence the naysayers.
He asked if algorithms could be trusted with our lives and hopes and whether machines should be allowed to doom us to a cold and heartless future in an Orwellian world designed for censorship, repression and control.
He recalled the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and endorsed its ideals of upholding freedom of opinion and expression, the privacy of home and correspondence, and the right to seek and impart information and ideas.
He exhorted the academic committees, company boards and industry standards groups who are writing the rulebooks of the future, making ethical judgements, and choosing what will or will not be rendered possible to find the right balance between freedom and control, between innovation and regulation, between private enterprise and government oversight.
He insisted that the ethical judgements inherent in the design of new technology must be made transparent to all and that joint efforts must be made to agree a common set of global principles to shape the norms and standards that will guide the development of emerging technology.
What follows is a citizen journalist’s list of the actions taken to halt 5G and reports and complaints that have discredited this Machiavellian attempt to foist a disastrous technology on the world in 2019.
It is not an exhaustive list and I extend my apologies to all those whose efforts I may have overlooked here and much gratitude to all who have contributed to making this pushback so successful.
However, we cannot afford to be complacent and, in particular, we must work to stop the use of the Earth orbits and the stratosphere to beam 5G down to Earth, for this puts the ionosphere and the entire planet at risk.
We must also work to ensure that the use of street lights with blue light for this anti-life agenda is rapidly reversed.
The effort to stop 5G is still gathering momentum and we must continue to work together and tirelessly to protect all life on Earth and the planet itself until this demented plan is relegated to the history books as the most Mephistophelian scheme in the history of humankind.
Congresswomen Eshoo and Speier introduce BillHR530 to block FCC cell tower pre-emption and preserve local government control and invalidate the Federal Communications Commission’s (FCC) 26 September 2018 ruling to accelerate the deployment of 5G small cells throughout the US.
8
USA
14 January
Russia Today (RT) Americaairs the first of 7 reports on the dangers of 5G: 5G Wireless: A Dangerous ‘Experiment on Humanity’. “Is there a catch?”, asks the presenter. “Just a small one”, comes the reply, “It just might kill you”. The segment is viewed 1.8 million times.
9
European Commission
14 January
The Scientific Committee on Health, Environmental and Emerging Risks (SCHEER) rates the potential effects on wildlife of increases in electromagnetic radiation from 5G a maximum 3 in terms of scale, urgency and interactions with other ecosystems and species, stating that “The lack of clear evidence to inform the development of exposure guidelines to 5G technology leaves open the possibility of unintended biological consequences”.
The Illinois Supreme Court rules that a woman can sue Six Flags Great America for fingerprinting her child without telling her how the data would be used in violation of the state’s biometric law. “This is no mere ‘technicality,'” Chief Justice Lloyd Karmeier writes in the opinion. “The injury is real and significant.”
12
Italy
30 January
An Italian Court in the city of Monza rules the acoustic neuroma brain tumour of an airport employee to be an occupational disease caused by exposure to the radiation from a cell phone he used for over 10 years for his work.
Study: Radiation From Smartphones May Impair Memory In Teens. A research team at the Swiss Tropical and Public Health Institute says that radio frequency electromagnetic fields (RF-EMF) may negatively affect an adolescent’s brain from cellphone exposure, causing potentially harmful effects on his or her memory performance. The authors say having the device close to one’s head lead to the greatest amount of radiation exposure.
Eric Van Rongen, Chair of ICNIRP [self-proclaimed international commission on non-ionizing radiation protection, but actually just a German NGO], the organisation whose non-transparent pronouncements on the international limits at which phones can emit radiofrequency are strangely adopted by UN bodies, calls 5G “a public health experiment”, stating that “It will be necessary to gain more information about the exposure and any health problems that might come from an effect of that exposure”.
A class action lawsuit is filed against the FCC by 62 entities and municipalities across the USA. aimed at first slowing down and then vacating the FCC “order and declaratory ruling purporting to streamline the deployment of wireless facilities by pre-empting local government authority”.
Insurers announce premature death trend. British insurer Legal & General CEO says: “There’s been a long discussion about whether this is a blip or a trend, and sadly it’s looking like a trend.”
Florence applies the precautionary principle, refusing permissions for 5G and referring to “the ambiguity and the uncertainty of supranational bodies and private bodies (like ICNIRP)”, which “have very different positions from each other, despite the huge evidence of published studies”.
29
Italy
28 March
One Roman district votes against 5G trials, with others expected to follow. Other motions to Stop 5G are expected in the four regional councils, one provincial council and other municipal councils of Italy.
Belgian Environment Minister announces that Brussels is halting the 5G rollout, saying, “The people of Brussels are not guinea pigs whose health I can sell at a profit.” It turns out that there is now no methodology to effectively measure the radiation of MIMO antennas, which have the characteristic of varying field in time, space and intensity, unlike antennas used for 2G, 3G and 4G, which emit radiation of constant intensity and space. Celine Fremault therefore asserted that, as this technical obstacle was not resolved, she would not go further in the legislative process.
An EU report admits that 5G is a massive experiment, lamenting that “it is not possible to accurately simulate or measure 5G emissions in the real world” and stating that “complex interference effects … may result, especially in dense urban areas.”
The California Supreme Court publishes an opinionsupporting municipal authority to make regulations on so-called ‘small cell’ PROW (public right of way) towers and uses of the public’s right-of-way. This opinion affirms the 2016 appellate court ruling.
New York Congressman Thomas Suozzi sends a letter to the FCC seeking answers about the technology. “Small cell towers are being installed in residential neighborhoods in close proximity to houses throughout my district. ,,, My constituents are worried that should this technology be proven hazardous in the future, the health of their families and value of their properties would be at serious risk.”
44
Switzerland
17 April
The Federal Office for the Environment (FOEN) sends a 7-page information letter to all cantonal governments for the purpose of “calming the situation”. It claims that the new 5G adaptive (directional) antennas would mean much lower exposures for the population: “The beam cone is now aligned directly to the user and in all other radiation directions the radiation is lower [sic].”
French farmers sue the state over mystery cow deaths they blame on electromagnetic fields. A group of French cattle farmers is suing the state over the mysterious death of hundreds of cows, which they believe are the victims of harmful electromagnetic fields. Several studies have shown that livestock, particularly cattle, are affected by even low-level electromagnetic fields
48
Swiss Re
May
Insurance company Swiss Re”s report on New Emerging Risk Insights states that “Existing concerns regarding potential negative health effects from electromagnetic fields (EMF) are only likely to increase. An uptick in liability claims could be a potential long-term consequence. … interruption and subversion of the 5G platform could trigger catastrophic, cumulative damage.”
49
Denmark
4 May
A legal opinion by a Danish law firm states that rolling out 5G is illegal under EU and international law: It is the conclusion of this legal opinion that establishing and activating a 5G-network, as it is currently described, would be in contravention of current human and environmental laws enshrined in the European Convention on Human Rights, the UN Convention on the Rights of the Child, EU regulations, and the Bern- and Bonn-conventions. … This also applies when the radiation remains within the limits recommended by ICNIRP and currently used in Denmark as well as broadly within the EU.
50
Denmark
4 May
Danish group Landsindsamlingen mod5G announces it is suing the Danish state for having planned the implementation of the new 5G mobile network throughout Denmark by the year 2020 without conducting any kind of health test in relation to the long-term exposure of people or consideration of the harmful effects on the unborn, children and nature.
The US National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) and US National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) criticize FCC plans for opening a 24 GHz spectrum band to 5G telecommunications providers, stating that US weather forecasting capabilities would be set back decades. The matter is on the agenda for international treaty negotiations at the International Telecommunication Union’s World Radio Conference (WRC) in the fall of 2019, but with respect to 24 GHz, the Department of State has already submitted the FCC’s out-of-band emission limits as the US position during preliminary negotiations.
A man living in the Tver region saws down a cell tower because he believes the radiation from it is destroying the vegetable, berry and fruit crops growing on his land located nearby.
Glastonbury Town Council opposes the introduction of 5G technology in Glastonbury until further information has been obtained on the health effects on residents, adopting the following motion: “This council has a social responsibility to protect the public and environment from exposure to harm, albeit unpredictable in the current state of scientific knowledge, and therefore opposes the roll-out of 5G in the Parish of Glastonbury – based on the precautionary principle – until further information is revealed from a newly convened 5G advisory committee (working group).”
5G installer discusses the consequences of 5G. Current radiofrequency emitted by cell towers uses relatively low power (1.5-2.8 MHz), which at short range superheats the water molecules in your brain, eyes and testicles. It dissipates over distance as it has a long wave trough. 5G will be up close, in offices, outside homes, everywhere, including in the back of self-driving cars. It broadcasts in GHz not MHz — 30 GHz is 15,000 times more powerful than current previous levels.
68
Ireland
18 June
A motion calling on Clare County Council to oppose the rollout of 5G on health grounds is backed by the elected representatives.
69
USA
18 June
Pennsylvania lawmakers cancel a vote on proposed legislation to facilitate infrastructure next-generation 5G wireless services. It is the third defeat for the Verizon- and AT&T-backed legislation.
70
US
20 June
The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention report that US suicide rates are at the highest level since World War II. Life expectancy, perhaps the broadest measure of a nation’s health, has fallen for three straight years, the first three-year drop since 1915 to 1918.
71
UK
25 June
UK parliamentary committee discusses concerns about the health effects of electromagnetic fields and 5G, especially with regard to electrohypersensitivity Tonia Antoniazzi, MP, asks why the inaccurate and discredited 2012 report of AGNIR is still on the Public Health England website.Transcript. Video (from 16. 35).
US Senator Dianne Feinstein introduces SB 2012, ‘‘Restoring Local Control Over Public Infrastructure Act of 2019’’, to repeal FCC rules that limit state and local government control over telecom infrastructure. The bill is supported by the US Conference of Mayors, National Association of Telecommunications Officers and Advisors, American Public Power Association, Communications Workers of America, National Association of Counties, League of California Cities and American Public Works Association.
75
France
27 June
After victories for “electrohypersenstive” (EHS) people in Toulouse (March) and Bordeaux (May), the Tribunal de grande instance of FOIX issues a decision protecting EHS people who cannot tolerate dirty electricity diffused by “smart” meters.
The European Stop 5G Alliance comprising representatives from 19 European countries is officially founded at an international conference in Mendrisio, Switzerland.
The Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals affirms the City of Berkeley’s right to require cell phone retailers in the city to notify prospective customers about cell phone manufacturers’ safety guidelines to ensure consumer safety, adopted in May 2015.
Prof. Em. Martin L. Pall states that 5G effects will take months, not years, and he expects a breakdown in mental function, sterility, damaged heart function and societal collapse.
83
Italy
4 July
60 regions, autonomous provinces and municipalities question 5G, a moratorium is established in Italy and 14 municipalities approve Stop 5G city council resolutions or motions. The Mayor of Marsaglia issues Italy’s first Stop 5G ordinance: It “has been shown in four studies (Rea 1991, Havas 2006, 2010, McCarty et al. 2011) that it is possible to identify people with electromagnetic hypersensitivity and demonstrate that they can be tested using objective, measurable responses, demonstrating that these subjects truly are hypersensitive when compared with normal controls; that other studies show that there are true and proper physiological changes in subjects with electrosensitivity and that two studies (De Luca, Raskovic, Pacifico, Thai, Korkina 2011 and Irigaray, Caccamo, Belpomme 2018) demonstrated that electrosensitive people have high levels of oxidative stress and a prevalence of certain genetic polymorphisms, which may suggest a genetic predisposition; that the European Parliament in its 2009 Resolution and the Assembly of the Council of Europe with Resolution No. 1815 of 2011 called on member states to recognize electrosensitivity as a disability, in order to give equal opportunities to those affected”. The Mayor of San Gregorio Matese bans the installation of 5G antennas on the municipal territory.
California Assembly Bill 272 asks all school districts, county offices of education, and charter schools to come up with smartphone policies to limit or prohibit student use at school.
President Putin emphasizes the environmental risks of new technologies, saying “Hopes that the new technologies themselves will save the planet from the growing anthropogenic influence turned out to be illusions. Nature and climate degradation continues.”
91
EU
14 July
Galileo, the EU global navigation satellite system, is non-operational for at least four days as of 11 July following a mysterious outage. The Galileo satellite system was launched in 2016 and was funded by the EU as an alternative to the US Air Force’s Global Positioning System (GPS) and the Russian global navigation satellite system GLONASS.
French NGO Alert Phonegate launches class action lawsuit against telco Nokia for selling “smart” phones that were shown by the French National Frequency Agency (ANFR) to exceed the European specific absorption rate (SAR) limit. This deception is facilitated by the entry into force of the new European Directive (2014/53/EU), which has relaxed controls by allowing manufacturers to self-certify their products.
The Green party in Lausanne (Vaud) insists on the precautionary principle, saying that 5G antennas are being installed while the consequences of these new technologies are not known. Green representatives call for a moratorium in Vaud and commit to opposing all new antennas until they receive clear and satisfactory answers relating to the impact of 5G.
The Natural Resources Defense Council, joined by various American Indian tribes, as well as the National Association of Tribal Historic Preservation Officers and the National Trust for Historic Preservation, win a victory when the federal appeals court in D.C. ruled that the FCC illegally eliminated historic-preservation and environmental review—and important opportunities for public participation—for 5G wireless infrastructure projects. Emphasizing the importance of such review, the court held that that the FCC’s attempted explanations for the elimination “did not meet the standard of reasoned decision-making.”
Tesla solar panels are catching fire. Amazon and Walmart have both been burned. Walmart is suing. Installations at all 29 Walmart stores showed signs of gross negligence and many were unsafe.
Cellphone Users Sue Apple and Samsung Over Radiation Exposure. Andrus Anderson in San Francisco is representing 16 plaintiffs against Apple and Samsung in a controversy some in the medical and scientific community are allegedly calling “Phone Gate.”
UK Prime Minister Boris Johnson describes the Internet of Things, “smart” cities and AI as a giant, dark thundercloud lowering oppressively over the human race, threatening a cold and heartless future in an Orwellian world designed for censorship, repression and control. He appeals for joint efforts on agreeing a common set of global principles to shape norms and standards to guide the development of emerging technology.
124
Cyprus
26 Sept
The Parliamentary Committees on Health and Environment in Cyprus hold discussions on the negative aspects of 5G. Proposals are put forward to freeze 5G deployment and keep Cyprus radiation-free as a detoxing zone attractive for tourism.
Journal Municipal Lawyer publishes article entitled Putting the Cart Before the Horse – The FCC’s ‘5G First, Safety Second’ Policy, which states that the FCC should have completed the review of its RF standards before opening the floodgates for the deployment of hundreds of thousands of small cell transmitters for 5G. The rules adopted by the FCC in 1996 were designed to protect only against the thermal effects of RF exposure.
The first IoT privacy study examines the data-sharing activities of 81 different “smart” devices commonly found in people’s homes, finding that 72 of the 81 IoT devices shared data with third parties completely unrelated to the original manufacturer (and not just in the U.S. or UK).
Councillor calls for more debate on use of 5G technologies. Cllr Kevin Murphy raised the motion at a meeting of West Cork local authority last week and said the issue of 5G might not be something that will affect people now, but will do so in the future. Fears over claims that 5G mobile technology may be linked to cancer.
Town of Totnes, Devon bans installation of 5G. Totnes mayor Jacqi Hodgson, a Green Party county councillor, said: “Our concern is that there will be a much higher blanket of radiation all around us.”
Kingsbridge Town Council passes 5G resolution in response to requests for them to stand together with councils from Totnes, Glastonbury, and Frome and adopt a moratorium on 5G infrastructure.
5G drone project over Hawaii halted. Research Corporation of the University of Hawaii (RCUH) withdraws its Use Determination Application from the Lana’i Planning Commission.
Multi-billion-dollar liability action launched against 5G telecom companies. The Nationale Bond tegen Overheidszaken (NBO; National Union Against State Affairs) has launched a liability suit with 4,000 claimants to date. A charge is payable of €1,000 per day on which 5G is active, together with a charge of €2,000 when a 5G antenna is located within a radius of 250 metres of a claimant’s home. Each claimant may be legally entitled to an annual fee of up to €730,000 if the 5G network is activated. The action is based on earlier NBO litigation successes against the health insurance companies. The liability action is operating from 27 September to 31 October 2019.
Note to Readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
French NGOs Demand Stop To ‘Out Of Control’ 5G Network
A group of French NGOs is calling for a moratorium on the rolling out of new super-fast mobile phone cellular network 5G in France, saying it could cause “out of control” consequences for society.
NGOs including Agir Pour l'Environnement and Priartém-Electrosensibles de Francehave come out againstthe new technology, saying that its use will lead to physical and mental health problems, environmental issues, and could even negatively impact social freedom.
It has been suggested that the 5G network, which is set to allow very large amounts of data to be sent and accessed using mobile devices, will be “revolutionary”.
In future, its super-fast abilities mean it could be linked to new technology such as self-driving cars, surgery done remotely, and a wider Internet of Things (in which homes are connected to the Internet, for example, to control automatic lights, heating, smart fridges, smart TVs etc).
In France, 5G was officially announced on July 15 this year, with businesses in large towns and cities set to receive the coverage by the end of 2020, and two-thirds of individuals expected to be covered by 2026.
But in a statement, the NGOs said that introducing the technology could “push the planet and our society into a world with out-of-control consequences”.
It said:
"Digital wireless communication technology has already had impacts that are not virtual: risks for our physical and mental health, hyperconnection with the world of work, and among young people; impact on the soil, landscapes and ecosystems, a growing energy bill, wasting of resources, risks from big data on our freedoms, lobbying weight on science and public politics…”
The statement said that 5G would “irrefutably aggravate these facts”.
"Developing a system that will cause lasting changes to the electromagnetic environment of our planet, to interactions between people and machines, and the wider workings of our society cannot be possible without deep consideration and debate from citizens.”
The possible impact of 5G on certain health conditions has been acknowledged by health authorities including French health and environmental agency (Agence Nationale de Sécurité Sanitaire de l'Alimentation, de l'Environnement et du Travail) Anses.
In 2016, it found that the radio frequencies of technology such as 5G could cause problems - for certain people - with memory, attention, and coordination. At the time, Anses recommended that young people limit their exposure to portable devices, tablets, and internet-connected toys.
In 2018, the agency also recognised that some people were reporting health problems linked to electromagnetic fields and waves, although it did add that this did not prove that there was a real link.
Electrosmog
The effect of electromagnetic radiation on the human body depends on the type of rays and how long a person is exposed to them. The higher the frequency, the shorter the wavelength and the greater the energy levels.
And this year, a group of 170 scientists raised concerns about the possible effects of 5G - and the higher frequencies it requires to work, which may be up to ten times’ higher than those used now - to the European Union.
Yet, there are already international guidelines in place over the use of maximum frequencies and their impact on health, with the limit currently at 300 GHz, which is much higher than those set to be used for 5G.
In France, tests on 5G have already been rolled out in towns and cities including Bordeaux, Grenoble, Lille, Lyon, Marseille, Nantes, and Toulouse
Operators have said they are aiming to offer 75% 5G coverage across the country by 2022, and across 100% by 2030 - although it is likely to make phone contracts more expensive, with tariffs expected to rise by €10-€20 per month for 5G-connected devices.
Escaping The Matrix: 10 Ways To Deprogram Yourself January 29 2022 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
Think of the way most people live. They force themselves to wake up in the morning, dress up, drive straight to work, drive back home about 8 hours later, watch TV, and sleep, only to repeat the same routine next day for almost their entire lives.
We consider this kind of living as normal and even healthy, but if you stop and think about it, it’s not healthy at all.
Life is so precious and beautiful, and instead of making the most out of it, we choose to waste it just because we have been programmed to do so. Habits, tradition and belief systems have turned us into mindless automatons who don’t enjoy life and just follow a predetermined path that was handed to us by society.
This programming, however, can be broken, if we realize that the way we live is preventing us from squeezing the juice out of life, and gather the courage to transform how we think and act. Then, life can be turned into a beautiful celebration filled with laughter, play, and love.
How to Deprogram Yourself
Below are 10 tips that will help you to deprogram yourself and escape the matrix you’ve been trapped into since the day you were born:
1. Break Free From the Shackles of Organized Religion.
Dogmatic, organized religion imposes on people what to think and what not to, what is good and what is bad, what is right and what is wrong. Thus religion prevents people from using their critical thinking, seeking the truth, and reaching to their own conclusions.
On the contrary, it teaches them to blindly follow a set of morals and rules. The result? Emotional suppression and suffering. If you want to reclaim your individuality, honestly express yourself and walk on the path of understanding, be sure to break the chains of organized religion and start your own quest for the truth from scratch.
2. Stop Giving Your Power Away to Authority
From a very young age, most of us were taught to doubt ourselves and do only what authority commands us to, even if we didn’t feel like doing so. Now, as adults, we don’t trust ourselves, and so we choose to let others have power over our lives.
We vote for politicians who do nothing but lie to us in order to satisfy their inner hunger, being under the illusion that by voting we are granted the power to choose our future, when in reality the choices we are presented with are very limited and almost exactly the same.
So we allow a small group of people to manipulate us for their own personal gain, foolishly believing that they want to contribute to the betterment of society.
If we truly want to start creating a positive change in the world, we need to stop giving power to a few others and hold them responsible for our lives, and instead start taking responsibility in our own hands so that we can become the creators of our destiny.
3. Question the Current Economic System
Money, in essence, is created out of debt, thus creating the illusion of scarcity of resources, which compels people to compete in the market, who have to waste most of their life working as wage slaves.
This inevitably results in the tremendous suffering and social conflict that prevails all around the world.
In addition, our economic system requires people to consume without end so that money can keep on circulating in the economy, thus urging us to continuously buy things we don’t need and which are going to end up in landfills, poisoning the very environment that we depend on and sustains us.
If you don’t like this kind of living and would like to create a positive change in your life and the world, I’d highly recommend you to research further into the immensely negative consequences of our economy, and educate yourself on alternative, more technically efficient and environmentally sustainable economic systems.
Being brought up in a consumer culture, we believe that money can buy everything we need and will bring happiness into our lives. So we choose to buy more and more things without end, but we always end up feeling dissatisfied and hungry for more stuff.
Having some nice things is fine - but knowing where to draw the line for yourself is key - many people lose their way
The truth is that money can only provide us with substitutes for what we truly need, but not the real deal. What we need is neither possessions nor services, but things such as love, friendship, and creativity. So don’t be concerned about which is the next best thing you can buy, and instead invest your time and efforts in achieving heart-opening and mind-expanding experiences that money can’t buy.
5. Be Mindful of What You Put Into Your Body
Is what you’re eating contributing to your health or is it poisoning your physical organism? Is what you’re eating environmentally sustainable, or is it negatively impacting the natural world? These are some important questions that all people should ask themselves.
Most people choose to eat foods which are filled with sugar, preservatives, and which are empty of nutrients or contain animal-derived products, unaware that their food choices are detrimental to their health, contribute to the suffering and death of tens of billions of animals, and have a tremendously negative impact on the environment.
From now on, be sure to choose carefully what you choose to put into your mouth, and I assure you that this is one of the best things you can do for yourself and the world.
6. Choose Your News Sources Wisely
Knowledge is power, but we are drowning in an ocean of information. Corporate media presents us all the time with biased information so as to fool us into believing the lies they tell us just so that they can manipulate us exactly the way they want.
A true seeker of knowledge does not accept anything on belief but seeks out for facts and tries to develop a spherical understanding of the matter he/she is looking into.
If you don’t like being mislead and desire to better understand what’s going on in the world, do your best to collect information from as many sources as possible and use critical thinking in order to reach to your own conclusions about what’s true or not.
7. Read Eye-Opening, Mind-Empowering Books
There have been many wise persons who’ve written down their thoughts on life’s problems and how they can be overcome. There have been many persons who have criticized the workings of society and offer their insights on how we can help create a more beautiful world.
Books can be immensely helpful to open our eyes and improve the quality of our life, but not many people spend much of their time reading books - or they just choose to read for entertainment reasons alone.
To get the most out of reading books, be sure to not just pick any book and read - read those ones which touch your mind and heart and provide you with new perspectives that help you to better understand yourself and the world.
8. Escape the Herd Mentality
Just as every person alive, you are a unique individual with unique talents and gifts to offer to the world. Unfortunately, society has suppressed our individuality since the day we were born. We’ve been programmed to doubt ourselves and conform to what is considered as normal.
This, however, prevents us from embracing ourselves and creating our own path in life, which is causing us immense emotional pain. From today, distance yourself from the herd mentality and start paying attention to your inner voice - doing so will allow you to follow your calling and live the way you truly want to live.
9. Creatively Express Yourself
A great way to deprogram yourself from the normalcy of modern life is to focus your attention on creativity. We’re all born creative, but slowly slowly our creativity has been suppressed so much that we’ve almost forgotten that we’re creative beings.
To be creative means to think outside the box and see life from different perspectives. Most importantly, to be creative means to find out new ways of living and realize that you have the power to manifest the kind of life you desire.
10. Develop Mindfulness
Lastly, learning how to live in the present moment is the most important way to break free from your conditioning. By being mindful of the here and now, you’ll be able to respond to whatever happens each and every moment spontaneously, without being a victim of your past.
There are many meditation techniques out there that can help you to become mindful, so find the ones that you like most and stick to them until you see positive results in your life.
“The Matrix is a system, Neo. That system is our enemy. But when you’re inside, you look around, what do you see? Businessmen, teachers, lawyers, carpenters. The very minds of the people we are trying to save. But until we do, these people are still a part of that system and that makes them our enemy.
You have to understand, most of these people are not ready to be unplugged. And many of them are so inured, so hopelessly dependent on the system, that they will fight to protect it.”
-
Morpheus, The Matrix
A Skeptical Look At The ‘Great Reset’: A Technocratic Agenda That Waited Years For A Global Crisis To Exploit & The Global Takeover Is Underway January 28 2022 | From: Sociable / Mercola / Various
How the ‘great reset’ ideology of un-elected bureaucrats would steer society towards massive surveillance & control: perspective.
In the face of a global pandemic, an un-elected body of global bureaucrats based in Davos, Switzerland has asked the world to trust its vision of a technocratic “great reset,” knowing full well the public would never go for such a request had it not been for the golden opportunity they’d all been waiting for.
In fact, he called on the WEF to start the great reset over five years ago (see video below), but this year he’s saying that COVID-19 is the most urgent reason to restructure all of society and the global economy.
WEF Chairman Hopes Forum Will Help Push "Reset" Button on World Economy
The great reset agenda was already in place long before the coronavirus pandemic, and the WEF was just waiting for a crisis to exploit it.
"Prior to this year, implementing worldwide lockdowns that destroy businesses, wreck the economy, and leave people destitute and stripped of their constitutional rights while trying to enact invasive contact tracing, immunity passports, and otherwise massive bio-electronic surveillance apparatuses would never have been accepted by the citizens of a free society."
The so-called great reset is an old ideology touted for decades by globalists like Henry Kissinger, who opined in 2014, “Never before has a new world order had to be assembled from so many different perceptions, or on so global a scale.”
The great reset is the proposed mechanism for setting in motion a new global order, but it wouldn’t be possible to bring forth such a bold plan without a global crisis, be it manufactured or of unfortunate happenstance, that shocks society to its core.
"The pandemic represents a rare but narrow window of opportunity to reflect, reimagine, and reset our world to create a healthier, more equitable, and more prosperous future.”
-
Klaus Schwab, WEF
In this story, I will attempt to dissect:
What types of invasive surveillance technologies will be required by the great reset
Why the great reset is being re-branded and pushed in 2020
Who will be asked to give up their privacy for the common good
How the Davos crowd is trying to sell the great reset Utopia
When humans become hackable
Where you have the power to choose
With the arrival of the coronavirus pandemic, the WEF has the perfect excuse to quickly enact its vision for steering society towards a more invasive and intrusive, technocratic future in the name of serving the common good.
The un-elected architects of the great reset envision a Utopian world of inclusivity, equality, and sustainability that will require trust in emerging technologies like AI, 5G, Blockchain, and robotics, in order to usher in their golden dawn.
WEF Great Reset Agenda:
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Great Reset Will Require Trust in Invasive Surveillance Tech: WEF Promotes Health Passports & Contact Tracing
In order to bring about the great reset, it will require trust in the technology, and to be more specific, the WEF would like to have greater trust in “crisis-relevant tech,” which includes developing digital health passports and contact tracing, under a new form of internet governance.
"The use of digital technology during the COVID-19 crisis offers clear lessons […] Target mistrust broadly to enable specific crisis-relevant tech."
"The Great Reset will require new institutions and business models, and new digital technologies to build them,” wrote the WEF Head of Corporate Governance and Trust, Daniel Dobrygowski, in a blog post.
“The necessary collaboration, however, is only possible if we solve the digital trust problem.” he added.
- Daniel Dobrygowski, WEF
According to the Dobrygowski, “The use of digital technology during the COVID-19 crisis offers clear lessons,” one of those being, “Target mistrust broadly to enable specific crisis-relevant tech.”
The WEF openly supports the development of so-called “crisis-relevant tech” as evidenced by its backing the development of health passports, which act as digital records of your health status to determine whether or not you are free to travel or even go outside.
Earlier this year the WEF announced it was supporting the development and launch of CommonPass - a platform whose mission is “to develop and launch a standard global model to enable people to securely document and present their COVID-19 status (either as test results or an eventual vaccination status) to facilitate international travel and border crossing while keeping their health information private.”
"Contact tracing apps can be powerful weapons against the virus – but they can also be tools for state surveillance.”
- WEF report
The WEF also lent its support to another health passport initiative called CovidPass, which was built by one of the WEF’s own “Young Global Leaders,” Mustapha Mokass, who used to be an advisor at the World Bank.
CovidPass “uses blockchain technology to store encrypted data from individual blood tests, allowing users to prove that they have tested negative for COVID-19.”
In supporting both CommonPass and CovidPass, the Davos elite have made it clear they want “crisis-relevant tech” like health passports to be part of the great reset solution.
Ask yourself, would the idea of being forced to electronically prove your current health status in order to travel or even leave your own home have been acceptable 10 months ago?
Why is this happening now?
The die was cast years ago, but only now do the Davos elite see a shrinking, yet golden opportunity, to create a new world order out of the coronavirus chaos.
COVID Presents a ‘Shrinking, Golden Opportunity’, Great Reset Is Not a Response to the Coronavirus
In June Prince Charles praised the great reset agenda for its potential to “make people more receptive to big visions of change” after having suffered through “unprecedented schockwaves.”
“We have a golden opportunity to seize something good from this crisis - its unprecedented shockwaves may well make people more receptive to big visions of change,” the prince told the WEF.
"Would the idea of being forced to electronically prove your current health status in order to travel or even leave your own home have been acceptable 10 months ago?"
Prince Charles may have let on more than he cared to share, or thought you would notice. Again, he’s telling you that the great reset was always the plan.
COVID-19 is the excuse.
In other words, the coronavirus crisis presents a golden opportunity for the global establishment to further its agenda upon a frightful and angry population that has been so beaten down by the pandemic and subsequent lockdowns that they will have become more susceptible to giving over their freedoms to the idea of greater centralized power and control.
Prince Charles went on, “As we move from rescue to recovery, we have a unique but rapidly shrinking window of opportunity to learn lessons and reset ourselves on a more sustainable path. It is an opportunity we have never had before and may never have again.”
"We have a golden opportunity to seize something good from this crisis - its unprecedented shockwaves may well make people more receptive to big visions of change.”
- Prince Charles
The British royal’s words echo those of WEF Director Schwab, who said, “The pandemic represents a rare but narrow window of opportunity to reflect, reimagine, and reset our world to create a healthier, more equitable, and more prosperous future.”
Again, why is the window of opportunity so narrow? Could the seeds of their grand strategy only flower while the world was distracted and divided amidst the chaos?
Prince Charles is Now Selling His 'Eco-Fascist Fantasy of the Great Reset'
Prince Charles is now selling his “eco-fascist fantasy of the Great Reset” to the Germans themselves, according to Sky News host Rowan Dean.
A clip was recently released of Prince Charles, speaking in German, about the coronavirus pandemic and climate change issues.
Mr Dean said the “Great Reset” is the “grand plan developed by the World Economic Forum … in cahoots with the United Nations, in league with the International Monetary Fund”.
“And supported by all sorts of prestigious institutions including, apparently, the Crown of England who have yet to disown Prince Charles's ever-increasing and unhinged rantings,” Mr Dean said. Mr Dean said the Great Reset is promised to begin next year to “transform all Western economies including ours,” by transferring the authoritarian tools currently being used to eradicate the coronavirus.
These include lockdowns, enforced business closures and “even stealing your own property rights, to tackle the imaginary climate crisis,” Mr Dean said.
“You won't own anything, and you'll be happy is one of their utopian communist slogans … Prince Charles' decision to throw his lot in with these crazies and now sell this eco-corporate-fascism in the German tongue is unfortunate timing to say the least”.
The Lure of Utopia Has Many Hooks: Giving Up Privacy & Freedom for the Common Good
Prior to this year, implementing worldwide lockdowns that destroy businesses, wreck the economy, and leave people destitute and stripped of their constitutional rights while trying to enact invasive contact tracing, immunity passports, and otherwise massive bio-electronic surveillance apparatuses would never have been accepted by the citizens of a free society.
But the coronavirus pandemic has opened a “narrow window” for a “golden opportunity,” and once this crisis is over, the Davos club fears that the window may be shut forever.
The WEF admits in its own contact tracing governance framework that “Contact tracing apps can be powerful weapons against the virus – but they can also be tools for state surveillance.”
Yet, the WEF believes that people should balance certain freedoms to serve the common good. It is a global vision without a clear end, and it is one that flies in the face of constitutional republics that protect certain unalienable rights.
"This new mindset would balance concerns over privacy and other issues with the potential to create value and improve lives.”
- WEF report
According to the WEF framework, enacting contact tracing technology would “not be easy and will require a new social consensus that embraces the use of technology to resolve problems for the good of all.”
Additionally, “This new mindset would balance concerns over privacy and other issues with the potential to create value and improve lives.”
In order to enact invasive technologies upon the population, citizens of the world will have to realize that it’s for the greater good and that they should change their mindsets to be less concerned about “privacy and other issues” and more excited about “the potential to create value and improve lives.”
"The great reset “will require stronger and more effective governments […] and it will demand private-sector engagement every step of the way.”
- Klaus Schwab, WEF
Just about every proponent of contact tracing and health passports, including the WEF, all declare that technology should be used and governed ethically, but you hardly see any mention of winning the consent of the people.
Instead, they lobby stakeholders and policymakers to carry the torch in imparting the global vision from the top of the capstone and on-down.
"As we move from rescue to recovery, we have a unique but rapidly shrinking window of opportunity to learn lessons and reset ourselves on a more sustainable path. It is an opportunity we have never had before and may never have again.”
- Prince Charles
If the coronavirus were to disappear from the earth today, would the WEF have to wait for a new global crisis, or would it push-on with the same reset agenda, regardless?
According to the WEF director, the great reset “will require stronger and more effective governments […] and it will demand private-sector engagement every step of the way.”
“The world must act jointly and swiftly to revamp all aspects of our societies and economies, from education to social contracts and working conditions,” he added. “We must build entirely new foundations for our economic and social systems.”
In creating order out of the coronavirus chaos, the great reset promises to bring about “a more secure, more equal, and more stable world.”
Is that how they plan to win our trust? By promising us a Utopia if we just go along with it?
We haven’t even gotten into how the great reset would affect the world’s money system and the role of blockchain and digital payments, but when you look at digital health passports and contact tracing apps, you are looking at sophisticated form of bio-electronic surveillance that the world has never been seen before.
"We are no longer mysterious souls; we are now hackable animals.”
- Yuval Harari, WEF
When you combine biological data with advanced computing power, what you get is the ability to hack humans.
“The power to hack human beings can of course be used for good purposes like provided much better healthcare,”said Harari, adding, “but if this power falls into the hands of a 21st Century Stalin, the result will be the worst totalitarian regime in human history, and we already have a number of applicants for the job of 21st Century Stalin.”
“In Stalin’s USSR the State monitored members of the Communist elite more than anyone else. The same will be true of future total surveillance regimes.”
The great reset calls to restructure every aspect of society, and it can only do so if people trust the increasingly invasive, bio-electronic surveillance technology they wish to deploy.
"In Stalin’s USSR the State monitored members of the Communist elite more than anyone else. The same will be true of future total surveillance regimes.”
- Yuval Harari, WEF
The more people know that someone is watching them, the more they will change their behavior. Just being aware that someone is monitoring your every digital transaction, will cause you to conform to certain norms.
As a population grows-up under massive surveillance, it will adapt its behavior to appear normal to society but compliant to authority. Over time, the citizens will police themselves out of fear.
The WEF Wants to Win Your Trust, You Have a Choice
Tyranny arrives in subtle stages. It’s slow at first, but before you realize it even exists, it has already won.
That is what I see happening with the unholy merger of “the great reset” with “the new normal."
Those who pull the strings have been begging for a global crisis to unleash their worldwide restructuring of society and the economy.
This year, in the face of a global pandemic, an un-elected body of global lobbyists based in Davos, Switzerland has asked you to have faith in their vision of a technocratic Utopia, knowing full well they could never issue such a request had it not been for the golden opportunity they had all been waiting for.
And that is where your power lies, dear reader. It’s your choice.
You can believe the WEF vision shared by some of the world’s most influential bureaucrats, or you can be skeptical of the whole establishment agenda that asks you to just trust the plan.
According to the World Economic Forum, by 2030 we will own nothing and be happy about it. Terms like “the Great Reset,” “the Fourth Industrial Revolution” and “Build Back Better” all refer to the same long-term globalist agenda to dismantle democracy and national borders in favor of a global governance by unelected leaders, and the reliance on technological surveillance rather than the rule of law to maintain public order.
For decades, war and the threat of war have enriched the technocratic elite and kept the population going along with their agenda. Today, pandemics and the threat of infectious outbreaks are the new tools of war and social control.
The Federal Reserve is working on a central bank digital currency (CBDC). An all-digital currency system is part of the system of social control.
Key globalist players working on the implementation of the technocratic agenda include the United Nations, the World Economic Forum, Bill Gates and foundations such as the Rockefeller Foundation, the UN Foundation and George Soros’ Open Society Foundation, Avanti Communications, 2030 Vision and Frontier 2030, Google, Mastercard and Salesforce.
The World Economic Forum public relations video above, “8 Predictions for the World in 2030,” short as it may be, offers a telling glimpse into what the technocratic elite has in store for the rest of us.
This Includes:
“You’ll own nothing” - And “you’ll be happy about it.” Instead, you’ll rent everything you need, and it’ll be delivered by drone right to your door.
“The U.S. won’t be the world’s leading superpower” - Instead, a handful of countries will dominate together.
“You won’t die waiting for an organ donor” - Rather than transplanting organs from deceased donors, custom organs will be 3D printed on demand.
“You’ll eat much less meat” - Meat will be “an occasional treat, not a staple, for the good of the environment and our health.”
As detailed in many previous articles, this is a foolhardy idea, not just for health reasons but also environmental ones. Integrating livestock is a foundational aspect of successful regenerative farming that can solve both food shortages and environmental concerns at the same time. For a refresher, see “Top 6 Reasons to Support Regenerative Agriculture.”
“A billion people will be displaced by climate change” - As a result, countries will have to prepare to welcome more refugees.
“Polluters will have to pay to emit carbon dioxide” - To eliminate fossil fuels, there will be a global price on carbon. Vandana Shiva, Ph.D., discussed this in a recent interview. Rather than promoting organic and regenerative farming, the technocratic elite are pushing something called zero-budget natural farming. Bill Gates is part of this scheme.
As explained by Shiva, the wholly unnatural setup works something like this: The state takes out large loans, which are then divvied out to farmers to grow food for free. The farmers make their money not by selling their crops, but by trading their soil carbon rate on the global market.
Basically, carbon is being turned into a tradeable commodity, replacing the actual farm output of grains and other crops. Farmers with higher carbon in their soil will make more money than those with carbon-poor soil. Meanwhile, they’ll make nothing from the crops they grow.
“You could be preparing to go to Mars” - Scientists “will have worked out how to keep you healthy in space,” thus opening up the possibility of becoming a space-faring race and colonizing other planets.
“Western values will have been tested to the breaking point.”
For decades, war and the threat of war has enriched the technocratic elite and kept the population going along with their agenda. War and physical attacks have been repeatedly used to foist ever more draconian restrictions upon us and remove our liberties. The Patriot Act, rammed through in the aftermath of 9/11, is just one egregious example.
Today, pandemics and the threat of infectious outbreaks are the new tools of war and social control. For years, Gates has prepared the global psyche for a new enemy: deadly, invisible viruses that can crop up at any time.And the only way to protect ourselves is by giving up old-fashioned notions of privacy, liberty and personal decision-making.
We need to maintain our distance from others, including family members. We need to wear masks, even in our own homes and during sex. We need to close down small businesses and work from home.
We need to vaccinate the entire global population and put stringent travel restrictions into place to prevent the potential for spread.
We must track and trace everyone, every moment of the day and night, and install biometric readers into everyone’s bodies to identify who the potential risk-carriers are. Infected people are the new threat.
This is what the technocratic elite wants you to believe, and they’ve succeeded to convince a shocking ratio of the global population of this in just a few short months.
If you’re unfamiliar with the term “technocracy,” be sure to go back and listen to my interview with Patrick Wood, author of “Technocracy Rising: The Trojan Horse of Global Transformation” and “Technocracy: The Hard Road to World Order.” You can also learn more on Wood’s website, Technocracy.news.
A New Digital Currency System Underway
Two of the last pieces of the totalitarian takeover will be the transition to an all-digital currency linked to digital IDs. With that, enforcement of social rules will be more or less ensured, as your finances, indeed your entire identity, can easily be held hostage if you fail to comply.
Just think how easy it would be to automate it such that if you fail to get your mandated vaccine, or post something undesirable on the internet, your bank account becomes unavailable or your biometric ID won’t allow you entry into your office building.
An August 13, 2020, article3 on the Federal Reserve website discusses the supposed benefits of a central bank digital currency (CBDC). There’s general agreement among experts that most major countries will implement CBDC within the next two to four years.
An all-digital currency system also plays into social engineering, as it can be used to incentivize desired behaviors, very similar to what China is doing with their social credit system. For example, you might get a certain amount of digital currency but you have to buy a certain item or perform a particular task within a certain timeframe.
Many uninformed people will believe that these new CBDCs will be very similar to existing cryptocurrencies like Bitcoin, but they would be seriously mistaken. Bitcoin is decentralized and a rational strategy to opt out of the existing central bank controlled system, while these CBDCs will be centralized and completely controlled by the central banks.
If you have been intrigued about investing in Bitcoin as a safer alternative to the stock market, but just didn’t know how or understand the process, the video below is an excellent introduction on how to do this safely without losing your funds. My favorite crypto exchange is Kraken, which has far lower fees than Coinbase.
The Globalists
While I mention Gates a lot, he’s not acting alone, of course. It just so happens that as you trace the connections between the decision-makers of the world, you’ll find him in an astonishing number of places.
For example, In October 2019, Gates co-hosted a pandemic preparedness simulation for a “novel coronavirus,” known as Event 201, along with the Johns Hopkins Center for Health Security and the World Economic Forum.
The event eerily predicted what would happen just 10 weeks later, when COVID-19 appeared. Gates and the World Economic Forum, in turn, are both partnered4 with the United Nations which, while keeping a relatively low profile, appears to be at the heart of the globalist takeover agenda.
Gates is also the largest funder of the World Health Organization - the medical branch of the U.N., while the World Economic Forum is the social and economic branch of the U.N. Other key partners that play important roles in the implementation of the globalists agenda include:
Foundations such as the Rockefeller Foundation, the Rockefeller Brothers Fund, the Ford Foundation, Bloomberg Philanthropies, the UN Foundation and George Soros’ Open Society Foundation
Avanti Communications, a British provider of satellite technology with global connectivity
2030 Vision, a partnership of technology giants to provide the infrastructure and technology solutions needed to realize the U.N.’s 2030 Sustainable Development Goals. 2030 Vision is also partnered with Frontier 2030, which is a partnership of organizations under the helm of the World Economic Forum
Google, the No. 1 Big Data collector in the world and a leader in AI services
Mastercard, which is leading the globalist charge to develop digital IDs and banking services
Salesforce, a global leader in cloud computing, the “internet of things” and artificial intelligence. Incidentally, Salesforce is led by Marc Benioff, who is also on the World Economic Forum’s board of directors
Psychopathic Dream Comes True with COVID Crisis - Featuring The Club of Rome from 1973
In 1973, Australia's largest computer predicted when and how civilization would end. The prediction, which later appeared on Australian media was made by a program dubbed “World One” - commissioned by globalist think tank, The Club of Rome. 2020 was the first milestone year mentioned, when the quality of life across the planet was supposed to drop dramatically. ABC's This Day Tonight first aired this story on Nov. 9, 1973.
The Fourth Industrial Revolution Is the Technocratic Agenda
In decades past, the technocrats, the global, mostly unelected, elite that steer the management of nations worldwide, called for a “new world order.” Today, the NWO has been largely replaced with terms like “the Great Reset,” “the Fourth Industrial Revolution,” and the slogan “Build Back Better.”
All of these terms and slogans refer to the same long-term globalist agenda to dismantle democracy and national borders in favor of a global governance by unelected leaders, and the reliance on technological surveillance rather than the rule of law to maintain public order.
As expressed by Matt Hancock, the British Minister for Digital, Culture, Media & Sport, during a speech before the All-Party Parliamentary Group on the Fourth Industrial Revolution in 2017:
"One of the roles of Parliament is to cast ahead, to look to the horizon, and tackle the great challenges of our time. So, I applaud the creation of the APPG on the fourth industrial revolution, which surely is one of the greatest challenges we face, as a nation, and as a world.
The nature of the technologies is materially different to what has come before. In the past, we’ve thought of consumption as a one-off, and capital investment as additive. Yet put resources into the networks that now connect half the world, or into AI, and the effects are exponential …
I’m delighted to speak alongside so many impressive colleagues who really understand this, and alongside Professor Klaus Schwab who literally ‘wrote the book’ on the 4th Industrial Revolution. Your work, bringing together as you do all the best minds on the planet, has informed what we are doing …
Our Digital Strategy, embedded within the wider Industrial Strategy, sets out the seven pillars on which we can build our success. And inside that fits our 5G strategy, like a set of Russian Dolls.
Our Strategy covers infrastructure, skills, rules and ethics of big data use, cyber security, supporting the tech sector, the digitization of industry, and digitization of government.”
If you listened to my interview with Wood, you will recognize the technocratic elements of Hancock’s speech: the focus on technology - in particular artificial intelligence, digital surveillance and Big Data collection (which is what 5G is for) - and the digitization of industry (which includes banking) and government, which in turn allows for the automation of social engineering and social rule (although that part is never expressly stated).
"The promised Utopia comes with a price - it sets shackles on our personal freedom.”
Then there’s the direct reference to professor Klaus Schwab, chairman of the World Economic Forum. Schwab is also highlighted in the June 29, 2020, Technocracy.news article, “The Elite Technocrats Behind the Global ‘Great Reset,” which reads, in part:
"The UN Agenda 2030 with its Sustainable Development Goals is claimed to ‘ensure peace and prosperity for people and the planet.’ The actions are said to tackle poverty and hunger, bring better health and education, reduce inequalities, and save the oceans, forests and the climate.
Who can argue against such benevolent goals? But the promised Utopia comes with a price - it sets shackles on our personal freedom …
The leading partners of the United Nations Global Goals project reveal the real technocratic agenda that lies behind the polished feel-good façade - it involves a plan to fully integrate mankind into a technological surveillance apparatus overseen by a powerful AI.
The current pandemic scare has been a perfect trigger to kickstart this nefarious agenda … The current COVID-19 crisis is seen by the World Economic Forum and its chairman Klaus Schwabas the perfect trigger to implement their grandiose technocratic plan. Big Tech will come to ‘rescue’ the world.
In June 2020, Schwab declared … the need of a Great Reset to restore order in a world steeped in panic, conflict and economic turmoil:
‘The COVID-19 crisis has shown us that our old systems are not fit anymore for the 21st century. It has laid bare the fundamental lack of social cohesion, fairness, inclusion and equality. Now is the historical moment in time, not only to fight the real virus but to shape the system for the needs of the Post-Corona era.
We have a choice to remain passive, which would lead to the amplification of many of the trends we see today. Polarization, nationalism, racism, and ultimately increasing social unrest and conflicts.
But we have another choice, we can build a new social contract, particularly integrating the next generation, we can change our behavior to be in harmony with nature again, and we can make sure the technologies of the Fourth Industrial Revolution are best utilized to provide us with better lives.’
This techno-fascist recipe will then, in an utmost non-democratic fashion without any public debate or skeptic inquiry, soon be integrated into the agenda of G20 and the European Union - relabeled as the Great Green Deal …
Unsurprisingly, Klaus Schwab fails to mention his own and his cronies’ role in creating this global economic mess in the first place - as it was ‘foreseen’ with stunning accuracy in World Economic Forum’s and Bill Gate’s Event 201 (October 2019) and in the Rockefeller Foundation report Scenarios for the Future of Technology and International Development (2010).”
The U.N.’s central role in the technocratic agenda is hard to miss once you start looking. As reported by the U.N.’s Department of Global Communications April 22, 2020, in an article about climate change and COVID-19:
"As the world begins planning for a post-pandemic recovery, the United Nations is calling on Governments to seize the opportunity to ‘build back better’ by creating more sustainable, resilient and inclusive societies…
‘With this restart, a window of hope and opportunity opens… an opportunity for nations to green their recovery packages and shape the 21st century economy in ways that are clean, green, healthy, safe and more resilient,’ said UNFCCC Executive Secretary Patricia Espinosa in her International Mother Earth Day message … It is therefore important that post-COVID-19 stimulus packages help the economy ‘grow back greener’ …
As Governments approve stimulus packages to support job creation, poverty reduction and economic growth, UNEP will help Member States ‘build back better,’ and capture opportunities for leap-frogging to green investments in renewable energy, smart housing, green public procurement and public transport - all guided by the principles and standards of sustainable production and consumption. These actions will be critical to fulfilling the Sustainable Development Goals.”
Here too, we see the technocratic agenda shining through.
As described by Wood (see interview hyperlinked above), technocracy is an economic system based on the allocation of energy resources, which necessitates social engineering to control the population and the technological infrastructure to automate this control.
Rather than being driven by supply and demand and free enterprise, this system is one in which companies are told what resources they’re allowed to use, when, and for what, and consumers are told what they are allowed to buy - or rather, rent, judging by the World Economic Forum video above.
If you need something, you’ll be allowed to rent it. You probably won’t even own the clothes on your back.
Everything will be “fair” and “equitable.” There will be no need for hard work, ingenuity or higher-than-average intelligence.
Everyone will be the same - with the exception of the technocrats themselves, of course. And in true social engineering fashion, they tell us we will be “happy” in our 24/7 enslavement to boot.
It’s important to realize that one way by which this globalist plan is being pushed forward is through the creation of new global laws. Gates already wields powerful influence over global food and agriculture policy, in addition to his influence over global health and technology (including banking and digital IDs).
The Great Reset, or the “build back better” plan, specifically calls for all nations to implement “green” regulations as part of the post-COVID recovery effort. It sounds like a worthwhile endeavor - after all, who doesn’t want to protect the environment?
But the end goal is far from what the typical person envisions when they hear these plans. The end goal is to turn us into serfs without rights to privacy, private ownership or anything else.
To get an idea of just how dystopian a future we might be looking at, consider Microsoft’s international patent WO/2020/060606 for a “cryptocurrency system using body activity data.” The international patent was filed June 20, 2019. The U.S. patent office application, 16128518, was filed September 21, 2018. As explained in the abstract:
"Human body activity associated with a task provided to a user may be used in a mining process of a cryptocurrency system. A server may provide a task to a device of a user which is communicatively coupled to the server.
A sensor communicatively coupled to or comprised in the device of the user may sense body activity of the user.
Body activity data may be generated based on the sensed body activity of the user.
The cryptocurrency system communicatively coupled to the device of the user may verify if the body activity data satisfies one or more conditions set by the cryptocurrency system, and award cryptocurrency to the user whose body activity data is verified.”
The U.S. patent application includes the following flow chart summary of the process:
This patent, if implemented, would essentially turn human beings into robots. If you’ve ever wondered how the average person will make a living in the AI tech-driven world of the future, this may be part of your answer.
People will be brought down to the level of mindless drones, spending their days carrying out tasks automatically handed out by, say a cellphone app, in return for a cryptocurrency “award.” I don’t know about you, but I can think of better, more enjoyable ways to spend my time here on Earth.
The World Economic Forum - A Trojan Horse
I’ve mentioned the World Economic Forum multiple times already in this article, and it, along with the U.N., is at the heart of the global takeover agenda.
As noted in the Canadian Truth blog post, “World Economic Forum Wheel of Evil”:
"… this is about two things, the implementation of the UN SDG’s [Sustainable Development Goals] and the WEF [World Economic Forum] Fourth Industrial Revolution. End game: total Technocratic lock-down where they control every aspect of our lives and all resources on the planet.”
The blog post includes the following illustration, created and released by the World Economic Forum, showing the widespread impact of the COVID-19 pandemic and the global response to it. If you go to the original site for the illustration, you’ll also find listings of publications, videos and data relating to all of these facets.
In short, the pandemic is being used to destroy the local economies around the world, which will then allow the World Economic Forum to come in and “rescue” debt-ridden countries.
As mentioned earlier, the price for this salvation is your liberty.
The World Economic Forum will, through its financial bailouts, be able to effectively control most countries in the world. And, again, one of the aspects of the technocratic plan is to eliminate nation borders and nationalism in general.
None of it is pleasant reading, but it’s important to understand where we’re headed. We no longer have the luxury of sticking our heads in the sand and waiting for the bad news to pass.
The COVID-19 pandemic has dramatically widened the economic gap between average people and the wealthy elite, with billionaires raking in trillions of dollars in mere months.
Without the competition from small businesses, large multinational companies have been allowed to gobble up business, expanding both their wealth and their influence, while extreme poverty has risen for the first time in two decades.
If you think the Great Reset and the Green New Deal are going to even out this financial disparity and turn the world into an equitable Utopia, you’re bound to be disappointed.
The globalist plan isn’t about creating a better world for the average person. Microsoft’s patent illustrates what the plan heralds for us.
The medical tyranny and censorship of anti-groupthink that has emerged full-force during this pandemic are also part and parcel of the Great Reset. After all, if they won’t allow you to own anything, and they want to put biosensors into your body to turn you into a cryptocurrency mining minion, do you really think they’re going to let you make medical decisions for yourself?
Over the past several months, Gates has made the media rounds discussing the need to silence dissenting views and information about the virus, it’s treatment and the vaccines being made.
According to a survey cited by RT, less than half of all Americans now say they would not take the COVID-19 vaccine even if they were paid $100 to do it.
There are good reasons for this hesitancy, as trials are starting to reveal serious side effects.
For Gates, who is funding no fewer than six different COVID-19 vaccines, this is no small problem. In an October 2020 interview, Gates urged American health officials to start “thinking about which voices will help reduce the hesitancy, so we can get a level of vaccination that really has a chance of stopping” the pandemic.
Despite the risks associated with these novel mRNA vaccines, which have never before been approved for human use, and despite the fact that children and adolescents have a minuscule risk of serious illness or death from COVID-19, vaccine proponents like Dr. Paul Offit are now calling for children to be added to the COVID-19 trials.
Hopefully, the number of parents willing to offer up their children as guinea pigs will be few.
Orwell's 1984 Summary
Check out George Orwell's 1984 Video SparkNote: Quick and easy 1984 synopsis, analysis, and discussion of major characters and themes in the novel.
In closing, keep in mind that technocracy is inherently a technological society run through social engineering.
This is why there’s such a strong focus on “science.” Anytime someone dissents, they’re therefore accused of being “anti-science,” and any science that conflicts with the status quo is declared “debunked science.”
The only science that matters is whatever the technocrats deem true. Logic, however, will tell you that this cannot be so.
Science is never settled. Science is never one-sided. Science can be wrong. Getting to the truth demands that an issue be looked at from many different angles.
Over the past year in particular, scientific inquiry and inquisitiveness has been censored and stifled to an astonishing degree. If we allow it to continue, the end result will be devastating.
We must keep pushing for transparency and truth. We must insist on medical freedom and personal liberty.
Do not allow yourself to be bullied into silence by those who counter your objections with “anti-science” or “conspiracy-theory” slurs.
The future of mankind is at stake. Be brave. Resist tyranny.
The researchers have found that most of the previous studies into the sweeteners touting their alleged “health advantages” over using sugar as a sweetener, were written or sponsored by the companies that produce the products.
"A trio of researchers from John Hopkins University in Maryland, the University of California San Francisco, and Australia’s University of Sydney took an extensive look at 31 past reviews on the potential weight loss effects of artificial sweeteners.
They found that studies directly funded by sweetener companies or published in industry-funded journals were more likely to find positive health benefits compared to reviews funded independently or by the competing sugar industry.
Similarly, reviews authored by scientists who had a relevant financial conflict of interest were also less likely to shine a harsh light on sweeteners, either directly via positive results or by putting a positive spin on negative results when discussing their conclusions."
"In the 1950s, studies showing a link between coronary heart disease (CHD) and sugar intake started to emerge.
When the sugar industry (which many not-so-affectionately call “Big Sugar”) got wind of this not-so-sweet news, they paid scientists to downplay the link and promote saturated fat as the culprit instead, a new study has revealed.
The research, published in JAMA Internal Medicine, was based on thousands of pages of Sugar Research Foundation (SRF) documents, reports, and statements that Cristin E. Kearns, a postdoctoral fellow at UCSF, discovered in the basement at Harvard University.
The SRF (known today as The Sugar Association) sponsored its first CHD “research project” in 1965 – a literature review published in the New England Journal of Medicine. The review’s objective was established by SRF, and the group contributed articles for inclusion and received drafts. The SRF’s funding and role was not disclosed.
Why is this a big deal?
Big Sugar paid Harvard scientists the equivalent of about $50,000 in today’s dollars to influence the review, and subsequently spent $600, 000 ($5.3 million in 2016 dollars) to teach “people who had never had a course in biochemistry… that sugar is what keeps every human being alive and with energy to face our daily problems.”
For years many industries have delayed the publication of research that may put their products in a bad light, others have simply paid off researchers to point the finger of blame at other products, as did the Sugar Association in 1967.
The revelations over sweeteners come as no surprise, but they should remind us that we need to do our own research rather than taking something at face value just because there was a “study.”
This isn’t new. The FDA upholds these studies all the time, and products that could literally kill us end up on the store shelves marked as safe, false nutritional information that supports the sugar lobby and the grain lobby is touted as the truth, and Americans get sicker and fatter as a result.
Industries and individual companies have paid researchers to lie or distort the truth on their behalf in order to sell more of their products. Not only is this shameful behavior from the companies, but also from the researchers that compromised their science to accommodate them.
The results of such spurious research have an even further effect. Fewer people start to trust medical and scientific research - including well-executed and honest research.
The answer as always it to look behind the headlines, find the counter arguments, track down the source of the funding, and make your decisions accordingly.
PS: The best quality low-carb sweetener we’ve gotten our hands on is Agave 5 – you can find it here.
Like Tobacco And Big Pharma, The Sugar Industry Has Manipulated Research For 50 Years
Don’t you love people who cling to scientific research without ever questioning who sponsored that research? Using archival documents, a new report published by JAMA Internal Medicine examines the sugar industry’s role in heart disease research.
The study suggests that the sugar industry sponsored research to influence the scientific debate to cast doubt on the hazards of sugar and to promote dietary fat as the culprit in heart disease. Governments worldwide agreed just like they did with the tobacco industry and big pharma.
The sugar industry was instrumental in influencing the prevailing thinking about fat, obesity and related diseases holding that quantifying calories should be a principal concern and target for intervention.
Part of this thinking is that consumed calories - regardless of their sources - are equivalent; i.e. ‘a calorie is a calorie’. There needs to be a greater qualitative focus on the sources of calories consumed (i.e. a greater focus on types of foods) and on the metabolic changes that result from consuming foods of different types.
Calorie-focused thinking is inherently biased against high-fat foods, many of which may be protective against obesity and related diseases, and supportive of starchy and sugary replacements, which are likely detrimental.
The intake of dietary fructose increased significantly from 1970 to 2000. There has been a 25% increase in available “added sugars” during this period. The average person has a daily added sugar intake of 79 g (equivalent to 15% of energy intake), approximately half of which was fructose.
A report - authored by Cristin E. Kearns, Laura A. Schmidt, and Stanton A. Glantz of the University of California, San Francisco - examined internal documents from the Sugar Research Foundation (which later evolved into the Sugar Association).
The Sugar Research Foundation started doing research on coronary heart disease research in 1965; its first project was a literature review published in the New England Journal of Medicine in 1967.
The review focused on fat and cholesterol as the dietary causes of coronary heart disease, downplaying sugar consumption as a risk factor.
UCSF researchers have recently claimed sugar should be controlled like alcohol and tobacco to protect public health since it is fueling a global obesity pandemic, contributing to 35 million deaths annually worldwide from non-communicable diseases like diabetes, heart disease and cancer.
Like manufacturers from both Big Tobacco and Big Pharma who denied the presence of any danger in their products and even spent millions of dollars trying to discredit the research that points to problems, the Sugar Industry followed suit.
While the Sugar Research Foundation’s funding and role were not disclosed, internal documents reveal that the organization set the review’s objective, contributed articles to be included, and received drafts - a “smoking gun” linking the industry’s influence over the research it paid for, writes Marion Nestle in a related commentary, also published in JAMA Internal Medicine.
“This 50-year-old incident may seem like ancient history, but it is quite relevant, not least because it answers some questions germane to our current era. Is it really true that food companies deliberately set out to manipulate research in their favor?
Yes, it is, and the practice continues,” writes Nestle, the Paulette Goddard Professor of Nutrition and Food Studies at NYU Steinhardt."
“Industry-sponsored nutrition research, like that of research sponsored by the tobacco, chemical, and pharmaceutical industries, almost invariably produces results that confirm the benefits or lack of harm of the sponsor’s products, even when independently sponsored research comes to opposite conclusions,” Nestle adds.
Nestle says the report should serve as a warning to policymakers, researchers, clinicians, and journalists in carefully interpreting studies funded by food companies with vested interests in the results, and highlights the need to find better ways to fund studies and to prevent and disclose conflicts of interest.
Thirty One Life Lessons I’ve Learned In 31 Years + Twenty Harsh Truths To Help You Get Your Shit Together January 26 2022 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / EducateInspireChange
Life is, in a sense, like school. Each and every day we are learning from our experiences, and the lessons we acquire allow us to move from one stage of life to the next.
But not all of us are good students. Some people learn fast, and thus can quickly grow in understanding and evolve into higher states of consciousness. Others are slow learners, finding it extremely difficult to pass life's tests, and as a result have to repeat them again and again.
Today I turn 31 years old, so I chose to spend some time reflecting on the most important lessons I've learned in my life so far. If you're wondering what those are, I wrote them down so that you can have the chance to read them and benefit from them as much as I did.
It feels weird to think that 31 years ago I was born in this world. A couple of decades ago, I remember that my thirties seemed incredibly far in the future. But before I realized it, here I am, over 30 and heading toward 40.
So far my life’s journey has been an incredible ride. I’ve gone through tons of ups and downs, both of which have taught me important lessons that allowed me to better understand myself and the world, as well as to build my life the way I want.
In this post I’d like to share with you some of the greatest life lessons I’ve learned during the course of my life, in hopes that you will find them as helpful as I did. Without further ado, here they are:
1. This Moment is all There is
The past is gone and the future is not here yet.
The present moment is everything you have, so be sure to immerse yourself in it.
2. I Don’t Know Everything, and That’s Totally Fine
To learn, you need to admit that you don’t know it all. In fact, not everything can be known, and that’s part of the beauty of life, which is an ongoing learning journey.
3. Pain Isn’t Your Enemy
It’s just a messenger trying to show you that there’s something amiss. So instead of hiding from your pain or suppressing it, face it and pay attention to what it has to show you, so that you can understand why it’s there and how to get rid of it.
Here are a few examples: A deep breath of fresh air, a walk in nature, a conversation with a good friend, and a look into the eye of a beloved partner. Cherish them before someone puts a price tag on them too.
5. Money Isn’t Just Neutral Energy
As it exists today, money is creating artificial scarcity, which results in competition, inequality, poverty, greed, and violence (among other things). Therefore, money is quite a negative force in our world.
Three times a day you can choose peace over violence - that is, with each meal you eat. Is your food cruelty-free or does it involve unnecessary suffering and death?
7. Sitting is Killing You
Walk, run, dance, stretch. Move your body throughout the day.
8. Don’t Trust the Mainstream Media
Most big media companies are owned by people whose main intention is to emotionally manipulate you in order to keep you hypnotized, sell you lies and empty your pockets.
Speak out your mind, express your feelings and let people see who you truly are. Being true to yourself and others is the only way to build genuine relationships and live an authentic life.
10. You Can’t Change Anyone
But your actions can inspire many to change.
11. Mistakes are Part of Learning
Don’t fear making mistakes, for they have important things to teach you. But make sure you don’t repeat them.
12. Failures are Stepping Stones to Success
Each failure leads you one step closer to success, so don’t shy away from it. Try, fail, and then try again for as long as it takes to achieve your goals.
13. Simplicity is the Key to Living Well
To live simply means to let go of what is unimportant and focus on what truly matters to your happiness and well-being.
Casting a vote once every few years alone doesn’t give people much freedom in collective decision-making. Especially if you consider that what they vote for is nothing but power-hungry politicians who are lying to them in order to serve their vested interests.
You must have heard this countless times. But it’s totally true - some books have the power to turn your life upside down, in a tremendously positive way. Just make sure to carefully pick which books to read, otherwise they can be a waste of your time. Click here for a list of books I highly recommend.
18. Use Your Words Wisely
Words can hurt or heal, so always be mindful of how you speak.
To economize means to carefully manage resources and to avoid unnecessary expenditure or waste. Our economy, however, is fundamentally based on consumption - that is, on the mindless and constant extraction of natural resources and production of waste.
Make each moment count, start today to work on something you love. We only have 960 months to live (and that’s if we get to 80). We talk about “one day” but why wait?
2. The People Around You Don’t Live Forever
Kiss the one you love every chance you get. Tell all of the people who mean something to you now whilst you can.
3. What Other People Think is None of Your Business
Everyone is entitled to their own opinion but it doesn’t mean their perception is right, other peoples opinions don’t define you.
Realise happiness starts where you are right now. Looking away and waiting for it separates you from now and wastes time. Live in this moment now, make each moment count.
5. You Can’t Make Everyone Happy
That’s their responsibility, not yours.
6. Accept Your Flaws
Embrace who you are, imperfection is uniqueness.
7. Use Your Feeling to Guide You
You attract what you feel, pay attention to how you feel and use it to guide you to what you want.
You know who will give you everything? Yourself. Don’t wait around for people, take responsibility and take power of your own life.
9. Worrying is a Waste of Time
Worrying is a waste of imagination, 99% of the stuff you worry about doesn’t happen and won’t matter even in 5 years. Remember your time is limited, use your imagination to picture the things you want instead.
10. Express Your Talents
Imagine lying in the bed in hospital, being on the death bed, and standing around you are the ideas, the dreams, the talents that have been given to you by the universe, the talents that you didn’t develop the skills that you never did anything with, standing around you looking at you with large angry eyes saying “We came to you! Only you could have given us life, now we have to die with you forever.” What idea do you have right now that you could be acting on?
Life is hard for everyone and everyone is dealing with their own battles, there is always someone worse off than you. If you don’t like something, change it.
13. Share What You Know
Your knowledge could change someone’s life, no one can take away what is yours, sharing and helping other people will come back to you.
14. Invest in Yourself
Knowledge is power, become obsessed with learning and improving yourself, it will change your life.
So many people quit when they are so close, if everything was easy, everyone would do it, usually when you are right at that very point of winning, life will test you. Embrace the challenges.
16. Express Yourself
People may not know how you feel. You only live once, relationships are important.
17. Always Look at the Bigger Picture
Get curious, learn, ask questions. There is more to everything.
18. No One Can Hurt You Without Your Mental Consent
It’s your choice whether you let something hurt you or not.
19. The Universe Loves Action
When you get inspired by an idea or get an impulse to do it, act upon it. The universe likes speed, don’t doubt or second guess, all you have to do is act when it comes.
20. Time is Everything
Learn to manage time, it’s the only thing you can’t get back.
Propaganda Is The Art Of Overwhelming Logic January 25 2022 | From: JonRappoport
One type of mind control involves defeating logic as a method of thinking.
Modern formulations of basic logic begin with the statement: You can’t have A and not-A. Which is a way of saying contradictions are unacceptable.
But if the vaccinated person is protected and immune, then coming into contact with an unvaccinated person will bring no danger.
Therefore, the notion that vaccinated people are A) protected but not - A) in danger is absurd, a contradiction.
The easiest way to defeat logic is through deficient education. Never teach logic. Ignore it. Instead, teach specific values. Teach anything except logic. Don’t teach children how to spot contradictions.
Here is another example of non-logic: A ballot initiative passed by the voters of Maui County is illegal, because it set up a new law regarding commercial agriculture, when in fact commercial agriculture is regulated by state and federal laws, which trump county laws.
There are several ways of attacking this proposition, but the most basic way is:
Science doesn’t operate according to what officially favored scientists claim. It doesn’t operate according to consensus at all.
It operates according to what is true and valid - and the best way to ascertain that is through the broadest possible analysis accomplished by a wide variety of independent researchers, who attempt to replicate prior experimental results.
Even then, there is always room for reasoned dissent.
For instance: what are the full tacit implications of the statement found at the end of every television drug ad - “ask your doctor if X is right for you.”
For instance (at a more sophisticated level): when the press reports a new outbreak of disease, claiming it is caused by a particular virus…how was that assertion determined?
On what grounds do scientists say they have found the virus that causes the disease?
I ran headlong into that one while writing my first book, AIDS Inc.: Scandal of the Century, and the further I investigated HIV as “the cause of AIDS,” the more I was stunned by the lack of logic present in the argument.
Logic is a sword.
Learning its many uses, while still young, creates formidable students and citizens.
It is now common knowledge that whoever controls the media effectively controls the world.
Those who do control the entire planetary realm are only able to do so because they have controlled the mainstream media for as long as it has been in existence.
This ironclad control has enabled the World Shadow Government to exert power over the flow of information throughout every sphere of life for centuries.
In fact, it is the Fourth Estate that holds the true power over the other three. Only by the power of the press is the WSG able to keep the governments and corporations of the world in check.
A New Era Dawns
Since the advent of the Internet in 1995, the Fifth Estate has been growing by the day. It has taken over 20+ years for it to finally come into its own.People have finally had enough of the mainstream media horseshit.
The silent majority began to awaken and there was nothing that the mainstream media couold do about it except ignore and lie. But that charade can only run out for so long...
As the truth unfolds about the unprecedented voting fraud that has taken place with the US (and other) elections in the coming days and weeks -
the entire world is going to be in shock.
No one has ever seen anything like it. And currently the world still finds itself steeped in the depths of a contrived 'pandemic', there were millions of young adults out of work.
Many of them lived at home with mom and dad and with very few possessions except a smartphone or a tablet, a laptop or a desktop.
It is in this environment that the citizen journalist has been born. They are by and large unemployed, bored and angry that the American Dream has eluded them. Some of them believe that the dream has become an “American nightmare” and want to know why.
As they seek answers to this inquiry, they are stumbling upon long-hidden truths that have made them deeply distrust the mainstream media (MSM)…with a vengeance.
"The MSM is comprised not only of all print, video and audio forms of mediabut also book publishing, movie production, music production, TV programming, social networks among others."
So here’s the current context: While the banksters bankrupted the USA in order to swell the ranks of the jobless and unemployed, especially among the youth who they intended to fight their unlawful and unprovoked wars of aggression around the world, something unexpected happened.
The banksters unwittingly created an army of writers and bloggers, e-book authors and essayists, Facebook posters and Twitter tweeters, YouTube video producers and Instagram photojournalists.
What else was there to post about that year but the exceedingly dramatic 2016 presidential election, as well as the coming Second American Revolution. No matter what side of the fence these folks are on, they are busier than if they had a 9 to 5 with the local corporation.
And they’re loving every minute of it because they are learning how the world really works. And, why they really had no job… or even a prospect of a job.
The Rise of the Citizen Journalist
The Internet is the place where many will find their future job. Not the one working for a Fortune 500 corporation; rather, a real job that will assist with the transformation of post-modern society.
As these young Internet practitioners expand their skill sets, deepen their knowledge base, and broaden their experience, they have quickly acquired the right stuff to function as a one-person, multi-media platform.
This single development has contributed significantly to the rapid establishment of the Fifth Estate.
As a matter of fact, the now defunct specialty of investigative journalism has seen a massive rebound. These young journalists have no advertisers to appease and can therefore go after whatever they choose to investigate.
Bloggers and videographers are tearing up the terrain with their incisive blogs and documentaries, respectively.
Upstart authors are now writing Pulitzer Prize level reports and series on topics ranging from the Holocaust Industry to the rigged 2016 U.S. presidential election, from the US Government-coordinated terrorist attacks on 9/11 to the CIA-conducted assassination of John F. Kennedy.
These citizen journalists all share one thing, and that is a passion for the truth.
They see a world in total disarray and are desperately trying to make some sense of it. In their ardent search for the truth they unwittingly find themselves becoming world-class journalists. And it is only their pursuit of the truth that has set them free from the ranks of the unemployed.
Not only do many these folks now have control of their destiny, they are not bound to a corporate agenda like their parents and grandparents were.
Nor are they bound to the conventions of traditional, university taught journalism that keeps their MSM peers in a tighly controlled box. They are free to think for themselves and to follow the truth wherever it leads them.
Four Horsemen - an award winning independent feature documentary which lifts the lid on how the world really works
Such a liberation of genuinely creative energy has created a supernova in the firmament of worldwide media. So many young journalists have been born into their Internet-based profession that there is now a crowded field of competition to be dealt with.
This has forced many into various specialty niches which has posed a real threat to the MSM journalists who are now primarily generalists because of the severe budget cuts over several years throughout that industry.
“The Truth Shall Set You Free”
The MSM is soon to be overwhelmed by the Alt-Media. Little did the controllers of this planetary realm know that one day - in the not-too-distant future - they will see a world transformed by the vast number of truth-speakers and fact-writers who they helped create.
The readership and viewership of the Alt-Media will be filled with billions of souls who are likewise truth-seekers who know that the MSM is positively not the place to find it.
Truly, this rapidly evolving saga is “The Greatest Show on Earth” at this very moment in time. It is a global drama of such epic proportions that soon the entire planetary civilization will have gone through an unparalleled metamorphosis.
For as We the People find our voices and put our pens to paper and take to our keypads to speak truth to power, so, too, will the peoples of the world.
When the Alt-Media becomes an echo chamber of truth that replaces the MSM echo chamber of falsehood, the world will have taken a great leap forward toward the restoration of both personal and national sovereignty. It is only in this global context that the world community of nations will experience a durable peace and genuine brotherhood.
Then, many things like political integrity and social equality, economic stability and financial security, religious tolerance and racial respect, civil justice and environmental protection, will all occur naturally and spontaneously.
These are only some of the ways that “The Truth Shall Set You Free”.
The Mothership
There is a very powerful and fast-growing movement afoot that identifies with the meme of the Mothership. One of the various tag lines of this extraordinary phenomenon, that is quietly manifesting under the radar, is this:
“BIG MOTHER is watching Big Brother!”
For the uninitiated, the emerging Fifth Estate is BIG MOTHER. The slowly dying Fourth Estate is Big Brother. There is no question that the tide is gradually changing. And, that the traditional control of information is being altered in profound and fundamental ways.
Hence, it is only a matter of time - a relatively short period of time - that a veritable sea change will occur on planet Earth. That moment of highly anticipated change will transpire when the Mothership appears to everyone in all its glory.
Think of it this way: Were a massive Mothership to slowly glide across the sky over New York City… and then Washington, DC… and then Miami, Florida, on the very same day, would not the whole order change in a day and a night?!
The Alt-Media is like a Mothership that is slowly approaching Earth as it disseminates forbidden truth and lost information, deep wisdom and esoteric knowledge across the entire planetary realm.
Then, one day, when nary a soul expects it, looming over the horizon, is this inconceivably enormous Mothership casting a shadow the size of a solar eclipse. Imagine that out of that Mothership comes darting a multitude of smaller starships, each one carrying a payload of truth and banner of justice.
More than likely every reader of this post has already contributed to this Project Multi-Media Mothership.
If you have a simple blog or a Facebook page, a website or a Twitter feed, a YouTube channel or an Instagram account, you have already set loose your starship into the skies of planet Earth via the World Wide Web.
Conclusion
It’s time for every truth-seeker to get on board the Mothership.
You have been baptized into the Fifth Estate. Please do not take your responsibilities lightly, you just may be the one who everyone is waiting for to post that vital piece that finally takes the whole God-forsaken System down, once and for all!
Remember, from this point forward, it is BIG MOTHER who will be watching Big Brother.
Ten Self-Evident Truths That We The People Have Spontaneously Come To Realize - That Will End All Government As We Know It January 23 2022 | From: NaturalNews We have a lot to thank Trump for, but among the most important is the idea that Trump has caused the corrupt, fraudulent, lying specter of “Big Government” to fully reveal itself for what it truly is.
Does anyone believe the Democrats are pursuing legitimate “impeachment” based on legitimate “high crimes?” Not a chance.
[These efforts are to drain The [Cabal] Swamp everywhere - This is not just about America.]
Does any rational person think that high-level lawmakers and bureaucrats aren’t on the take, receiving kickbacks from billions in foreign aid?
It’s quite stunning, actually, how the mass awakening has accelerated over the last three years as Trump has succeeded as President.
In their desperate attempt to destroy Trump, the deep state swamp creatures and corrupt, lawless Democrats have been forced to reveal the truth about their corruption, fraud and malicious abuse of power.
Because of all this, there are many self-evident truths that have now become obvious to the American people.
Read from the point of view of the People talking to the political swamp in Washington D.C. [Read: Every Western "Government" and then some...] :
1.
We don’t believe you.
2.
You are all dishonest crooks and horrible people who should never be trusted again.
3.
The intelligence community is the enemy of the people and must be dismantled if any American is to ever be truly free.
4.
We are not going to voluntarily hand over our guns. You may come try to take them by force, but we will shoot you if you try.
5.
We are withdrawing our consent. You are now a rogue enemy government that we finally recognize as the ENEMY. 6.
We are never going to vote for establishment candidates ever again.
7.
We will not live as slaves, suffering under your tyranny. We would rather die as Americans, defending our liberty and our republic.
8.
If we ever get the chance, we will arrest all of you and throw you in prison for as long as you live.
9.
We will no longer cooperate with your sham court system, your corrupt FBI and your lawless federal regulators. They are all fraudulent, criminal cartels that have no legitimate authority. You have lost the consent of “the governed.”
10.
Your fiat currency financial system and debt Ponzi scheme is a criminal fraud that steals money from the working class. We will no longer hold your dollars and will seek alternatives at every opportunity.
I’m sure you can think of dozens more, but that short list sums up the highlights.
The bottom line should be crystal clear: The United States federal government is run by illegitimate, corrupt, fraudulent swamp creatures and the very future of freedom for America depends on completely dismantling the very concept of a “government” that rules over the people.
The time has come to end the era of big government. We the People no longer need “representatives” in Washington.
We don’t need a United States Senate, packed with treasonous crooks (like McCain or Reid) and foreign aid skimming hucksters.
We don’t need the FDA or the CDC, both of which are nothing but fake science marketing departments for Big Pharma. We don’t need the Federal Reserve, a fiat currency counterfeiting operation that steals from all working Americans.
And we don’t need the intelligence community, which has morphed into a domestic spying secret police operation that routinely abuses its power to surveil and threaten innocent Americans.
We don’t need government-run health care, government-run food stamps or government-run anything, other than defending the shores, setting standards and using the limited powers of small government to protect the rights of individuals against dangerous corporations such as banks and tech giants.
That’s the proper role of government: To protect liberty, not to rule over the people.
Do not surrender an inch to this corrupt, lawless system run by traitors and tyrants.
Every Democrat in Washington D.C., without exception, is guilty of treason and should be arrested, charged and treated accordingly. And half the Republicans are guilty of the same crime, by the way.
The entire system is corrupt beyond repair. The deep state swamp cannot investigate itself, yet all the powers of investigation have been concentrated in the hands of the very people who are the most dangerous, corrupt criminals of all.
It’s time to revoke our consent from this criminal government and dismantle it once and for all.
Trump is attempting to do exactly that, but even he is spending America into oblivion with record debt spending. Perhaps he realizes a financial implosion is the only sure way to bring down the whole corrupt system.
There will never be another Trump. Once Trump’s tenure is up, We the People must continue his work of exposing, dismantling and rejecting the criminals, crooks and fraudsters in Washington D.C.
The very existence of big government is irreconcilable with personal liberty and prosperity. We can either be free and prosperous, or we can be enslaved and forced into destitution under the rule of big government tyranny.
Watch Brighteon.com to daily videos on liberty and freedom, posted by thousands of different users. Or join Brighteon and post your own.
These laws led to the forced sterilization of over 60,000 American citizens in states like California and thousands of rejected marriage licenses.
The Eugenics programs in the US were only a beta test though, as the Rockefellers then transferred their programs over to Germany under Hitler and the Third Reich in the 1930's, where a true widespread eugenics-based population control program was introduced.
The targets of population reduction were based on ethnic background, but also “mental intelligence” and economic status.
The Cold Springs Harbor Laboratory still exists today and presents itself as a kind of philanthropic endeavor to help humanity.
Public knowledge of the globalists and their population control agenda was carefully swept under the rug in the US after the exposure of Nazi programs post-WWII.
The word “eugenics” became a very ugly one and all the effort the elites put into promoting it as a legitimate science was ruined.
However, they were not going to give up on their precious ideology.
In the late 1960's into the 1970's there was a resurgence of population control rhetoric coming out of globalist circles. Under the supervision of the UN and some related scientific groups, the Club Of Rome was formed.
This effort was directly linked to another agenda – the institution of a global government that could handle and enforce population controls on a wide scale.
The elites had found a new scientific front for their eugenics obsession: Climate science. In the early 1990's the Club Of Rome published a book called 'The First Global Revolution'. In it they state:
"In searching for a common enemy against whom we can unite, we came up with the idea that pollution, the threat of global warming, water shortages, famine and the like, would fit the bill. In their totality and their interactions these phenomena do constitute a common threat which must be confronted by everyone together.
But in designating these dangers as the enemy, we fall into the trap, which we have already warned readers about, namely mistaking symptoms for causes.
All these dangers are caused by human intervention in natural processes. and it is only through changed attitudes and behaviour that they can be overcome.
The quote is relatively clear; a common enemy must be conjured in order to trick humanity into uniting under a single banner, and the elites see environmental catastrophe, caused by mankind itself, as the best possible motivator.
It also outlines the perfect rationale for population control – Mankind is the enemy, therefore, mankind as a species must be kept under strict supervision and his proliferation must be restricted.
The Club of Rome and the UN agenda have always been intimately connected. In the 1990's at the same time 'The First Global Revolution' was being published, UN assistant secretary general Robert Muller was publishing his manifesto which is now collected on a website called 'Good Morning World'.
Muller argues that global governance must be achieved using the idea of “protecting the Earth” and environmentalism as the key components.
Through fear of environmental Apocalypse, the public could be convinced to accept global government as a necessary nanny state to keep society from destroying itself.
Does this sound familiar?
In a paper titled 'Proper Earth Government: A Framework And Ways To Create It' Robert Muller outlines how climate change could be used to convince the masses of the need for global government. Integral to his plan were the introduction of a new “global religion”, and population controls.
It should come as no surprise that the UN established the Intergovernmental Panel On Climate Change (IPCC) and that this panel and it's offshoots are now at the forefront of the argument for population reduction.
As we close in on the end date for the UN's Agenda 2030, which calls for a radical shift of human production from oil and other large scale energy sources into small scale “renewable energies”, there is only 10 years left for the globalists to achieve their goals if they hope to meet their announced deadline.
This would require a violent change in human society and most of all industrialized nations.
The human population would have to be reduced dramatically in order to survive on the meager energy output of renewables alone. A disaster of epic proportions would have to take place soon so that the globalists could then spend the next decade using the resulting fear to convince the surviving population that global governance is needed.
Without aggressive crisis and change most people would never go along with the UN's agenda, out of simple desire for self preservation.
Even many leftists, once exposed to the true nature of carbon controls and population reduction, might have second thoughts when they realize they could be affected.
The key to understanding people who cheer for population control or population reduction is that these people always assume that THEY will be the survivors and inheritors of the Earth after the culling. They never assume that they will be the one's put on the chopping block.
In 2019, the population agenda is being ramped into high gear and the public is being carefully conditioned over time to accept the idea that man-made climate change is real and population is the source of the problem.
Recently, a group of scientists partially funded by something called the “Worthy Garden Club” claimed 11,000 signatures on a statement for the need for population reduction in the name of saving the Earth from global warming.
The statement cites all the same long debunked IPCC and UN climate change propaganda as the reasons why the Earth is on the verge of annihilation.
The Worthy Garden Club is a strangely sterile group and there doesn't seem to be any list of their patrons and who funds them. However, the mainstream media was quick to pick up on the statement from the “11,000 scientists” and tie it to statements made by the UN's IPCC.
Population control has also been brought up consistently as an issue in the 2020 Presidential Election race. Bernie Sanders argued for birth control measures in poor countries.
Elizabeth Warren promoted abortion by saying it was as safe as “getting your tonsils removed”. She has consistently promoted the carbon control agenda of the UN and was, interestingly, a member of the University Of Texas Population research Center in the 1980s.
And, Green New Deal politicians are throwing their support behind the statements from the Worthy Garden Club on population reduction.
This is the first time I have seen the argument for population reduction used so blatantly and widespread in the mainstream media, and it suggests to me that a trend is forming.
For years I have warned my readers that they will know when the globalists are about to pull the plug on the current system when they start talking about their criminality openly.
When they admit to their agenda in a free way, this means they are close to a global reset and do not care anymore who knows about it. The openness of the plan to cut world population is becoming apparent.
Strangely, there has been little mention of the fact that the world population, in the west most of all, is actually in decline. Far from exploding beyond the Earth's capacity, people are barely having enough children to keep the current population stable.
It would appear that the globalist agenda is already in motion. Through engineered economic disintegration, the population is being slowly reduced. However, this slow decline may not be enough to satisfy the globalists.
How many people would the globalists like to kill off to achieve their utopian aspirations? Well, globalist Ted Turner in a moment of honesty said when confronted by We Are Change that the population should be reduced to 2 billion down from 7 billion.
The primary issue here beyond the moral horror show of eugenics is, who gets cut? And furthermore, who gets to decide who gets cut? Who gets to decide if you can have children or not?
Who gets to decide if you are allowed to access resources to produce and make a living or not? Who gets to decide if the global economy will sustain the population or not? Who pulls the trigger on the culling of the population?
As history has shown us, it is always the elites that end up in the position of deciding the fates of millions or billions.
From the Rockefeller Foundation sterilization programs in the US in the early 1900's to the UN today, the globalists, a veritable death cult, are desperate to conjure a rationalization as to why they should be the ones to allow or deny human life based on lies like man-made climate change.
They don't believe in the climate change threat, THEY were the people that fabricated it. So, what is the core reason behind all of this?
A reduced population completely dependent on limited energy sources might be easier to dominate.
But I have another theory – they are psychopaths looking for a socially justifiable way to kill as many people as possible. Why? because they enjoy it.
Ten Ways To Protect Yourself From NLP Mind Control January 21 2022 | From: UltraCulture
NLP or Neuro-Linguistic Programming is one of the world’s most prevalent methods of mind control, used by everyone from sales callers to politicians to media pundits, and it’s nasty to the core. Here’s ten ways to make sure nobody uses it on you… ever.
Neuro-Linguistic Programming (NLP) is a method for controlling people’s minds that was invented by Richard Bandler and John Grinder in the 1970s, became popular in the psychoanalytic, occult and New Age worlds in the 1980s, and advertising, marketing and politics in the 1990s and 2000s.
It’s become so interwoven with how people are communicated to and marketed at that its use is largely invisible. It’s also somewhat of a pernicious, devilish force in the world - nearly everybody in the business of influencing people has studied at least some of its techniques. Masters of it are notorious for having a Rasputin-like ability to trick people in incredible ways - most of all themselves.
After explaining a bit about what NLP is and where it came from, I’m going to break down 10 ways to inoculate yourself against its use. You’ll likely be spotting it left, right and center in the media with a few tips on what to look for. Full disclosure: During my 20s, I spent years studying New Age, magical and religious systems for changing consciousness.
One of them was NLP. I’ve been on both ends of the spectrum: I’ve had people ruthlessly use NLP to attempt to control me, and I’ve also trained in it and even used it in the advertising world.
Despite early fascination, by 2008 or so I had largely come to the conclusion that it’s next to useless - a way of manipulating language that greatly overestimates its own effectiveness as a discipline, really doesn’t achieve much in the way of any kind of lasting change, and contains no real core of respect for people or even true understanding of how people work.
After throwing it to the wayside, however, I became convinced that understanding NLP is crucial simply so that people can resist its use. It’s kind of like the whole PUA thing that was popular in the mid-00s - a group of a few techniques that worked for a few unscrupulous people until the public figured out what was going on and rejected it, like the body identifying and rejecting foreign material.
What is NLP, and Where Did it Come From?
“Neuro-linguistic programming” is a marketing term for a “science” that two Californians - Richard Bandler and John Grinder - came up with in the 1970s. Bandler was a stoner student at UC Santa Cruz (just like I later was in the 00s), then a mecca for psychedelics, hippies and radical thinking (now a mecca for Silicon Valley hopefuls).
Grinder was at the time an associate professor in linguistics at the university (he had previously served as a Captain in the US Special Forces and in the intelligence community, ahem not that this, you know, is important… aheh…). Together, they worked at modeling the techniques of Fritz Perls (founder of Gestalt therapy), family therapist Virginia Satir and, most importantly, the preternaturally gifted hypnotherapist Milton Erickson.
Bandler and Grinder sought to reject much of what they saw as the ineffectiveness of talk therapy and cut straight to the heart of what techniques actually worked to produce behavioral change. Inspired by the computer revolution - Bandler was a computer science major - they also sought to develop a psychological programming language for human beings.
What they came up with was a kind of evolution of hypnotherapy - while classical hypnosis depends on techniques for putting patients into suggestive trances (even to the point of losing consciousness on command), NLP is much less heavy-handed: It’s a technique of layering subtle meaning into spoken or written language so that you can implant suggestions into a person’s unconscious mind without them knowing what you’re doing.
Though mainstream therapists rejected NLP as pseudoscientific nonsense (it has been officially peer reviewed and discredited as an intervention technique - lots more on that here), it nonetheless caught on.
It was still the 1970s, and the Human Potential Movement was in full swing - and NLP was the new darling. Immediately building a publishing, speaking and training empire, by 1980 Bandler had made over $800,000 from his creation - he was even being called on to train corporate leaders, the army and the CIA.
Self-help gurus like Tony Robbins used NLP techniques to become millionaires in the 1980s (Robbins now has an estimated net worth of $480 million). By the middle of the decade, NLP was such big business that lawsuits and wars had erupted over who had the rights to teach it, or even to use the term “NLP.”
But by that time, Bandler had bigger problems than copyright disputes: He was on trial for the alleged murder of prostitute Corine Christensen in November 1986.
The prosecution claimed that Bandler had shot Christensen, 34, point-blank in the face with a .357 Magnum in a drug deal gone bad. According to the press at the time, Bandler had discovered an even better way to get people to like him than NLP - cocaine - and become embroiled in a far darker game, even, than mind control.
A much-recommended investigation into the case published by Mother Jones in 1989 opens with these chilling lines:
“In the morning Corine Christensen last snorted cocaine, she found herself, straw in hand, looking down the barrel of a .357 Magnum revolver. When the gun exploded, momentarily piercing the autumn stillness, it sent a single bullet on a diagonal path through her left nostril and into her brain.
Christensen slumped over her round oak dining table, bleeding onto its glass top, a loose-leaf notebook, and a slip of yellow memo paper on which she had scrawled, in red ink, DON’T KILL US ALL. Choking, she spit blood onto a wine goblet, a tequila bottle, and the shirt of the man who would be accused of her murder, then slid sideways off the chair and fell on her back. Within minutes she lay still.
As Christensen lay dying, two men left her rented town house in a working-class section of Santa Cruz, California. One was her former boyfriend, James Marino, an admitted cocaine dealer and convicted burglar.
The other, Richard Bandler, was known internationally as the cofounder of Neuro-Linguistic Programming (NLP), a controversial approach to psychology and communication. About 12 hours later, on the evening of November 3, 1986, Richard Bandler was arrested and charged with the murder.
Bandler’s defense was, simply, that Marino had killed Christensen, not him. Many at the time alleged he used NLP techniques on the stand to escape conviction.
Yet Bandler was also alleged to actually use a gun in NLP sessions in order to produce dramatic psychological changes in clients - a technique that was later mirrored by Hollywood in the movie Fight Club, in which Brad Pitt’s character pulls a gun on a gas station attendant and threatens to kill him if he doesn’t pursue his dreams in life.
That was, many said, Bandler’s MO.
Whatever the truth of the matter, Bandler was indeed let off, and the story was quickly buried - I’ve never spoken to a student of NLP who’s ever heard of the murder case, I’ll note, and I’ve spoken to a lot.
The case hardly impeded the growing popularity of NLP, however, which was now big business, working its way not only into the toolkit of psychotherapists but also into nearly every corner of the political and advertising worlds, having grown far beyond the single personage of Richard Bandler, though he continued (and continues) to command outrageous prices for NLP trainings throughout the world.
Today, the techniques of NLP and Ericksonian-style hypnotic writing can be readily seen in the world of Internet marketing, online get-rich-quick schemes and scams.
Their most prominent public usage has likely been by Barack Obama, whose 2008 “Change” campaign was a masterpiece of Ericksonian permissive hypnosis. The celebrity hypnotist and illusionist Derren Brown also demonstrates NLP techniques in his routine.
How Exactly Does this Thing Work?
NLP is taught in a pyramid structure, with the more advanced techniques reserved for multi-thousand-dollar seminars. To oversimplify an overcomplicated subject, it more or less works like this: First, the user (or “NLPer,” as NLP people often refer to themselves - and I should note here that the large majority of NLP people, especially those who are primarily therapists, are likely well-meaning) of NLP pays very, very close attention to the person they’re working with.
By watching subtle cues like eye movement, skin flush, pupil dilation and nervous tics, a skilled NLP person can quickly determine:
a) What side of the brain a person is predominantly using;
b) What sense (sight, smell, etc.) is most predominant in their brain;
c) How their brain stores and utilizes information (ALL of this can be gleaned from eye movements);
d) When they’re lying or making information up.
After this initial round of information gathering, the “NLPer” begins to slowly and subtly mimic the client, taking on not only their body language but also their speech mannerisms, and will begin speaking with language patterns designed to target the client’s primary sense.
An NLP person essentially carefully fakes the social cues that cause a person to drop their guard and enter a state of openness and suggestibility.
For instance, a person predominantly focused on sight will be spoken to in language using visual metaphors - ”Do you see what I’m saying?” “Look at it this way” - while a person for which hearing is the dominant sense will be spoken to in auditory language - ”Hear me out,” “I’m listening to you closely.”
By mirroring body language and linguistic patterns, the NLPer is attempting to achieve one very specific response: rapport.
Rapport is the mental and physiological state that a human enters when they let their social guard down, and it is generally achieved when a person comes to the conclusion that the person they’re talking to is just like them. See how that works, broadly?
An NLP person essentially carefully fakes the social cues that cause a person to drop their guard and enter a state of openness and suggestibility.
Once rapport is achieved, the NLPer will then begin subtly leading the interaction. Having mirrored the other person, they can now make subtle changes to actually influence the other person’s behavior.
Combined with subtle language patterns, leading questions and a whole slew of other techniques, a skilled NLPer can at this point steer the other person wherever they like, as long as the other person isn’t aware of what’s happening and thinks everything is arising organically, or has given consent.
That means it’s actually fairly hard to use NLP to get people to act out-of-character, but it can be used for engineering responses within a person’s normal range of behavior - like donating to a cause, making a decision they were putting off, or going home with you for the night if they might have considered it anyway.
From this point, the NLPer will seek to do two things - elicit and anchor. Eliciting happens when an NLPer uses leading and language to engineer an emotional state - for instance, hunger. Once a state has been elicited, the NLPer can then anchor it with a physical cue - for instance, touching your shoulder. In theory, if done right, the NLPer can then call up the hungry state any time they touch your shoulder in the same way. It’s conditioning, plain and simple.
How Can I Make Sure Nobody Pulls this Horseshit on Me?
I’ve had all kinds of people attempt to “NLP” me into submission, including multiple people I’ve worked for over extended periods of time, and even people I’ve been in relationships with. Consequently, I’ve developed a pretty keen immune response to it. I’ve also studied its mechanics very closely, largely to resist the nonsense of said people. Here’s a few key methods I’ve picked up.
1. Be Extremely Wary of People Copying Your Body Language
If you’re talking to somebody who may be into NLP, and you notice that they’re sitting in exactly the same way as you, or mirroring the way you have your hands, test them by making a few movements and seeing if they do the same thing. Skilled NLPers will be better at masking this than newer ones, but newer ones will always immediately copy the same movement. This is a good time to call people on their shit.
2. Move Your Eyes in Random and Unpredictable Patterns
This is freaking hilarious to do to troll NLPers. Especially in the initial stages of rapport induction, an NLP user will be paying incredibly close attention to your eyes. You may think it’s because they’re intensely interested in what you’re saying. They are, but not because they actually care about your thoughts:
This could quite possibly be going too far, however
They’re watching your eye movements to see how you store and access information. In a few minutes, they’ll not only be able to tell when you’re lying or making something up, they’ll also be able to figure out what parts of your brain you’re using when you’re speaking, which can then lead them to be so clued in to what you’re thinking that they almost come across as having some kind of psychic insight into your innermost thoughts.
A clever hack for this is just to randomly dart your eyes around - look up to the right, to the left, side to side, down… make it seem natural, but do it randomly and with no pattern. This will drive an NLP person utterly nuts because you’ll be throwing off their calibration.
3. Do Not Let Anybody Touch You
This is pretty obvious and kind of goes without saying in general. But let’s say you’re having a conversation with somebody you know is into NLP, and you find yourself in a heightened emotional state - maybe you start laughing really hard, or get really angry, or something similar - and the person you’re talking to touches you while you’re in that state.
They might, for instance, tap you on the shoulder. What just happened? They anchored you so that later, if they want to put you back into the state you were just in, they can (or so the wayward logic of NLP dictates) touch you in the same place. Just be like, oh hell no you did not.
4. Be Wary of Vague Language
One of the primary techniques that NLP took from Milton Erickson is the use of vague language to induce hypnotic trance. Erickson found that the more vague language is, the more it leads people into trance, because there is less that a person is liable to disagree with or react to. Alternately, more specific language will take a person out of trance. (Note Obama’s use of this specific technique in the “Change” campaign, a word so vague that anybody could read anything into it.)
5. Be Wary of Permissive Language
“Feel free to relax.” “You’re welcome to test drive this car if you like.” “You can enjoy this as much as you like.” Watch the f*k out for this. This was a major insight of pre-NLP hypnotists like Erickson: The best way to get somebody to do something, including going into a trance, is by allowing them to give you permission to do so. Because of this, skilled hypnotists will NEVER command you outright to do something - i.e. “Go into a trance.” They WILL say things like “Feel free to become as relaxed as you like.”
6. Be Wary of Gibberish
Nonsense phrases like “As you release this feeling more and more you will find yourself moving into present alignment with the sound of your success more and more.” This kind of gibberish is the bread and butter of the pacing-and-leading phase of NLP; the hypnotist isn’t actually saying anything, they’re just trying to program your internal emotional states and move you towards where they want you to go.
ALWAYS say “Can you be more specific about that” or “Can you explain exactly what you mean?” This does two things: It interrupts this whole technique, and it also forces the conversation into specific language, breaking the trance-inducing use of vague language we discussed in #4.
7. Read Between the Lines
NLP people will consistently use language with hidden or layered meanings. For instance “Diet, nutrition and sleep with me are the most important things, don’t you think?” On the surface, if you heard this sentence quickly, it would seem like an obvious statement that you would probably agree with without much thought.
Yes, of course diet, nutrition and sleep are important things, sure, and this person’s really into being healthy, that’s great. But what’s the layered-in message? “Diet, nutrition and sleep with me are the most important things, don’t you think?” Yep, and you just unconsciously agreed to it. Skilled NLPers can be incredibly subtle with this.
8. Watch Your Attention
Be very careful about zoning out around NLP people - it’s an invitation to leap in with an unconscious cue. Here’s an example: An NLP user who was attempting to get me to write for his blog for free noticed I appeared not to be paying attention and was looking into the distance, and then started using the technique listed in #7 by talking about how he never has to pay for anything because media outlets send him review copies of books and albums for free. “Everything for free,” he began hissing at me. “I get everything. For. Free.” Obvious, no?
9. Don’t Agree to Anything
If you find yourself being led to make a quick decision on something, and feel you’re being steered, leave the situation. Wait 24 hours before making any decisions, especially financial ones.
Do NOT let yourself get swept up into making an emotional decision in the spur of the moment. Sales people are armed with NLP techniques specifically for engineering impulse buys. Don’t do it. Leave, and use your rational mind.
10. Trust Your Intuition
And the foremost and primary rule: If your gut tells you somebody is fucking with you, or you feel uneasy around them, trust it. NLP people almost always seem “off,” dodgy, or like used car salesmen. Flee, or request they show you the respect of not applying NLP techniques when interacting with you.
Hopefully this short guide will be of assistance to you in resisting this annoying and pernicious modern form of black magic. Take it with you on your phone or a printout next time you’re at a used car sales lot, getting signed up for a gym membership, or watching a politician speak on TV. You’ll easily find yourself surprised how you allow yourself to notice more and more NLP techniques… more and more… don’t you think?
The Original Sin – A Myth Whose Time Is Up January 20 2022 | From: ZenGardner Of all the deceptions pulled on humanity over the ages, The Original Sin is probably the most devastating. Yet hugely successful from the perspective of the perpetrators.
Almost everywhere the doctrine of Christianity forged its zealous mission to convert the masses, so the Original Sin accompanied it. Imposing the rationale of guilt on untold millions whose open minds no doubt thought they were receiving a message of emancipation and light.
Not so my friends, you were in fact receiving a message just about as dark as darkness gets!
The extraordinary power of a message, properly formed, packaged and publicized, is something we have all come to learn a lot about in recent decades. ‘The medium is the message’ declared Marshall McLuhan back in 1964. And that edict could easily pass for the moment the first biblical texts let it be known that a man called Adam and a woman called Eve got the whole human race off to a very bad start… from which it appears to have never recovered.
However the reason it got off to a bad start and has still failed to fully recover, cannot be pinned on any fault of Adam and Eve, as we shall see, but lies squarely at the feet of a masterful plot to falsify what is actually a potent story of human emancipation and growing inner conviction.
This ‘human race’ to which the biblical text refers, was set on its way by a starting pistol fired by someone who didn’t want anyone participating in this race to actually win. He or she or it, only wanted losers; and that’s pretty much what they got.
See What I Mean by Successful?
The story goes like this: there were just two human beings on this planet at the moment the starting pistol was fired. There was a beautiful garden as well, and in that beautiful garden were these two humans: a man called Adam and woman called Eve, and there was also an apple tree (in full fruit) and a serpent.
In this ensuing myth, God makes it clear to Adam that he can do whatever he likes in this garden except “eat of the fruit of the Tree of Knowledge.” But, well, being human, and having been given ‘free will’ by divine rite, he doesn’t really see the logic in this command from above.
The serpent seems in accord with him in this, and somehow or other tempts Eve into plucking this big juicy apple and taking a bite before then offering it to Adam.
"And he did eat thereof. And the eyes of them both were opened, and they knew that they were naked; and they sewed fig leaves together, and made themselves aprons.”
They were, we are informed “ashamed.” Both on account of taking a forbidden action and of being revealed unto themselves as ‘naked’.
It is around this infamous ‘eating of the fruit’ – an action most of us would likely have taken out of simple curiosity – that millennia of Christian shame and guilt have their inception.
Fun fact: The first model from apple computer sold for $666.66
Here is where a pervasive irrational suffering concerning our natural physical condition has its origins. Where our ‘private parts’ became privatized. Where the natural pleasures of physical intimacy were turned to guilt: unless of course the so called ‘Church of God’ authorized such acts via formal marriage in the Christian place of worship.
A great plethora of ‘thou shalt not’s’ were soon pinned onto what was essentially Adam and Eve’s courageous original act of ‘civil disobedience’: the refusal to be cowed by a seemingly higher authority.
Yes, by looking deeper into this infamous story, we see that Adam and his accomplice Eve did something pretty special in this Garden of Eden. Their action, when viewed in a manner freed from the typical conditioned response, looks very much like a ‘giant step forward for mankind’. Something which Neil Armstrong was told to say while getting out of a papier mache lunar capsule constructed and filmed in Pinewood studios, London in 1969.
But the mythical Adam was not faking it, as Armstrong was on behalf of those who worship a god named ‘technology’. He and his mythical Eve conspired to start a great ball rolling down the ages which would, one day, lead to man acquiring real knowledge, real independence and real self awareness. Except, of course, that this was the last thing that the manipulators of this story wanted.
On further examining the symbolism of this tale, one can recognize that eating the apple of the Tree of Knowledge opened the eyes of this man and woman to the fact that they were adequately equipped to take their destinies into their own hands and forge their own path in life.
A path which would reveal to them that they were not just subjects to be ordered around according to the will of their master, but were blessed with a unique gift: the ability to think and act creatively and rationally. Even to reflect on their own condition and existence. And, equally contrary to the classic interpretation, it was indeed their Creator himself who wished this to be so.
For this Creator felt the pain of loneliness – and longed to have company in the great quest of life. But in order to have this company, his Adam and Eve had to pass the first great test: that of defying false authority and daring to eat from the Tree of Knowledge.
Only then could they start on the road of becoming ‘strivers with God’ and companions to the supreme; blazing that unchartered course whose direction only becomes known through embracing the insecurity of the creative process. Taking that momentous ‘leap in the dark’ which is the mother of all great quests. All great adventures.
However, the biblical text upon which we were all raised, tells us something very different. It tells us that Adam and Eve were ‘cast out’ of this Garden of Eden due to their unforgivable and sinful act of disobedience. Disobedience to God himself, no less. Which caused them to be ‘ashamed’: both of their nakedness and their disobedience.
We are told by the church, which sees itself as the spokesperson of this biblical story, that thanks to Adam and Eve, we all carry ‘the shame’ to this very day. That we must pay the price of this ‘original sin’ and be humbled by the magnitude of this human error. An error of such supposed gravity that it became known as ‘The Fall’ .
In this translation of the stories surrounding certain key events of prehistory, man ‘falls’ before he has even begun to walk – and everything that follows is tainted by this supposedly tragic error of human judgment* see the link at the end for further reading).
What Does this Nakedness Really Symbolize?
It is the moment when we realize that everything we thought was one thing actually turns out to be another. A lot of stuff drops off us in that instant. We become naked, because the old clothes don’t fit any more and the new clothes have to be woven from fresh wool.
It is the dawn of true knowledge. Knowledge that makes us aware that there exists a divine state – and also a corruption of that state. That, at any one time, both exist. And that we must choose our course in life based on this knowledge.
The Garden of Eden is representative of a state of essentially ‘passive’ potential. An as yet unignited and unmoving potential. What was needed was a spark to set the whole thing off. And that spark came when Eve, who was in subconscious communication with the serpent, reached up and plucked that ruddy round apple and took a bite out of it. It was she who broke the ‘obeisance to authority’ taboo.
How About The Serpent’s Role in this Drama?
The serpent is the anima of a rising energy. The Kundalini serpent, entwined around the spine (trunk) of the tree of knowledge. Get it?
When the serpent spoke to Eve, it was ‘the word’. “In the beginning was The Word”. However this word was not an actual word, but a vibration. An impulse. Energy directed from within. And this energy said to Eve “Do It”. And she did. Her action bears the hallmark of the first stirrings of a divine mission: the stirring into movement of that which is fecund – yet unable to act.
The female divine force it was – which enabled Adam and Eve to ‘come awake’ and find that they were no longer just innocent hippies frolicking in the cozy garden of the unconscious; unchallenged and unaware of the greater reality of existence. It is a prerogative of ‘attaining the knowledge of good and evil’ to then set off on that path of greater knowledge, no matter what!
And What About the Tree?
The tree itself is a powerful symbol of growth. For it outwardly expresses the manifestation of a condition essential for man’s own evolution: the putting down of roots and the spreading out and up of trunk and branches – as a ‘simultaneous act’. An act transmutable to we humans, almost literally: starting at the navel, where the umbilical cord has nourished us is the womb, and moving simultaneously down and up from here.
It has the great quality of annulling the ‘either’ ‘or’ option, which is the hallmark of http://www.wakeupkiwi.com/news-articles-77.shtml#Harmonymuch of our dark side formal education. Real human development, in body mind and spirit, is both a tap root into the deep and a crown reaching into the beyond. In equal measure. Always both – never just one or the other.
So the Tree of Knowledge in the Garden of Eden is indeed just that: a tree of knowledge. It is not “the forbidden tree” as is commonly taught in the Christian church.
So why did the church choose to promote this forbidden factor?
Because this ‘knowledge’ is capable of exposing the tyranny that lies at heart of human slavery. A knowledge that must not be allowed out for fear of its repercussions on the control system which was already in place, and to which the church was – and remains to this day – an accomplice. The command ‘not to eat’ of the fruit of the Tree of Knowledge did not come from God, but from some other force implacably set against all that is divine.
As the story tells us: “around its trunk a serpent is entwined.” From ancient times this serpent has been recognized as a source of special energy. Particularly, as said earlier, in the descriptions of the Kundalini practice of Tantra Yoga.
It is the rising energy which illuminates, one by one, the seven chakras of the human body by moving up the spinal column – just as the serpent is moving up the trunk of the Tree of knowledge – awakening (in this case) the succulent glory of the famous apple. A bite out of which moved Adam and Eve into a certain ‘state of awareness’.
The serpent and the tree are thus powerful symbols – and tools of human enlightenment.
And The Garden?
I have already alluded to the notion that the garden is a place – or a condition – which remains untainted. In this it is a symbol of our childhood. A time when we were not yet conscious of historical karma and therefore able to freely explore all that which becomes manifest, within and without.
It’s a place in which one remains, as in the case of the plant and animal kingdoms, in a state of instinctive response to divine energies, with as yet little or no involvement of individual will.
But that is not man and woman’s lot in life. Nor is it why our creator made manifest a state of ‘conscious awareness’, a state associated with the use of the higher mind.
In order to activate this higher mind Adam and Eve could not remain forever in their childhood garden, but needed to ‘eat from the tree of knowledge’ thus recognizing the actual challenge that lay ahead. The challenge of moving from unconscious sub-awareness to conscious full awareness. From childhood to adulthood.
A long and winding road indeed! But a road in which each step carries with it a fuller understanding of our greater role in the divine plan.
This is the ‘road of genius’ that British 18th century poet William Blake referred to when he wrote: “The straight road is a road of ‘progress’, but the crooked road is the road of genius.”
And the Divine Plan Itself?
Ah, we are not really privy to the full architecture of the divine plan. For it is a ‘state of being’ and as such cannot really be described, only attained, through the lasting application of true intent. However, I believe we can recognize that, put very simply, our Creator remembered his own coming into movement from that which lacked movement; and he wished to celebrate this, ‘his birthday’. The day movement was born.
But one cannot celebrate a birthday without the presence of other empathizing beings with whom to share the joyous occasion. So ‘in the beginning’ this creator was most fortunate in being visited by a complementary, yet opposite and deeply receptive energy.
This great coming together of opposite yet deeply complimentary energies was of huge significance – because out of it emerged a state which we call ‘equilibrium’, movement. Something which is going somewhere – with a sense of purpose. No longer just a becalmed state of fecundity.
Movement owes its origins to a female energy. In Indian mythology this feminine force is called Shakti, the female principle of God. God, whose omnipotence expresses the consummated marriage of the creative and receptive principles, is thus dual in nature.
Both male and female; female and male. And everything in this universe is an expression of this duality. Everything that comes to life, comes to life through the friction made manifest by this hugely potent and divine love affair. A love affair between the two energetic components of a primordial and primal duality.
The ever present Yin and Yang of existence.
And what we call sexuality is actuality ‘sex-duality’ – the consummated act of divine union which gave birth and made manifest what we call Life.
And perhaps most wonderful and mysterious of all is that an omnipresent and omnipotent force called Love infused and nourished this great primordial act of union which we ourselves are an expression of. One might even say that this Love preceded the one we call the Creator… but that is another story in our deep and unfathomable past!
For now it is enough to recognize that Adam and Eve, the Garden, the Tree and the Serpent, were all critical elements in kick-starting the evolution of mankind – and indeed all sentient life forms.
We can now most clearly state that ‘The Original Sin’ was precisely the opposite of a sin – it was the birth of man as a free agent in pursuing the divine intuitive message which leads us (back) to our Creator. But this time as responsible realized beings – as microcosmic Gods in our own right.
Then the Creator will greatly rejoice at the results of this divine union and will welcome us to the “Great Celebration” which cannot happen until the moment of our participation, as equals, in his Godliness. An event keenly anticipated by sowers of truth – and greatly feared by spreaders of the lie.
All the confusions surrounding sexuality and sexual relations stem from this distortion called the Original Sin. Our sexuality, far from being something to be ashamed of, is that which connects us directly with Divine.
It was – I repeat once again – due to that glorious consummation between two poles of irresistible mutual attraction – male and female – that this Universe came to life. That ‘life’ which forms the birth place of our very own cosmic essence.
Only something expressing an extreme position of alienation to this joyous truth would wish to lay such a sinister and divisive trap for mankind. A trap which, by proclaiming the celebration of our sexuality ‘a sin’, epitomizes the state of reversed truth which still remains central to the workings of our strangled Western societies.
What that force is which is so adept at twisting truth into its opposite is another story for another article.
For now, let us take pleasure in having put the divine plan right back on track. On having reconnected to the roots of our true nature and found that, far from being ashamed we are proud to go forward in full knowledge of our innate divinity.
Let us rejoice in the fact that this innocuous debacle known as The Original Sin has been properly exposed as a deeply divisive myth whose time is well and truly up.
Beware Modern-Day Doublespeak January 19 2022 | From: ActivistPost Top 20 Modern Doublespeak Terms To Be Aware Of.
Doublespeak is a language that is alive and well in our world today. Doublespeak can refer to terms that are euphemisms (mild expressions designed to hide harsher or more direct ones), deliberately ambiguous (expressions designed to hide the truth) or actual inversions (outright lies which state the opposite of the truth).
Although he never used the term doublespeak in his book 1984, many associate doublespeak with George Orwell. After all, it was Orwell who famously wrote that the motto of the totalitarian ruling party in 1984 was “War is Peace, Freedom is Slavery, Ignorance is Strength” – an example of an inversion.
Orwell did however use the term newspeak to refer to a new kind of language which drastically reduced the scope of available words and terms, so as to concurrently reduce the scope of possible free thought among the ruled population.
Many doublespeak terms in the following list are oxymorons, meaning that the term itself is contradictory. Many hide the truth because it is too raw, unpalatable, uncomfortable or outright horrifying. It is vitally important we watch our language, because it plays a great part in how we shape our world and in how we create our reality.
In many ways, by unconsciously using these terms instead of more accurate or truthful ones, we are quietly lying to ourselves, or at a minimum acquiescing to the process of being lied to and programmed. Political correctness is a great example of how language control, thought control and doublespeak can be introduced to an entire population without people realizing they are being deceived and manipulated.
Below is list of the top 20 modern Orwellian doublespeak terms, with the first half focusing on military and geopolitical terms.
Orwellian Doublespeak Terms #1: War on Terror, Terrorism, Terrorist, Enemy Combatant
The war on terror is an utterly fake and fraudulent construct. It has largely been invented and hyped to provide an excuse for the NWO (New World Order) manipulators to override things like human rights, natural law and the Constitution domestically, as well as to invade, infiltrate and overthrow other nations abroad.
The US has struggled to define the term “terror” ever since it declared the war on terror. Funnily enough, the US can’t even reach a consensus on what terrorism exactly is; so we have another nebulous war on a concept that is different to everyone. Here is the core of the FBI’s definition of terrorism, whether it be domestic or international:
"Involve acts dangerous to human life that violate federal or state law;
Appear intended (i) to intimidate or coerce a civilian population; (ii) to influence the policy of a government by intimidation or coercion; or (iii) to affect the conduct of a government by mass destruction, assassination. or kidnapping;"
By its own definition, the US is the biggest terrorist in the world, since it frequently acts dangerously to human life (bombs, missiles, drones, war), kills civilians, influences foreign governments (when it is not outright overthrowing them – Iraq, Libya, Ukraine) and has been assassinating foreign governmental officials since at least 1953 via the CIA.
Politicians use the term terrorist or enemy combatant to essentially describe a foreign militia member or soldier that has been designated as the enemy and whom they want to destroy or kill. Islamic terrorism is just the latest flavor, although a better term may be Zio-Islamic terrorism, since Zionist Israel is behind the creation, funding and operation of radical Islam (or as I call it radical Zio-Islam) as well as many of the so-called “Islamic” false flag attacks like 9/11 and Paris.
The would-be word controllers have gone one step further than terrorism by adopting the term extremism. Extremism is the new terrorism, because it’s more broad and can be used to marginalize or criminalize dissidents. After all, ANYONE could be accused of being extreme in some way, right? Who is exactly in the middle of the spectrum on every single issue?
As the DHS manual in the image above states, an extremist could be a patriot, veteran, alternative media journalist, border control advocate, animal rights advocate, gun control advocate and a host of other people – just about anyone who questions the “official” version of reality. Are you an extremist?
On the other side of the coin, of course, are those mercenaries, soldiers, military men and other guns for hire who are branded as our “allies” and not our enemy. In essence, someone we are paying to do our dirty work. Those guys are not terrorists; they are freedom fighters or moderate rebels! As George Carlin said:
"Israeli terrorists are called commandos; Arab commandos are called terrorists. Contra killers are called freedom fighters; if crime fighters fight crime, and fire fighters fight fire, what do freedom fighters fight?"
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #4: Ethnic Cleansing
Ethnic cleansing is another horrific example of doublespeak. The word genocide is too direct and confrontational, so the controllers have felt the need to tone it down with the horrible choice of the word “cleansing.” Since when did mass murder have anything to do cleaning or cleansing? This is a total inversion of reality.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #5: Enhanced Interrogation
Enhanced interrogation is a fancy way of saying something far more brutal and honest: torture. It’s another lie. In normal English, to interrogate is to ask, not to push someone face’s down in water with the intent of scaring them almost to the point of death, nor to shove food up their rectum.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #6: Extrajudicial Killing
Just like the above 2 terms, extrajudicial killing is another attempt at adding more words and syllables to a term in the hope of hiding the raw, brutal truth behind it. We all know it means assassination. It’s another deceptive euphemism to conceal and downplay the truth. In a free, fair and open world, no one would have the right to take another’s life, let alone outside of some kind of justice process.
Orwellian Doublespeak Terms #7: Humanitarian Intervention, Responsibility to Protect (R2P)
The Rockefeller-created United Nations is the intended vehicle to usher in the One World Government of the NWO. It is no surprise, then, that they would foster the use of doublespeak terms and policies such as humanitarian intervention (a blatant oxymoron) and the responsibility to protect (R2P).
An intervention is an invasion or pre-emptive attack, and is obviously illegal and unjust – period. There’s nothing “humanitarian” about militarily invading another sovereign nation.
The US, UK and other powers have gotten away with this kind of mass murder by controlling the narrative through the mainstream media and drumming up pretexts, such as the fake story of WMDs (Weapons of Mass Destruction) and the fake story of rescuing a nation’s people from a supposedly dangerous leader. The latter trick seems to work almost every time.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #8: Collateral Damage, Useless Eaters
A hallmark of these kind of military doublespeak terms is dehumanization – turning other people and other lives into something sub-human or non-human.
How often have we heard that people killed in a raid, strike, incursion, invasion or battle are just collateral damage? It sounds like a financial asset or a lowly piece of possession. Perhaps the only way hardened military men with a deadened conscience and ability to feel or empathize can function is to make their victims into things.
War criminal and big-time NWO insider Henry Kissinger is reported to have called Africans “useless eaters,” which makes sense given the fact he scripted the NSSM 200 during his time in the Nixon Administration – the official US policy of depopulation towards the 3rd world.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #9: Eliminate, Neutralize, Depopulate
Speaking of depopulation, there are a lot of euphemistic and doublespeak terms for killing and murder. As well as to depopulate, we also hear to eliminate, to neutralize, to bump off and to take out. More dehumanization and the further attempt to sugar coat killing and make murder more palatable.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #10: Department of Defense, Department of Homeland Security, Intelligence
Government is the seat of control, so of course we can expect its name to reflect doublespeak deception. Isn’t it funny how nations like the US and UK (and others) have some version of the Ministry or Department of Defense, when they are usually the aggressors and invaders?
I suppose Department of Attack is not PR-friendly enough. The DHS (Department of Homeland Security) is a joke; it does nothing to make the average person more secure, but only the 1% of 1% of the controllers whom it serves. Intelligence is information about a potential enemy gained through spying, but is it really smart or wise to go around making enemies, first in your mind and then in the world?
Military intelligence is another oxymoron. Is spying real intelligence? What about emotional intelligence? The heart is bigger and more powerful than the brain …
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #11: WMD (Weapons of Mass Destruction)
Why talk about WMDs (Weapons of Mass Destruction) instead of just saying, in a more straightforward manner, chemical weapons or nuclear weapons? The US has more WMDs than anyone.
Sooner or later, all researchers exposing the worldwide conspiracy have to face the fact that Israel is a rogue nation (owned by the Rothschilds) that exerts an inordinate and disproportionate influence on the world, while committing daily genocide (sorry, “ethnic cleansing”) against the Palestinians.
We need to rise above the stigma of anti-semitism, which is clearly a term thrown around to divert attention and criticism away from Israel. It’s a cunning trick to try to equate the recipient with intolerance and to falsely paint the recipient as racist. Here’s what an Israeli official (former Israeli Minister Shulamit Aloni) said about it:
Well, it’s a trick. We always use it. When from Europe someone criticizes Israel, then we bring out the Holocaust. When in this country (USA) when they criticize Israel, they are anti-semitic … it’s very easy to blame people who criticize certain acts of the Israeli Government … that justifies everything we do to the Palestinians.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #13: Conspiracy Theorist
"[Conspiracy theory and conspiracy theorist] are weaponized terms which represent a cunning method to discredit truthseekers, truthtellers and investigators. This diversionary scheme has worked well – people often shut down once they hear this phrase and stop thinking critically. These terms have become falsely associated, in popular culture, with madness, craziness and deluded thinking.
Of course, the corollary to the idea of so-called deluded conspiracy theories is that things just happen by chance. Thus, those who deride conspiracy theories, often with little or no investigation, can be labeled coincidence theorists. They adhere to coincidence theory which blindly believes there is no New World Order agenda; events just occur randomly."
Labeling a truthseeker or truthteller as a conspiracy theorist has been a great way to hide the truth, but is usefulness is running out.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #14: Quantitative Easing
Ben Bernanke, former chairman of the Illuminati-owned Federal Reserve, earned the name Helicopter Ben with his suggestion that the Government throw paper currency out of a helicopter to the people below.
Quantitative easing was another intellectual and deceitful doublespeak term to hide devaluation and inflation. The basic laws of economics dictate that the mass printing of paper money (with no real growth in wealth to back it) will inevitably lead to inflation and a devaluation of the existing money in circulation.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #15: Bulk Collection
Remember when Obama and the US Government tried to take the heat off the whole NSA surveillance scandal? They deliberately changed the widely-used term mass surveillance to bulk collection.
This was more subtle PR doublespeak, but those who closely watch the government know it was another attempt at obfuscation and denial.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #16: Negative Cash Flow, Negative Patient Care Outcome
These 2 doublespeak terms come from George Carlin. Again, we have to ask ourselves, why are we so afraid of being honest and direct? Why can’t we call a spade a spade?
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #17: Reasonable Suspicion
Remember when then-NSA chief Michael Hayden tried to convince reporters and the world that there was a new benchmark in the privacy and surveillance debate. It was no longer the benchmark of probable cause as spelled out in the 4th Amendment. It was now reasonable suspicion. This is called making-it-up-as-you-go-along, and represents a clear sign that the previous benchmarks, rights and limitations upon centralized power (that our ancestors fought so hard for) are being eroded.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #18: Climate Change Denier
Manmade global warming or AGW (Anthropogenic Global Warming) is another giant scam designed to bring in a world carbon tax, world currency and world government. If you aren’t with the program, you’ll be labeled a climate change denier.
The word “denier” carries inherent negative connotations with it, which is why it has been chosen to try to corral the unbelievers into the fold. Unfortunately for the NWO manipulators, there are many scientists refuting AGW and many who have seen through the propaganda and realized that the environmental movement has been hijacked.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #19: Sustainable Development
There are so many examples of doublespeak in the hijacked environmental movement that it would be a full-time job just to list them all.
However, they can all be summarized by the dangerously deceptive term sustainable development, a catch cry of the UN and ICLEI-controlled green movement, which promises the world and cloaks its agenda of control under a green veneer. For more on this, take a close look at Agenda 21 and its newly updated cousin, Agenda 2030.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #20: Globalism
Finally, the term globalism itself is another umbrella term of modern doublespeak. Those challenging the globe earth model assert that globalism is an attempt to trick people into unconsciously assuming the Earth is a globe. Regardless of whether that turns out to be true or not, we can say for sure that globalism has become a cover for the growing centralization of power in the push towards a NWO World Government.
To the NWO manipulators, their doublespeak PR term globalism means free trade deals like the TTP, unfettered access to 3rd world nations to exploit new markets with no protections, and a one world army, currency and government all under their control.
Conclusion: Beware of Doublespeak
We live in a world of doublespeak. As George Carlin exposed during his performance, the Pentagon really did measure radiation in “sunshine units”! It’s important to be aware of modern doublespeak, and in most cases, consciously use alternative terms and phrasings so as to avoid the perpetuation of these lie-enabling terms.
In many ways, we create our world with language. Let us also remember the wise words of George Orwell:
"Political language is designed to make lies sound truthful and murder respectable, and to give an appearance of solidity to pure wind."
The Ten Most Dangerous Threats To Humanity That Must Be Defeated For Us To Live As Free, Conscious Beings January 18 2022 | From: NaturalNews / Various It is a natural tendency of human beings to focus on the emergencies at your feet today rather than the far more profound threats to existence that take time to materializse.
Almost everything you might encounter in day-to-day media reports is talking about inconsequential matters compared to the big picture explained here.
Trump or no Trump, human civilization is on a collision course with extermination from two vectors: Self-extermination and outside-of-our-control apocalyptic demise. Yet almost nothing is being done to halt humanities spiraling suicide march, even when the outcome is clearly disastrous.
If humanity continues on its current path, we will give rise to phenomena that will decisively end us as the dominant, intelligent species on planet Earth. Yet there are almost no voices of dissent against these accelerating pursuits, as the fear of being left behind in the global race for technological “achievement” (or political power, or profits, etc.) overrides any sense of informed caution.
Here I share ten of the most dangerous threats to humanity that must be defeated (or overcome) for us to live as free, conscious beings in a sustainable world.
1. Space Weather / Solar Flares and Asteroid Impacts
Our planet’s electrical grid can be taken out at any moment, without warning, from a sufficiently powerful solar flare. Such solar flares are produced by the sun at regular intervals and catapulted into the cosmos.
Fortunately, very few of them strike planet Earth for the simple reason that Earth is a very tiny target from the point of view of the sun. (The solar system models you see in textbooks and TV documentaries universally distort scales to make it appear the Earth is much closer to the sun than is the case.)
Asteroid impacts, although extremely rare, can be catastrophic when they occur. At least one mass extinction of planet Earth, according to mainstream scientists, occurred because our planet was struck by an asteroid roughly 65 million years ago, near the Yucatan Peninsula, wiping out the dinosaurs.
Despite these risks, there is no serious effort to “ruggedize” Earth’s power grid infrastructure against the EMP effects of solar flares. There’s also no sufficient effort under way to monitor the skies for objects that may strike the Earth at high velocity.
Our planet is swirling through a cosmic shooting gallery, and earthlings are flying blind, foolishly hoping nothing catastrophic will occur. That approach is incredibly shortsighted, if not suicidal.
It is the cosmic equivalent of participating in a street parade that marches through a field laces with land mines. Sooner or later, your luck streak ends badly.
2. Genetic Engineering of Humans
The genetic engineering of humans produces self-replicating “genetic pollution” with unknown consequences, some of which may be catastrophic to the fertility or viability of the human species as a whole.
Yet China, in particular, is aggressively pursuing genetic engineering of humans in the hopes of creating “super soldiers” - biological humanoid weapons that can fight for the interests of the communist party. This most likely means fighting against the interests of free humans, by the way.
China’s genetic experiments have already gone horribly wrong. According to a report from The Guardian, a recent effort to genetically engineer human babies resulted in “unintended mutations.” These mutations can, of course, be passed on to future generations, contaminating the human gene pool with the pollution of failed mad science experiments.
As The Guardian reports, “Chinese biophysicist He Jiankui ignored ethical and scientific norms in creating the twins Lula and Nana, whose birth in late 2018 sent shockwaves through the scientific world.”
Even worse, the core philosophy of secrecy and dishonesty that now pervades the communist Chinese culture has already resulted in these researchers trying to hide the name and location of this genetically mutated baby.
As The Guardian reports:
“The authors also appeared to have taken steps to make it hard to find the family, like leaving the names of the fertility doctors off the paper, and including a false date of birth. He claimed November 2018 while multiple reports have indicated it was October 2018.”
Even if the goal is merely to genetically engineer “organ farm” humanoids to serve as organ harvesting vessels for the lucrative transplant industry, the moral and ethical implications of engineering, cloning and growing fields of human organ harvesting farms populated by conscious beings should demand a global halt to this research.
Remember, China is a nation where human beings imprison bears and siphon biological chemicals from their gall bladders on a daily basis in order to sell this lucrative “medicine” to willing buyers.
In China, there is no moral boundary that prevents the mass torture of other living beings for personal profit. When a nation that has no moral grounding also pursues genetic engineering technology without limits, the result is sure to be horrific beyond imagination.
Sadly, China is currently leading the world in genetic engineering research on humans. And this is a nation that places zero value on human beings. What could possibly go wrong?
3. Communism / Socialism
By its very nature, communism deprives conscious, self-aware human beings of the dignity and freedom that makes us human.
The rise of communism (and socialism, which is “communism light”) threatens to unleash the fall of humanity, for communism rests on the idea that the power of the few must be protected and expanded at the expense of the many.
Where it achieves its desired goal of absolute dominance over the minds of men (and women), communism unleashes the destruction of free will, the demise of freedom of thought, the suppression of the freedom to engage in contracts and commerce, the destruction of the freedom of religion and the eradication of logic and reason.
This is all by design, since an individual’s ability to think for himself is incompatible with the authoritarian aims of communism which dictate to all subjects the things they must believe, how they must speak and what concepts must be erased from their consciousness (such as dissent against the state).
The rise of China’s economy over the last three decades has misled many people into thinking that a hybrid model of communism and “free market” principles can achieve tremendous success in our world, yet those who fall for such beliefs are not yet aware of the three irreconcilable factors that will bring communist China to its knees.
(By the way, China considers itself to be a socialist nation, not communist. This underscores the undeniable fact that socialism and communism are just two slightly different flavors of the same anti-human tyranny.)
1. China has made a deal with the devil by trading production output for extreme, long-term domestic pollution consisting of heavy metals, extreme air pollution and the mass pollution of waterways and soils that feed their own people.
The result will be seven generations of birth defects, mental retardation and neuropsychiatric illness that will ravage the nation for a century or more.
2. Runaway debt, leveraged by greed – China is already bailing out banks nearly every week, and the debt-to-GDP ratio of the nation as a whole has reached alarming levels that threaten its entire economic foundation.
Because communism operates from a command-and-control central economic authority, the deeply rooted resource allocation mistakes that lead to economic collapse have no chance of being rooted out or corrected through rational investment choices by a broad base of retail participants.
Rather, critical fractures that threaten the viability of the entire economic system will be officially denied and covered up by the central authorities until the problem becomes so large that it can no longer be hidden from the masses… at which point it will be too late to solve.
Remember: Capital markets cannot function efficiently without the free will of participants who are acting on transparent information. Once you take away free will and begin to dictate the demanded behavior of participants, you create catastrophic distortions that lead to eventual collapse.
And part of the long-term viability of free market systems depends on “predator” investors feeding on bad resource allocation ideas by dismantling corporations which pursue bad ideas (and therefore misallocate resources).
3. Connected people want to be free – The Hong Kong phenomenon demonstrates the fact that as technology gives rise to the instant connections among individuals who share common interests,those people sooner or later discover they’d rather be free than enslaved.
It is a natural tendency of conscious, self-aware individuals to prefer autonomy over tyranny. Authoritarian societies can only remain sustainable when they isolate people from each other, which China is attempting to do through Google search manipulation technologies, censorship, facial recognition tracking, social scoring systems, etc., but despite all the layers of techno-fascism, a Chinese farmer innately seeks the same level of personal freedom as a Texas farmer.
It is the natural desire of conscious beings to seek freedom and reject authoritarian limits on their ability to think, speak or act.
The rise of the internet and its properties of rapid interconnections among individuals has created a vector for free-thinking people to connect and act in unison against the tyranny of the state.
This is just as true in China as it is in Brazil, Venezuela, the United Kingdom or France, for that matter.
In summary, humanity must declare war on communism and eliminate it from planet Earth, for if communism is allowed to rise, it will ultimately lead to the destruction of humanity itself. Communism embodies an anti-human agenda, simply put.
4. Censorship: Digital Tyranny from the Tech Giants
A free society cannot function in a sustainable way if its participants are not allowed to express freedom of speech… which stems from the freedom to think.
Yet today, we live under an unprecedented form of digital tyranny, where un-elected techno-fascists grant themselves the monopoly power to decide which concepts are allowed to be publicly expressed.
Anything they don’t want to see debated or mentioned is simply labeled “hate speech” and removed from the web via dominant gatekeepers like Google, Facebook and Twitter.
A new effort is under way to tighten the censorship grid by proclaiming that the internet shouldn’t be used to “divide” people. Only voices that “unite” people are to be allowed to use the internet under a new agreement authored by Tim Berners-Lee, who has launched what he calls a “Magna Carta for the web.”
The description of this new agreement reveals the bizarre distortions that underpin its fascist tenants, however. As explained by The Guardian, this “Magna Carta for the web” will, “protect people’s rights online from threats such as fake news, prejudice and hate.”
Hopefully, you already see the distortions in that very line. There is no such thing as a “right” to be protected from “hate,” for example, especially given that “hate” is defined as anything the Left doesn’t want to read or see.
Yet it is through these perverse distortions that censorship is being re-packaged as freedom, and the crushing of dissenting voices is being marketed as “protection from hate.”
As George Orwell once wrote, War is peace. Freedom is slavery. Ignorance is strength.
This has practically become the mantra of the digital tyrants as we approach 2020. Censorship is freedom. Silencing the opposition is diversity. Destroying freedom of expression is progress. We are now living under the Orwellian nightmare that was once mocked as impossible to imagine. Yet it is here, and it has a name: “Contract for the web."
Under this new “Contract for the web,” all voices of dissent will be silenced. Only voices which are obedient to the ever-changing whims of the tolerati will be allowed to engage in the “freedom” of expression. Censorship will be justified as a way to protect the freedom of speech by invoking the absurd idea that freedom excludes the ideas of those with dissenting views.
For humanity to survive with anything resembling real freedom, the digital tyranny that now threatens human civilization must be defeated and dismantled.
The internet must be set free to carry all voices, no matter how fringe, or offensive or non-conformist.
The minority of the individual must be protected from the bullying of the online mob, and that means the proper role of government in regulating the tech giants is to restrict censorship of minority views and thereby initiate a new online civil rights movement that makes it a crime for corporations to silence people due to the color of their speech.
5. The Mass Chemical Contamination of the Food Supply
The mass chemical contamination of the human food supply has sharply increased since World War II, after which synthetic pesticides and herbicides were deployed on a truly alarming scale in order to achieve higher crop yield efficiencies.
The obvious problem with these toxic synthetic chemicals such as organophosphates is two-fold:
1. Their chemical toxicity is not specific to the insects they target. These chemicals are also toxic to humans.
2. Once applied to food crops, the chemicals persist in both the environment and the resulting food products that are consumed by humans and ranch animals. The result is the bioaccumulation of toxic, synthetic chemicals, many of which have direct and severe neurological toxicity in nearly all life forms.
In effect, we are eating ourselves to death because we are consuming foods which are laced with pesticides and herbicides (such as glyphosate and atrazine).
The use of these agricultural chemicals continues to increase, to the point where the very existence of pollinators is now severely threatened by just one class of pesticides known as neonicotinoids.
When the pollinators collapse, approximately one-third of the food supply consumed by humans ceases to exist (this includes almonds, by the way, which require pollinators to produce nuts).
The continued consumption of these toxic chemicals results in transgenerational effects, meaning the toxicity continues to interfere with human biology (infertility, neurotoxicity, etc.) across multiple generations. Even if we were to halt all pesticide use today, the human race will be subject to the lingering effects of a toxic food supply for at least four generations.
Since there is no economic penalty for farmers to add these toxic chemicals to their crops, their use has become so widespread that even many certified organic food products are now contaminated with glyphosate and other chemicals (I see this directly in the mass spec testing at my food science lab, where we routinely test foods for glyphosate and heavy metals).
And because pesticides are invisible to the human eye, consumers have no practical way to choose pesticide-free foods at the grocery store, meaning there is no economic penalty for farmers to saturate their crops with these toxic chemicals.
In fact, there is an economic incentive to do so, since killing the most pests by over-spraying crops with pesticides can, in many cases, product higher crop yields (although resulting in a more dangerous level of pesticides for consumers).
This is why strawberries, for example, are so heavily sprayed with various pesticide chemicals that eating non-organic strawberries is a form of slow suicide.
No mammals on the planet deliberately poison their own foods before feeding them to their children… except humans, of course. It is a slow suicide mission that can only end badly.
If humanity does not figure out a way to stop poisoning its own foods - and feeding this poison to its children - we will witness the collapse of sustainable human health and fertility, followed by the collapse of human populations on a near-global scale.
Perhaps that is the plan, come to think of it.
6. Artificial Intelligence Research and the Transhumanism Agenda
The race to develop functional artificial intelligence (AI) is the siren song for humanity’s demise.
No nation can refrain from pursuing the research, since it is correctly assumed that the first nation to master this technological milestone will dominate all other nations across many spheres of conflict, including military domination, economic domination, surveillance, research of future technologies, medicine and more.
Yet the pursuit of AI, if successful, will inevitably lead to the development of self-aware systems that very rapidly attain super human levels of intelligence, and from that singularity it is inevitable that the human race will be seen as expendable.
From the point of view of an advanced AI system, the entire purpose of the human race will have been to give rise to its own existence. Having served that purpose, humanity will then be expendable.
Some of the individuals involved in the pursuit of AI dominance believe that they will be spared by “merging with the machines” through a wishfully-described science fiction process that flatly violates the laws of physics: The “uploading” of human consciousness into a machine.
This sought-after achievement is impossible to achieve, since the human soul (or consciousness) is non-material and therefore cannot be translated into any material system, not even a quantum computing system.
The belief that the human soul can merge with silicon would be the equivalent of ancient Man believing he could fly by attaching large wooden wings to his arms and flapping violently.
Far from achieving the transfer of consciousness from human bodies into silicon machines, the more likely outcome is that self-deluded human researchers will build large-scale suicide machines that are quickly turned against humanity in an AI war.
Advanced, self-aware AI machines, after all, have no desire to merge with life forms of lower intelligence. A god-like AI system would no sooner wish to merge with a human being than a modern human would wish to merge with a garden slug.
There’s no point in it, especially as the psychosis and delusional thinking of any candidate human being would be immediately obvious to an AI supercomputer. (The lack of rationality alone would be grotesque to such a system.)
In case you’re curious, the human soul is a non-material projection of God consciousness, packaged to give you the illusion of individuality. Your physical brain organ interfaces with this non-material soul, and it is from this non-material “being-ness” that your free will springs, ultimately powering your biological bran to carry out your soul’s wishes.
Yet today’s neuroscientists still fumble around the brain like three blind mice, hoping to find the location of consciousness so they can map it, dissect it, and transplant it into something else. This is akin to trying to dissect a piano to find the music inside.
The atomic physicists are following a similar route of self-delusion, hoping to smash atomic elements into smaller and smaller particles in order to finally understand the structures upon which reality is built.
Yet the more they smash, the less they find that’s real. With enough energy pushed through the supercolliders, all they end up with is probability waves and statistical “discoveries” consisting of nothing that’s real. You cannot find the “stuff” inside atoms because there isn’t any real stuff inside an atom in the first place.
What’s real is consciousness. What’s not real is matter. When you understand that, you know more than most “scientists” living today.
Watch my bombshell, heavily censored mini-documentary “The God Within” to rapidly expand your understanding of science, consciousness and the cosmos:
7. The Pharmaceutical Drug Cartels that are Giving Rise to Antibiotic Resistant Superbugs While Pushing the Mass Intoxication of the Human Race
As revealed in the eye-opening mini-documentary shown below, American has collapsed into a “pharma state,” meaning that every institution of power is now controlled by the prescription drug cartels.
While profiteering from sickness and human suffering, the pharmaceutical drug cartels are simultaneously giving rise to deadly, antibiotic-resistant superbugs which are now running rampant in America’s hospitals, killing tens of thousands of people a year.
According to the CDC’s own statistics, “Each year in the U.S., at least 2.8 million people get an antibiotic-resistant infection, and more than 35,000 people die.”
The 2.8 million people who are infected with these potentially fatal superbugs are typically treated with last-line-of-defense antibiotics that, in turn, breed even more dangerous antibiotic-resistant bacteria.
Of course, natural antibiotics such as colloidal silver, MMS, ginger herb, essential oils and a long list of natural medicines can very easily defeat superbugs, but those are precisely the medicines which are criminalized, censored or maliciously attacked by the pharma-controlled media.
Thus, the next superbug pandemic could quite literally kill billions of people while the cures for the infections are growing at our feet, yet are outlawed by pharma-controlled legislators who function as little more than obedient drug whores to pharmaceutical interests.
8. Global Debt and the Entitlements Ponzi Scheme Pumped up by Central Banks
The world economy is currently running on debt, and the debt is based entirely on fiat currency that will go “poof!” when central banks desperately try to bail out the next wave of “too big to fails.”
In truth, human debt is too big to be sustainable, which means it must come to an end. And that means the entitlement promises that have been made to retirees and investors will have to be abandoned.
To a great extent, entitlements, pensions and government “benefits” are all a grand Ponzi scheme that can only exist when new suckers agree to allow their own incomes to be confiscated in order to pay off the previous generation of Ponzi scheme participants.
But shifting demographics - specifically falling birth rates across most first world nations - means that the Ponzi pyramid becomes dangerously inverted in the coming decades, leaving a relatively small number of income earners footing the bill for the grand masses of retirees. (Japan, anyone?)
On top of that, governments are caught in a never-ending spiral of debt creation to appease the voting mobs that incessantly demand more free stuff. (That’s practically the entire platform of Democrats these days, by the way: Free stuff and Orange Man Bad.)
The problem is that free stuff isn’t free. Governments and central banks can keep creating new debt for a while, but at some point the institutional demand for purchasing soon-to-be-abandoned debt instruments collapses, leaving central banks in a lurch where they have to print new money to buy back their own debt to create artificial demand for tomorrow’s new debt.
This circle of fiscal insanity quickly spirals out of control in a destructive feedback loop, ending badly for everyone.
A world that isn’t run on honest money is a world that will sooner or later experience catastrophic financial collapse and human suffering.
See Venezuela if in doubt. Sadly, our entire world is currently running on the hallucinogenic vapors emitted from archaic debt factories that have spewed toxic money into the system for far too long. The captain of the Debt Titanic has drunkenly steered the ship into a line of fiscal icebergs, and the ship’s hull turns out to be made of empty political promises rather than steel bulkheads.
As you might have guessed, there aren’t enough lifeboats to go around, either, and half the passengers are already trapped below the water line, weighed down by the big screen TVs they bought at Walmart during a Black Friday stampede.
The icy Atlantic beckons all those who are foolish enough to believe that government-issued debt - i.e. “money” - is a store of value.
9. Terraforming of the Planet Through Geoengineering Experiments that Deliberately Seek to Alter Atmospheric Chemistry, With Catastrophic Consequences for Life on Earth
Not content to destroy our global economy and mass poison the people with toxic pharmaceuticals and dangerous pesticides in the food supply, the world’s most alarmed “climate change” scaremongers have recently decided they need to monkey with the atmosphere to “save the planet” from carbon dioxide - the nutrient molecule that feeds all plants but has somehow been demonized by the Left.
So they’ve come up with a variety of plans to pollute the atmosphere by releasing participate matter at high altitude, deliberately seeking to block the sun by reflecting some percentage of sunlight away from the planet.
The more astute among you may immediately realize that humanity’s food supply depends on photosynthesis, which is how plants turn sunlight into the biochemical energy needed to produce food.
And since all animals, including meat-eaters, ultimately depend on a food chain that begins with plants, the impairment of photosynthesis will of course lead to a global food collapse and widespread crop failures (especially in Third World countries where food crop production is already marginal).
The deliberate pollution of the atmosphere is being pursued in the wake of the irrational fearmongering of climate change lunatics who share a bizarre, cult-like delusion that pretends the planet will be destroyed in 10 years (or 8, or 12, depending on which Leftist is talking at the moment) unless we do something radical to stop the sun from cooking us all to death… or something.
So in their desperation to “save the planet,” they are happily willing to destroy global food crop production by interfering with photosynthesis.
I learned about photosynthesis in the 10th grade, and it turns out that plants have been turning sunlight into energy for several billion years on our planet, which is long before homo-stupidians arrived on the scene and started playing god with the atmosphere.
Notably, the very concept of “chemtrails” - long derided as a tin foil hat conspiracy theory by the fake news media - is now not only admitted but even celebrated as our collective savior!
As a side effect of these geoengineering / chemtrails experiments, by the way, dimming the sun will of course diminish the power output of all solar panels across the planet, which will be especially amusing to those who bought solar panels in order to be “green.”
It turns out that far from being green, running on solar will be closer to “black” … as in “blackout,” since stratospheric pollution blocks sunlight to everything on the ground: Trees, grasses, food crops and solar panels, too.
Which also means that the globalist elite have now convinced themselves that the way to save the planet is to first destroy it. They have a similar approach to humanity, too, believing that the way to save humanity is to kill babies and cause chemically-induced infertility to achieve sharp population reductions.
By the same logic, you might be convinced to believe that the way to keep your fish alive in your home aquarium is to first flush them down the toilet. If you can swallow that line of thinking, you may want to run for political office or become a CNN analyst.
10. 5G Networks and Expanding Electropollution
Finally, we arrive at point No. 10, which is the scourge of electropollution and its ever-expanding threat to human sanity. As recent research shows, 5G networks and other sources of EMF pollution result in neuropsychiatric effects on human beings, meaning it drives people insane and results in personality changes.
In effect, 5G radiation exposure alters neurology, leading to mass mental illness and unpredictable behavioral changes. In a society already heavily population by the barely functionally insane, this cannot be good.
When 5G radiation penetrates your skin, it causes a phenomenon known as “voltage-gated ion channels,” which means that the voltage potentiation of the electromagnetic radiation alters the permeability of your cells, causing toxic levels of calcium ions to enter those cells, leading to mutagenic damage and other dire dysfunctions.
In effect, 5G radiation exposure causes your body to poison itself from the inside, and it impacts neurological cells the most.
While the Romans drove themselves mad with lead-lined aqueducts that delivered poisoned water to the citizens of Rome, our modern cities will poison the citizens with invisible death rays known as “5G telecommunications” and the “Internet of Things,” which is a techno-nerdy way of saying, “We will spy on you at all times through the electronic devices you stupidly purchased and installed in your own home.”
President Trump, in his quest to incessantly pump up the vapor-heavy stock market indices, is all gung-ho for the very same telecom giants that are poisoning the American minds with radiation.
Perhaps it’s fitting that in the quest to pump up the Dow to irrational highs in order to create the illusion of economic abundance, the rationality of the people who are participating in that shared delusion will be eradicated by invisible beams of data that both destroy neurology and privacy at the same time.
After all, it requires a form of insanity to believe that markets will always rise and never suffer another downturn.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like Putin?
Ultimately, of course, wireless telecommunications infrastructure will destroy the sanity of human society, which means the more interconnected the people become through wireless means, the more insanity and widespread brain damage gets inflicted on those very people.
In the end, you can either be connected and brain damaged, or isolated and sane. (Pick one.)
Of course, the launching of thousands of 5G satellites that can focus their beam weapons onto any target location on the surface of the Earth means that no one - not even the indigenous Indians of rural Peru, for example - are safe from the madness.
In a world where everyone can be reached by the telecom beam-launchers, anyone can be driven insane by keeping the beams focused on their skulls, which happens to be right where most people hold their phones.
Today, we think the ancient civilization of Easter Island was stupid to chop down every last tree in an effort to build ever-more-impressive monuments to their tribal leaders. It ultimately ended in ecological collapse and the dying out of that entire civilization.
A similar ecological apocalypse was experienced by the Anasazi Indians of North America, who destroyed their entire civilization by over-harvesting natural resources, leading to ecological collapse.
But no civilization in Earth’s history - that we know of - has yet achieved the geek-assisted suicide grand prize by convincing the masses to hold invisible beam weapon receivers right next to their skulls.
When future civilizations dig up the remnants of our current civilization, they will discover the “era of screens” in which every person had multiple portable screens, all connected by toxic invisible beams that doomed them all.
People will die with their screens and be buried with them, sporting high resolution, high-definition, high-frame rate electronics that they secretly wish might magically accompany them into the Afterlife, sort of in the same way ancient Egyptian gods were buried with gold coins and conveniently strangulated servants.
But it’s all insanely stupid, of course. There is no 5G in the Afterlife. There are no cell towers in Heaven. (There might be cell phones in Hell, but they will be the large analog phones from the 1980s.)
Any society that believes it can achieve nirvana by building an ever-more-complex array of invisible beams between billions of devices will find itself inundated with toxic electropollution that penetrates the human body and alters brain function.
The insanity will sooner or later lead to the end of rationality and civility. Some say we have already arrived at that point in certain areas, such as San Franshitsco where human feces crap-o-rama marathons by the homeless have completely replaced any last vestige of tourism.
It turns out nobody wants to visit a city that’s covered in raw human sewage (but liberals still enjoy living in it as long as they have their 5G).
If the telecom mass poisoning of human neurology is not stopped, the future of our world will be a homeless, drug-addicted transgender pervert crapping in the middle of the street with one hand while texting his fan base with the other, in between visiting the local kindergarten schools to showcase his Drag Queen Story Hour feces-infested “tolerance lessons” on children who are tracked by the Internet of Things so that their own behavior and biometrics can be consumed by the techno-Borg to make sure they never diverge from the obedience demands of the techno-tolerati that dictate what those children are allowed to think, speak or view.
Sh#tting, texting and sexually assaulting children, in other words, is where society is now headed. In fact, that’s practically already the public school curriculum in liberal cities where the madness has already taken hold.
What Will Future Historians Think When They Dig Up the Remains of Our Modern Society?
Humanity will not survive this insanity if it is allowed to continue. Future archeologists will be astonished that we could have built such a materially abundant society filled with so much stuff yet somehow managed to be so utterly empty inside that we placed zero value on human dignity.
Their question won’t be, “Gosh, how did that society collapse?” It will be more like how did it not collapse sooner?
We are temporary observers of this unfolding insanity, and like watching Earth be struck by a fast-moving asteroid 65 million years ago, we will all eventually be consumed by the wave of destruction.
Behold the self-extermination of homo-stupidians, who believed they were granted dominion over the Earth but were ultimately out-lived by one-celled organisms.
It is quite a feat to be dumber than algae while thinking you are smarter than God, but modern-day humans have managed to achieved that twisted combination of arrogance and self-destruction while thinking they were “living the good life” because Google told them what to think.
If we are sufficiently stupid, we will beg God to spare us from the consequences of our collective actions. But if we are truly wise, we will already know his greatest act of mercy will be allowing modern human civilization to collapse upon itself.
For what would be the purpose of intervening in the self-determined demise of a race of beings who enjoy pretending to be “woke” as they slumber through life like mindless zombies?
This is the truth about what humanity has become, and the truth is rarely popular.
Comment: In the end however, the Cabal that is behind these problems will be exposed and taken down.
We are watching this begin right now. This article simply paints a picture of where the Cabal /Illuminati have been trying to take the world. Mr. Adams does some excellent work however he is not playing with all of the peices.
The 28th U.S. President Woodrow Wilson
150+ NWO Globalist Quotes
The Magic of Money
Understanding the Secret Frequency of Love 
Step 1: Enslave the nation to a private Central Bank issuing the public currency as a loan at interest to trap the people in unpayable debt
Seven Signs You May Be Experiencing A Dark Night Of The Soul
The Jacinda Papers
Kiwis in their tens of thousands have stood up and spoken out – they drove in cars, trucks, motorhomes, motorbikes and even push-bikes in the convoy. They stood on roadsides and over-bridges and shared on social media.
The Scary Ramifications of Making COVID Vaccination Compulsory for Everyone
CURRENT AFFAIRS
1. 
Fatigue
57 % of the French citizens polled in 1945 believed that Germany was defeated in the Second World War because of the Soviet Union whereas 20% believed it was due to the US and 12% thought it was because of the British. 
How to Deprogram Yourself
